Technical Specifications,

Student City I, Tirana,

Albania

Implementation Consultant Services for the Project

"Energy Efficiency Rehabilitation Programme
Student City I - Tirana"
BMZ 2015 68 179

Ministry of Infrastructure and Energy of Albania, the City of Tirana and the Student
City Administration (PIU)

1
Contact

Fichtner GmbH & Co. KG

Sarweystrasse 3
70191 Stuttgart
Germany

[Link]

Maja Studovic

Mobile: +381 60 6252528

E-mail: [Link]@[Link]

Fichtner GmbH & Co. KG

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 2
Document approval

Name Signature Position Date

Prepared by: Michael Hamann Architect 25.04.2022

Blerim Kurti [LIC. K.2574] Hydro-technical Engineer

Checked by: Maja Studovic Project Manager 31.03.2022

Document revision record

Rev. Date Details of revision Fichtner Doc Ref. Prepared by Checked by

0 17.02.2022 First submission [Link] [Link]

[Link]

1 31.03.2022 Second Submission [Link] [Link]

[Link]

2 25.04.2022 Third Submission [Link] [Link]

[Link]

Disclaimer

The content of this document is intended for the exclusive use of Fichtner’s client and other contractually
agreed recipients. It may only be made available in whole or in part to third parties with the client’s consent
and on a non-reliance basis. Fichtner is not liable to third parties for the completeness and accuracy of the
information provided therein.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 3
Table of Contents

1 General Specifications.................................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 General Obligations........................................................................................................................................... 1

1.1.1 Bill of Quantities.................................................................................................................................................. 1

1.1.2 Responsibility for Information ....................................................................................................................... 1

1.1.3 Billposting and Advertising............................................................................................................................. 1

1.1.4 Mobilization and Demobilization................................................................................................................. 1

1.1.5 Contractor’s Construction Management Team ...................................................................................... 2

1.1.6 Co-operation with the Engineer ................................................................................................................... 2

1.1.7 Co-operation with other Contractors ......................................................................................................... 3

1.1.8 Contractor’s Professional Conduct and Execution of his Duties...................................................... 3

1.1.9 Standard Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 4

1.1.10 Pre-Construction Conference ........................................................................................................................ 9

1.1.11 Site Progress Meetings.................................................................................................................................. 10

1.1.12 Sub-Contracted Works .................................................................................................................................. 10

1.1.13 Sequence of Construction............................................................................................................................ 12

1.1.14 Warranty for Equipment ............................................................................................................................... 12

1.2 Site Working Arrangements ........................................................................................................................ 13

1.2.1 General Requirements ................................................................................................................................... 13

1.2.2 Permits ................................................................................................................................................................. 14

1.2.3 Access Roads ..................................................................................................................................................... 14

1.2.4 Other Underground Communication Lines........................................................................................... 15

1.2.5 Temporary Fencing and Marking of Sites .............................................................................................. 15

1.2.6 Information on Site Conditions and Subsurface Information........................................................ 15

1.2.7 Existing Services and Structures ................................................................................................................ 16

1.2.8 Access by Officials ........................................................................................................................................... 16

1.2.9 Procedure for Complaints and Claims for Damage ........................................................................... 16

1.2.10 Protection of Works........................................................................................................................................ 16

1.2.11 Measurements of Works............................................................................................................................... 16

1.2.12 Working Hours for Construction ............................................................................................................... 17

1.2.13 Temporary Site Installations ........................................................................................................................ 17

i
 1.2.14 Traffic Diversions and Arrangements ...................................................................................................... 18

1.2.15 Lifting gear and devices ................................................................................................................................ 21

1.2.16 Work in Dangerous Areas ............................................................................................................................ 21

1.3 Products and Equipment requirements.................................................................................................. 22

1.3.1 Product and type Lifetime............................................................................................................................ 22

1.3.2 Protection and Packing for Dispatch ....................................................................................................... 23

1.3.3 Advice of Dispatch .......................................................................................................................................... 24

1.3.4 On Site Storage and Safekeeping ............................................................................................................. 25

1.3.5 Unloading, Erection and Running-In of Equipment .......................................................................... 25

1.4 Drawings, Records and Documents ......................................................................................................... 26

1.4.1 Design and Construction .............................................................................................................................. 26

1.4.2 Drawings ............................................................................................................................................................. 27

1.5 Inspections and Testing ................................................................................................................................ 33

1.5.1 General................................................................................................................................................................. 33

1.5.2 Inspection and Testing at Manufacturers' premises.......................................................................... 34

1.5.3 Inspection and Testing during Construction ........................................................................................ 34

1.5.4 Laboratory for Civil Works ........................................................................................................................... 34

1.5.5 Tests on Completion ...................................................................................................................................... 36

1.5.6 Tests after completion ................................................................................................................................... 41

1.6 Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Training .......................................................................... 41

1.6.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals..................................................................................................... 41

1.6.2 Training................................................................................................................................................................ 43

1.7 Spare Parts ......................................................................................................................................................... 45

1.8 Services and Miscellaneous Equipment to be provided for the Engineer by the Contractor
................................................................................................................................................................................ 45

1.8.1 Services ................................................................................................................................................................ 45

1.8.2 Surveying Equipment and Tools ................................................................................................................ 45

1.8.3 Safety Equipment ............................................................................................................................................ 45

1.8.4 Testing Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 46

1.9 Taking-Over and Project Closeout/ Performance Certificate ......................................................... 46

1.9.1 Taking-Over ....................................................................................................................................................... 46

1.9.2 Steps following the Taking-Over Certificate ......................................................................................... 47

1.9.3 Project Closeout ............................................................................................................................................... 47

1.10 Quality Assurance............................................................................................................................................ 48

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications ii
 1.10.1 Outline Quality Plan........................................................................................................................................ 49

1.10.2 Full Quality Plan ............................................................................................................................................... 49

1.11 Documents to be submitted by the Contractor .................................................................................. 49

1.11.1 Programme and Methods of Working .................................................................................................... 49

1.11.2 Notices of Commencement of Work ....................................................................................................... 50

1.11.3 Construction Site Diary.................................................................................................................................. 50

1.11.4 Monthly Progress Reports ........................................................................................................................... 50

1.11.5 Progress Photographs ................................................................................................................................... 51

1.11.6 Overview of Document Submittal ............................................................................................................. 51

2 Specifications for Civil Works................................................................................................................................... 54

2.1 General Information ....................................................................................................................................... 54

2.1.1 Works Included in the Contract ................................................................................................................. 54

2.1.2 Standards ............................................................................................................................................................ 54

2.1.3 Climate ................................................................................................................................................................. 55

2.1.4 Scaffolding ......................................................................................................................................................... 55

2.2 Earthworks .......................................................................................................................................................... 56

2.2.1 General................................................................................................................................................................. 56

2.2.2 Sub-Soil Investigations.................................................................................................................................. 56

2.2.3 Site Clearance, preparatory work, and demolition work.................................................................. 56

2.2.4 Excavation ........................................................................................................................................................... 57

2.2.5 Backfilling............................................................................................................................................................ 66

2.2.6 Pipe bedding and backfilling of trenches .............................................................................................. 67

2.2.7 Restoration and Clean-up ............................................................................................................................ 71

2.2.8 Footways - Reinstatement ........................................................................................................................... 71

2.2.9 Topsoil.................................................................................................................................................................. 71

2.2.10 Site Formation................................................................................................................................................... 71

2.2.11 Testing of Earth Works .................................................................................................................................. 72

2.3 Demolition works............................................................................................................................................. 72

2.3.1 Method of demolition ................................................................................................................................... 72

2.3.2 Demolition of Civil Buildings Elements ................................................................................................... 73

2.3.3 Demolition of sanitary installations.......................................................................................................... 73

2.3.4 Demolition and Dismantling of Electrical and Mechanical Equipment...................................... 74

2.3.5 Existing utilities and temporary installations ........................................................................................ 74

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications iii

 2.4 Concrete Works ................................................................................................................................................ 74

2.4.1 General................................................................................................................................................................. 74

2.4.2 Classes of Concrete......................................................................................................................................... 74

2.4.3 Materials for Concrete ................................................................................................................................... 75

2.4.4 Mixing of Concrete ......................................................................................................................................... 77

2.4.5 Transporting Concrete................................................................................................................................... 81

2.4.6 Placing of Concrete......................................................................................................................................... 81

2.4.7 Testing Concrete .............................................................................................................................................. 85

2.4.8 Measurement and Payment for Concrete.............................................................................................. 88

2.4.9 Formwork for Concrete ................................................................................................................................. 89

2.4.10 Tolerances of Concrete Construction ...................................................................................................... 90

2.4.11 Repair of Concrete .......................................................................................................................................... 90

2.4.12 Surface Finish and Treatment ..................................................................................................................... 90

2.4.13 Joints in Concrete ............................................................................................................................................ 92

2.4.14 Joint Sealing....................................................................................................................................................... 93

2.4.15 Cement Mortar and Grout ........................................................................................................................... 96

2.4.16 Falsework and Forms ..................................................................................................................................... 97

2.4.17 Reinforcement .................................................................................................................................................. 99

2.5 Walls ................................................................................................................................................................... 100

2.5.1 Dry walls ............................................................................................................................................................ 100

2.5.2 Masonry/Brick wall reparation and support ....................................................................................... 101

2.5.3 Lintels ................................................................................................................................................................. 102

2.6 Insulation and surfaces of walls, ceilings, floors, roof, and other parts ................................... 103

2.6.1 General............................................................................................................................................................... 103

2.6.2 Submittals ......................................................................................................................................................... 103

2.6.3 Materials............................................................................................................................................................ 105

2.6.4 Execution........................................................................................................................................................... 115

2.6.5 Finishing of Edges and Neatness of visible surfaces ....................................................................... 116

2.7 Suspended Ceilings ...................................................................................................................................... 116

2.8 Shading Elements .......................................................................................................................................... 117

2.9 Doors and Windows ..................................................................................................................................... 117

2.9.1 Doors .................................................................................................................................................................. 117

2.9.2 Windows............................................................................................................................................................ 118

2.9.3 Installation of Doors and Windows ........................................................................................................ 119

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications iv
 2.10 Metalwork......................................................................................................................................................... 119

2.10.1 General............................................................................................................................................................... 119

2.10.2 Materials............................................................................................................................................................ 120

2.10.3 Welding ............................................................................................................................................................. 120

2.10.4 Galvanizing....................................................................................................................................................... 121

2.10.5 Nuts and Bolts ................................................................................................................................................ 121

2.10.6 Iron Castings.................................................................................................................................................... 121

2.10.7 Fixing and Building-In.................................................................................................................................. 122

2.10.8 Painting.............................................................................................................................................................. 122

2.10.9 Ladders, Stairs, and Handrails................................................................................................................... 123

2.10.10 Roofing .................................................................................................................................... 125

2.10.11 Open Mesh Flooring .......................................................................................................... 125

2.10.12 Fixing and installation of metalwork to concrete ................................................... 126

2.11 Elevator .............................................................................................................................................................. 127

3 Sanitary Installations and Rainwater drainage ................................................................................................ 129

3.1 General Information and requirements ................................................................................................ 129

3.1.1 Marker Posts.................................................................................................................................................... 129

3.2 Water supply (cold & hot sanitary) system ......................................................................................... 129

3.2.1 Pipes Fittings and other Materials .......................................................................................................... 129

3.2.2 Pipes.................................................................................................................................................................... 130

3.2.3 Pumping Booster Station ........................................................................................................................... 131

3.2.4 Cold Sanitary Water System ...................................................................................................................... 132

3.2.5 Hot Sanitary Water System........................................................................................................................ 132

3.3 Sanitary sewerage system .......................................................................................................................... 134

3.3.1 Pipes, Fittings, and other materials ........................................................................................................ 134

3.4 Rainwater drainage system........................................................................................................................ 137

3.4.1 Rainwater Pipes .............................................................................................................................................. 137

3.4.2 Connections to Underground Services ................................................................................................. 137

3.4.3 Rainwater outlets and gullies.................................................................................................................... 137

3.5 Sanitary Fixtures ............................................................................................................................................. 138

3.5.1 Water Closet (WC) set and flash box+ plastic coated wooden seat ......................................... 138

3.5.2 Suspended Wash Basin sets, and mono-control mixer tap .......................................................... 139

3.5.3 Single Lever Plus Wash-Basin Mixer ...................................................................................................... 140

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications v
 3.5.4 Wall Mounted Shower Bath Mixer Tap and handles ....................................................................... 141

3.5.5 Shower drain channel .................................................................................................................................. 142

3.5.6 Shower Glass ................................................................................................................................................... 142

4 Specification for HVAC ............................................................................................................................................. 143

4.1 General Information and requirements ................................................................................................ 143

4.1.1 Works Included in the Contract ............................................................................................................... 143

4.1.2 Standards .......................................................................................................................................................... 143

4.1.3 Submittals ......................................................................................................................................................... 145

4.1.4 Welding, Soldering, Brazing ...................................................................................................................... 146

4.1.5 Execution........................................................................................................................................................... 147

4.1.6 Processing ........................................................................................................................................................ 147

4.1.7 Standard Commercial Product ................................................................................................................. 147

4.2 Heating-Cooling System (VRF/VRV) ...................................................................................................... 148

4.2.1 Copper pipe for refrigeration gas and Branch for the VRF/VRV system ................................. 148

4.2.2 Insulation of rubber pipes.......................................................................................................................... 149

4.2.3 REFNET branch and selector unit Piping Kit ....................................................................................... 150

4.2.4 Heat Recovery Outdoor Units .................................................................................................................. 154

4.2.5 Heat Recovery indoor units ....................................................................................................................... 164

4.3 Condensing water discharge system ..................................................................................................... 174

4.4 Ventilation system ......................................................................................................................................... 176

4.4.1 Wall Bathroom Fans ..................................................................................................................................... 176

4.4.2 Delivery Air Grilles ......................................................................................................................................... 178

4.4.3 Return Air Grilles ............................................................................................................................................ 178

4.4.4 Transit Air Grilles ............................................................................................................................................ 179

4.4.5 Air Duct Ventilation ...................................................................................................................................... 179

4.4.6 Duct insulation................................................................................................................................................ 182

5 Specification for Electrical, PV and BMS System ............................................................................................ 183

5.1 General Specifications on Electrical, PV and BMS System ............................................................ 183

5.1.1 Abbreviations .................................................................................................................................................. 183

5.1.2 Works Included in the Contract ............................................................................................................... 184

5.1.3 Contractor's Coordination.......................................................................................................................... 185

5.1.4 Standards .......................................................................................................................................................... 185

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications vi
 5.1.5 Submittals ......................................................................................................................................................... 186

5.1.6 Use of Metals .................................................................................................................................................. 187

5.1.7 Use of Wood.................................................................................................................................................... 187

5.1.8 Tools and Lubricants .................................................................................................................................... 188

5.2 Electrical Specification ................................................................................................................................. 188

5.2.1 MAIN POWER SUPPLY ................................................................................................................................. 188

5.2.2 POWER NETWORK SOCKETS .................................................................................................................... 189

5.2.3 POWER NETWORK CABLES ....................................................................................................................... 192

5.2.4 ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAYS ......................................................................................................................... 198

5.2.5 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND PANELS ........................................................................ 200

5.2.6 INDOOR LIGHTING SYSTEM...................................................................................................................... 202

5.2.7 EVACUATION & SAFETY LIGHTING SYSTEM ...................................................................................... 212

5.2.8 EARTHING SYSTEM ....................................................................................................................................... 215

5.2.9 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................... 217

5.2.10 LAN & TELEPHONE SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................... 223

5.2.11 CCTV SYSTEM.................................................................................................................................................. 231

5.2.12 EMERGENCY VOICE ALARM AND COMMUNCATION SYSTEM .................................................. 239

5.2.13 UPS, UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................ 260

5.3 Specification for Photovoltaic System................................................................................................... 264

5.3.1 PV solar modules 450Wp (Minimum Requirements) ...................................................................... 264

5.3.2 Solar Inverter DC/AC 20kW ....................................................................................................................... 266

5.3.3 Solar Inverter DC/AC 25kW ....................................................................................................................... 268

5.3.4 Solar Inverter DC/AC 50kW ....................................................................................................................... 271

5.3.5 DC Surge Arrestor (Minimum Requirements) .................................................................................... 273

5.3.6 Types of solar cables .................................................................................................................................... 274

5.3.7 MC4 Connectors ............................................................................................................................................ 274

5.3.8 Cable Ties with Clip....................................................................................................................................... 275

5.3.9 Stainless steel two-wire cable clip .......................................................................................................... 275

5.3.10 Installation materials .................................................................................................................................... 275

5.3.11 Racking System .............................................................................................................................................. 275

5.3.12 Generation Energy Meter ........................................................................................................................... 275

5.3.13 DSO Three phase Approved Bidirectional Smart Energy Meter ................................................. 276

5.4 Specification for Building Management System ............................................................................... 280

5.4.1 BMS Server Station ....................................................................................................................................... 280

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications vii

 5.4.2 BMS Server Software.................................................................................................................................... 280

5.4.3 BMS Management Server........................................................................................................................... 280

5.4.4 BMS Room Controller .................................................................................................................................. 281

5.4.5 BMS Key Card Holder .................................................................................................................................. 283

5.4.6 BMS Key Access Card ................................................................................................................................... 285

5.4.7 BMS Floor Controller .................................................................................................................................... 285

5.4.8 BMS Cabling .................................................................................................................................................... 287

5.4.9 BMS Magnetic Contacts.............................................................................................................................. 287

6 Specification for Fire protection ........................................................................................................................... 288

6.1 General Specification on Fire protection system .............................................................................. 288

6.2 Fixed type system .......................................................................................................................................... 288

6.2.1 Water tank ........................................................................................................................................................ 288

6.2.2 Pumping Station ............................................................................................................................................ 289

6.2.3 Hydrants ............................................................................................................................................................ 291

6.2.4 Water drainage system technical room................................................................................................ 292

6.3 Portable type system.................................................................................................................................... 292

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications viii

List of Figures

Figure 3-1: Example of a Booster Pumping Set................................................................................................................. 132

Figure 3-2. Example with dimensioning (mm) of an Electric Boiler cap. 80 lit ........................................................ 133
Figure 3-3. Wastewater Discharges Pipe Inside the Building with flexible connectivity and push-fit system
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 134
Figure 3-4. Fitting for water discharge pipes........................................................................................................................ 135
Figure 3-5. Typical Toilet Room for the dormitories .......................................................................................................... 138
Figure 3-6. Technical Detail for Suspended Toilets ............................................................................................................ 139
Figure 3-7. Technical Detail for Suspended Wash Basin.................................................................................................. 140
Figure 3-8. Singer Lever Plus Wash-Basin Mixer ................................................................................................................ 140
Figure 3-9. Water flow for Mixer............................................................................................................................................... 141
Figure 3-10. Shower drain channel.......................................................................................................................................... 142
Figure 4-1 – The type of pipes ................................................................................................................................................. 148
Figure 4-2 – Branch Selector Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 150
Figure 4-3 – PP pipes - with flexible connectivity and push-fit system ...................................................................... 174
Figure 4-4 – The Wall Fans......................................................................................................................................................... 177
Figure 4-5 – The Delivery Grilles .............................................................................................................................................. 178
Figure 4-6 – The Return Air Grilles .......................................................................................................................................... 179
Figure 4-7 – The Transit Air Grilles .......................................................................................................................................... 179
Figure 4-8 – Air Ventilation Duct Detail ................................................................................................................................ 180
Figure 5-1 – Three/Four modules plastic boxes .................................................................................................................. 190
Figure 5-2 – Four modules cover for sockets with IP55 .................................................................................................... 190
Figure 5-3 – Squared LED Panel luminaires, 600x600mm, 35W, IP20....................................................................... 203
Figure 5-4 – Rectangular LED Panel luminaires, 1200x300x12mm, 33W, IP20...................................................... 204
Figure 5-5 – Industrial LED lighting 33W, IP 65.................................................................................................................. 205
Figure 5-6 – Round LED luminaires, 24W, IP65/IK07 ....................................................................................................... 206
Figure 5-7 – Outdoor Up-Down LED luminaries ................................................................................................................ 206
Figure 5-8 – Round LED luminaires, 11W, IP44/IK07 ....................................................................................................... 207
Figure 5-9 – Round LED luminaires, 11W, IP65. ................................................................................................................. 208
Figure 5-10 – LED Strip, L=1600mm, 18W, 3000K, IP40. ................................................................................................ 209
Figure 5-11 – Wall Surface Mounted, 7W, IP54. ................................................................................................................. 210
Figure 5-12 – Motion Sensor, wall mounted 180°, IP40................................................................................................... 210
Figure 5-13 – Motion Sensor, recess ceiling mounted 360°, IP40. ................................................................................ 211
Figure 5-14 – Evacuation luminaires (EXIT), LED 3.1VA, IP43, 3 hours autonomy ................................................ 214
Figure 5-15 – Emergency luminaires, LED 8W, IP65 ........................................................................................................ 215
Figure 5-16 – F/FTP AWG23/1 Cat. 6A cable ...................................................................................................................... 229
Figure 5-17 – EVAC system principal diagram.................................................................................................................... 240
Figure 5-18 – Cabinet loudspeaker 6W metal square ...................................................................................................... 246
Figure 5-19 – Sound projector 20W metal unidirectional............................................................................................. 248
Figure 5-20 – Fireman panel, EN 54-16 certified ............................................................................................................... 255
Figure 5-21 – EVAC Cable PH120 ............................................................................................................................................ 259
Figure 5-22 – PV module 450Wp ............................................................................................................................................. 265

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications ix
Figure 5-23 – PV module 450Wp dimensions ..................................................................................................................... 265
Figure 5-24 – PV module 450Wp voltage characteristics................................................................................................ 266
Figure 5-25 – Cable Ties with Clip ........................................................................................................................................... 275
Figure 6-1. Firefighting Pump.................................................................................................................................................... 290
Figure 6-2. Technical Data for Firefighting Pump.............................................................................................................. 290
Figure 6-3. Technical Wall-mounted Firefighting Hydrant DN 45 .............................................................................. 291
Figure 6-4. Firefighting brigade connection DN65 ............................................................................................................ 291
Figure 6-5. Fire extinguishers according to fire protection classes............................................................................... 292

List of Tables

Table 2-1: Rock excavation - Soil & Rock Classification as per DIN 18 300, Clause 2 .......................................... 59
Table 2-2: Concrete Classification.............................................................................................................................................. 75
Table 2-3: Grading Curve e.g. for a max. grain size of 31.5mm: .................................................................................... 77
Table 2-4: Concrete – Compressive Strength Classes ........................................................................................................ 78
Table 2-5: Removing times for forms ....................................................................................................................................... 84
Table 2-6: Conversion Factors for the 7-day cube into the 28-day.............................................................................. 88
Table 2-7: Preparation and Coating Application for Metal Surfaces ........................................................................ 109
Table 2-8: Preparation and Coating Application for Concrete Surfaces.................................................................. 110
Table 2-9: Colour Schedule ....................................................................................................................................................... 111
Table 2-10: Surface Preparations ............................................................................................................................................ 111
Table 2-11: Exposure of Surfaces (Metal and Concrete) ................................................................................................ 112
Table 2-12: Preparation and Painting Schedule for Surfaces Other than Metal .................................................. 112
Table 2-13: Installation of metalwork to concrete ........................................................................................................... 126
Table 3-1: Sanitary water boosting station technical data’s ......................................................................................... 132
Table 3-2. Technical Specifications of Electric Water Heaters ..................................................................................... 133
Table 4-1. Certification References ......................................................................................................................................... 144
Table 4-2. Albanian and European Standards .................................................................................................................... 145
Table 4-3. Table of Standard Dimensions according to EN 12735-1........................................................................ 148
Table 4-4. Table of Standard Dimensions according to EN 12735-1........................................................................ 149
Table 4-5. The specifications of pipes ................................................................................................................................... 149
Table 4-6. External and Insulating Pipe Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 149
Table 4-7. The technical specifications of the branch selector units. ....................................................................... 152
Table 4-8. Design Limitations for lengths of pipes of the VRF/VRV system for each branch ......................... 153
Table 4-9. Outdoor Heat recovery Unit for Building No.4 and 14, Ground Floor................................................ 155
Table 4-10. Outdoor Heat recovery Unit for Building No. 4 and 14, First and Second Floor ......................... 157
Table 4-11. Outdoor Heat recovery Unit, Building No. 4 and 14, Third Floor ....................................................... 159
Table 4-12. Outdoor Heat recovery Unit, Building No. 16/17 – Ground Floor/ First Floor/ Second Floor/
Third Floor .................................................................................................................................................... 161
Table 4-13. Outdoor Heat recovery Unit, Building No. 03 – Ground, first and second floor/ third, fourth and
fifth floor ....................................................................................................................................................... 163
Table 4-14. Air Duct indoor unit Cooling / Heating 2.8 / 3.2 kW ............................................................................... 164
Table 4-15. Round flow cassette Cooling / Heating 4.5 / 5 kW. ................................................................................. 166
Table 4-16. Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 4.5 / 5.0 kW................................................................................................. 167

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications x
Table 4-17. Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 7.1 / 8.0 kW................................................................................................. 168
Table 4-18. Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 2.8 / 3.2 kW................................................................................................. 169
Table 4-19. Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 7.1 / 8.0 kW................................................................................................. 170
Table 4-20. Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 4.5/5.0 kW. .................................................................................................. 171
Table 4-21. Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 7.1/8.0 kW. .................................................................................................. 172
Table 4-22. Split wall mounted unit Cooling / Heating 5.0 / 6.0 kW ........................................................................ 173
Table 4-23. PP Pipe Dimension Table.................................................................................................................................... 175
Table 4-24. Dimensions of wall fans ...................................................................................................................................... 177
Table 4-25. Air Duct Ventilation thickness........................................................................................................................... 180
Table 5-1. General Features ....................................................................................................................................................... 188
Table 5-2. Flush mounting distribution boxes IP40 ........................................................................................................... 191
Table 5-3. Connection cables ..................................................................................................................................................... 197
Table 5-4. The indoor lighting ................................................................................................................................................... 203
Table 5-5. Fire Detection System References........................................................................................................................ 218
Table 5-6. Technical Characteristics........................................................................................................................................ 223
Table 5-7. Mechanical Characteristics .................................................................................................................................... 223
Table 5-8. Technical Feature of Wi-Fi access point device.............................................................................................. 228
Table 5-9. Construction................................................................................................................................................................ 229
Table 5-10. Mechanical Properties........................................................................................................................................... 229
Table 5-11. Electrical Properties ............................................................................................................................................... 230
Table 5-12. Electrical Properties according to Cat. 6A (at 20°C) .................................................................................. 230
Table 5-13. Cable type ................................................................................................................................................................. 230
Table 5-14. Channel 4K NVRs – Technical Specifications ............................................................................................... 234
Table 5-15. Outdoor Cameras bullet 5Mpx, IP66 ............................................................................................................... 236
Table 5-16. Indoor Cameras Day Night 5 MPx ................................................................................................................... 238
Table 5-17. Technical specification of the Voice Alarm Controller .............................................................................. 244
Table 5-18- Certifications and approvals .............................................................................................................................. 245
Table 5-19. Octave band sensitivity ........................................................................................................................................ 246
Table 5-20. Technical specification .......................................................................................................................................... 247
Table 5-21. Sound projector specification ............................................................................................................................. 249
Table 5-22. Power Amplifier specification ........................................................................................................................... 251
Table 5-23. Call Station ............................................................................................................................................................... 253
Table 5-24. EVAC system............................................................................................................................................................. 255
Table 5-25. Fireman Panel.......................................................................................................................................................... 256
Table 5-26. Music background device..................................................................................................................................... 257
Table 5-27. End of line device .................................................................................................................................................... 259
Table 5-28. Specification of Cable for EVAC system.......................................................................................................... 260
Table 5-29. UPS specifications – 15kVA................................................................................................................................. 262
Table 5-30. UPS specifications – 10kVA................................................................................................................................. 263
Table 5-31. Technical Characteristics for 20 kW DC/AC Three Phase Inverter ....................................................... 268
Table 5-32. Technical Characteristics for 25 kW DC/AC Three Phase Inverter ....................................................... 271
Table 5-33. Technical Characteristics for 50 kW DC/AC Three Phase Inverter ....................................................... 273
Table 6-1. Sanitary water Storage tanks technical data’s .............................................................................................. 288

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications xi
1 General Specifications

1.1 General Obligations

This chapter shall apply for all Works (including sections of work).

If not otherwise stated, the stipulations and specifications made within this document (“Technical
Specifications”) shall be deemed minimum requirements, whereas the Contractor is free to provide higher/
better specifications than constituted within this document (with special regards to the HVAC, Electrical, PV
and BMS components).

1.1.1 Bill of Quantities

The Contractor is to consider all aspects of this and other chapters of the specification and make appropriate
provision in his pricing.

If not otherwise stated, all costs related to the requirements in these general specifications are deemed to be
included in the Contractor’s pricing of the Bill of Quantities, whether or not a specific bill item is provided.

The more specific item coverage for the items in the Bill of Quantities is given in the Preamble to the Bill
of Quantities.

1.1.2 Responsibility for Information

The Contractor will be deemed to have fully informed himself, by his own independent observations,
enquiries, site visits, additional investigations, geo radar, pipe locations or any other necessary investigation
of local site conditions as required to prepare his Bid, and after contract award to implement the works. It
is important that the Contractor before starting work shall check and verify dimensions, material and
location of existing utilities and other underground structures.

The Contractor is expected to conduct his own research on all important matters related to the Works. Any
negligence or failure on the part of the Contractor to obtain reliable information on the site or elsewhere
concerning any matter affecting the Contract shall not relieve the selected Contractor from any of his
obligations or liability arising from the Contract.

1.1.3 Billposting and Advertising

The Contractor shall not undertake or allow bill posting or advertising of any kind upon the works without
the written consent of the Employer and Engineer. This includes the respective building, all construction
fences and comprehensive boundaries and the area of the construction site equipment.

1.1.4 Mobilization and Demobilization

[Link] Mobilization
Mobilization shall include the erection of all site facilities and the furnishing of all equipment as required
and necessary to carry out the Works under this Contract. The site facilities shall include all site installations,
temporary offices, safety provisions, accommodation and sanitary facilities, provisions for water, energy

1
and access and the installation of signboards as required. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements
for his site compounds and shall set them up at the locations agreed with the Engineer.

[Link] Demobilization
Demobilization includes the removal of all site facilities and temporary installations, the demobilization of
all equipment from site, the removal of all surplus materials, the reinstatement of all damaged or worn
facilities used by the Contractor (including access roads) and the cleaning up of the construction site(s).

1.1.5 Contractor’s Construction Management Team

The Contractor shall appoint his construction management team of competent and experienced managers,
fluent in the English language (both written and verbal). Prior to Commencement Date, the Contractor shall
submit in writing to the Engineer a statement of the powers and duties that he has delegated to the
Contractor’s Representative in line with the FIDIC Sub-Clause 4.3.

The Contractor shall not be permitted to proposed changes to the staff as nominated in the Bid before the
works commencement.

Furthermore, no exchange of staff will be allowed during the construction period without valid reason.
Approval of the Employer and the Engineer will be required for such changes.

The Contractor’s Representative shall be fully responsible for all aspects of the construction,
commissioning, and Defects Notification Period. He shall be present at all meetings between the Engineer
and the Contractor when requested by the Engineer, provided he is given reasonable notification in
advance of such meetings. All documents issued by the Contractor during the course of the Contract shall
only be considered as in force and accepted by the Employer and the Engineer, if these documents have
been issued by the Contractor’s Representative in accordance with the requirements of the Contract.

The Contractor shall appoint competent and experienced Technical Supervisors whose duties shall be to
monitor and coordinate all aspects of the supply and installation of mechanical and electrical Equipment
in the Works. The Technical Supervisors shall be present at all meetings between the Engineer and the
Contractor where the mechanical and electrical equipment are concerned and when requested by the
Engineer.

Prior to Commencement Date, the Contractor shall hand over a list of all names, titles, addresses and
telephone/fax/mobile phone/e-mail of his managerial and supervising staff on site indicating those
responsible who may be reached outside normal working hours in case of emergency.

All costs of provision of the construction management team shall be deemed to be included in the prices
in each of the relevant Schedules and Bill of Quantities and shall not be separately measured.

1.1.6 Co-operation with the Engineer

The Contractor shall co-operate with the Engineer in arranging the time and dates of site meetings, and in
the preparation of Minutes of Meetings.

The Contractor shall co-operate with the Engineer in taking photographs for the documentation of the
works progress.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 2
The Contractor shall provide every assistance to the Engineer and his staff in carrying out their duties and
shall provide personnel to assist the checking, sampling, testing, setting out, leveling and measurement of
the work done.

The Contractor shall employ sufficient interpreters so that oral and written communication in the contract
language is possible during working hours at all relevant sites and foremen.

1.1.7 Co-operation with other Contractors

The Contractor shall co-operate with other contractors working on other Energy Efficiency projects or on
other local schemes. This co-operation, which does not entitle the Contractor to any additional payment
or time extension, covers activities such as, but not limited to: Coordination and adjustment of site
possession, coordination and adjustment of time schedules, working space, manpower, timing, traffic
regulation; attending of coordination meetings called by the Engineer or as might be necessary for
optimum coordination of activities. The following on-going projects are concerned:

 The Contractor and Subcontractors who may be employed to carry out any of the part of Works in this
Contract.
 Any other on-going projects within Student City 1 premises,
 Any other contractors who may be working on infrastructure and road rehabilitation projects under
other on-going projects.

However, the Contractor is obliged to verify with the relevant authorities if any other projects are on-going
which may possibly interfere with his works. The programme is to be adjusted accordingly in accordance
with FIDIC Sub-Clause 8.3.

1.1.8 Contractor’s Professional Conduct and Execution of his Duties

[Link] Good Practice

If the Technical Specifications or the Bill of Quantities do not give a full description of any material, product
or workmanship, it is nevertheless understood that these materials or work shall be suitable for the purpose
of the Contract or what may be needed to execute the item in conformity with good practice together with
whatever is mentioned for the relevant item in the Bill of Quantities, the Technical Specifications and the
Standards being used.

[Link] Specifications prescribing a product

If a single source should be specified for any material or a product, whether by the Employer or by the
Contractor in completing the Data Sheets during Bid submission, then the Contractor shall be bound by
the same, and shall not change the said single source without the written approval of the Engineer.

[Link] Design by Contractor

Any design carried out by the Contractor:

 shall not in any case whatsoever alter the purpose and the scope of the proposed Works.
 must not cause any delays whatsoever in the execution of the Works; and
 shall not lead to the extension of Time for Completion

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 3
If the Contractor is responsible for any design of the Permanent Works, the Contractor undertakes that the
design, the Contractor’s Documents, the execution and the completed Works will be in accordance with
Laws and Regulations of Albania and the documents forming the Contract. The design shall be prepared
by qualified designers who are engineers or other professionals complying with the requirements of this
Contract. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for consent the name and particulars of each
proposed designer and design Subcontractor. The Contractor warrants that he, his designers and design
Subcontractors have the experience and capability necessary for the design. The Contractor undertakes
that the designers shall be available to attend discussions with the Engineer at all reasonable times, until
the expiry date of the relevant Defects Notification Period.

Routing of pipes, manholes, cables, ducts and other structures are included in the relevant layouts. The
detailed indicated position of the pipe routing is to be understood as indicative, and the Contractor is at
liberty to propose revisions to the routing before implementation of the works. In doing so, other existing
infrastructure shall be taken into consideration. Detailed working drawings shall be submitted to the
Engineer for review/approval. Refer to Chapter 1.4 below.

1.1.9 Standard Specifications

[Link] Abbreviations and Definitions

The following abbreviations as referenced in the Contract are defined to mean the following:

AV - Air valve including Chamber m³ - Cubic meters

o
C - Celsius or centigrade masl - Meter above sea level
CIF - Cost, Insurance, and Freight mm - Millimeter
cu - Cubic mm² - Square millimeter
dia or ø - diameter MN - Mega newton
DN (and ND) - Nominal diameter (= inside diameter) m³/s - cubic meters/sec
FM - Force Main MPa - Mega Pascal
g - Gram m/s - Meter per second
g/m³ - Grams per cubic meter m/m.°C - Meter per meter per degree Celsius
g/m² - Grams per square meter max - Maximum
ha - Hectare min - Minute or minimum
HP - Horsepower OD - Outside Diameter
kg - Kilogram O&M - Operation and Maintenance
kg/cm² - Kilograms (force) per square centimeter OP - Oxidation Ponds
kg/cm³ - Kilograms per cubic centimeter PE - Polyethylene or population equivalent
kg/m² - Kilograms per square meter PE - HD - Polyethylene High Density
kg/m³ - Kilograms per cubic meter PN - Nominal Pressure rating
km - Kilometer PS - Pumping Station
km/h - Kilometers per hour PVC - Polyvinylchloride
kPa - Kilopascal S - Second
kN - Kilonewton N - Newton
kN/m² - Kilonewton per square meter N/mm² - Newton per square millimeter
l - Liter No. - Number
l/m - Liters per minute RL - Reduced Level
l/s - Liters per second
l/m².s - Liters per square meter per second TWL - Top Water Level
m - Meter DR - Standard [Link] = (Out. Dim. of
m² - Square meter Pipe) / (Thickness of pipe)

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 4
The following abbreviations as referenced in the Contract are defined to mean the associated names. Both
the names and addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up to date as of the
date of the Contract.

AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's B.S. British Standards Institute

Association 2 Park Street,
35 East Wacker Drive London W1A 2BS
Chicago, Illinois 60606
312/782-8256

AASHTO American Association of State Highway & CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
Transportation Officials 933 Plum Grove Road
444 North Capitol Street, N.W. Schaumburg, Illinois 60195
Washington, DC 20001 312/490-1700
202/628-2438

ACI American Concrete Institute CS Commercial Standard

Box 19150, Redford Station US Department of Commerce/National
Detroit, Michigan 48219 Bureau of Standards
313/532-2600 Washington DC 20230
202/377-2000

AISC American Gear Manufacturer's Association DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung
1500 King Street, Suite 201 Burggrafenstrasse 4-10
Alexandria, Virginia 22314 Postfach 1107
703/684-0211 D-1000 Berlin

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute DVGW Deutscher Vereın des Gas- und Wasserfaches
1000 16th Street, N.W. e. V.
Washington, DC 20036 Josef-Wirmer-Str. 1-3
202/452-7100 D-53123 Bonn

ANSI American National Standards Institute FED SPEC United States of America Federal
(Successor to USASI and ASA) Specifications
1430 Broadway General Services Administration
New York, New York 10018 Specification Unit
212/868-1220 7th and D Streets, S.W.
Washington, DC 20406
202/472-2205

APA American Plywood Association IFI Industrial Fasteners Institute

P.O. Box 11700 1717 East Ninth Street
Tacoma, Washington 98411 Cleveland, Ohio 44114
206/565-6600 216/241-1482

API American Petroleum Institute ISO International Organization for

1220 L. Street, N.W. Standardization
Washington, DC 20005 1 Rue de Vermbe,
202/682-8000 Case Postale 56
Geneva 20, Switzerland

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers MIL Military Standards Documents

345 East 42nd Street Naval Publication and Forms Center
New York, New York 10017 5801 Tabor Avenue
212/705-7496 Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19120

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute

345 East 47th Street 201 North Wells Street
New York, New York 10017 Chicago, Illinois 60606
212/644-7722

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 5
 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials PS Product Standard
1916 Race Street (See CS-Commercial Standard)
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103
212/644-7722

AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute TRGS Technısche Regeln für Gefahrstoffe
P.O. Box 849 Carl Heymanns Verlag KG
Stevensville, Maryland 21666 Luxemburger Strasse 449
301/643-1463 D-50939 Köln

AWS American Welding Society, Inc.

550 Le Jeune Road, N.W
Miami, Florida 33135
305/642-7090

AWWA American Water Works Association, Inc.

6666 West Quincy Avenue
Denver, Colorado 80235
303/794-7711

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 6
[Link] Construction Standards
The references made to the regulations and standards of any technical body or association or to the
regulations of the local or provincial authorities, unless otherwise specified, shall be assumed to refer to
the latest valid publication or the latest revision of the relevant standards, regulations, specifications, or the
provisional standards.

All materials shall comply with the standards listed in the Contract and when such materials are submitted
to the Engineer for approval they shall be accompanied by certificates of compliance to the standards.

Albanian regulations for construction of the works should be followed, especially regarding Consent to
work, Building Permits, Safety, existing services, road closures etc.

Wherever reference is made in the Contract to specific standards and codes to be met by the goods and
materials to be furnished, and work performed or tested, the provisions of the edition or revision of the
relevant standards and codes in effect 28 calendar days prior to the latest date for submission of bids shall
apply, unless otherwise expressly stated in the Contract. Where such standards and codes are national, or
relate to a particular country or region, other authoritative standards which ensure an equal or higher
quality than the standards and codes specified will be accepted subject to the Engineer's prior review and
written approval. Differences between the standards specified and the proposed alternative standards must
be fully described in writing by the Contractor and submitted, in the English language, to the Engineer at
least 28 calendar days prior to the date when the Contractor desires the Engineer’s approval. In the event
that the Engineer determines that such proposed deviations do not ensure equal or higher quality, the
Contractor shall comply with the standards specified in the documents.

In general, the requirements for the fabrication, construction, inspection and testing of the Works have
been specified to meet the applicable standards and codes of Albania, Germany, the UK (British Standards),
or the EC equivalent (EN). However, the Contractor shall be permitted to use other international standards
and codes provided that the product, design, and installation meets or exceeds the minimum specified
requirements of the standard and codes of Albania, Germany or of the British Standards or EC equivalent.

The Contractor shall note that particular attention will be paid to these requirements. In cases where the
proposed equipment is not standardized with regard to manufacturer and type, the Contractor shall be
required to provide conclusive technical justification; considerations of price alone will not be accepted.
Equipment and components which have not been standardized will not be approved.

Notwithstanding the above, any design, together with the execution and completion of the Works shall
comply with Albanian standards in the cases where they are obligatory.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 7
[Link] Foreign Standards related to the Contract

DIN 3367 C-150 C-361 AWS

2413 144 C-207 C-655 DD.1
3230 157 C-5 C-443 D1.1
50049 158 C-270 C-497
3226 292 A-36 AWWA
3202 A-366 BS C 200
3222 IFI A-325 1377 C 203
1944 IFI-104 A-307 812 C 205
24260 IFI-100 A-500 16-1 C 206
24295 A-501 25 C 207
31000 WBG A-48 20 C 208
4132 8 A-167 16 C 209
15018 9 B-209 14 C 214
15020 B-308 10 C 602
15030 VDI B-221 4504 C 606
17100 3571 B-429 5163 C 651
1000 3576 B-316 5155 C 110
4100 B-26 5136 C 900
4114 AASHTO B-36 5156 C111/A21.1
18800 T-27 B-61 5159 1
19704 T-11 B-97 5153 C 210
19705 T-104 B-584 5152
3216 T-96 A-123 3136 Fed Spec
52101 T-89 A-153 5150 RR-G-661
52105 T-90 A-385 RR-C-271
52108 T-191 B-633 ANSI TT-P-645
488 T-181 A-120 B.18.22.1 TT-P-636
1612 T-239 A-320 TT-V-51
4034 T-224 I-959 ACI FF-S-325
4291 T-180 A-441 347 TT-S-00227
4292 T-99 A-588 TT-S-230
1211 T-88 C-669 AISI TT-P-25
2403 T-193 A-167 A.116.1 TTC-535
8560 T-238 C-206 A.12.3 TT-E-495
8565 T-194 C-35 304 TT-E-524
55928 A-392 A.108.1 TT-P-38
DIN ISO 250 ASTM A-121 B.18.2.1 TT-P-19
5199 (E) C-142 C-67 B.1.1 TT-V-85

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 8
 C-131 C-66 B.18.2.2 TT-V-86
IEC C-88 C-76 B.36.10
3629 C-144 C-33 B.18.21.1

Where reference is made in the Contract to one of the above organizations or other associations, the
Contractor shall comply with the standard or trade association, which is in effect at the Base Date (28
calendar days prior to latest Bid Submission Deadline).

General Notes:

 Latest versions of Standards shall be used at everywhere instead of the older versions.
 All applied related Albanian standards shall be submitted in English Language to the Engineer.
 Harmonized European Norms shall also be considered.
The names of the manufacturers of Materials and Plant proposed for incorporation in the Works together
with performance characteristics, capacities, certified test reports and similar information of proposed
Plant, shall be furnished at the specified times or when requested by the Employer. If in the Engineer's
judgment, the provision of such Materials and Plant is unsatisfactory because they are not in compliance
with the standards and codes listed in the Specification, then the Employer shall have the right to reject
such proposed manufacturers.

Any materials and workmanship not fully specified herein or covered by the Standards, Codes or Manuals
shall be of such type and quality so as to produce a first-class work. In such circumstance the Engineer shall
determine whether all or any of the materials offered or delivered to the site are suitable for use in the
Works and the Engineer’s decision in this respect shall be final.

1.1.10 Pre-Construction Conference

Prior to the commencement of work at the site, a pre-construction conference will be held at a mutually
agreed time and place. The conference shall be attended by:

 The Contractor and the Contractor’s Representative

 Principal Subcontractors
 Representatives of principal suppliers and manufacturers as appropriate
 The Engineer and his delegated assistants
 Representatives of the Employer
 Governmental Representatives as appropriate
 Other parties as requested by the Contractor, Employer, or Engineer
The purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel and establish a working relationship.
Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters established.
The agenda will include:

 Contractor's tentative schedules

 Transmittal, review, and distribution of Contractor's submittals
 Processing applications for payment
 Maintaining record documents
 Critical Work sequencing

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 9
 Field decisions and Variation instructions if any
 Use of premises, office and storage areas, security, housekeeping, and Employer's needs
 Major equipment deliveries and priorities
 Contractor's assignments for safety and first aid
The Engineer will preside at the conference and will prepare the minutes and distribute them to all parties
in attendance.

1.1.11 Site Progress Meetings

The Engineer and Contractor’s Representative or other parties on request of the Engineer shall meet at
times scheduled by the Engineer on a monthly basis to discuss the status of the Contractor's performance.
This Monthly Progress Meeting may also be attended representatives of the Employer or other Authorities
as might be invited by the Employer.

Should the Contractor fail to send his representative(s) to any meeting at which his presence has been
requested, all decisions shall be taken as if the Contractor had been present and agreed on subsequent
actions and instructions.

At least three calendar days before such meetings, the Contractor shall submit a report showing the
progress achieved, a review of schedules and plans for future activities, the status of staffing, engineering,
safety, equipment, material supply, payments, current and anticipated difficulties, interface with other
Contractors, claims for extras, and other pertinent topics. The agenda for the meeting will be based on this
report.

The Engineer will prepare minutes of meeting (MoM) and supply all parties with a copy within three
calendar days after the meeting. Any comments must reach the Engineer within seven calendar days after
receipt of the MoM. After this time, the MoM will be considered as accepted by all parties.

Further ad-hoc meetings will be held if needed. The time and place of these meetings shall be mutually
agreed taking into consideration the subjects to be discussed.

For the monthly site meetings, the Contractor shall provide as part of his site set-up:

 a fully equipped Meeting Room (30 m² floor area)

 WC and bathroom

1.1.12 Sub-Contracted Works

[Link] Specialized Sub-Contractors

The Contractor shall appoint specialist sub-contractors for all those parts of the work described herein for
which he is not himself an experienced, recognized, and approved Contractor. The Contractor shall submit
for consent, the names of all proposed specialist sub-contractors and suppliers of special manufactured
items with full details of local agents or, if local agents do not exist in Albania, the procedures for service
and supply of spare parts and shall indicate the precise sections of the work for which each of the Sub-
Contractors shall be responsible.

The Contractor shall provide evidence that each firm undertaking manufacture or fabrication has
satisfactorily executed work of a similar nature. In the case of work, which the Contractor proposes to

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 10
manufacture or fabricate on the Site, the Contractor shall provide evidence that he can satisfactorily execute
the Work.

The Contractor shall not interfere in any way with any works, whether the property of the Employer or of a
third party (for instance a Contractor for another Lot) and whether the position of such works is indicated
to the Contractor by the Engineer or not. The Contractor shall respect the construction and finish of works
and articles supplied or installed by others and will be held responsible for any loss or damage thereto if
caused by him, his employees or his sub-contractors.

The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the overall co-ordination of the Contract. Direct formal
communication between his sub-Contractors and the Engineer will not be allowed.

[Link] Orders and Sampling

Before placing any order with principal suppliers for manufactured or fabricated articles for the Permanent
Works, the Contractor shall arrange the inspection visits to the manufacturers and suppliers and submit to
the Engineer for approval the following details for each item as relevant:

1. Names of the firms from whom he proposes to obtain such items together with places of
manufacture or fabrication
2. A description of the items to be supplied with manufacturer's specification together with a
description of quality, grade, weight and strength
3. Manufacturers "type" test certificates, or recent test results carried out on similar items.
The Contractor shall provide all material samples for testing together with the necessary storage, packing
and transport required in connection with quality control or on request of the Employer.

Material samples shall be submitted by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Contract not less than
thirty calendar days prior to the time that the materials represented by such samples are needed for
incorporation into any work. Samples shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Material represented
by such samples shall not be manufactured, delivered to the site nor incorporated into any work without
such prior approval.

The Contractor shall not be entitled to any compensation or claim for delays, inconveniences, damage,
standing time or any other cause whatsoever, arising from the late submission of material samples.

Where samples, including samples of materials and workmanship constructed on the Site, are submitted
as a reference for materials and workmanship to be provided as part of the Permanent Works, they shall,
after approval by the Engineer, be carefully preserved for this purpose by the Contractor until permission
is given by the Engineer for their disposal.

The submission of details and samples under this Clause shall not relieve the Contractor from any of his
responsibilities under the Contract.

Copies of all orders for all major plant items, materials and sub-contract works placed with suppliers and
sub-contractors shall be provided in triplicate to the Engineer. The orders shall give or shall be
accompanied by full details and drawings of the materials, equipment or work ordered. Copies of all orders
shall be provided in English and Albanian or with English and Albanian translation where the actual order
is placed in any other language.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 11
The Contractor shall invite the Employer and the Engineer to inspect all foreseen manufacturers and
suppliers (national and international) and the Contractor shall cover all costs related to these visits.

1.1.13 Sequence of Construction

[Link] General
When preparing the programme of works as specified, the Contractor shall take account of the priority
order prescribed for the various activities of the Works. The programme shall comply (where appropriate
to the particular scope of work of the package) with the following:

a) The Contractor shall commence the Works in accordance with the Contract and shall proceed with due
expedition and without delay.
b) The Contractor shall develop his programme to meet the contractual finishing dates as detailed in
Contract.
c) If it is necessary for the safety of the works or for any other reason, the Contractor shall carry out such
part of the Works continuously by day and by night when so allowed by the Engineer.
d) The extent of the working site has to be agreed with the Employer and the Engineer. Generally, working
sites have to be confined in accordance to physical restrictions and the requirements for maintaining
access to neighboring plots. The Contractor has to inform the Engineer at least two calendar days in
advance when he intends to open new works or when he intends to batch concrete.
[Link] Requirements defining the implementation sequence
Within the above-mentioned constraints, the Contractor shall prepare a detailed programme for each
building, specifying the major works and showing times for:

 Demolition Works
 Refurbishment Works
 Disinfection of water lines,
 Installation of electrical equipment and systems
 Installation of mechanical equipment and systems
 Installation of sanitary equipment and systems
 Testing for both systems, electrical, HVAC, BMS, water and sewerage,
 Any other necessary work.
The implementation sequence shall suit the Contractor's method of working. He shall employ sufficient
equipment and labor to allow the timely completion of the works. It is anticipated that work will as far as
possible be commissioned as soon as completed. This applies to buildings and even to smaller subsections
if appropriate.

1.1.14 Warranty for Equipment

Component Warranty period

Mechanical Equipment’s, Electric equipment’s, measuring instrument and

2 years
control equipment for technical management

Pipelines 5 years

Tanks 5 years

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 12
The warranty period shall commence from the Taking-Over of the Works and not from the time installed
and put into use. All warranties shall be in the name of the Employer.

1.2 Site Working Arrangements

1.2.1 General Requirements

[Link] Protection of Nature

The Contractor shall preserve trees, planted fields and fences in a suitable manner, and shall replant any
that are damaged or removed, and re-erect fences to their original condition, all in accordance with the
Engineer’s instructions.

In case of repair works, the Contractor shall tabulate the requirements and methodology thereof, and ask
the Engineer for approval before starting any repair. After completion or repaired work, such work shall be
re-inspected by the Engineer.

Should the Contractor need to erect scaffolding on any private property he shall contact the owner of the
property and arrange for the proper execution, and for the removal of the scaffolding. He shall carry out
all repairs and re-instatement before the end of the Defects Notification Period.

Before starting any construction activity in public or private roads, the Contractor must submit a method
statement detailing the intended signposting, signaling, erection of barriers or guard rails, diversion of
traffic, protection measures for the public, railings around construction pits etc. The Contractor shall obtain
approval from local and police authorities before starting any associated construction work.

[Link] Cleanliness on Site

The Contractor shall confine his operations within the allocated Site, or such other areas of land as may be
agreed between the Engineer and Contractor.

The Contractor shall maintain the Site in a clean, tidy and safe condition during the period of construction
and commissioning and shall at all times take every possible precaution against the contamination of
subsoil and groundwater. Should contamination occur in the course of the work (demolition, earthworks,
etc.), cleaning must be arranged immediately, but at least every working day. Any disused materials and
other debris arising in connection with the Works shall be removed from the Site. The work shall not be
taken over until such material has been removed.

The Contractor shall be responsible for making all arrangements for the disposal of solid and liquid wastes
from the site. Furthermore, he shall give strict instructions to all persons employed by him to use the
sanitary facilities provided at site.

The Contractor shall prevent vehicles entering or leaving the Site depositing mud or other debris on the
surface of the adjacent roads or footpaths. Any materials so deposited shall be removed at the earliest
practical opportunity.

If the Contractor fails to keep the site clean, the Engineer will instruct a third party to carry out the work at
the cost of the Contractor.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 13
If the work and demolition work involve handling hazardous substances or contaminated substances, the
applicable hazardous substance ordinances, safety regulations and technical regulations for handling
hazardous substances must be observed. This also applies to storage on site and separate transport and
disposal.

[Link] Protection of water quality

The Contractor shall make every effort to avoid contamination of the drinking water. Whenever the risk of
contamination may arise, the Contractor shall (with the consent of the Employer) interrupt the supply and
then disinfect the works which are in contact with drinking water.

1.2.2 Permits

[Link] Authorizations and permits to be obtained by the Contractor

The Contractor shall obtain all required authorizations or permits from appropriate government authorities
including Electricity, Water, Telephone, Roads, Police and the Municipality prior to start of construction of
buildings, structures and infrastructures and shall submit the same to the Engineer. The Contractor shall
also be responsible for providing any other authorizations or permits to be obtained after completion of
the construction works hereunder from the appropriate authorities. If the Contractor is required to carry
out any asphalt cutting or canal excavation works on any road or street, then he shall obtain the Engineer's
written authorization in writing at least 1 week before proceeding with such works.

The Contractor shall comply with all conditions stipulated in any permits granted by third parties, including
conditions stipulated in those permits obtained by the Employer.

[Link] Land for construction purposes

The Contractor will be permitted to use available land belonging to the Employer, on or near the site of
the Work, for construction purposes and for the storage of materials and equipment.

The Contractor shall immediately move stored material or equipment if any occasion arises, as determined
by the Employer, requiring access to the storage area. Materials or equipment shall not be placed on the
property of the Employer until the Employer has agreed to the location to be used for storage.

Easements across private property will be shown to the Contractor by Engineer. The Contractor shall set
stakes to mark the boundaries of construction easement across private property. The stakes shall be
protected and maintained until completion of construction and clean-up.

The Contractor shall not enter or occupy for any other purpose with men, tools, equipment, construction
materials, or with materials, any private property outside the designated construction easement boundaries
without written permission from the owner and tenant of the property.

Also refer to ESHS Specifications.

1.2.3 Access Roads

The Contractor shall carry out all protective works and strengthening of public streets and roads that he
may use so as to avoid damage from heavy loads and plant moved to the site. The Contractor shall also
construct, maintain, and remove such temporary access roads as he may require for carrying out the works.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 14
The Contractor shall observe all restrictions which apply to public roads, and he shall comply with all
reasonable restrictions which may be imposed by the Engineer, the Employer, the Police or other
Authorities. This includes safe and secure fencing of the respective site, temporary traffic lights and guards.

The Contractor shall not run tracked vehicles or tracked plant on any public or private road without the
written approval of the responsible Authority or owner and subject to such conditions as those may require.

Public and private streets, roads and other surfaces used by the Contractor shall be kept free from dirt and
rubbish and be cleaned with adequate equipment as required by the Engineer. If the Contractor fails to do
so, the Engineer can instruct a third party to do the cleaning on the account of the Contractor.

Immediately after ceasing to use any temporary road, the Contractor shall restore the road to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and the responsible Authority or the owner. These provisions shall apply also
to the shoulders of any existing sealed road used by the Contractor or affected by his operations.

Also refer to ESHS Specifications.

1.2.4 Other Underground Communication Lines

The Contractor is responsible for contacting the relevant authorities and identifying any crossing or
conflicting lines and shall make his own investigations well ahead of the works. If the Engineer shall
determine that significant relocation of services is necessary, separate provisions will apply, otherwise the
Contractor shall repair, relay short sections, support pipework etc. at no additional cost to the Contract.

1.2.5 Temporary Fencing and Marking of Sites

Temporary fencing shall be provided at all construction sites where permanent fencing has not been
provided. All open excavations shall be protected sufficiently to ensure the safety of workmen and to
prevent entry of the public. The fencing must be maintained and checked throughout the construction
period. Appropriate work lighting and signage for the construction site and storage areas must also be
provided. This can also include signage for the access roads if this becomes necessary due to deliveries
and removals.

Also refer to ESHS Specifications.

1.2.6 Information on Site Conditions and Subsurface Information

The Contractor shall ascertain all conditions relevant to the Works.

All information obtained by the Engineer regarding site conditions, subsurface information, groundwater
elevations, existing construction of site facilities as applicable, and similar data will be available for
inspection at the office of the Engineer upon request. Such information is offered as supplementary
information only. Neither the Engineer nor the Employer assumes any responsibility for the completeness
and correctness or interpretation of such supplementary information.

The Contractor shall make himself aware of the site and sub-surface conditions during the site visit.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 15
1.2.7 Existing Services and Structures

[Link] Unforeseeable Physical Condition

No warranty is given as to the accuracy or completeness of the information on existing services and
structures included in the Contract.

The Contractor shall consult all relevant authorities and owners of services before commencing any work
and shall satisfy himself as to the exact position of existing services which affect or may be affected by the
Works. If any service is found to exist but is not as indicated in the Contract, then the Contractor shall at
once give written notification to the Engineer. The Contractor shall record the position of all located existing
services on the general arrangement drawings a copy of which shall be made available by the Contractor
to the Engineer.

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for any diversion or removal of services, which he may
require for his own convenience or method of working and shall obtain the prior approval of the Engineer
to such arrangements.

1.2.8 Access by Officials

Authorized government and municipal officials shall at all times have access to the work wherever it is in
preparation or progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for
inspection.

1.2.9 Procedure for Complaints and Claims for Damage

Details of all claims or warnings of intended claims which the Contractor may receive in respect of matters
against which he is required by the Contract to indemnify the Employer, shall be notified without delay to
the Engineer, who shall likewise pass to the Contractor any such claims or warnings which may be submitted
directly to the Contractor or Engineer.

A similar exchange of information shall also be made in relation to all complaints which may be received.

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing immediately following any damage or injury arising out
of the execution of the Works.

Also refer to ESHS Specifications.

1.2.10 Protection of Works

The Contractor shall, at no additional cost to the contract, suitably protect all works likely to be affected in
its quality either by the weather or by the method adopted for the execution of the Works and take all
precautions against any damage which may affect the Works. This includes all services on the construction
site. A transfer of liability only takes place with successful acceptance (Taking-Over) by the Employer. Up
to this point in time, the work must be protected by the Contractor to the extent required.

1.2.11 Measurements of Works

The Contractor shall measure the quantities of all work he intends to include in his Payment Certificates.
The Contractor’s measurement is subject to the Engineer’s approval.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 16
Wherever levels, measurements, quantities, etc. of any work done cannot be checked at a later stage,
measurements made by the Engineer or approved by him shall be taken to be correct measurements of
the work in accordance with the Preamble of the Bill of Quantities and these Technical Specifications.

The Contractor shall provide all survey instruments and measuring equipment required, together with the
necessary assistance to the Engineer, all at no additional cost to the Contract.

1.2.12 Working Hours for Construction

Site working hours shall be restricted to the following times:

Monday to Friday: 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. including lunch break 1 hour. The working hours for employees shall
not exceed eight hours per day.

The Contractor’s program and methods of working must be made on the assumption that the working
hours will not be varied.

Any proposal by the Contractor to work outside these hours shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
giving at least one day’ notice. A clear definition of the work to be carried out and the reasons for the
request shall also be provided.

Unplanned deviation from the normal working hours will normally be limited to emergencies only and the
Engineer shall be informed of any such working, or the Contractor’s intention of such working, at the
earliest opportunity.

For the purposes of this clause, working shall be deemed to include for any activity whatsoever undertaken
by the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors in connection with the execution of the Works undertaken
within the Site, on the Employer’s Land or in any nearby premises or on the nearby public road.

1.2.13 Temporary Site Installations

[Link] General
The Contractor shall arrange at no additional cost to the Contract the supply of electricity, fresh water,
telephone, compressed air and other services as are necessary to his site establishment and shall provide,
maintain and remove on completion all pipes, cables and fittings which carry such services to his
operations.

[Link] Temporary Buildings

The Contractor shall provide as necessary temporary sheds, offices, mess rooms, sanitary accommodation
and other temporary buildings required for the Contractor's own and sub contractors' use.

[Link] Temporary Fencing and Marking of Sites

The Contractor shall make such provision in the way of temporary works, scaffolding and other works as
may be necessary and required for the safe and efficient performance and construction of the Works and
all works incidental thereto and in an expedient manner.

All open excavations shall be protected sufficiently to ensure the safety of workmen and to keep out the
public and livestock.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 17
All existing fences affected by the Work shall be maintained by the Contractor until completion of the
Work. Fences which interfere with construction operations shall not be relocated or dismantled until written
permission is obtained from the owner of the fence, and the period the fence may be left relocated or
dismantled has been agreed upon. Where fences must be maintained across the construction easement,
adequate gates shall be installed. Gates shall be kept closed and locked at all times when not in use.

On completion of the Work, the Contractor shall restore all fences to their original or to a better condition
and to their original location.

Also refer to ESHS Specifications.

1.2.14 Traffic Diversions and Arrangements

The Contractor shall in any case contact and provide the permission of the Police prior to any disturbance
of local traffic. The requirements of the police are to be followed strictly. The Contractor shall comply with
all applicable municipal and traffic police requirements for closure of streets. The Contractor shall provide
barriers, guards, automatic traffic lights, signs, temporary bridges, flag persons and watch persons, advising
the public of detours and construction hazards. The Contractor shall also be responsible for compliance
with additional public safety requirements, which may arise during construction. The Contractor shall
furnish and install all signs and warning devices and shall promptly remove them upon completion of the
work

Traffic diversions, if necessary, shall be planned and arranged with the responsible authorities (e.g. Police)
by the Contractor and harmonized with the Engineer and the Employer. No diversion shall be implemented
without the written consent of the responsible authority and after given information to the Engineer and
the Employer. Access to the site shall be available to vehicles of emergency services and residents in the
areas.

The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain on the Sites and at locations on the access to the Sites all
traffic signs and traffic control signals, as necessary and/or may be required by the Police Authority for the
safe direction and control of the traffic. The location and size of all such signs and the lettering thereon
shall be approved by the Engineer before erection of the signs. The Contractor shall reposition, cover or
remove signs as required during the progress of the Works.

At least 48 hours in advance of closing or partially closing or of re-opening any street, alley, or other public
thoroughfare, the Contractor shall notify the Police, Fire, Traffic and Engineering Departments of
jurisdictional agencies involved, and comply with their requirements. Deviations to traffic and road closure
program must first be approved in writing by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall obtain the approval in advance, from Authorities concerned for any temporary public
and private roads, bridges proposed by the Contractor for public use. Temporary bridges shall be clearly
signposted as to load limit, with signs and posting confirming to current requirements.

Also refer to ESHS Specifications.

[Link] Electricity and Lighting

The Contractor shall provide and maintain a temporary supply of electricity for construction purposes and
to the temporary offices of the Contractor and the Engineer all at no additional cost to the contract. The

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 18
Contractor shall provide and maintain wherever required adequate supplies of electricity at a suitable
voltage for all operations to be undertaken to complete the Contract. The Contractor shall also make these
services available to sub-contractors and, when instructed by the Engineer, to other Contractors and
employees of the Employer.

All such facilities shall be removed by the Contractor before final acceptance of the Works.

Before starting work, the contractor shall find out about the connection values from the local authorities
and initiate the appropriate measures to ensure the operation of the construction site. The Contractor shall
be responsible for entering into any agreements with the appropriate suppliers, and shall issue all notices
and pay all fees, dues, rents, charges and other costs incurred thereby.

The Contractor shall, in connection with such supplies, adopt precautions to ensure the safety of all
personnel.

The Contractor shall provide adequate lighting for the proper execution and inspection of the Works.
Definitions of adequate lighting see electrical specifications. If the Engineer considers the intensity of
lighting to be inadequate for the proper execution and inspection of the work being undertaken of the
Contractor shall install such additional lighting as the Engineer may be require.

Such lighting shall be maintained throughout the Contract until the Taking-Over Certificate is issued or
until an alternative date as may be agreed with the Engineer.

[Link] Water Supply and Sanitation

The Contractor shall be responsible for entering into any agreements with the appropriate suppliers, and
shall issue all notices and pay all fees, dues, rents, charges, and other costs incurred thereby.

The Contractor shall provide wherever required adequate supplies of water of proper quality and pressure
for all operations to be undertaken to complete the Contract. The Contractor shall also make these services
available to his sub-contractors.

The Contractor shall provide and maintain sufficient chemical type toilets at each working location, of
suitable type, and maintain the facility in a sanitary condition at all times. Chemical type toilets shall be of
adequate construction so that no unsanitary contamination of the area can result from their use. Upon
completion of the work, sanitary facilities shall be removed, and the areas restored to their original
condition.

No tipping facilities are to be provided for the Contractor and he shall make all arrangements for the
disposal of all surplus excavated material of site at his own cost and to the agreement of the Engineer.
Unauthorized tipping shall not be permitted.

The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of sewage and waste in accordance with the local
environmental regulations, especially for the water source site. Details shall be found in HSE Report and
according to relevant local legislation.

Also refer to ESHS Specifications.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 19
[Link] Temporary Access
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all temporary roads, footways and structures necessary for the
purposes of the Contract. On completion of the Works, unless instructed otherwise by the Employer, the
Contractor shall remove such roads, footways and structures and restore the ground to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.

The Contractor shall provide and maintain all temporary gangways, ladders and staging on and about the
Sites necessary for the purposes of the Contractor and shall remove such gangways, ladders and staging
when no longer required. The occupational safety of the respective facilities and the locking against
unauthorized persons must be ensured.

[Link] Upkeep of water supply and wastewater disposal during implementation

The measures foreseen by the Contractor are to be described in his Method Statement, which is to be
issued to the Engineer before starting any construction works on site. Such measures could be the
construction of diversion systems, relocations and other works necessary during the construction period
including the removal and dismantling of such works on completion as required by the Engineer.

The Contractor has to provide all temporary installations to maintain those parts of the existing water
supply, sewerage, drainage systems and water courses which may be affected during his construction
works. Any interruption of the network systems requires prior approval from the respective authorities and
the Engineer.

Construction wastewater may only be discharged into the public system in compliance with local
regulations. Cement- and construction wastewater must be cleaned or filtered (if permitted). It is also
advisable to use a settling tank to avoid the entry of solids or sludge. Wastewater containing oil or fat must
not be discharged. These must be disposed separately.

Also refer to ESHS Specifications.

[Link] Dealing with water

The Contractor shall be responsible for dealing with water, whether from existing drainage systems,
watercourses, ground water, underground springs or any other source or cause.

The Contractor shall supply, install, maintain and operate all necessary pumping and other equipment for
de-watering the various parts of the Works.

In discharging and diverting water he shall avoid flooding or damaging other works or services, causing
erosion and polluting water courses.

The Contractor’s method of removal of water from the foundations will be subject to the approval of the
Engineer. Where excavation for foundation of structures extends below the groundwater table, the portion
below the water table shall be de-watered in advance of excavation unless specified otherwise.

The dewatering shall be accomplished in a manner that will prevent loss of fines from the foundation, will
maintain stability of excavated slopes and the bottom of the foundation, will result in all construction
operations being performed free from standing water, unless otherwise specified, and will result in all

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 20
foundations being sufficiently dry for proper bonding of the backfill materials with the foundations and
proper compaction of the materials placed.

The Contractor will be required to control any water level along the bottom of the foundations and
elsewhere prevent the accumulation of standing water.

All related costs (e.g. pumping) are to be considered to be included in the unit prices.

Also refer to ESHS Specifications.

[Link] Signboards
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain weather resistant project signboards at the main entrance
of each construction site.

The signs shall be a minimum of 2 m wide by 1 m high and shall show the Contract name, the funding
agencies including logo and the name of the Employer, the Bank and the Contractor. Each sign is to be in
English and Albanian. The signboard and information given is to be approved by the Engineer before
manufacture.

The final location of the sign boards shall be approved by the Engineer.

[Link] Security
The Contractor shall be responsible for protection of the Site, and all Works, materials, equipment, and
existing facilities thereon, against vandalism and access by unauthorized persons.

No claim shall be made against the Employer by reason of any act of an employee or trespasser, and the
Contractor shall make good all damage to the Employer's property resulting from his failure to provide
security measures as specified.

Security measures shall include security fencing, barricades, lighting, watchman services, and other
measures as required protecting the site.

Also refer to ESHS Specifications.

1.2.15 Lifting gear and devices

It is the full responsibility of the Contractor to decide on required lifting gears, hoist and cranes that are
required for the works.

If elevators and cranes are used, these must also be made available to other companies involved in the
construction. The contractor shall enquire about the corresponding connection values in advance and make
respective arrangements.

1.2.16 Work in Dangerous Areas

The Contractor shall ensure that all personnel working at or visiting the Site shall comply with any safety
precautions called for by the Engineer, such as a “Permit to work” system for access to high-risk areas
including exposed areas, and buildings in addition to Electrical Danger Areas.

The “Permit to Work” system will be administered by the Engineer.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 21
Plant, as designed and installed, shall have no feature that could be a hazard to operators, maintenance
staff, visitors or other persons having access thereto. Guard electrical safety devices, thermal insulation,
noise suppression devices, written notices, safety covers, lifebelt and the like shall be provided where
needed.

Adequate safeguards shall be provided to prevent personnel accidentally coming into contact with
dangerous machinery mechanisms, hot surfaces, electrically live parts and any other hazardous
components or contents.

Emergency stop devices shall be provided and positioned adjacent to all driven plant which:

- involves a risk of injury to personnel during norm and maintenance operations;

- handles high pressure fluid or dangerous chemicals;
- is located at a distance of more than five meters from its controller;
- has no direct, unimpeded access between the controller and the item of controlled plant,
irrespective of distance.

Secure and substantial guards shall be supplied throughout the installation to cover drive mechanisms. All
rotating and reciprocating parts, drive belts, etc. shall be shrouded to removable for gaining access to the
plant without the need to first remove or displace any major item of plant; and they should also allow for
adequate ventilation.

Guards shall not have to be removed during normal operation running maintenance and routine
inspections and shall be designed to prevent access of fingers to the moving parts.

Rubber mats shall be provided by the Contractor in front of all distribution boards and instrument and
battery supply power cabinets supplied by them under the contract.

Also refer to ESHS Specifications.

1.3 Products and Equipment requirements

1.3.1 Product and type Lifetime

The Plant shall be designed for a long reliable operating life and shall be suitable for 24 hours per day
continuous operation for prolonged periods in the climatic conditions applying and with a minimum of
maintenance. The Contractor may be called upon to demonstrate this for any component, either by the
service record or evidence of similar equipment already installed elsewhere or by records of relevant type
tests.

Wherever possible, plant shall be designed and arranged so that the degree of skill required to maintain
and service the Works shall be minimum. Except for consumable items such as carbon brushes and the like,
which normally require more frequent replacement, no part subject to wear shall have a design life from
new to replacement or repair of less than five years of continuous normal operation, and, where major
dismantling is required to replace a part, the life of such parts shall not be less than ten years.

Electrical contacts and switches shall have a minimum life under normal full load working conditions of two
million operations without replacement of any part and two hundred thousand operations without

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 22
maintenance of any kind. Electrical relays and light current switching devices shall not require maintenance
of any kind before completing two million operations under normal full working load.

The Works shall be designed for the prevention of corrosion, entry of insects and vermin, entry of dirt and
dust, and to minimize risk and damage in the event of a fire. Plant shall operate without undue vibration
and parts shall be designed to withstand the maximum stresses under the most severe conditions of normal
service after loss due to any corrosion allowance, or the specified test condition including any corrosion
allowance.

Plant shall be designed so that when operating at the normal condition, the intensity of emitted noise in
the working environment shall not constitute a health hazard to operators and other personnel or cause a
nuisance outside the boundary of the Works. The anticipated noise characteristics of all items of plant and
systems which have high noise potential shall be submitted to the Engineer early in the design stage of the
Contract.

1.3.2 Protection and Packing for Dispatch

Before despatch from the Manufacturer's works all Plant shall be adequately protected by painting or by
other approved means for the whole period of transit, storage and erection against corrosion and
accidental damage. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the Plant being packed and/or protected
ensuring that it reaches the Site intact and undamaged. All plant and equipment as necessary shall be
packed in first quality containers or packing; no second-hand timber shall be used. The Plant shall be
packed to withstand rough handling in transit and all packages shall be suitable for several stages of
handling via sea or air freight, inland transport, and movement on site and for storage including possible
delays in delivery. Packing cases shall be of the fully boarded type, slated cases will not be allowed.

Precautions are to be taken to protect shafts and equally unprotected surfaces where they rest on wooden
or other supports likely to contain moisture. At such points wrappings impregnated with antirust
composition or vapour phase inhibitors are to be used of sufficient strength to resist chaffing and
indentation due to any movement which is likely to occur in transit. The form of the protective wrappings
and impregnation are to be suitable for a minimum period of twelve months.

Lids and internal cross battens of all packing cases are to be fixed by screws and not nails. Hoop metal
bindings of cases are to be sealed where ends meet and if not of corrosion resistant material, are to be
painted.

Contents of such cases are to be bolted securely or fastened in position with struts or cross battens and
not with wood chocks unless they are fastened firmly in place. All struts or cross battens are preferably to
be supported by cleats fixed to the case above and below to form ledges on which the battens may rest.
Cases are to be upended after packing to prove that there is no movement of contents.

Where parts are required to be bolted to the sides of the cases, large washers are to be used to distribute
the pressure and the timber is to be strengthened by means of a pad.

Waterproof paper and felt linings are to overlap at seams by at least 12 mm and the seams secured together
in an approved manner, but the enclosure is to be provided with screened openings to obtain ventilation.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 23
The flanges of pipes, valves and fittings shall have their open ends protected by adhesive tape or jointing
and then be protected by wooden discs secured by means of service bolts (which shall not be used on site)
or by other approved means. The sleeves and flanges of flexible couplings shall be bundled by wire. Cases
containing rubber rings, bolts and other small items shall not normally weigh more than 500 kg gross.

All electrical equipment, relays, instruments, etc. shall be shipped with transport screws and/or clamps,
clearly marked and painted red, to prevent movement of moving parts. Reference shall be shown in the
operating and maintenance instructions, detailing the removal of these temporary fixings prior to setting
the equipment to work.

Structural steelwork, pipes, valves, uncased fittings, and metalwork shall be similarly marked. In addition,
one in every ten repeated articles shall bear the despatch marks in suitable paint or other approved
medium. When in the opinion of the Engineer the despatch marks cannot be applied satisfactorily to any
item, they shall be stamped on a metal label attached to the item or part by means of a piece of wire
passing through holes at either end of the label and secured so that it lies flat with the item.

Indoor items such as electric motors, switch and control gear, PLC's, PCs, instruments and panels, machine
components, etc., are to be ‘cocooned’ in aluminium or polythene sheeting, sealed at the joints and the
enclosures provided internally with an approved desiccator.

All items of Plant shall be clearly marked for identification against the packing list.

All cases, packages, etc., shall be clearly marked on the outside with a waterproof material to show the
weight, where the weight is bearing, and where the slings should be attached and shall also have an
identification mark relating them to the packing lists and to the appropriate shipping documents.

Cases shall bear the Contractor's name and the name of the particular site. These shall be marked in stencils
or legible letters and shall be in red or black waterproof paint or protected by shellac or varnish to prevent
obliteration in transit.

Each crate or package is to contain a packing list in a waterproof envelope and copies in duplicate are to
be forwarded to the Engineer on Site, prior to despatch. All items of material are to be clearly marked for
ready identification against the packing list.

The Engineer may require inspecting and to approve the packing before the items are despatched but the
Contractor is to be entirely responsible for ensuring that the packing is suitable for transit, and such
inspection will not exonerate the Contractor for any loss or damage due to faulty packing.

The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the Contract Price for all materials and packing cases
necessary for the safe conveyance and delivery of the Plant.

1.3.3 Advice of Dispatch

The Contractor shall send advice of despatch to the Engineer so that this information is received not less
than two weeks before the anticipated delivery of the goods.

The advice shall comprise the complete packing list with understandable designations of the main items
(not only article codes).

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 24
1.3.4 On Site Storage and Safekeeping
The Engineer shall agree delivery dates with the Contractor within 30 days of the Contract Agreement, and
these shall be in accordance with the Contract.

In case of delay to the Civil Works programme, to prevent delay to the shipment of equipment or the
deterioration of equipment stored at Site, the Contractor shall either:

 Adequately package all items of equipment to enable the equipment to be stored in the open on
Site without any deterioration whatsoever.
 Provide an approved store, complying with the following minimum requirements on Site which will
also prevent any deterioration of the equipment.
 Electrical equipment: covered, air conditioned, dustproof and vermin–proof area.
 Rotating mechanical machinery: covered area.
 Pipes, valves, steelwork, etc.: sheeted on open hard standing area.
 The sheeting to be used shall be of a type that will not deteriorate in ultraviolet light.

The machinery shall be ready for erection at Site by the end of the Manufacturing and carriage periods but
if the machinery is complete and ready for erection before the agreed date, the Contractor shall arrange
on site storage as defined herein, at his own expense within the Contract Price.

The Contractor shall provide insurance and shall be entirely and solely responsible for the security of all
such equipment stored at the Site in accordance with the Contract.

The Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting all equipment prior to storage and he shall arrange for
any damaged equipment to be rectified prior to delivery to store.

The Contractor shall remove the machinery from storage and deliver to the final point of installation upon
receipt of the instruction from the Engineer.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the operation, safe keeping and maintenance of all equipment on
site during and after erection up to the issue of the Performance Certificate.

1.3.5 Unloading, Erection and Running-In of Equipment

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the unloading of the equipment supplied at site or
store and be responsible for any damage occasioned. The Contractor shall at his own expense provide all
equipment, tools meters, gauges, temporary accommodation, all skilled and unskilled labour, for the
erection of the whole of the equipment and apparatus so that it can be installed complete and left in good
working order.

Before commencing this work the Contractor shall examine the structure and decide with the Engineer so
that the equipment may be installed without interfering with the works and the running of the plants in
course of construction and shall deliver to site items required to be “Built–in” prior to delivery of the main
plant.

Any special erecting tackle required shall be provided by the Contractor and be left at site after the
completion of the Contract.

The Contractor shall provide adequate protection for the plant from the time it is delivered to Site until the
Taking-Over Certificate is issued.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 25
In particular, the Contractor shall provide and fix adequate sheeting, etc., to prevent the ingress of dust
and dirt both during erection and whilst the building finishes are carried out after erection.

Upon the complete erection of the whole of the plant and auxiliary apparatus, the Contractor shall set the
equipment to work in conjunction with arrangements to be made with the Engineer.

The Contractor shall provide a suitably qualified and authorised engineer to act as site manager to co–
ordinate the activities of the various subcontractors for the whole period covered by the Contract.

The Contractor shall also provide suitably qualified and competent specialist personnel employed for:

 The erection and checking of the equipment.

 The necessary liaison with the Engineer, Statutory Authorities, and other contractors.
 Supervision during the safekeeping, site testing, commissioning periods and during the Defects
Notification Period.
When the works are complete, the Contractor shall commission the equipment to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Until the Taking-Over Certificate has been issued, the Contractor shall be responsible for making
good any damage which occurs, however caused.

Products

NOTE: All Products used are to be stamped with “CE” – Symbol or there must be a declaration that confirms
the conformity with the requirements of European Norms.

Furthermore, the respective products to be delivered must adhere to the general standards as presented
in Chapter1.1.9 and the Electrical standards as presented in Chapter 5.1.4 as well as HVAC and mechanical
specific standards as presented in Chapter 4.1.2.

1.4 Drawings, Records and Documents

1.4.1 Design and Construction

The Works shall be designed in all respects to conform to the latest current engineering practice.

For completion of the Works, only parts and materials of internationally well-known producers are
accepted, that have been installed at multiple locations and have been proved to be durable under similar
conditions. The components must be suitable for the desired purpose and the conditions at the location
of installation. If specialised tools are required for maintaining the offered equipment, the Contractor is
deemed to have included them in his Bid. Tools, spare parts, and accessories provided by the original
manufacturer have to be delivered to the Employer.

It must be guaranteed, that the manufacturer will provide a repair- and maintenance-service at the place
of operation. Spare parts have to be available for at least 10 years. Ordinary spare parts have to be of a
locally available type.

Only new equipment of highest quality may be installed. For similar tasks, uniform appliances by the same
manufacturer should be used. The number of different brands has to be kept to a minimum. For extensions,
only such appliances should be tendered, that are identical to those that are already in use.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 26
The philosophy of the design shall be simplicity and reliability such that the equipment will give long
trouble–free service with low maintenance costs. Particular attention should be paid to ease of access to
facilitate inspection, cleaning, maintenance, and repair.

All equipment supplied shall be designed to meet the needs for satisfactory operation under all variations
of operating loads, pressures and temperatures including variation in the ambient temperature.

All materials shall be new and unused and of the best quality and shall be selected to withstand the stresses
imposed by the working and the ambient conditions without distortion or deterioration affecting the
efficiency and reliability of the plant.

Each component or assembly shall have been proven in service in a similar application and under conditions
no less arduous than those specified herein. The Engineer shall have the right to request the Contractor to
justify his selection of equipment. Where it is shown that material or plant are of a standard lower than that
necessary to comply with these Technical Specifications, the Contractor shall modify or replace the
equipment concerned at no extra cost.

The choice of materials and finishes shall consider the atmospheric conditions at the Site. Equipment shall
be protected against the entry of vermin, insects, or small animals.

Outdoor equipment shall be weatherproof and designed to prevent the collection of water at any point.
Metal–to–metal joints will not be permitted, and all external bolts or screws shall be provided with blind
tapped holes where a through hole would permit the ingress of moisture.

Mechanisms shall be constructed of materials, which will not jam due to rust, corrosion, brine, or dust.
Bearings of exposed operating shafts shall be designed to prevent moisture seeping along the shaft into
the interior of the equipment.

Equipment and instruments shall not be located in positions where they are vulnerable to falling objects
or water drips.

All equipment performing similar duties shall be of a single type and brand and fully interchangeable to
limit the stock of spare parts required.

1.4.2 Drawings
The following types of drawings apply:

 Tender Drawings
 Engineer’s Drawings
 Shop (Working) Drawings
 As-Built (Record) Drawings
All drawings prepared and submitted by the Contractor are considered “Contractor’s Documents” in
accordance with the Contract and shall be in the form of black lines on a white background and conform to
the relevant ISO standards in respect of drawing size, presentation, scales and use of symbols. Drawing sizes
shall normally be either A1 or A3. All dimensions shall be in metric units, preferably restricted to meters
and millimetres. A graphical scale shall be included to aid the use of photographic or electronic
reproduction methods.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 27
The drawing title block shall be located in the lower right corner and shall allow for inclusion of the name
of the Employer, the Engineer, the Contract title, contract number, date of drawing, scale, drawing number, list
of amendments, and authorized signatures, in addition to the Contractor’s name. The final layout shall be
subject of approval by the Engineer.

All drawings prepared by the Contractor must be bi-lingual (Albanian and English language).

[Link] Tender Drawings

These are also referred to as the “Drawings” provided with the Bidding Documents.

During the mobilization period, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the
Tender Drawings or other data received from the Engineer, and shall notify him immediately of any error,
discrepancy or conflict found therein. Failure to discover or disclose such errors, discrepancies or conflicts
shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for unsatisfactory work, nor from rectifying such work at
no additional cost to the Contract.

The Tender Drawings shall rather help the Contractor to place a first order of material supply. The Contractor
shall design and execute all works based on the Tender Drawings; however, all further drawings and
documentation shall be prepared by the Contractor even if the Tender Drawings for parts of the works are
not provided or in insufficient detail only. If the Contractor is responsible for any design of the Permanent
Works, the design shall be prepared by qualified designers who are engineers or other professionals
complying with the requirements of this Contract. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for consent
the name and particulars of each proposed designer and design Subcontractor. The Contractor warrants
that he, his designers and design Subcontractors have the experience and capability necessary for the
design. The Contractor undertakes that the designers shall be available to attend discussions with the
Engineer at all reasonable times, until the expiry date of the relevant Defects Notification Period.

[Link] Engineer's Drawings

The Engineer reserves the right to issue additional drawings throughout the progress of the Works (so called
Engineer’s Drawings) and these shall constitute complementary Tender Drawings.

These drawings might be prepared from time to time if required to support the Contractor’s work and will be
issued under the same conditions as Tender Drawings, except that they shall have no status whatsoever for
interpretation of the Contract. Having satisfied himself that any necessary amendments have been carried out,
the Contractor may resubmit such Engineer's Drawings to the Engineer as Shop Drawings for approval.

[Link] Shop (Working) Drawings

The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings for approval to the Engineer in accordance with the procedure
outlined below, together with descriptive literature in the English and Albanian language for all
manufactured or fabricated items. Additional information such as special drawings, schedules, calculations,
and curves shall be provided when specifically required in these Technical Specifications or when requested
by the Engineer during implementation in line with the Contract. The term "Shop Drawings' here shall mean
amongst other drawings, prints, descriptive literature, test reports, samples, calculations, schedules,
material lists, and information, and items of similar meaning. Shop Drawings are considered Contractor’s
Documents in accordance with the Contract. No materials shall be fabricated or shipped until the relevant
drawings or submittals applicable to that particular item, have been approved by the Engineer.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 28
These Shop Drawings shall then form the basis for the "As-Built" Drawings that shall be produced by the
Contractor (see below).

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval construction and installation drawings, design
calculations, prototype test results and other relevant documents (in triplicate) which are required for detailed
clarification and for carrying out the Contract especially:

(a) Structural (reinforcement and shuttering plans and schedules) and Mechanical Drawings: All
construction and installation drawings are to be refined and supplemented based on the Tender
Drawings and Engineer's Drawings as applicable.
(b) Electrical Drawings: Based on the Tender Drawings, the Contractor shall prepare his design of the
finally chosen equipment and material in compliance with Albanian legislation and local regulations,
and other requirements of these technical specifications.
All electrical and Instrument installations shall follow electric safety regulations and norms set in Albania.
However, the electric safety standards and regulation for Albania have not been confirmed for all areas
specified. In such cases where the Albanian electric safety standards are not confirmed, electric standards
valid in CENELEC (European Committee for Electro technical Standardization) and IEC (International Electro
technical Commission) -publication IEC 364 shall apply.

The Shop Drawings shall be complying at least with the following:

i) Site layout;
ii) Panel location and dimension drawings
iii) Main cable diagrams
iv) Panel single line diagram
v) Wiring and Circuit diagrams with device terminal number. Combined internal and
external wiring diagrams.
vi) Panel assembly dimensioned lay-out drawings
vii) Panel device/part list
viii) Earthing conductor diagram
ix) List of cables

The Contractor shall design the electrical installation of the plant and pumping station based upon the
following standards and instructions:

 IEC 60204, Electrical equipment of industrial machines.

 IEC 60439, Low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies.
 IEC 60364, Electrical installation of buildings.

Procedure for Approval of Shop Drawings

As soon as possible after signature of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer three copies
of his Shop Drawings for all works not designed by the Employer including general arrangement drawings in
sufficient detail for his proposals to be examined, reviewed, accepted, or rejected in accordance with the
procedure described in the following sub-clauses and in line with the Contract:

i) Within 14 calendar days after receipt of said drawings, the Engineer will return one copy of
each drawing to the Contractor with his comments.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 29
 ii) If the drawing is returned to the Contractor marked "ACCEPTED", revision of the said drawing
will not be required, and the Contractor shall immediately submit two additional copies to
the Engineer for his records.
iii) If the drawing is returned to the Contractor marked "MAKE CORRECTIONS”, the Contractor
shall revise the drawings and submit three additional copies to the Engineer for his records,
within 7 calendar days.
iv) If the drawing is returned to the Contractor marked "AMEND AND RESUBMIT" or "REJECTED
- RESUBMIT" the Contractor shall revise the drawings and submit three copies to the
Engineer for further review within 14 calendar days. The cycle shall then recommence at step
(iii) above.
v) If the drawing is returned to the Contractor marked "NOT SUBJECT TO APPROVAL" revision
of the drawing will not be required and the Contractor shall immediately submit two copies
to the Engineer for his records.
vi) Fabrication or execution of an item shall not be commenced, nor any items shipped or
transported, before the Engineer has received the relevant drawings and returned copies to
the Contractor marked "ACCEPTED" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS ".
vii) Revisions indicated on drawings shall be considered as changes necessary to meet the
requirements of the Specifications and shall not be a basis of claims for extra work.
viii) The Contractor shall have no claim for damages or extension of time due to any delay
resulting from revising the drawings before acceptance.

In the event that the Contractor obtains the Engineer's approval for the use of materials or equipment
other than that which is shown on the Drawings or specified, the Contractor shall, at no additional cost to
the Contract and using methods approved by the Engineer, make any changes to structures, piping,
mechanical and electrical work that may be necessary to accommodate these materials or equipment.

If the Contractor wishes to modify any design or document which has previously been submitted for review
or approval, the Contractor shall immediately give notice to the Engineer. Thereafter, the Contractor shall
submit revised documents to the Engineer in accordance with the above procedure.

Any such approval or consent, or any review (as described above or otherwise) shall not relieve the
Contractor from any obligation or responsibility. Approval by the Engineer of Shop Drawings or other
submittals for any material, apparatus, device and layout shall not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility of furnishing the same of proper dimension, size, quality, quantity, materials and all
performance characteristics to efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the Contract. Approval
shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for errors of any kind on the Shop Drawings. Approval
is intended only to assure conformance with the design concept of the Works and compliance with the
information given in the Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for all dimensions, to be confirmed
and correlated at the job site. The Contractor shall also be responsible for information that pertains solely
to the fabrication processes or to the techniques of construction and for the coordination of the work of
all trades. In checking the Shop Drawings, the Contractor shall take account of related technical
requirements derived from works already executed, or to be executed under other projects, in conjunction
with which, the Works in this Contract will be operated as part of the Contract.

Accompanying documentation for equipment

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 30
For each item of equipment, grouped by Classification according to Bill of Quantities and bound in hard
covers, the Contractor shall provide Equipment Manuals to the Employer containing the following:

 Functional description, performance curves, diagrams, test certificates

 Specification of corrosion protection
 Operator’s manual, which shall be a brief simplified version of the O&M manual for day-to-day
use by operators.
 Instructions for Operation and Maintenance (O&M)
 Spare parts manual
 Contact Details of the supplier/manufacturer

The complete documentation (lists of parts, descriptions, maintenance and operating instructions, test
reports and certificates, etc.) shall be submitted to the Engineer, in three copies each, before the
commencement of installation.

[Link] Record Surveys and Drawings

After the clearing of the Site, the Contractor shall take and record levels in the manner instructed by and
in the presence of the Engineer of any portion of the Site and Works. Such levels, when approved by the
Engineer, shall be recorded by the Contractor on drawings and/or schedules which shall be signed as a
true record by the Contractor and the Engineer and shall form the basis of the measurement of the
Contractor's work. Excavation works shall not commence before such records have been certified by the
Engineer.

[Link] As-Built (Record) Drawings

As-Built Drawings present the Works constructed in all detail and serve as basis for final acceptance of the
works.

Before the issue of the Taking-Over Certificate, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer
"As-Built" Record Drawings. This should include any schedules and "as-built" records that give details of all
particulars required to establish the true dimensions of the Works, as constructed. This information has to
be included on the draft As-Built Drawings (Red Mark Drawings) together with request to taking over
documents. Such drawings will serve as the base for preparation of the final As-Built Drawings.

The As-Built Drawings shall include all electrical and mechanical installations and all buildings inclusive site
layout. All existing services found during excavation works shall also be shown, incorporating all the
modifications/revisions affected during construction.

Each copy shall be durably bound in a volume or volumes depending on bulk. Drawings shall be on
international A size sheets and shall preferably not exceed 297 mm in height folded and shall be bound into
volumes. Volume titles shall be clearly inscribed on the front cover and on the spine of the cover. Drawings
shall be marked AS BUILT.

Within a period of four weeks before the scheduled issue of the "Taking-Over Certificate”, As-Built Drawings
shall be provided in the required number of copies and languages. All drawings shall be filed on USB-Stick as
AutoCAD Drawings in DWG format and handed over to the Employer.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 31
The final "As-Built" Drawings shall be produced by the Contractor. The Contractor shall keep records of the
information required to prepare the "As-Built" Drawings throughout the progress of the works and shall
submit this information to the Engineer on a regular basis and when requested to do so.

[Link] Amendments to Tender Drawings

Following the approval of mechanical and electrical shop drawings, modifications to the proposed civil
structures may be necessary. The Contractor shall prepare and issue revised drawings showing the
necessary revisions to the proposed civil structures. The Contractor will be responsible for providing in the
civil structures the correct location and size of the wall ducts and fixings shown on the approved mechanical
and electrical drawings.

If subsequent to the award of the Contract it should be deemed necessary to modify the proposed civil
structure as a direct result of the size or imposed loadings of the proposed mechanical and electrical
equipment being different from that detailed by the Contractor at the time of bidding, then the Contractor
shall prepare at his own cost the necessary revised civil drawings and detailed structural and other design
calculations and submit them to the Engineer for approval.

[Link] Required Drawings, Schedules and Calculations

During the execution of the contract, the Contractor shall prepare and provide for approval by the Engineer
all necessary drawings, schedules, diagrams, and other documentation as per contract conditions as listed
below and as required by the Engineer according to the Contract, namely:

 Construction details
 Structural drawings
 Shop drawings of all measures
 Mechanical works drawings
 Electrical works drawings
 Complete surveying maps for the Sites
 Maintenance schedules
 As-built documentation
 Material / equipment submittal schedule including delivery program
 Shop drawing submittal schedule
 Overall and detailed time schedule
 Weekly and monthly progress reports including manpower schedules
 Cable list, Single Line & Wiring diagrams
 Illumination calculation
 Cable dimensioning calculation
 Equipment schedules and
 Electrical power consumption schedule

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 32
1.5 Inspections and Testing

1.5.1 General
The Contractor shall perform all necessary tests to demonstrate compliance of the Works with the
specifications, performance criteria and guarantees. During the tests, the Contractor shall demonstrate to
the satisfaction of the Engineer that:

 The Work is capable of achieving performance as specified.

 The Work complies fully with these Technical Specifications.
 The Contractor shall demonstrate that works, plants and equipment operate satisfactorily in both
manual and automatic control.

Tests shall include, but not be limited to:

 Inspection and testing at the manufacturers' premises (Factory tests).

 Inspection and testing during construction
 Tests on Completion including commissioning
 Tests after completion
A minimum of 21 calendar days’ notice in writing shall be given to the Engineer and the Employer before
carrying out any scheduled inspection or testing.

Procedures and work processes for the recording of test results shall be set out in the Contractor’s Quality
Plan but in any case, the test results shall be reported in writing to the Engineer by the Contractor with the
comments and endorsement of the Engineer.

Where specialized test equipment is supplied, the Contractor shall provide the associated test sheets which
shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before the tests being carried out.

All tests specified herein (including supply of any test equipment needed or retesting) shall be carried out
at the risk of the Contractor and at no additional cost in accordance with the Contract.

For the Tests on Completion, the Contractor shall prepare a comprehensive commissioning and testing
program and details of the inspection and test procedures he proposes to employ for the start-up of the
systems and this shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 30 calendar days before the
scheduled commencement of the Tests on Completion.

Quality Control records, test certificates, reports and daily records of on-site testing and inspection shall
be kept on forms approved by the Engineer.

Test results shall be certified by the QC Executive. All test certificates and inspection records (including any
from suppliers or other outside testing agencies) shall be clearly identified with the appropriate part of the
Works/systems to which they refer and shall include information required by the relevant Reference
Standard or Technical Specifications Section, and they shall be submitted to the Engineer.

The timing for submission of certificates shall be as follows:

 Manufacturer’s and supplier’s test certificates shall be submitted as soon as the tests have been
completed and in any case not less than seven calendar days prior to the time that the materials
represented by such certificates are needed for incorporation into the Permanent Works

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 33
 Certificates of tests carried out during the construction or on completion of parts of the Permanent
Works shall be submitted within seven calendar days of completion of the test.

1.5.2 Inspection and Testing at Manufacturers' premises

The Contractor has on request of the Employer/Engineer, to organize and bear all related costs (flight,
accommodation, allowances) of any inspection visit of any of the nominated manufacturers/suppliers of
major items, e.g., pipes, HVAC system, control panels, etc. A maximum number of four representatives of
the Employer and/or Engineer may be expected to attend these visits.

1.5.3 Inspection and Testing during Construction

Tests during construction shall include but not be limited to the following:

 All specified tests and sampling for materials to be incorporated into the Permanent Works (specified
backfill material, concrete quality, etc.).
 All water retaining structures including tanks, manholes, building roofs etc. shall be tested to prove the
water tightness in accordance with these Technical Specifications.
 All pipelines and distribution systems (gravity or pressure pipes) shall be pressure tested in accordance
with these Technical Specification. This also includes the joints, welding seams, washers, etc.
 All materials supplied for incorporation in the Permanent Works shall be new and subject to Quality
Assurance Inspection, certification and where appropriate destructive testing in order to demonstrate
compliance with the requirements of the specification and the purpose for which they are used in the
Permanent Works. Where quality assured materials are not readily available the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer test certificates furnished by the supplier or manufacturer of the materials indicating
their compliance with the relevant specification.
 Inspection, testing and sampling of equipment and other items not categorized as materials

During initial start-up, when the electricity supply to the control panels has been energized, the following
tests shall inter alia be carried out:

 Testing of all valves and hydrants for full closing and opening
 Testing of all HVAC equipment for function and proper adjusting
 Testing of each instrumentation loop to ensure correct operation.
 Testing of alarms to ensure correct operation.
 Testing of BMS.

1.5.4 Laboratory for Civil Works

The Contractor shall provide laboratory facilities required to carry out tests defined in Contract at his own
cost.

The Contractor shall build a complete laboratory consisting of a building and facilities and equipped, as a
minimum, with all the test equipment enabling performance of tests marked (*) herein below at his own
cost and put it at the Engineer's disposal. The Contractor shall also be fully responsible for operation and
maintenance of such laboratory.

The Contractor may carry out all the routine field tests in the laboratory, which he will build for the Engineer
by providing additional test tools, if deemed necessary, or may install a separate field laboratory for such
tests.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 34
The Contractor shall provide tools required for routine tests which shall be carried on the Site or provide a
specialized laboratory technician to perform such tests by using equipment to be supplied from a
laboratory approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor may carry out any tests, which are not required to be performed on the Site in any external
independent laboratory acceptable to the Engineer. After completion of the Works under the Contract the
Contractor shall, upon Engineer's instruction, remove the laboratory built on the Site and the equipment
shall remain the Contractor's property.

The Contractor shall assign minimum one laboratory technician with having experience on concrete and
concrete materials and in soil tests. Appropriate assistants to the laboratory technician shall be made
available. CVs of laboratory technician shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Such personnel
assigned to the laboratory shall be fully supervised by and receive instructions from the Engineer. The
Engineer in agreement with the Employer may require the Contractor to replace laboratory personnel when
he deems necessary.

Tests required to be conducted by the Contractor during the execution of the Works hereunder include,
but not limited to, the following:

AGGREGATES:

- Organic impurities in aggregates

(*) Sieve analyses of fine and coarse aggregates
(*) Water content of aggregates
- Resistance of aggregates to Na2S04
- Crushing test
- Scaling test
- Stripping resistance
(*) Water absorption
- CBR tests
(*) Humidity/density relations of soils by using a 2.5 kg (5.5 lb} power hammer with a drop of 305 mm (12
inches)
(*) Humidity/density relations of soil by using a 4.54 kg power hammer with a drop of 457 mm (18 inches)
(*) Natural density of aggregates by using sand funnel method

CONCRETE:

- Concrete cylinder compaction resistance

(*) Concrete sampling and curing tests on the site
- Slump in Portland cement concrete (*) Sampling from fresh concrete
(*) Air content of fresh mixed concrete by compression method
(*) Density of fresh and set concrete

The tests listed above are defined generally and this listing shall not limit the tests, which the Contractor is
required to conduct within the frame of these Technical Specifications.

The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer copies of all certified test reports issued by his own accredited
laboratory or by an independent accredited test laboratory, as appropriate.

Each such test report shall include the following information:

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 35
  The date of the report
 A brief description and name of the Contract
 Name and address of the laboratory
 Name and signature of Engineer
 Date of inspection or sampling
 Temperature and atmospheric conditions
 Date of test
 Type and description of product and number of articles in related specifications
 Location within the Works
 Type of inspection or test
 Observations made to verify the conformity with the Contract.

Submission of Test Reports: Test reports relating to materials and equipment proposed to be used in the
Works shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer in the required number of copies to be
designated by the latter.

1.5.5 Tests on Completion

The Contractor shall carry out Tests on Completion in accordance with the FIDIC Clause 9.

If the tests fail due to non-compliance with the criteria, or do not attain the specified minimum
requirements or the Engineer is not satisfied that the operational parameters can be maintained, the
Contractor shall:

 identify the reason for the failure,

 put forward written proposals for rectification,
 obtain written approval from the Engineer for these proposals
 rectify the problem and re-test
[Link] General
The following general procedures have to be considered:

a. The Contractor shall carry out functional tests for all equipment to prove that the works comply with
these Technical Specifications.
b. The Contractor shall give the Engineer 21 calendar days’ notice of his intention of carrying out tests,
and that the equipment is ready for operation. The Contractor shall provide a test program to test the
function of each part of his work (e.g., Site testing).
c. Within two weeks of completion of any functional test, the Contractor shall obtain and submit to the
Engineer, and to other parties as may be instructed, test certificates and performance curves of all
items giving detailed records of all electrical and mechanical tests carried out on the equipment and
material, both at the manufacturer's works or on Site.
d. Copies of certificates of all tests of all items shall be submitted to the Engineer. Copies of test
certificates of all major items shall be included in the operating and maintenance instructions as
detailed elsewhere.
e. When the tests and inspections have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and when the
test certificates and performance curves, etc., have been checked, the Engineer shall confirm
acceptance in writing.
f. The Engineer reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to meet any extra costs which are occasioned
by failure of the Contractor to comply with the above testing and inspection requirements, including

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 36
 the provision of test certificates, performance curve, etc., or which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are
due to insufficient care having been taken by the Contractor or the sub-contractor before presenting
the plant for inspection or test.

[Link] Site testing

On completion of erection and after the initial setting to work, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer that
he is ready to demonstrate the performance of the relevant components of the works. Such a
demonstration is referred to herein as Site testing, which shall be witnessed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall then fully test all items of equipment, civil components and the component as a whole
and shall include provision and arrangement of:

 All skilled and qualified staff and labor for operating and testing equipment during the tests.
 Provision and disposal of all services such as lubricants, fuel, electricity, water, etc.
 All measuring and testing instruments necessary to demonstrate that the equipment operates in
fulfillment of the Technical Requirements.

The Contractor shall consider that the Employer will make available suitably qualified personnel who will
take part in the tests.

The period of testing shall terminate after the object has been satisfactorily and successfully run by the
Contractor (as certified by the Engineer) for a period as required by the Engineer.

[Link] Test Equipment

In terms of equipment, at least the following issues have to be considered:

a. The Contractor shall provide and install ready for use any equipment, materials, consumables, water,
etc. necessary for execution of the functional tests at no additional cost to the Contract.
b. Any equipment used in the testing of the plant shall comply with the appropriate safety regulations
and requirements in all respects. The Contractor shall ensure that all sub-contractors are acquainted
with the Technical Specifications.
c. The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer regarding the accuracy of all instruments used for tests and,
if required, shall present recent calibration test certificates, or otherwise have the instruments calibrated
by an independent authority at no additional cost to the Contract.
d. Electricity meter shall be checked for correct rotation and creep tests shall be carried out to ensure that
the meter is inoperative with voltage alone if the secondary of the current transformer is left connected
with the primary current interrupted.

[Link] Functional “Cold Water” Machine Tests

All functional tests shall be carried out by the Contractor under the supervision of and to the satisfaction
of the Engineer, as follows:

a. Each pump set shall be tested for capacity, head, power consumption and mechanical reliability.
b. Each motor for the emergency power supply shall be tested for fuel input, power and thermal output
and effectiveness and for full reliability in all aspects.

[Link] Hydraulic Tests

The following hydraulic tests should be considered at minimum:

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 37
a. Pumps, pipes, valves and pressure vessels shall be hydraulically tested to the pressure as specified or
to at least 1.5 times the maximum working pressure or the nominal pressure +5 bar, whichever is the
greater.
b. The testing of pipes shall in all cases be carried out in the presence and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall give the Engineer advance written notice of his intention to carry out
testing. The form and period of notice are to be agreed between the Engineer and the Contractor.
c. Test certificates shall be prepared by the Contractor in a form to be agreed upon and shall be signed
by the Engineer on the satisfactory completion of each test. One copy of each signed certificate shall
be kept by the Engineer and one by the Contractor. The complete pipeline, including blank flanges,
caps, plugs, pressure gauges, pipe connection cocks, etc. shall be provided with anything necessary for
effectively testing the pipelines at the required pressure. The Contractor shall keep the said plant in
good order for the duration of Works, at no additional cost to the contract. Any pipe or length of pipe
found to be defective shall be immediately removed and replaced without additional cost and leaking
joints shall be remade. The test shall be repeated as often as necessary until the whole length under
test is accepted by the Employer and Engineer.
d. The testing of tanks/reservoirs for water tightness will be carried out similar to DVGW W 311 (or
internationally acceptable standards).
e. Notwithstanding the satisfactory completion of the above test, any leakage or soaking visible on the
outside face of the tank walls shall be stopped, after allowing for self-sealing. Any caulking or making
good of cracks in the concerned wall section shall, where practicable, be carried out from the inside
face.
[Link] Testing of Pumps, Conveying Equipment
Pumps and conveying equipment shall be tested on performance by the Contractor under the supervision
of and to the satisfaction of the Engineer as follows:

a. each pump set shall be tested for capacity, head, and power consumption,
b. each equipment shall be tested for capacity and power consumption.

[Link] Testing of Electric and Electronic Equipment and Systems

The Contractor shall provide all necessary testing equipment as required by the Engineer to carry out tests
as set out in the Laws and Regulations of Albania and as required by the relevant Electricity and other
Authorities.

The Contractor shall also be responsible for the payment of any fees to specialists and manufacturers, for
testing and commissioning required to bring all such plant and equipment into fully efficient operation as
part of the installation.

The Contractor shall thoroughly test each part of the Contract Works all generally in accordance with I.E.C.
and Electricity Authorities regulations, and the tests shall include the following:

 Insulation resistance tests between earth and each phase on all circuits and power consuming
equipment by means of a 500 Volt insulation tester
 Insulation resistances below10 megaohms will not be accepted.
 Earth continuity tests shall be made on each main, submain, circuit, and sub circuit.
 Polarity of switches and continuity of ring main circuits shall be tested.
 Insulation resistance tests of all connected appliances shall be made.
 Tests of the effectiveness of earthing including resistance of main earth shall be made.
 Any other tests the Engineer may reasonably instruct the Contractor to make. Such will include
readings of voltage drop and current balance between phases at full load conditions at various
points in the installation.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 38
The Contractor has to provide all necessary labour, materials, test media and instruments required, and all
instruments must carry a recent calibration certificate from an approved body.

All tests are to be witnessed by the Engineer, and test record certificates, signed by all test witnesses, are
to be provided to the Engineer as the work proceeds, upon request, or in any event before the
commencement of the Defects-Notification period.

The Contractor has to present a list of tests during construction which will be done for the equipment’s,
and to be approved by the Engineer.

Testing Distribution Systems:

Before completion, the installation shall be tested in accordance with the standards, and compliance with
the Laws and Regulations of Albania in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer.

Inspections will be carried out during installation and after completion of work.

All assistance in the form of Labour and instruments for carrying out such tests and inspections shall be
supplied by the Contractor at reasonable times as required by the Engineer and the costs of such tests shall
be included in the prices quoted by the Contractor for the various items to be installed under these
Technical Specifications.

All cables and cable sheaths shall be tested for continuity and insulation resistance as the work precedes
and before connecting to the main supply.

Testing procedures shall be performed as following:

 That the equipment complies with the specification.

 That the installations comply with the applicable standards, the Electricity Supply Regulations,
Licensing Authorities and Fire Regulations where applicable.
 Earth resistance test.
 That all protective devices are correctly adjusted and operated satisfactorily.
 Measurement of Insulation Resistance
 Check of Protection by barriers and Enclosures.
 Verification of Polarity
 Measurement of Earth Fault Loop Impedance
 Test of Operation of Residual Current Devices

All the above shall be carried out in accordance with the applicable standards. Test protocols have to be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.

After completing each part of the installation and after carrying out the above tests the Contractor shall
switch on all electrical loads. The current in each phase shall be measured with a clip-on Ampere-meter. If
an imbalance of more than 10% exists, reconnections shall be made to balance the load.

Phase sequences shall be tested at each distribution board; the tests shall show that the phase sequence
and color-coding is constant throughout the installation, the sequence being L1; L2; L3

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 39
Tests shall be made during and after installation to demonstrate that the phase rotation is correct at all
end connections of power cables.

Where electronic equipment is installed, care must be taken when testing to avoid damage due to testing
voltages. If necessary, vulnerable devices and equipment’s must be disconnected.

The Bid of the Contractor shall also include tests of the installations witnessed and confirmed by external
authorities such as Fire Officers, Factory Inspectors, Licensing Authorities, Insurance Company
Representative as required by the Albanian legislation and/or set forth in these Technical Specifications.

The Contractor is reminded that the operating and maintenance instructions should be submitted in time
and that the necessary spare parts and tools should be handed to the Engineer latest at the time of
commissioning. Failure to do so, will delay the issue of the Taking-Over Certificate.

The Contractor shall instruct the Employer's Personnel appointed to take charge of the plant in all matters
and activities related to the proper operation, calibration, and maintenance in an efficient mode.

[Link] Commissioning
The Contractor shall carry out operational tests to demonstrate that all systems and components can be
operated safely and as specified in accordance with the specifications, design drawings and according to
national and international standards.

The commissioning period shall commence at such date determined by the Engineer and after the
Contractor has successfully realized all functional and work tests on completion and put the related
structures into operation.

The commissioning shall not start until all tests on completion have been done to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and the approval of the Contractor's proposal and program for commissioning the works by the
Engineer.

The Contractor shall supervise the working of the mechanical and electrical installations and shall provide
technical supervision continuously to affect any adjustment and remedial works that may be necessary. The
Contractor shall co-operate and render all assistance necessary as required by the Engineer during the
commissioning of the works.

The services to be provided during the commissioning period shall include but not be limited to the
following:

a. Conducting the start-up of the structures in accordance with the commissioning work plan approved
by the Engineer.
b. Provision of all skilled personnel for the commissioning of the structures using the O&M manuals to
demonstrate that the installation is capable of meeting the specified design and performance criteria.
The Contractor shall maintain on site all necessary specialists on commissioning and technical
personnel for a period of 14 calendar days after the successful commissioning to affect any adjustment
that may be necessary.
c. Assisting in supervising operation of the structures under a series of selected routine and non-routine
process modes and conditions to determine the performance of individual elements and provide a
base record of the capabilities of the pumping and valves for future reference

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 40
d. Assisting in supervising the operation and maintenance of the structures using various operating and
maintenance procedures to test alternatives and determine optimum methods of operation.
e. Monitoring, reporting and referring of problems which cannot be resolved onsite to the Engineer’s
satisfaction and recommending alternatives to correct the problems.

1.5.6 Tests after completion

In accordance with the Contract, if any defects occur to any part or the installation after commissioning
and Taking-Over, the Engineer preserves the right to call for such further tests as may be necessary to
identify the nature and location of the defect, and to demonstrate the satisfactory completion of the
remedial works. The Contractor shall bear all costs involved in carrying out the additional testing.

1.6 Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Training

1.6.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

The Contractor shall prepare comprehensive operating and maintenance manuals covering all items of the
contracted works and equipment including all instructions of manufacturers, references, lists, etc. The manuals
shall include an outline of the general principles of operation and maintenance of the items and shall make
specific reference to the particular equipment provided. Sales brochures may be included only as additional
information.

The operating instructions shall be prepared in such a way as to provide a step-by-step description of the
preparation and setting to work of the whole of the works and it’s shutting down.

The manuals shall also include a list of addresses with contact details of the suppliers’ representatives in
Albania or country or origin which can provide after sales service, spare parts or operation support.

The manuals shall be submitted in both English and Albanian language in the required number of copies. They
shall cover the testing, operation, control, maintenance, dismantling and repair of all the components and
Plant provided in the Works. The greatest attention shall be paid to the completeness and clarity of
presentation. The information shall be supported by:

 Catalogues and brochures

 Dimension drawings
 Data sheets
 Descriptive text
 Comprehensive drawings, sketches, plans, sections as may be required

A collection of standard pamphlets of general nature without drawings and descriptions referring to the actual
as-built situation will not be acceptable. In particular, the information supplied by Sub-Contractors and
manufacturers employed by the Contractor shall be prepared to form a comprehensive manual. Cross-
references of descriptive texts, drawings and spare part lists must be included.

At least two months before the scheduled issue of the Taking-Over Certificate, the Contractor shall deliver to
the Engineer copies of draft (provisional) operation and maintenance manuals for the Works and the auxiliary

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 41
structures. The manuals shall be divided into several volumes (e.g. function, operation, maintenance, and
overhaul) and shall fully and clearly set out the Contractor's own recommendations and instructions for the
satisfactory operation, maintenance and overhaul of the works and equipment included in this Contract.

The draft (provisional) manuals shall also be already available during the required Training for the Employers
staff as described in Chapter 1.6.2.

The text or accompanying diagrams shall in addition show the electrical wiring, handling and erection
instructions. Draft (provisional) manuals shall, during the testing and commissioning of the Works, be carefully
checked by the Contractor, updated and modified to ensure that they are fully descriptive and applicable to
the final layout of the works.

The finally approved manuals shall be submitted at least three weeks before the planned issue of the Taking-
Over Certificate securely bound in A4 sized loose leaf binders, clearly titled, index linked and cross referenced.
If prepared on computer, standard PC word processor software such as Word for Windows shall be used, and
a copy of the data file for each volume, on USB-Stick, shall be supplied to facilitate updating and searching
for information. No section of the Works will be certified by the Engineer as completed unless this requirement
has been met.

The contents of the manuals may be subdivided into the following sections:

1. Basic data of the Works;

2. Description of the various units of the Works including supporting sketches;
3. Procedures for setting to Work;
4. Procedures for shut down and taking out of service;
5. Emergency operation (amount of raw water, electricity failure, etc.);
6. Maintenance procedures including maintenance schedules and draft of maintenance reporting forms

If during the Defects Notification Period, the Contractor or the Engineer should find that the manual requires
modification or adjustment as a result of operational and maintenance experience in the Works, the Contractor
shall provide such modification for each relevant manual at no additional cost to the Contract.

The manuals shall include explanations of the function and purpose of each item supplied and the
operational, mechanical and electrical procedures for:
1. Lubrication, checking, calibration (including charts), testing and adjustment;
2. Attention at daily, weekly, monthly or other maintenance intervals to ensure reliable trouble-free
operation;
3. Complete overhaul, dismantling and re-assembly, testing and re-commissioning;
4. The identification and selection of suitable lubricants standardized throughout the Works, including
identifying equivalents, available from local manufacturers where possible;
5. Defect location decision charts to facilitate tracing of the cause of malfunction or breakdown from
symptoms or tests;
6. Routine and emergency safety precautions, procedures and recommendations;
7. Cleaning of the Plant and its components;
8. Guidelines for protection of equipment in case of taking the equipment out of service;
9. Maintenance of protective coating;
10. Operational maintenance of the system, performance, monitoring and reporting procedures;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 42
The operating instructions shall be harmonized between the electrical and mechanical system and contain
the function of the electric equipment as well as the process itself, which is controlled with it. The
instructions shall clearly specify the function of each device and how it has to be operated. All signals and
indicated values shall be explained; necessary instructions shall be added.

In particular, the electrical part of the maintenance manual shall include at least the following:

i. Schedule of equipment supplied giving manufacturer's name and appropriate brand / Model No. /
Serial No.
ii. Schedule of routine maintenance for all equipment supplied.
iii. Schedule of spares supplied
iv. Schedule of tools and lubricants supplied
v. Plant layout drawings
vi. Electrical single line diagrams and circuit diagrams of the switchgear and control gears and further
control panels
vii. Arrangement (layout) of the equipment inside and at the front of the switchgear and control gears
viii. BMS and automation configuration diagram, if required
ix. Full and comprehensive instructions for all items of supplied equipment.
x. Test certificates for both works and site tests for electrical installation and other items, where
appropriate.
xi. Programs for control and monitoring (PLC, RTU. HMI and BMS-PC) Installation programs on DVD, if
required.
xii. Program for reading the installed data logger and changing parameter of the installed instrumentation
(Installation programs on DVD if required)
xiii. Copies and licences of the BMS. HMI and PLC (RTU) applications programs .

Operation and maintenance data shall be collected, and reports prepared and submitted, specifically for
the HVAC to ensure energy-efficient operation. Those include:

a. General operation and maintenance data and procedures, Operational System and Software
(freeware), O&M Manual
b. List of qualified service organizations which include contact details and qualifications, cost
estimates etc.

1.6.2 Training

[Link] Training of Employer’s Personnel

The training of Employer’s Personnel in the operation and maintenance of the buildings and the building
services and devices shall be duty of the Contractor. Training of Employer’s Personnel shall be carried out
by a special Training Programme and during day-to-day operational services. The Contractor shall enable
the Employer’s Personnel to be practically trained on site as well as at an external Training Centre for
theoretical and practical basis works, so that the responsible staff of the Employer will be able to operate
the system in an appropriate manner in technical, environmental, health and safety terms.

The Employer’s staff to be trained on-site will accompany the Contractor’s staff in assisting their duties
where it is necessary to learn “on-the-job” but will not take over any responsibility for operation and
maintenance. The Contractor has to involve the Employer’s Personnel in all operational and start-up
procedures and commissioning on direction of the Employer.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 43
In order to allow the timely arrangement of training, the Contractor shall provide at least two months
before the scheduled date for taking-over, a training schedule specifying the number of staff required from
the Employer and their qualifications. The Engineer and Employer will check, amend if required and approve
the training schedule. The Contractor shall submit a training programme at least three weeks before the
intended training activities for the Engineer’s approval. As part of the training programme, the draft
(provisional) Operation and Maintenance manuals shall be provided to the Employer, so that the involved
staff can adequately prepare themselves for the Training. Further training materials shall be prepared in
both Albanian and English language in the required number of copies.

The training programme should be divided into several blocks/ topics, each lasting at least three calendar
days and include but not be limited to the following aspects:

1. General Training on entire Building Infrastructure

2. Specific Training on Building Management System
3. Specific Training on HVAC
4. Specific Training on Electrical System
5. Specific Training on PV System
6. Specific Training on Firefighting System

The above-mentioned trainings shall at least include the following procedures and topics (if applicable):

 Theoretical Background and overview about the constructed measures/ system

 Practical training on operation of the systems
 Emergency Operating Procedures;
 Preventive Maintenance Procedures;
 Corrective Maintenance Procedures;
 Lubrication Procedures;
 Cleaning Procedures;
 Laboratory Analytical Equipment Procedures;
 Electrical Switching Procedures;
 Firefighting
The Contractor shall provide training in the performance of predictive and preventive maintenance on all
equipment in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer(s) and designer. The objective of the
preventive maintenance training shall be in such a manner that the condition and functionality of the
equipment is able to be maintained in good condition.

The Contractor shall ensure the training is at an advanced level to ensure the system operators have an
adequate understanding of the systems and equipment functions and that maintenance staff have the skills
for repairing and restoring the systems and equipment to its original operating condition.

[Link] Acceptance of Training

Training must be certified by the Employer and by the Engineer. The Staff to be trained will be nominated
in good time in writing by the Employer.

Training will only be accepted upon a short examination of the trained personnel by the Engineer.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 44
1.7 Spare Parts
The Contractor shall provide the spare parts, which the manufacturer recommends should be kept in stock
for the efficient operation of the equipment for a period of two years after the performance certificate has
been issued.

The spares shall be packed and sealed in individual boxes to preserve the parts against damage and
corrosion over long storage periods. Each package shall be clearly identified in Albanian and English as to
its contents.

All spare parts used due to technical failure during the Defect Notification period shall be refilled by the
Contractor prior issuing the Performance Certificate.

1.8 Services and Miscellaneous Equipment to be provided for the Engineer

by the Contractor

1.8.1 Services
The Contractor shall provide on his own cost to the Employer and the Engineer, his representatives and
other persons authorized by the Employer with such labor as the Employer and the Engineer may require.
The Contractor shall provide staff equal to the tasks required and shall maintain continuity of employment.

1.8.2 Surveying Equipment and Tools

The Contractor shall provide surveying equipment for the sole use of the Engineer and his staff for the
duration of the Contract and when appropriate have a Manufacturer’s or Agent’s specified tolerance
certificate at the date of issue. The Contractor is required to provide the survey instruments on the first day
of the Contract until completion of the Works. One surveying assistant shall be made available on request
to the Engineer.

The Contractor shall maintain the equipment and shall repair or replace damaged or unusable equipment
without delay when instructed by the Engineer. Upon the issue of the Taking Over Certificate the equipment
shall revert to the Contractor.

The Contractor shall provide throughout the period of the Contract all staging, templates, plumb bobs,
pegs, hammers, nails, strings, paint, brushes and other such articles required by the Engineer for inspection,
checking of setting out and measurement of the Works.

1.8.3 Safety Equipment

The Contractor, shall provide the following equipment for the exclusive use by the Engineer and for staff
of the Bank and the Employer as required during site visits:

 4 pairs of intrinsically safe overalls

 4 sets of waterproof jackets and trousers (waterproof jackets are to be reversible car coats complete
with separate liner and hood, one side yellow with reflective strips)
 4 pairs of site safety boots (leather uppers, PVC non-slip acid and oil resistant sale)
 4 pairs of safety wellington boots

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 45
 8 safety helmets, white with no logo
 8 pairs of PVC gloves
 1 rechargeable safety hand lamp
 1 high voltage charger (110-220V)

1.8.4 Testing Equipment

The Contractor shall provide the following equipment for the exclusive use by the Engineer and set up in
suitable room at a location to be agreed upon.

 One 2 kW electric space heater and one twin gang socket

 Work bench and shelves
 Eight metal cube molds for 150 mm test cubes
 One electrically heated thermostatically controlled water tank capable of containing 10 concrete cubes

The testing equipment shall be set up in the room provided and maintained by the Contractor in accurate
working order for the duration of the Contract.

1.9 Taking-Over and Project Closeout/ Performance Certificate

1.9.1 Taking-Over
Before the Engineer issues a Taking-Over Certificate, the Contractor shall submit record documents which
accurately reflects the Works as constructed (i.e. As-Built Drawings). Information on record drawings shall
be recorded concurrently with construction progress. Work shall not be covered up until all required
information has been recorded.

Each document shall be labeled " Record Document" in neat large, printed letters. Record documents shall
be legibly marked and shall record actual construction conditions including, but not limited to, the
following information:

a. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent
surface structures
b. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances referenced to visible and accessible features of the
structure.
c. Field changes of dimension and detail
d. Changes made by field instruction or by Variations
e. Details not on original Contract

Specifications and Addenda shall be legibly marked and shall include the following information:

a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalogue number, and supplier of each product and item of equipment
installed.
b. Complete list of subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers who furnished labor, materials, or
equipment. The address of each firm shall be included together with types of material or work
performed.
c. Changes made by on-site or by Variation instruction

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 46
As an additional requirement, the Contractor shall support the Employer in the taking-over according to
local practice in compliance with Albanian legislation.
[Link] Document submittal
Record documents shall be delivered to the Engineer before issuing of the Taking-Over Certificate. All
letter-sized material shall be neatly indexed and placed in a four or two ring binder. Drawings shall be
bound in sets of convenient size for ease of handling. A transmittal letter, in duplicate, shall accompany
the submittal of record documents. The transmittal letter shall contain the following information

a. Date.
b. Contract title and number.
c. Contractor's name and address.
d. Title and number of each record document.
e. Certification that each record document as submitted is complete and accurate.
f. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative.

1.9.2 Steps following the Taking-Over Certificate

During the Defects Notification Period, the Contractor shall remain responsible to the Employer under the
terms of the Contract and shall bear all relevant costs in respect of making good any defects in accordance
with the Contract and the supply of all spare parts required for the maintenance of the relevant component.

The scope of the Contractor’s responsibilities during the Defects Notification Period shall include:

 Provision of spare parts to be replaced during the Defects Notification Period

 Remediation of all defects
 Updating of operation manuals and as-built documentation as required.

1.9.3 Project Closeout

When the Contractor considers that all Works are complete, the Contractor shall submit the following
written certifications to the Engineer prior to final inspection confirming that all defects have been
remedied.

If the Engineer determines the Works is incomplete or defective, the Engineer will promptly notify the
Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or defective Work. The Contractor shall then take immediate
steps to correct the stated deficiencies and shall send a second written certification to the Engineer when
all stages of the Works are completed. Upon receipt of the second certification, the Engineer shall re-
inspect the Works.

When the Engineer determines that all stages of the Works are acceptable under the Contract, and Engineer
has received the closeout submittals from the Contractor, the Engineer shall issue a Performance Certificate
in accordance with the requirements of the Contract.

[Link] Closeout submittals

The Contractor's closeout submittals shall include record documents, as specified, and the following
certificates and affidavits:

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 47
a. Certificates of insurance and/or warranty for equipments’/products' liability (in the name of
Employer/Beneficiary)
b. Affidavit of payment of all duties, taxes, fees, levies and other charges.
c. Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims.
d. Affidavit of Release of Liens.

[Link] Clearance of Site on Completion

In accordance with FIDIC Sub-Clause 11.11, the Contractor shall remove any remaining machinery,
equipment, plant, waste material from the Site and the Site reinstated to the satisfaction of the Employer.

[Link] Performance Certificate

A Performance Certificate will be issued in accordance with the FIDIC Sub-Clause 11.9.

[Link] Final Account

In accordance with FIDIC Sub-Clause 14.11, within 56 calendar days of the Engineer's issue of the
Performance Certificate, the Contractor shall submit a final statement to the Engineer which shall reflect all
adjustments to the Contract Price including, but not limited to, the following information:

a. The original Contract Price.

b. Additions and deductions resulting from:
1. Previous Variation instructions.
2. Deductions for uncorrected work.
3. Deductions for liquidated damages.
4. Deductions for re-inspection payments.
5. Other adjustments.
c. Total Contract Price, as adjusted.
d. Previous payments.
e. Final Payment due.

Upon receipt of the Contractor's final statement, the Engineer will prepare a Final Payment Certificate in
accordance with FIDIC Sub-Clause 14.13.

1.10 Quality Assurance

The Contractor shall employ a full quality assurance system for all phases of the Works including design,
procurement, construction, testing, O&M and training phases. The QA system shall be in accordance with
the general requirements of ISO 9001.

All manufacturers and subcontractors shall also employ quality assurance systems in accordance with the
general requirements of ISO 9001.

The Quality Plan shall clearly state the methods for the identification, evaluation and rectification of matters
identified as or deemed to be non-compliant.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a Quality Plan for the Works within 30 calendar days from the
Contract Agreement covering the following:

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 48
1.10.1 Outline Quality Plan
 Company QA Policy Statement
 Company Organizational Structure
 Authority and Responsibility Schedule for the Contract
 List of quality procedures and instructions
 List of suppliers
 Inspection and test plans

1.10.2 Full Quality Plan

Procedures and instructions to assure quality for all the Works on and off the Site including the following:

 Contract Review
 Design Control
 Document Control
 Purchasing
 Subcontract administration and control
 Identification and traceability
 Supervision of construction
 Inspection, measuring and testing equipment
 Non-conformance
 Corrective action
 Handling, storage, packaging and delivery
 Internal quality audits and audit program
 Training

The Quality Plan as approved by the Engineer shall become part of the Contract.

1.11 Documents to be submitted by the Contractor

The schedule below gives an overview of the technical and planning documents that shall be submitted
for the approval of the Engineer in accordance with the Contract.

The Contractor shall submit a “document submission program” to indicate the submission times of these
documents.

1.11.1 Programme and Methods of Working

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of his proposed programme within the execution
period as stipulated in the Contract. He shall also submit details of the construction plant and labor force
which he proposes to employ and shall broadly describe the proposed construction methods.

The details of construction plant shall include the make, type, capacity or rating and the number of units
which the Contractor expects to employ throughout the duration of the Contract.

Details of the labor force shall include engineers and experts involved, senior staff, and specialists, skilled
and unskilled labor with indication of the local labor which the Contractor expects to employ and the
variation in staff and labor levels and their distribution throughout the duration of the Contract.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 49
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer:

a) The finalized overall programme and the detailed programme for the first month within 14 calendar
days of the Commencement Date.
b) Detailed programme for subsequent months showing the sections of proposed works which the
Contractor expects to perform.
c) Formal approval of working methods obtained from relevant Authorities before commencement of
any new section of works.

The Contractor is obliged to provide method statements for each construction site prior to commencement
of any works. These method statements are to be approved by the Engineer and shall include at least his
specific programme, a site plan (layout), site facilities (e.g. toilets, traffic and H&S arrangements, etc.), and
agreements made with the relevant authorities (e.g. police, electric utility, water/wastewater utility, etc.).

1.11.2 Notices of Commencement of Work

The Contractor shall, before commencing any work, give all necessary notices and make timely and
reasonable arrangements with:

a) the relevant authorities for public roads (approvals for opening, agreements on resurfacing) and
the Police (traffic arrangements), where applicable;
b) the concerned landowners (approvals of access, reinstatement of surfaces);
c) the statutory Authorities for water and energy supply and telecommunications

1.11.3 Construction Site Diary

The Contractor shall keep a diary for documentation of the following information.

 Weather conditions
 Air temperature
 Humidity
 Sites where the Contractor is working
 Staff at the sites
 Machinery and equipment at the sites
 Received site visitors
 Any notes, comments or whatsoever which the Contractor or the Engineer considers important.

The diary shall be submitted on a daily basis for countersignature by the Engineer’s staff.

1.11.4 Monthly Progress Reports

The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer monthly progress reports in English and Albanian
language.

The reports shall be in a style and format as agreed with the Engineer and shall be submitted in the required
number of copies.

The content of the monthly progress reports shall include but not be limited to the following:

 progress of works, divided into construction, delivery, installation, testing,

 quality of works,

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 50
 any events, difficulties and problems which have arisen during the reporting period,
 follow up of the approved programme: occurred delays, reasons for such delays, and measures to make
up such delays; up-date (if necessary) of the programme,
 cash flow forecast based upon the foreseen progress of works,
 photo documentation

Also refer to ESHS Specifications.

1.11.5 Progress Photographs

The photographs of the whole site and of its particular sections shall be taken before the commencement
of works and shall immediately be submitted to the Engineer. During the progress of the work, the
Contractor shall ensure that the necessary number of pictures are taken which should give a sufficient idea
about the activities undertaken on the site and shall submit them together with the Monthly Work Progress
Reports. Once all construction work is completed, the same sites shall be photographed again, and the
photographs shall be submitted together with the Contractors' Statement at Completion.

The pictures shall be taken before the work starts along all the rooms of the buildings and shall be
immediately submitted to the Engineer.

All the photographs shall be of good quality, generally in in color. Digital copies (USB-Stick) of all the
pictures shall be properly annotated and will have an explanation about the site shown in the picture
together with the date the photograph was taken.

The Contractor shall submit two albums including all the monthly photographs taken together with digital
copies (USB-Stick) of all the pictures and information on where the pictures were taken etc. to the Employer
prior to issuing the Taking-Over Certificate.

Also refer to ESHS Specifications.

1.11.6 Overview of Document Submittal

Item Document Description Copies Language Timing

(in each
language)

A General

A1 Programme Detailed construction Refer to English Commencement Date +14

programme FIDIC Sub- days
See Chapter 1.11 Clause 1.8
Refer also to FIDIC Sub-
Clause 8.3

A2 Manufacture & Including brief Refer to English Relevant approvals + 30

delivery of plant & description of basic FIDIC Sub- days
equipment equipment parameters, Clause 1.8
country of origin,
quantity, unit and total
price

A3 Cash Flow Detailed cash flow Refer to English, Contract Agreement + 21

Refer also to FIDIC Sub- FIDIC Sub- and local days;
Clause 4.21 Clause 1.8 language

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 51
 As part of Monthly
Progress Reports

A4 Quality Plan Refer to Chapter 1.10; Refer to English, Contract Agreement

Refer also to FIDIC Sub- FIDIC Sub- and local + 30 days
Clause 4.9. Clause 1.8 language

A5 Project Area As detailed in ESHS Refer to English, Contract Agreement

Environmental Specifications FIDIC Sub- and local + 28 days
and Social Clause 1.8 language
Management Plan
(“PA-ESMP”)

B Drawings,
records and
documents as
per clause 3

B1 Structural Construction drawings Refer to English, To suit construction

Drawings and details FIDIC Sub- and local program
Refer to Chapter 1.4 Clause 1.8 language

B2 Mechanical Construction drawings Refer to English, To suit construction

Drawings and details FIDIC Sub- and local program
Refer to Chapter 1.4 Clause 1.8 language

B3 Electrical Drawings Construction drawings Refer to English, To suit construction

and details FIDIC Sub- and local program
Refer to Chapter 1.4 Clause 1.8 language

B4 As-Built Drawings Refer to Chapter 1.4 Refer to English, Four weeks before
Refer also to FIDIC Sub- FIDIC Sub- and local scheduled issue of the
Clause 4.1 Clause 1.8 language "Taking-Over Certificate”

C O&M

C1.1 Operation + Refer to Chapter 1.5 Refer to English, Two months before
Maintenance Refer also to FIDIC Sub- FIDIC Sub- and local scheduled issue of Taking-
Manual (draft) Clause 4.1 Clause 1.8 language Over Certificate

C1.2 Operation + Refer to Chapter 1.5 Refer to English, Three weeks before
Maintenance Refer also to FIDIC Sub- FIDIC Sub- and local scheduled issue of Taking-
Manual (final) Clause 4.1 Clause 1.8 language Over Certificate

C2 Maintenance Refer to Chapter 1.5 Refer to English, As part of Operation +

scheme Refer also to FIDIC Sub- FIDIC Sub- and local Maintenance Manual
Clause 4.1 Clause 1.8 language

D Reporting

D1 Monthly Progress Refer to Chapter 1.11 Refer to English, Monthly

Reports Refer also to FIDIC Sub- FIDIC Sub- and local
Clause 4.21 Clause 1.8 language

D2 Record of Refer to Chapter 1.11 Refer to English, As part of Monthly

Contractor's Refer also to FIDIC Sub- FIDIC Sub- and local Progress Reports
Personnel & Clause 4.21 Clause 1.8 language
Equipment

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 52
 D3 Method Description of Refer to English, At least 14 days before
Statements construction and FIDIC Sub- and local intended commencement
testing procedures Clause 1.8 language of relevant work activity
Separated for the water
supply system if
applicable.

D4 Temporary water Description how the Refer to English, As part of PA-ESMP

supply and Contractor intends to FIDIC Sub- and local
firefighting plan supply the consumers Clause 1.8 language
during implementation
and how and how
firefighting capacity can
be maintained.
As detailed in ESHS
Specifications

D5 Inspection and Including methods of Refer to English, In accordance with

testing schedule testing of materials, FIDIC Sub- and local Contractor’s Programme
phases of construction Clause 1.8 language
and plant & equipment
Separated for the water
supply system and for
the wastewater system
See Chapter 1.5

D6 Pipe Condition As specified in the Refer to English, In accordance with

Report relevant Specifications FIDIC Sub- and local Contractor’s Programme
Clause 1.8 language

The Document Submission Plan, approved by the Engineer, shall become a part of the Contract.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 53
2 Specifications for Civil Works

2.1 General Information

2.1.1 Works Included in the Contract

The scope of civil works to be covered in this Contract includes the complete reconstruction of the building
as per drawings and technical description reports.

Following main items are listed as indication – no limitation - the scope of works:

- Dismantling and Demolition of existing building parts, including

 Removal of plaster on external walls
 Removal of floor, wall and ceiling layers
 Removal of layers from roof
 Removal of stone windowsills
 Demolition of walls
 Removal of existing windows and doors
 Dismantling and removal of water drainage system from roof (horizontal and
vertical)
 Dismantling and removal of water supply pipes with all fixtures (e.g. showers)
 Dismantling and removal of sewage system including all fixtures (e.g. toilets)
 Dismantling and removal of electrical and mechanical system
 Dismantling and removal of heat distribution system
- Thermal Insulation of floors, walls, roof
- Installation of new layers of floors
- Water drainage system around foundations
- Water proofing of external walls
- Water proofing of floors (ground floor and sanitary rooms)
- Plastering of ceilings and walls
- Waterproofing of roof
- Installation of windowsills
- Installation of new walls and new dry walls
- Installation of inner and outer doors and windows
- Installation of R/C lintels
- Construction of additional exits and emergency staircases
- Exchange of damaged bricks

2.1.2 Standards
All Standards mentioned herein shall be deemed to be part of the Contract. All references to such Standards
shall be to the latest edition or revision thereof unless otherwise stated. The Contractor shall apply all
standards, technical regulations laws etc. mentioned in the Bidding Documents.

The Civil Works shall comply as a minimum with International Standards ISO, EN or DIN Standards* named
as “I.S.”, with the respective Codes of Practice and Standards generally used for building refurbishment,

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 54
energy efficiency in “foreign countries”, adapted to the local conditions, shall be used as an alternative
subject to written approval by the Engineer.

Where no Standards are specified in the present Section or any other Section of the Contract, the above
defined EN or DIN shall apply.

Where there is conflict between this General Specification and the relevant DIN, the General Specification
shall take precedence. If not specifically stated, the following order of precedence shall apply:

1.) EC
2.) DIN
3.) UK
4.) Albania.

Materials supplied and work performed shall comply with these Standards and regulations as a minimum.
If manufacturers offer material to other Standards, the Standards shall be equal or superior to those
specified and full details of the difference shall be supplied to the Engineer if requested.

* ISO - International Standards Organization; EN - European Norm; DIN - German Standards

2.1.3 Climate
The Contractor shall be deemed to have considered all possible weather conditions when preparing his Bid
and his Programme of Works, and he will not be entitled to any additional payments whatsoever in respect
of any meteorological phenomenon although he may be granted extension(s) of time due to abnormal
weather conditions in accordance with the Contract.

The Contractor shall make suitable arrangements to protect the Works, temporary works, construction
plant, equipment and materials stored on site against the effects of the weather. The Contractor will
perform no work when in the opinion of the Engineer such work is liable to be affected by the weather.

2.1.4 Scaffolding
Any scaffolding required shall be designed and erected in accordance with the relevant standards. An
experienced and competent scaffolder shall carry out erection of scaffolding and it shall be of an
independent tied type. The Contractor shall ensure that all necessary adjustment is required to the
scaffolding to ensure its stability is made as the work proceeds. Care shall be taken that the load of any
debris collecting on a scaffold does not exceed the loading for the design. All measures necessary shall be
taken to prevent debris from being accidentally dislodged from the platform. Scaffolds shall at all times
during use be suitable for the purpose for which they are intended and shall comply with any local Authority
requirements. Where necessary, the scaffolding will be protected on the perimeter to roadways and
passageways should be taken precautions in order to make a surrounding of the object, and also the whole
scaffolding protection fixed by protecting netting in order to eliminate material swinging and including
required signal, illumination and the conditions of technical standards.

The scaffolding widths and decking widths must be suitable for the respective work (demolition, masonry
work, concrete work, painting work and installation work) For the roof area and the upper end, a roofer
safety catch is to be provided to prevent falls. The lower scaffolding level must be secured against

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 55
unauthorized access. Ladders must be able to be folded up outside working hours. Necessary stairways
must be protected from the outside.

Steel scaffolding shall be framed and braced, in accordance with local standards and regulations, including
transport supply, maintenance, assembly, anchorage, dismantling etc. To a maximum height of 12 m of
horizontal elements should have vertical balustrade, to a min. height 15 cm and protecting netting.

Modern modular heavy and light scaffolding with security systems (handrails and integrated staircases)
includes:

 tube-joint frames,
 adequate bracing elements,
 safety and security systems (handrails, integrated staircases, etc.),
 work platform and decking.

The complete system shall be certified and verified versus security, safety and stability according to all
applicable standards and in accordance with requested submittals.

2.2 Earthworks

2.2.1 General
Earthworks under this section include trench excavation and backfill where pipes are placed below ground
and excavation for structures such as concrete blocks, pipe supports, foundations for reinforced concrete
and site-formation. Everything contained in the Specification with regard to the execution of the
excavations, disposal of excavated material, etc. shall equally apply to the various types of soil unless
otherwise stated.

2.2.2 Sub-Soil Investigations

Where specified or in exceptional cases it might occur, that the Engineer instructs the Contractor to
investigate and take samples of the materials and water in and about the earthworks and structures.
Investigation will be done by trial pits. The precise location and method of investigation and sampling will
be instructed by the Engineer in each case. The Contractor shall employ staff experienced in site
investigation to undertake the site work.

Investigations shall be carried out in accordance with DIN 4420 and the corresponding codes or other
international accepted standards.

2.2.3 Site Clearance, preparatory work, and demolition work

[Link] Clearing of Site

The Contractor shall remove overburden and vegetation, fell trees, cut down hedges and bushes and grub
up roots, all as instructed by the Engineer. No material or trees shall be removed from the site without prior
approval being received from the Engineer. All rubbish and material unsuitable for re-use must be removed
from the site to an approved disposal area provided and paid for by the Contractor and all work that has
been disturbed must be made good.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 56
[Link] Felling trees
Where instructed by the Engineer, trees with a trunk exceeding 0.15 m diameter shall be uprooted and
holes shall be filled with approved material and well compacted.

[Link] Preparation of the Working Area

The Contractor shall prepare the working area such that the works can be carried out without any hindrance
to pedestrian or vehicular traffic.

Working area means in this context the area necessary for carrying out all works for the installation.

The Contractor shall check if the required permits are available for the construction of the working area.

Before starting work the Contractor shall determine all necessary rights of way. The Employer will liaise with
the relevant landowners to assist in establishing the necessary access arrangements.

The Contractor shall check with local authorities if explosive material is presumed along the route of the
pipeline. The Contractor is responsible for the finding and removing of these explosives. The Contractor
shall inform the Engineer of explosives found.

The Contractor shall take care of survey points. If survey points shall be removed the contractor should
reinstall the survey points on the original position.

The Contractor shall remove and store topsoil and humus outside the working area. Following completion
of the work this will be reinstated with surplus removed to tip if necessary.

The Contractor has to prepare the surface of the working area in a way that the equipment used for the
construction can manoeuvre. Where bad ground conditions are found it might be necessary to stabilise
the ground with geotextile and/or gravel or other suitable material.

After the pressure tests have been carried out successfully the re-cultivation of the working area shall take
place.

2.2.4 Excavation

[Link] Standards
The Contractor shall examine the Site to familiarize himself with the nature of the ground, excavation
methods to be applied and physical obstructions and conditions on Site that may affect his work and prices.
His rates shall allow for all operations and costs required and encountered when carrying out the Works in
accordance with the Contract. Claims due to lack of knowledge of site conditions will not be entertained.

The Contractor shall not execute any earthwork or excavation without giving the Engineer's prior approval
to the methods which he proposes to employ. He shall not thereafter modify such methods without the
Engineer's consent.

Prior to the commencement of any earthwork, excavation or asphalt cutting, the Contractor shall record
the actual condition of the surface of the working site and adjacent structures and buildings. The record
shall consist of a written description and photographic records and shall be submitted to the Engineer 14
days prior to the commencement of construction works. Such records shall be signed as true records by

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 57
the Contractor and the Engineer in order to avoid any discrepancies/differences at a later stage i.e. whilst
executing the reinstatement works.

The Contractor shall carry out works described in this Specification in accordance with the appropriate EN
and DIN Standards. The main Standards are, but are not limited by, the following:

DIN 4124 Excavation and trenches, slopes, breadths of working spaces, planking and strutting

DIN 18300 General technical code for earthworks

DIN 18303 General technical code for excavation lining

DIN 18305 Groundwater management

The Contractor may carry out the works or provide materials in accordance to local or other international
Standards, provided their requirements are superior or equivalent to the quality described by the Standards
cited in the Specifications. It is up to the Contractor to prove superiority / equivalency of other Standards.

Excavation pits must be protected against collapse and earth collapse in accordance with local regulations
and international standards. The respective shoring and bracing work are the responsibility of the
contractor. Should dewatering become necessary, an appropriate pump sump shall be installed and
operated in the excavation pit area. The edges of the pit shall be protected when it rains and, if necessary,
covered. The relevant accident prevention regulations must be observed.

[Link] Classification of Excavation

"Excavation" shall for the purpose of the Contract be deemed to refer to the excavation of all the materials
of whatever geological formation, quality, consistency, or description as classified in DIN 18300, clause 2.

Excavation shall be carried out neatly to the lines and levels which are specified on the Drawings or as
instructed by the Engineer.

Excess excavation beyond the specified lines and levels shall be limited to an absolute minimum to avoid
disturbances of surrounding spaces.

The Contractor shall take all possible precautions to prevent slips in excavations and embankments and to
protect and support structures, which may be endangered.

Any excess excavation, over-break or slip beyond the limits of the specified excavation shall be removed
and made good at the Contractor's expense.

Excavation shall be carried out by hand if excavation by mechanical means is not reasonably practicable or
may endanger or damage structures or property.

Excavated material shall, if in the opinion of the Engineer it is suitable and required for use at the Site, be
stockpiled, as well returned for backfill activities or, if possible, immediately placed or shall, if not so suitable
or required, be removed from the Site.

Rock excavation (for rock classification DIN 18300, class 6 and 7 shall apply):

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 58
The word "rock", wherever used as the name of an excavated material to be excavated, shall mean only
boulders and pieces of concrete or masonry exceeding 0.5 m3 in volume, or solid ledge material which, in
the opinion of the Engineer, requires, for its removal, drilling and blasting, wedging, sledging, barring, or
breaking up with a power-operated tool.

Table 2-1: Rock excavation - Soil & Rock Classification as per DIN 18 300, Clause 2

Class Identification Description

1 Topsoil  Topsoil is the top layer of the soil formation, which contains beside inorganic matter
(grit, sand, silt, poor clay) also humus and micro-organism
2 Floatable Soil  Soil of liquid to paste consistence with bonded water
3 Easily  Non-binding to light binding soil, like sand, grit, sand/grit mixture with up to 15%
detachable Soil by weight of paste/clay (granulometric gradation of < 0.06 mm) and with stones of
max. 30% by weight from > 63 mm grain size up to 0.01 m3 volume **)
 Organic soil with low water content (hard peat, turf for instance)
4 Medium  Mixture of sand, grit, paste and clay with more than 15% by weight of grain size <
heavily 0.06 mm
detachable Soil  Binding types of soil with light to medium heavy plasticity which are soft to hard
depending on the water content with max. 30% by weight of stones with grain size
> 63 mm up to 0.01 m3 volume **)
5 Heavily  Type of soil as per class 3 and 4, but with more than 30% by weight of stones with
detachable Soil > 63 mm grain size up to 0.01 m3 volume **)
 Non-binding and binding types of soil with max. 30% by weight of stones with >
0.01 m3 up to 0.1 m3 volume **)
 Distinct plasticity clay which can be hard to soft depending on the water content
6 Easily  Type of rocks with internal mineral bonding, but heavily cracked and of brittle,
detachable crumbly, salty condition, decomposed rock as well as similar compacted non-
Rock and binding and binding soil
similar type of  Non-binding and binding types of soil with more than 30% by weight stones of
Soil over 0.01 m3 up to 0.1 m3 volume **)
7 Heavily  Types of rock with strong internal mineral bonding with a high grade of structural
detachable stability and with minor cracks or decomposition only
type of Rock  Compacted non decomposed clay slate, conglomerate layer, slag or cinder dump
from metallurgical plants or similar
 Stones with size of > 0.1 m3 volume **)

NOTE:
*) above is translated from German to English and in case of any dispute the German version shall prevail
**) 0.01 m3 volume is equal to a sphere with  0.30 m diameter
0.10 m3 volume is equal to a sphere with  0.60 m diameter
***) See also
DIN 18 196 Soil Classification for Civil Engineering Purposes
DIN 4022, part 1 Classification and Description of Soil and Rock

Rock class 6 wherever used means material to be excavated as boulders, rock debris, detritus and pieces
of concrete or masonry or other material exceeding 0.30 cubic meter in volume, or solid ledge material
which, in the opinion of the Engineer, requires, for its removal, wedging, sledge, barring, or breaking up
with a power-operated tool.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 59
Rock class 7 wherever used means material to be excavated as hard solid bedrock material which, in the
opinion of the Engineer, requires for its removal special drilling, blasting, cutting, wedging and breaking
up with heavy duty power tools.

No soft or disintegrated material which can be removed with a hand pick or power-operated excavator or
shovel, no loose, shaken, or previously blasted material or broken stone in material fillings or elsewhere,
and no material exterior to the maximum limits of measurement allowed, which may fall into the excavation,
will be measured or allowed as " rock material".

Excess Rock Excavation: If rock is excavated beyond the limits of payment indicated on the drawings,
specified, or authorized in writing by the Engineer, the excess excavation, whether resulting from over-
breakage or other causes, shall be backfilled, by and at the expense of the Contractor.

[Link] Right of Way

Right of Way shall be the area(s) allocated to the Contractor to enable execution of the Works in accordance
with the Contract. Due to physical, statutory or other special conditions the working width of Right of Way
may be restricted (including restricted access to working sites). The Contractor is deemed to have included
in his Contract Price all costs encountered for complying with such restrictions.

Should the Contractor require areas outside the allocated Right of Way he may, with the prior agreement
of the Engineer, negotiate these on his own behalf and shall be responsible for all costs involved and for
the reinstatement after completion of the Permanent Works.

Prior to commencement of the Works the Contractor shall record on drawings the location and dimension
of drainage channels, structures, walls, fences etc., lying within an area of 20 meters measured from the
outer edge of structures to be executed. These drawings together with a written description of the
condition of such structures shall be submitted in duplicate to the Engineer 14 days before start of
construction works (excavation).

Before commencement of construction the Contractor shall carefully strip the topsoil from any agricultural
land, garden and the like to the depth as instructed by the Engineer and over the entire working width.
Topsoil shall be deposited separately from other excavated material for reuse. After completion of works
and before placing topsoil, the entire area affected by the Contractor's activities shall be scarified to a
depth of 450 mm and shall be made up to the required level to receive topsoil.

All fences, walls, structures, buildings, etc. affected by the Contractor's work shall be reinstated to the
satisfaction of the owner and the Engineer.

Trees within the Right of Way may be cut down only after having received the owners and the Engineer's
permission. Any damage to trees, whether accidental or otherwise, shall be reported to the Engineer.

The Taking-Over Certificate for any part of works will only be issued if the Contractor submits, together
with his application and where applicable, a written statement by the owner confirming that reinstatement
of land, garden, etc. has been carried out to the owner's satisfaction.

[Link] Location and Protection of Underground Utilities

The Contractor shall be responsible for locating and protecting all underground structures and utilities
including contacting/coordination with the relevant organisations/Authorities. He shall proceed with

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 60
caution in all excavation so that the exact location of underground structures and utilities, either known or
unknown, may be determined and he shall be held responsible and pay for the repair without additional
payment in such structures when broken or otherwise damaged due to careless executed works.

When removal, relocation or reconstruction of any cables, pipes or any other services whatsoever is
necessary for the pursuit of the Contract, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing. Unless covered
by separate item in the Bill of Quantities, all work in connection with the removal or resetting of these or
any services shall be carried out by the Contractor under the supervision of the Engineer or concerned
authorities.

[Link] Explosives and Blasting

The Contractor shall provide a special store for explosives in accordance with existing regulations.
Transporting and storing of explosives and blasting shall also be in accordance with the Laws regulating
their use.

The Contractor shall be allowed to use explosives only with the express permission of the Engineer. After
having obtained the said permission, all blasting shall be done only by properly trained and qualified
workmen under the supervision of an experienced foreman, who shall be in possession of an official and
authenticated current blasting certificate.

The greatest care shall be taken when blasting to protect persons, the works and any other property. No
blasting shall be done within 10m of any existing structure.

The last 15 cm of rock above foundation level shall be removed by use of power tools or by hand.

The rates for excavation in rock shall include supplying, hauling and storing explosives, drilling holes, and
required materials for blasting including any necessary work.

[Link] General and Foundation Excavation

Everything contained in this clause with regard to the execution of excavations, disposal of excavated
material etc. shall apply to all material, unless otherwise stated.

All excavations shall be carried out to the lines and limits shown on the excavation plan and other drawings
or defined in the Specification. Said lines and limits may be amended by the Engineer to suit soil and other
conditions encountered during actual excavation and field inspection. When excavating in any material
other than rock for formation levels under any structure, the last 15cm of excavation shall be taken out not
more than 24 hours before placing of foundations or fill. The bottoms of excavations shall be levelled and
trimmed to full width to the required lines and levels and where under foundations shall be well watered
and rammed before placing of concrete.

[Link] Preparation of Foundation

The Contractor shall prepare the areas of excavations against which concrete is to be placed or on which
pipes are to be laid, in a manner suitable for forming a foundation. Foundations in earth upon which
concrete is to be placed shall be finished accurately to the dimensions shown on the Drawings or prescribed
by the Engineer, brought to proper moisture content by sprinkling as required, and thoroughly compacted
with suitable equipment. No boulders shall be left projecting within the minimum excavation lines shown
on the Drawing.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 61
Foundations for concrete on bedrock shall be trimmed to the prescribed lines, thoroughly cleaned of mud
and debris, and moistened in advance of placing concrete. All foundation surfaces shall be free from pools
of water at the time of placing concrete. Wherever any excavation in earth has been made below grade
without the Engineer's instructions, it shall be refilled as specified in Clause 2.2.5 hereof at the Contractor's
expense.

[Link] Disposal of Excavated Material

Excavated material which is not required or unsuitable for re-use in the Works shall be disposed of as
instructed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall give the Engineer adequate notice of his intention to spoil.
Material instructed to be disposed shall remain the property of the Employer and shall be deposited at
places designated by the related Authorities.

Subject to any specific requirements of the Contract, the disposal of excavated material within the Site shall
be at the Contractor's discretion but shall be so arranged as to be acceptable to the Engineer and to suit
the overall requirements for the construction of the Works. The Contractor shall ensure that no excavated
material which is suitable for and is required for re-use in the Works is disposed of outside the Site.

The term "excavation" shall be deemed to include for disposing of excavated material in any of the
following ways:

• backfilling to excavation and completed structures and trench excavation using suitable excavated
material and including placing in temporary spoil tips and any double handling required (piling at
separate location);
• transporting selected excavated material to locations within the site where embankments are to be
constructed or where is filling around structures is specified to be constructed as embankment including
tipping ready for spreading and compacting;
• disposal of surplus excavated material outside the Site;
• topsoil and excavated material suitable for grassing shall be deposited in temporary separate spoil tips
within the Site;
• unsuitable material shall be disposed of as approved by the Engineer.
[Link] Excavation Pipe Trench
Trench excavations shall be carried out in accordance with EN 1610, DIN 4124 (October 2002) and DIN
18303.

If instructed by the Engineer, for excavations in case of soil of bad quality or heavy loads next to the trench,
the Contractor shall submit the structural design including the relevant design calculations of the sheeting
system to the Engineer for approval.

The inclination of the side walls of the trench shall be adjusted to the soil conditions if the sides deeper
than 1.25 m are not protected by sheeting in accordance with international accepted standards.

Wherever necessary soil shall be adequately sheeted and braced. Where sheeting and bracing are used,
the net trench width after sheeting shall not be less than that specified in the related drawings. As backfill
is placed and if sheeting is to be withdrawn, it shall be withdrawn in increments of not more than 30 cm
and the void left by the withdrawn sheeting shall be filled and compacted. If, despite such precautions, or
by reason of their neglect, any portions of the bottoms, sides or ends shall give way or be excavated without
instructions from the Engineer, the Contractor shall at his expense excavate and remove all the ground

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 62
thereby disturbed and make it good, with well compaction fill or in such class of concrete as may be
instructed by the Engineer.

If applicable with the procedure of the pipe installation trenches shall have vertical sides but where it is
approved by the Engineer in writing the Contractor may excavate trenches having vertical sides below and
sloping sides above the top of the pipe. The cost of sloping sides shall be borne by the Contractor.
Permission to slope sides of excavation shall not be granted in streets, paved areas and roads.

Before the excavation the pipe route axis shall be set out.

No pipe shall be laid in a trench until the section of trench in which the pipe is to be laid has been approved
by the Engineer. Pipe trenches shall be excavated to the lines and levels shown on the drawings or as
instructed by the Engineer but shall normally not be laid with less than 100 cm of cover from top of pipe
to ground level.

The trench bottom shall provide a regular foundation for the pipes.

The width of the trenches shall be sufficient to permit the pipes to be laid and jointed properly and to place
and compact the backfill as specified. Trench excavations for pipes and interconnections shall be open-cut
trenches with minimum width as defined in EN 1610 if not otherwise specified in the specifications or
drawings.

The absolute minimum width of a pipe trench shall be 50 cm.

Where pipes are welded outside the trench, the smallest width of the pipe trench shall be 60 cm larger
than the pipe diameter. For socketed pipes the trench shall have the following dimensions:

DN 200 to DN 700: DN + 0.6m

DN 700 to DN 1400: DN + 0.8m

above DN 1400:DN + 1.1m

The Engineer may approve the use of a wider trench in particular circumstances.

Minimum excavation depth is established considering the minimum depths of cover allowed.

Strong sight rails shall be fixed and maintained at each change of gradient and at as many intermediate
points as may be necessary. On the rails shall be marked the centre line and the level to which the pipe is
to be laid, such rails being not more than 35m apart. Other equipment like LASER instruments may also be
used. This equipment needs the approval of the engineer.

All measuring equipment shall have been controlled by an approved institute or manufacturer not less than
1 year before use on the contract.

The trench bottom shall be even and smooth so as to provide a proper support for the pipe over its entire
length, and shall be free from stones, lumps, roots and other hard objects that may injure the pipe or
coating. Holes shall be dug in the trench bottom to accommodate couplings so as to ensure continuous
contact between the trench bottom and the pipe between coupling holes.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 63
Where the bottom of the trench is of such a nature that it is likely in the opinion of the Engineer to cause
damage to the pipe or coating or an unsuitable material is encountered which cannot support the pipe,
the Contractor shall excavate the trench to an additional depth below the required depth and shall refill to
required level with suitable material.

Where pipes are laid on curves of large radius the trench shall, be widened so as to ensure that no part of
the pipe shall be nearer to the sides of the trench than the clearance required for by handling.

The Contractor shall provide bridges over the pipe trenches where necessary or instructed by the Engineer.

Where necessary (crossing of cables, pipes, etc.) the excavation has to be carried out by hand.

Where excavated material is to be used for backfilling, the Engineer may instruct its storage in separate
stockpiles (may be at separate location); Topsoil and humus shall always be stored separately from other
material.

For the connection welding of the pipe sections the excavation shall be widened in order to allow the
welding, the control of the welding and the insulation of the weld without any danger for the workers. The
minimum distance from the pipe to the bottom and to the walls of the trench shall be 60cm.

Big boulders in the trench shall be removed or destroyed by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall keep the bottom of the pipe trench dry, e.g. by pumping. Groundwater shall be
discharged into to the nearest outfall and not into the wastewater system. Uncontrolled discharge onto
agricultural land is not permitted.

The prices quoted for trench excavation shall be fully inclusive and contain (except when separate items
are included in the Bill of Quantities) all incidentals works as:

• excavation of any type of soils, whether this excavation has to be made by hand or by machine
• incidental excavation, if instructed by the Engineer, and making good the same;
• demolition of existing surfaces and underground structures, where required;
• location, maintaining and reinstatement of existing services, where required;
• incidental excavation for joint holes, fittings, thrust blocks, manholes, encasements etc.;
• sheeting and piling of trenches, bracing and protection of slopes;
• levelling, trimming and consolidating the bottom of the trench;
• keeping the excavation free from surface and ground water and waste water, and maintenance of flow
during construction;
• any excess excavation to accommodate temporary supports and all working space to carry out the work;
• disposal of excavated material whether it shall be reused for backfilling or removed as surplus material
including formation of all temporary spoil heaps (may be at separate location) and all double handling
necessary;
• all additional measures necessary to ensure that the excavation is made to the correct line and level and
maintained in a safe and workmanlike manner.
[Link] Existing Services
Notwithstanding any relevant information furnished by the Employer or the Engineer or any public
authority, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for ascertaining from his own inspection of the Site

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 64
and from the respective supply authorities and other public or private bodies the position of all pipes and
cables whether underground or overhead, within or near the Site.

Where excavation is carried out close to or across or below the existing line of sewers, pipes, cables or
other services, the Contractor shall, where required, provide temporary supports or slings and where such
sewers, pipes, cables or other services are damaged the Contractor shall arrange for and pay any repair
works, replacement or costs resulting from such damages.

Where in the opinion of the Engineer construction of the Works cannot be reasonably carried out unless
the sewer, pipe, cable, other service is permanently severed or permanently diverted or permanently
supported, he will instruct the Contractor to provide all necessary facilities and access for the Government
Department or public utility company without additional cost.

[Link] Excavation to be Kept Free from Water

The Contractor shall keep the excavation whether above or below the groundwater table, at all times, free
from flooding by storm water, percolating water, subsoil water, sewage, irrigation water or sewage effluent
by pumping, bailing or other means.

The Contractor shall take all precautions to avoid undermining any part of the Works or other properties
by pumping or else but should undermining occur he shall make good same to the satisfaction of the
Engineer at the Contractor's expense.

In all cases where permission to use existing water courses, sewers, pipes for the discharge of liquids has
been granted, it will be on the condition that the Contractor cleans out such facilities after completion of
the Works at the respective Site.

[Link] Measurement of Excavations

After levelling and clearing the site under the Works, the Contractor shall take and record levels of any such
part, in the manner specified or as agreed by the Engineer. Such levels, when agreed by the Engineer, are
the basis for measurement. The Contractor shall also take and record such other levels and dimensions as
are necessary during the process of excavation.

Trench excavation will be measured net, whereby the minimum width of trenches as stated in this
Specification, the depth to the specified trench bottom (bottom of lower bedding zone), and the length of
Services laid (linear metres run as specified for pipe laying) shall be taken as payment limits.

The Contractor shall make his own allowances for excess excavations (e.g. due to sheeting system).

The preparation of sites and pipeline route including clearing, demolishing and removal of existing surfaces
and pavements, stripping of topsoil and demolition works, demolition and removal of existing pipes no
longer in use, as well as the reestablishment of the surfaces will be measured and quoted under separate
items. Furthermore, the trench sheeting, disposal of ground water from trenches, protection of existing
Services will be measured and paid for under separate items.

The excavation in rock material etc. shall be measured as extra over the general excavation rates.

The stated quantities of:

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 65
• suitable excavation material and
• suitable exchange material
are rough estimates.

It is the Contractor’s responsibility to assess for his purposes the amount / percentage of excavated material
not being suitable for backfill and compaction and to be replaced.

[Link] Offensive Matter

Any offensive matter found in the excavation shall be dealt immediately by the Contractor at his own
expense. He shall remove, disinfect with chloride of lime or other strong disinfectant and cart away such
matter to an approved site for burial or otherwise completely dispose of as necessary. Other precautions
may be detailed by the Engineer at places designated by the related Authorities.

[Link] Hardcore
Hardcore shall be graded hard limestone or other hard stone from an approved quarry, closely packed with
all interstices filled in.

When required the top surface shall be finished to correct levels, irregularities broken off and a smooth
surface shall be prepared to receive blinding, building paper or the like.

[Link] Trial holes

Trial holes are the responsibility of the Contractor for identifying the location of existing utilities.

2.2.5 Backfilling

[Link] General
All excavations shall be backfilled to the level of the original ground surfaces, unless otherwise shown on
the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer, and in accordance with the requirements of the Specification.
The material used for backfilling, the amount thereof, and the manner of depositing and compacting shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer, but the Contractor will be held responsible for any displacement
of pipe or other structures, any damage to their surfaces, or any instability of pipes and structures caused
by the improper depositing of backfill materials.

Pipe surround and structures of concrete shall be backfilled as soon as the concrete has attained sufficient
strength, as determined by the Engineer, to sustain the load imposed.

[Link] Backfilling Material

Excavation shall be carried out in such a manner so that material which is unsuitable for backfilling and
compaction shall be excavated separately and removed from the site. Examples of unsuitable material for
backfilling are as follows:

• Materials from swamps, marshes and bogs;

• Vegetable matter, timber or similar material liable to decomposition;
• Materials susceptible to spontaneous combustion;
• Clay or earth having excess liquid content; and
• Rock over 100 mm in any dimension.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 66
Material for backfilling shall be deposited and compacted in layers of a maximum thickness of 300 mm and
shall be appropriate to the compaction plant used. (Thickness measured prior to compaction.) Compaction
shall be so carried out to ensure a value of 95 % Proctor density is achieved. The Contractor shall ensure
that sufficient water is provided at all times to adequately moisten the backfill during compaction.

Supports to the excavation shall be carefully removed as the filling proceeds, but the removal of such
supports shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the safety and stability of the Works.

2.2.6 Pipe bedding and backfilling of trenches

[Link] General
This section covers the methods of construction for pipes and bedding of both rigid and flexibly jointed
pipes together with methods of backfilling trenches. It applies to both water and sewer pipelines, and for
both water and sewer pipelines to both gravity and pumping or force mains.

[Link] Bottoming of Trenches

Trenches shall be excavated to the levels necessary to allow the specified depth of bedding to be laid and
care must be taken to avoid deterioration of the trench bottom prior to and during the construction. Bill
rates for the excavation are to include for the additional excavation and for the removal of the excavated
material. The preparation of the trench bottom or surface of the bed shall be completed for at least one
full pipe length in advance of the pipe laying, except where in exceptional circumstances another
arrangement is approved.

Soft areas below formation level shall, upon the instructions of the Engineer, be excavated out to levels as
instructed and the material disposed of. The formation level of the excavation shall be restored; using an
approved fill compacted in layers not exceeding 300 mm, prior to continuing with laying the bedding as
specified.

Where localized hard spots are encountered below formation level, the material shall, upon the instructions
of the Engineer, be excavated out to levels as instructed and the material disposed of and the formation
level restored.

[Link] Geotextile (fabric filter)

For certain sections, if instructed by the Engineer, the whole embedment zone of the pipe will be wrapped
with a geotextile. The purpose of the geotextile is to avoid de-mixing of the bedding material and to
strengthen the embedment zone. The effect will be no displacement of the embedded pipes. The geotextile
shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor.

The geotextile shall be installed before the bedding material is filled into the trench. In case of sheeted
trench, at the same time the bedding material is filled in, the timbering has to be removed so that no free
space remains between the geotextile and the surrounding soil.

The geotextile shall have an overlapping of 50 cm on the top side. Also, in horizontal direction an
overlapping of 50 cm has to be applied.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 67
[Link] Bedding Materials

[Link].1 Concrete Bedding

Where required, this bedding shall consist of concrete class C15 to the dimensions shown on the Drawings
or as instructed by the Engineer.

[Link].2 Granular Bedding

The material shall preferably be clean hard coarse sand, or broken stone or gravel. Limestone shall not be
used. Broken stone or gravel shall pass a 5 mm and shall be retained on a 0.5 mm sieve. The material shall
be readily compactable. Locally excavated material shall be graded to conform to the above requirements.
The proposed material shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

[Link] Construction Procedure – Granular Bedding and Cover

Sand or granular bedding for the pipes shall be as follows:

For HDPE water pipelines:

• Under: shall have a minimum thickness of 100 mm.

• Sides: shall be for the full width of the trench.
• Cover; shall be a minimum thickness of 150 mm.
For steel water pipelines:

• Under: shall have a minimum thickness of 100 mm.

• Sides: shall be for the full width of the trench.
• Cover; shall be a minimum thickness of 150 mm.
For gravity sewer pipelines:

• Under: shall have a minimum thickness of 150 mm.

• Sides: shall be for the full width of the trench.
• Cover; shall be a minimum thickness of 300 mm.
For force main pipelines:

• Under: shall have a minimum thickness of 100 mm.

• Sides: shall be for the full width of the trench.
• Cover; shall be a minimum thickness of 150 mm.
The bedding shall be evenly spread and carefully compacted up to the level of the underside of the pipe
barrel and the surface worked to the correct gradient.

After laying the pipe the bedding shall be brought up evenly on each side of the pipe in carefully
compacted layers, not exceeding 300 mm thickness, to the required level. Care shall be taken to ensure
that the bedding is compacted under and along the sides of the pipe and laterally to the undisturbed sides
of the trench.

The bedding for pipes shall be brought up to the horizontal diameter of the pipe, compacted and finished
level to the full width of the trench prior to placing the specified cover and backfill.

Before bedding trench supports shall be withdrawn in steps to minimize disturbance of the bedding
material.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 68
[Link] Backfilling of Trench before Tests – Socketed Pipes
The trench, with the exception of the pipe joints, shall be refilled with selected approved material free from
stones, from the excavation, as specified in the Specifications and/or Drawings, hand-punned into place
under and around the pipe and up to 300 mm above the top of the pipe in layers of 10 cm after compaction.
Subsequent refilling shall be placed and consolidated in 300 mm layers after compaction and carried up to
the level necessary to allow for the temporary restoration of road and path surfaces, and also for hard core
(if and where instructed) on roads or to such level as will leave the requisite space for the topsoil, tarmac
etc. to be reinstated as instructed by the Engineer.

[Link] Backfilling of Trench after Tests – Socketed Pipes

On completion of pressure and leakage tests on pressure mains, exposed couplings, joints and manholes
shall be covered and backfilled with approved selected backfill placed above the top of the pipe and
couplings, in accordance with the requirements of the Specification.

The balance of backfill shall not contain stones of more than 15 cm in their largest dimension, and the
backfill mixture shall not contain more than 25 percent stones. The Contractor shall not permit excavation
to be used for disposal of refuse.

Trenches in the right-of-way of a road shall be backfilled with selected material placed in layers not
exceeding 300 mm in thickness after compaction, wetted and compacted to a density of not less than 90
percent of the maximum dry density at optimum moisture content as determined in accordance with the
Standard Proctor Density (SPD) test. Trenches not in a right-of-way may be backfilled without tamping.
Any deficiency in the quantity of material for backfilling the trenches shall be supplied by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall at his own expense make good any settlement of the trench backfill occurring after
backfilling and until the expiry of the Defects Notification Period.

On no account shall any excavated material be bulldozed back when backfilling trenches in roads and no
such backfilling shall be carried out unless in the opinion of the Engineer sufficient mechanical rammers
are in operation on that portion of the work. In no case shall any soft material be used in filling any part of
any trench within a road reservation.

[Link] Backfilling of Joints and Manholes before Tests – Socketed Pipes

Normally, joints on sewer and pressure mains will be left exposed during testing of pipelines. However, the
Engineer may at any time instruct the Contractor to proceed with the complete backfilling of the trench
before testing, where the pipeline is laid in the right-of-way of a road, in built-up areas and wherever for
any other reason the pipe trench cannot be left open until after testing. In such cases the positions of all
joints shall be clearly marked by the Contractor outside of the trench so that they can easily be located for
the purpose of repair if and when required. The cost of this work shall be included in the rate for excavation.

The working space outside manholes shall not be backfilled before testing has been successfully
completed. However, the Engineer may at any time instruct the Contractor to proceed with the complete
backfilling before testing. In such case re-excavation of the manhole is necessary if sealing cannot be done
from inside the manhole.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 69
[Link] Backfilling of Pipe Trenches – Welded Pipes
Before filling take place, the pipeline shall be surveyed. The corrosion insulation shall be checked. All
impurities like stones, knots, as well as trench protections shall be removed before starting refilling. Refilling
is not allowed without the approval of the engineer.

The backfilling of the pipe trench shall be carried out with suitable material to a height of 300 mm above
the top of the barrel of the pipe. The covering of the pipeline shall take place immediately after placing of
the pipeline in order to avoid temperature differences. Usually, the covering shall take place within 12
hours if the air temperature is above 30°C or within 24 hours if the air temperature is below 30°C.

Suitable material for the first filling has a maximum grain size of 60 mm or as otherwise specified in standard
drawings. Material with sharp edges may not be used. For the filling of the rest of the trench no boulders
shall be used. In order to compensate settlement of the ground, the filling shall be left slightly higher than
the original ground level.

The filling shall be compacted particularly carefully in any of the following cases:

• Backfilling behind vertical bends

• Horizontal bends: between side wall of the trench and outer side of the bend
• Crossing of roads or other traffic areas
• In areas liable to flooding
• If the cover of the pipe is increased in order to avoid uplifting of the pipes
• Crossing with underground installations

The entire filling shall be done in layers. The compaction equipment and the thickness of the layers are
subject to the approval of the engineer.

In areas with big slopes where the filling material might be eroded special measures shall be adopted, e.g.
barriers of sand bags, where instructed. Such barriers shall be constructed with material which will not rot.

The surplus of the excavated material shall be placed in an area specified by the Engineer.

[Link] Backfilling around Manholes

After successful testing of the manhole the space between the walls and the excavation shall be backfilled
with compacted material. Such backfill shall be placed in layers of 300 mm measured before compaction,
wetted if necessary to optimum moisture and compacted to the density of the surrounding natural soil.

[Link] Imported Filling

In cases where the Contractor excavates in rock or other material unsuitable for backfilling and where there
are not sufficient soft material specific for backfilling he shall transport suitable material from other parts
of the work or from borrow pits for a distance not exceeding 10 km.

[Link] Disposal of Surplus Materials

The Contractor shall immediately upon completion of backfilling load up and cart away all surplus
excavated material to temporary dumps if required for subsequent use or to permanent spoil heaps and
the Contractor shall make his own arrangements for sites for tipping the spoil.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 70
2.2.7 Restoration and Clean-up

[Link] General Requirements

The Contractor shall restore or replace all removed or damaged curbing, sidewalk paving, gutters,
shrubbery, fences, sod, and other disturbed surfaces or structures in a condition equal to that before the
work began, to the satisfaction of the Engineer and as specified in the following clauses and shall furnish
all labour and material incidental thereto. In restoring paved surfaces, new pavement shall be laid, except
that granite paving blocks and sound bricks, flagstones and asphalt paving blocks may be re-used. No
permanent surfacing shall be placed within 30 days after the backfilling has been completed, except by
instruction of the Engineer.

[Link] Surface Restoration other than of Public Roads and Footpaths

The Contractor shall carefully replace all surface material and maintain all surfaces of private roads, paths,
fields, gardens, open spaces etc. and make good any subsidence and defects to the satisfaction of the
owner or occupier until the end of the Defects Notification Period

Receipts shall be obtained from the property owners or tenants that the reinstatement has been carried
out to their satisfaction. The Performance Certificate will not be issued until these have been submitted to
the Engineer.

2.2.8 Footways - Reinstatement

The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in his rates for the reinstatement of both sides of the
roadways and both footpaths (if any) required as a result of damage occurring as a result of the temporary
works.

Surface to be similar to that already in place and to approval of the competent Authority.

2.2.9 Topsoil
Where topsoil is obtained from the strip spoil heaps deposited on the site, it shall only be used after
sufficient time has elapsed to make the soil suitable for re-use, and with the prior permission and approval
of the Engineer.

Where soil is to be obtained from outside sources, a sample load must be delivered, and the Engineer's
approval obtained before any further deliveries are made.

All weeds, stones and other unsuitable matter must be removed before any soil is seeded.

2.2.10 Site Formation

Site formation shall consist of bringing the areas of the various sites to the required levels indicated on
drawings, or instructed by the Engineer, by excavation or fill.

The surfaces of site excavation shall be finished and levelled to the exact required lines and slopes as shown
on the drawings and as instructed.

Where required, the site areas shall be brought up to the required levels by well compacted selected
material obtained from required excavations or elsewhere as instructed by the Engineer. Areas on which

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 71
such fill is to be placed shall be stripped of productive soil to a depth not exceeding 30cm and the filling
material shall be spread in layers not exceeding 15cm in thickness, watered as required, compacted by the
use of approved rollers or hand operated mechanical tampers, and finished to the drawings or as instructed
by the Engineer.

2.2.11 Testing of Earth Works

[Link] General
The Contractor shall provide all equipment and materials necessary for collecting samples and carry out
field laboratory tests on materials for earthworks. Laboratory equipment shall be housed in a suitable
building on site which shall also incorporate space for the storage of field test equipment.

[Link] Main Tests and Standards

The Contractor shall carry out all tests in accordance with ZTVE-STB 94 [Zusätzliche Technische
Vertragsbedingungen und Richtlinien für Erdarbeiten im Straßenbau, Ausgabe 1994; Forschungsgesellschaft
für Straßen- und Verkehrswesen e.V. (FGSV)] or equivalent international Standards. For the various tests the
following DIN Standards are valid:

DIN 18121 Moisture Test

DIN 18122 Consistency Test
DIN 18123 Grading Tests
DIN 18124 Density Test (solid volume without voids)
DIN 18125 Density Test for Soils (including voids)
DIN 18127 Proctor Test
DIN 18134 Loading Test

[Link] Tests on compaction

The compaction, as specified hereunder or on the standard drawings, will be checked by “Penetration and
Dynamic Test” on certain spots as defined by the Engineer, but minimum every 100 m for each layer of
backfill. The tests shall be performed only in the presence of the Engineer. A written protocol shall be
compiled by the Contractor for each test. In the event a test fails / the compaction does not reach the
required density, the Contractor shall perform an additional test at his own expense.

In the event the compaction does not reach the required density the backfill shall be removed and replaced
by the Contractor at his own expense. The section where the backfill is to be re-excavated shall be defined
by the Engineer.

2.3 Demolition works

2.3.1 Method of demolition

The contractors proposed method of demolition would be such that where part of the structure is to
remain, the method adopted for removal must ensure that no damage or weakening of the remaining
structure occurs. The contractor shall take adequate precautions to ensure the stability of that part which
remains. The method employed shall be subjected to the Engineers approval. Where demolition work
cannot be done safely from a part of the structure, a suitable working platform must be used. The structure

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 72
shall generally be demolished in reverse order to that of construction. Steel and reinforced concrete
structural members shall be lowered to the ground or be cut into lengths appropriate to the weight and
size of member before being allowed to fall. Debris shall be allowed to fall freely only where there is no
danger of damages occurring to the retained structures. When building demolition or its elements cannot
be done without problems divided from structure part, another appropriate working method shall be used.
Steel elements and concrete structures strengthened will be put on the ground or will be cut horizontally,
due to wideness and measurements in order not to swing down. Wood elements can be swing from
upstairs, only when they do not represent danger for the other part of the structure. When the elements
are demolished, should be taken precautions in order not to risk the other constructive holding elements
and to do not damage the other elements. Generally, demolition work shall commence by removing as
much dead load as possible without interfering with the main structural members. Temporary works shall
be designed to carry the required loads under the most severe conditions. Sections to be demolished shall
be supported by suitable lifting equipment then cut and lowered to the ground under control.

The different materials and waste accrued during dismantling and demolition shall be separately collected
and stored at containers at the site in order to be brought at recycling facilities. The contractor shall provide
a method statement for demolition and recycling/ disposal process, which shall be subject of approval
from the Engineer.

2.3.2 Demolition of Civil Buildings Elements

The demolition of civil building elements shall be carried out according to the Instructions given by the
Engineer and in line with the design drawings.

The following elements shall be partly uninstalled and disposed of:

- Damaged plaster on external walls

- Removal of plaster and painting on interior walls and ceilings
- Removal of stone windowsills and metal bars
- Removal of floor layers
- Removal of existing windows and doors
- Removal of all layers from the roof

The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer about any possible reuse of materials prior disposal.

The contractor shall propose and take appropriate measures to avoid any damage to the building through
external influences (Sunshine, Rain etc.) during and after demolition. He shall clearly describe in a
methodology how he intends to mitigate and avoid any damage to the remaining structural skeleton.

2.3.3 Demolition of sanitary installations

All existing sanitary installations such as water supply, wastewater as well as rainwater drainage from the
roof shall be uninstalled and disposed of.

Utmost care shall be taken in to separate the different materials to facilitate proper recycling (method to
be described in method statement)

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 73
2.3.4 Demolition and Dismantling of Electrical and Mechanical Equipment
All existing electrical and mechanical equipment shall be uninstalled and disposed of.

Utmost care shall be taken in to separate the different materials to facilitate proper recycling (method to
be described in method statement)

2.3.5 Existing utilities and temporary installations

The Contractor shall provide all necessary works and installations for the temporary or permanent
decommissioning of the existing utilities from the buildings. Those include

- Water supply
- Wastewater network
- Rainwater drainage system
- Electrical power supply system

The Contractor shall provide any equipment and technical appliances that are necessary in order to not
any harm to the existing public or private systems.

After completion of the works and reconnection of the buildings to the different utilities, he shall make
good any damages or changes to the existing system as per the condition of the system prior to the works.
This shall be done to the satisfaction of the utility operator/ owner.

2.4 Concrete Works

2.4.1 General
The concrete shall, except where otherwise described in the Contract, be produced in accordance with the
relevant provisions of

• EC2 / DIN ENV 206. Concrete - specification, properties, production and conformity
• DIN EN 1992
• DIN 1048 Quality tests of concrete;
• DIN 1084 Quality control of concrete;
• DIN 1164 Cement;
• DIN 4226 Concrete aggregates;
• EN 10088 Reinforcing steel
• DIN 488 Reinforcing steel.

2.4.2 Classes of Concrete

Concrete classes shall be generally used as indicated below:

A Reinforced concrete – general use

B Reinforced concrete – high loading
C Mass concrete
D Blinding or backfill

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 74
Concrete used in the Permanent Works shall be of the class shown on the Drawings, indicated in the Bill of
Quantities or instructed by the Engineer. Characteristics of the classes of concrete which may be used are
given in the table hereafter.

Except otherwise specified, the concrete ingredients, manufacture, testing and workmanship shall comply
with the requirements of EN 196-1 and 2 or their equivalents.

Concreting in the Permanent Works should not commence until a trial mix for the class of concrete required
has been approved by the Engineer.

The contractor shall not alter the mix proportions or the source of supply of any of the ingredients without
having previously obtained approval from the Engineer. If sample cubes are required for statics or statics
testing, these must be created by the contractor upon delivery of the concrete to the site and carefully
labeled in order to enable complete documentation of the samples afterwards.

Compliance with Strength Requirements

All concrete shall satisfy the strength requirements according to the terms in EC2 / ENV 206.

Table 2-2: Concrete Classification

Concrete Term according Type of cement Max. Slump Additional

Class to EC2 Aggregate Size Demands
A C20/25 OPC 32mm S3/100-150mm -
B C30/37 OPC 32mm S3/100-150mm -
C C12/15 OPC 32mm S2 / 50-90mm
D C12/15 OPC 32mm S2 / 50-90mm

Explanation of the concrete names:

e.g. C20/25: Both number show characteristic values of the strength, 5%-fractile of the specimens tested
after 28 days for different specimen shapes. Specimen according to ISO 4012 with treatment according to
ISO 2736 will be required. The first value gives the strength of a cylinder specimen with a diameter of 150
mm and a height of 300 mm, the second value gives the strength of a cube with an edge length of 150
mm.

The contractor shall make trial mixes for each class of concrete using the same type of Constructional Plant
and the same material as are proposed for the Permanent Works. The contractor shall give 24 hours’ notice
of such trials to enable the Engineer to attend.

The Contractor shall proportion the ingredients of each batch of concrete accurately by weight. Volume
batching may be allowed in particular circumstances. The concrete ingredients shall then be mixed
thoroughly.

2.4.3 Materials for Concrete

[Link] Cement
The cement used in the Works shall be ordinary Portland cement (OPC) complying with EN 197 or
equivalents for all parts not in contact with aggressive water. For all other concrete parts cement shall
correspond to classification ”increased sulphate resistant” according to EN197. Samples of cement shall be
supplied, when requested by the Engineer, both from the Contractor's store on Site and from the place of
manufacture.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 75
The Contractor shall not permit any cement to come into contact with water at a temperature greater than
60°C.

[Link].1 Certificate for Cement

For each delivery of cement, the Contractor shall furnish, test certificates as instructed by the Engineer,
relating to the cement to be used on the work. Analyses of the cement shall be shown.

[Link].2 Storage of Cement

The Contractor shall provide a well-ventilated waterproof shed or sheds to store the required amount of
cement. Each shed shall have a suitable floor built at such a height that the cement is kept dry at all times.
Delivery and stacking shall be so arranged that the various consignments can be used in the order of their
delivery. Cement shall not be taken from the shed until immediately before its use in the Works.

Different types of cements shall be stored in separate compartments. If intermixing occurs all cement
concerned will be condemned by the Engineer and shall be removed immediately from the Site.

No cement which, in the opinion of the Engineer, has deteriorated or hardened shall be used on the Works
and such cement shall be immediately removed from the Site.

Any cement which is stored on the Site for a period in excess of 28 days shall be tested in accordance with
the relevant Standard prior to use.

[Link] Water for Concreting

The water used for mixing or curing concrete and washing the aggregates shall be clean and free from
injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious substances. No salty water shall
be used.

A thorough chemical water analysis shall be made before using any particular water source for concrete
mixing and test certificates from an independent laboratory shall be presented to the Engineer for approval.

When comparative tests are made with distilled water of known quality, any indications of unsoundness,
marked change in time of set, or reduction of more than 10 % in mortar strength shall be sufficient cause
for the rejection of the water under test.

The Contractor shall not take water for use in concrete from shallow, muddy or marshy sources.

[Link] Aggregate for Concrete

Aggregates for concrete shall be coarse aggregate and fine aggregate conforming in all respects to EC /
DIN Standards. The grading should be such as to produce a concrete with the specified proportions and
consistency and one that is readily workable.

Aggregate for concrete shall consist of hard, dense, durable, clean, uncoated fragments of natural sand,
crushed stone, or other suitable materials approved by the Engineer for use with the cement specified and
shall be free from clay, shells, organic material or other deleterious substances and furnished from
approved sources.

The Contractor shall test all aggregates as instructed by the Engineer, and shall provide such facilities as
may be necessary for procuring representative test samples. The aggregates shall also be chemically

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 76
analysed in order to avoid bad influence to the concrete quality, lifetime, Special attention has to be paid
the aggregate alkali reaction.

If the aggregates are produced directly at site adequate machinery shall be installed. The installed crushing
and screening plant shall be approved by the engineer. The aggregates produced shall be controlled in
order to secure the required grading. The different fractions of the aggregates shall be stored separately;
mixing of the different fractions shall be avoided. All fractions shall be stored on a concrete floor in order
to avoid contamination. The approval of the engineer for storing the aggregates is necessary.

The aggregates shall be tested every 100 tones supplied or produced or as required. If the aggregate or
sand does not fulfil the required grading the contractor shall correct the grading with no extra cost for the
Employer.

All sand and coarse aggregate, when required, shall be washed in clean fresh water at no extra cost to the
Employer. The nominal size of graded coarse aggregate for reinforced concrete shall be 32mm to 5mm.

A stock of aggregates permitting concreting operations for at least 5 days shall be available on the site.

Table 2-3: Grading Curve e.g. for a max. grain size of 31.5mm:

Percentage Passing
Sieve Size [mm] A32 B32 C32
31,5 100 100 100
16 62 80 89
8 38 62 77
4 23 47 65
2 14 37 53
1 8 28 42
0,5 5 18 29
0,25 2 8 15
0,125 (1) (5) (10)
[Link] Admixtures and Additives
Preliminary strength tests shall be carried out to ensure that admixtures and additives do not adversely
affect the concrete to which they have been added.

Additives may be added to the concrete if they do not adversely affect the strength and durability of the
concrete and the corrosion protection of the reinforcement.

In no case shall admixtures or additives be added to concrete, cement mortar or grout without the express
permission of the Engineer in writing.

Additives and admixtures, if approved by the Engineer, shall be used strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.

2.4.4 Mixing of Concrete

[Link] Quality of Concrete

The class of concrete required is specified on the drawings and/or in the Bills of Quantities for the particular
position of the Works to be constructed.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 77
The strength class of concrete shall be as designated in the following Table (an extract from European
Standard EN 206-1 Concrete Part 1 Specification, performance, production and conformity, Table 6.3)

Table 2-4: Concrete – Compressive Strength Classes

Compressive Minimum characteristic Minimum characteristic Remarks

Strength Class cylinder strength N/mm cube strength N/mm
C12/15 12 15 Only lean concrete
C20/25 20 25
C25/30 30 35 -
C30/37 30 37 -

The quantity of water added shall only be sufficient to produce a dense concrete, which can be fully
compacted without undue difficulty, due allowance being made for the moisture content of the aggregates.

[Link] Design of Concrete Mixes

The Contractor shall nominate one adequately qualified person who will be responsible for the concrete
production.

Before commencing any concrete work, the Contractor shall design the mixes for the concrete, which he
proposes to incorporate in the Works. Each mix shall be designed to produce the required class of concrete
having a characteristic strength not less than the appropriate value specified. Each design shall fulfil the
following requirements:

• The combined grading of coarse and fine aggregate shall be continuous.

• The proportions and properties of the mix shall be within the limits set out for the various classes and
types of concrete described in this Specification.
• The water/cement ratio shall be consistent with attaining the average strength but without the ratio
exceeding the specified maximum. The aggregate/cement ratio shall be suitable to achieve the
minimum workability consistent with proper compaction by the methods specified.
When submitting his proposals for design mixes to the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide, in addition
to details of his cement, aggregates and water as specified earlier, details of:

• The proportions in which the dry materials are to be mixed, including the aggregate/cement ratio,
cement per cubic meter of compacted concrete and the sieve analyses of the individual and combined
aggregates.
• The water cement ratio to be adopted.
• The workability of the mix and the range in which it is to be maintained.
• The 28-day individual and average strengths for at least six previously obtained test cubes.
• The individual and average densities of the six cubes.
• The dates on which the cubes were made and tested.
• Any other relevant information.
Following the Engineer's approval of the mix designs, the Contractor shall prepare trial mixes of each class
of concrete in the presence of the Engineer. Each batch shall be not less than 0.5 cubic metre of concrete
and shall be mixed in the mixer that the Contractor proposes to use throughout the construction of the
Works. Sieve analyses and moisture content determination shall be made on the aggregates.

The batches of concrete shall be mixed as specified herein and tested.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 78
The Contractor shall allow sufficient time in his programme for designing and making trial mixes and testing
compression test cubes obtained there from.

If during the course of the works the concrete fails to comply with the specified requirements, or the source
of aggregate or cement should differ from those with which the preliminary design mixes were carried out,
the Engineer will instruct the Contractor to prepare further design mixes, which will be tested in accordance
with the above procedure.

[Link] Water-Retaining Concrete

Waterproof concrete for components with a thickness of between 100 mm to 400 mm shall be so dense
(impermeable) that the greatest depth of water penetration on testing in accordance with DIN 1048 does
not exceed 50 mm.

The water/cement ratio shall be not more than 0.60 for components with a thickness of between 100 mm
to 400 mm.

The cement content of waterproof concrete of a class less than C30/37 shall not be less than 370 kg/m3 if
the particle size range of the combined aggregate is 0 to 16 mm, and not less than 350 kg/m3 if it is 0 to
25 mm, and the grading of the aggregate shall be within the favourable range of Fig. 2 or 3 of DIN 1045.

Where waterproof concrete is required, the Contractor shall take full responsibility for ensuring that such
construction is completely waterproof (crack-free). Any leaks appearing during the construction and
maintenance period of the Contract shall be completely repaired by the Contractor. The method proposed
by the Contractor for dealing with shrinkage cracks, leaks, or other defective work shall have no adverse
effect on the finished structure. Treatments of internal and external concrete surfaces of structure, etc.
(coatings or toppings) provided in the Bill of Quantities, does not relieve the Contractor of this obligations
under the Contract. These treatments shall be considered as an additional step for waterproofing and/or
resistance to chemical attack.

Special attention shall be given to the elimination of cracking due the shrinkage of the concrete. In this
connection consideration should be given to the following:

• Reduction of cement content

• Curing of concrete. In this connection it should be understood that if all formwork is left in position for
protracted periods, proper curing will not be achieved.
• Testing for water tightness.
[Link] Pre-Cast Concrete
Concrete for pre-cast sections shall be at least Class C20/25, unless stated otherwise.

[Link] Concrete with High Resistance to Chemical Attack

When shown on the Drawings and/or the Bills of Quantities this type of concrete shall be so dense that the
greatest water penetration depth on testing (of at least 3 samples) does not exceed 50 mm in the case of
"weak" chemical attack and does not exceed 30 mm in the case of "strong" chemical attack. The
water/cement ratio must not exceed 0.60 for "weak" chemical and not exceed 0.50 for "strong" chemical
attack.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 79
Liquids, soils and vapours aggressive to concrete shall be judged and be classified according to "weak",
"strong" and "very strong" chemical aggressiveness.

Concrete, which is exposed to strong chemical attack for a substantial length of time should be protected
against direct access of the aggressive substances. In addition, this concrete should be as composed as is
required for strong attack.

For concrete, which is exposed to attack by water containing more than 300 mg of SO4 per litre or by soils
containing more than 3,000 mg of SO4 per kg, cement with high sulphate resistance, shall always be used.

[Link] Concrete in Contact with Sewage

All concrete in contact with sewage shall be water retaining and shall have high resistance to chemical
attack in accordance with the relevant Clause.

[Link] Weigh Batching

All materials used in the production of concrete shall be measured by weight, except that in the case of
small quantities of low-grade concrete volume batching may be used subject to the Engineer's approval.
Course and fine aggregate shall be measured separately using approved weigh-batching machines capable
of measuring increments of not more than 5 kg.

The concrete mixer shall be fitted with a water tank and a proper device for the accurate measurement and
easily controlled adjustment of the quantity of water to be added to the mix. The quantity of water added
to each batch shall be accurately measured and so adjusted for changes in the moisture content of the
aggregate to maintain the correct water content of the mix.

Where the Engineer has approved the measurement of small quantities of low-grade concrete by volume,
the gauge boxes shall be accurately calibrated and of robust construction. They shall have closed bottoms,
be as deep as practicable in shape and clearly marked for the mix and aggregate for which they are
intended.

[Link] Concrete Mixing

The Contractor shall include in his rate for making daily tests to determine the grading of the aggregates
and the proportions of the various mixes will then be adjusted as required. The quantities shall be arranged
to suit the use of approved weigh-batching plant or when approved, gauge boxes.

The mixing of the concrete in the machine shall continue for at least one minute after the last of the
ingredients composing the batch have been added.

The concrete shall be placed as soon as possible after having been mixed. If the mixer is stopped for any
period over twenty (20) minutes, it shall be washed out before being re-used. In all cases half of the coarse
aggregate shall be omitted from the first batch in a clean mixer at the commencement of concreting.

Hand mixing may be allowed where small quantities of concrete are required and where approved by the
Engineer. It shall be done on a watertight platform and in such a manner as to ensure a uniform distribution
of the materials throughout the mix. Mixing shall be continued until a homogeneous mixture of the
required consistency is obtained. When hand mixing is authorised then an extra 10 % of cement shall be
introduced into the concrete mix.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 80
Truck mixers can be used if authorised by the Engineer. They shall be of the revolving type, watertight and
so constructed that the concrete can be mixed to ensure a uniform distribution. When truck mixers are
approved to supply concrete to a distant location, the Contractor shall ensure that the following
information is supplied, on an approved delivery form:

• Type of concrete and ingredients used;

• Water/cement ratio;
• Time of departure from batching plant;
• Slump; and
• Signature of plant manager.
• The rate of delivery of concrete during concreting operations shall be such as to provide for proper
handling, placing and finishing of the concrete.

2.4.5 Transporting Concrete

The methods and equipment used and the speed required for transporting concrete shall be such that
concrete having the required composition and consistency will be delivered into the work, without
objectionable segregation, loss of slump, and delay. At no time shall a period of more than 30 minutes
elapse between the first wetting of all concrete ingredients and completion of placing the concrete in the
work, unless the concrete is carried in purpose-made agitators operating continuously, when the time shall
be two hours of the introduction of the cement to the mix and within 30 minutes of the discharge from the
agitator.

Before pouring the concrete the protocol of the batching plant shall be checked, especially with regard to
concrete type, slump, batching time, etc.

2.4.6 Placing of Concrete

[Link] General
No concrete shall be placed until all formwork, installation of parts to be embedded, and preparation of
surfaces involved in the placing have been approved by the Engineer. All surfaces against which concrete
is to be placed shall be thoroughly wetted before concreting.

Concrete shall be placed only in the presence of the Engineer or his Representative, unless written
permission is given for placing concrete in their absence. Excessive separation of coarse aggregate from
too great a height or at too great an angle from the vertical or to strike the forms or reinforcement steel,
will not be permitted; where such separation would otherwise occur, the Contractor shall provide suitable
drop chutes and baffles to confine and control the falling concrete.

Concrete shall be placed in continuous, approximately horizontal, layers, be from 30 to 60cm in depth. The
Contractor shall make such arrangements and shall time his operations such that no layer of concrete will
begin setting before the next layer is placed on top of it; in no case shall the delay between the placing of
any two layers be such that the vibrator will not readily penetrate the concrete placed before the delay
under its own weight.

Concreting should be carried out continuously between and up to joints, the position and arrangement of
which shall be predetermined. The surface of all concrete during deposition shall be maintained reasonably
level between plane of stoppage formed by vertical stopping-off boards or other vertical faces.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 81
In the event of unavoidable stoppage in positions not predetermined, the concrete shall be terminated on
horizontal planes against vertical surfaces in the manner before described. Where it becomes necessary or
desirable to allow concrete to stand so long that it may “set” before the works is renewed keyways shall be
formed in the surfaces as shown on the drawings or instructed by the Engineer.

Where concrete is to be placed above the natural or excavated level of the ground it shall be supported
laterally during construction by adequate shuttering or timbering rigidly stayed so as to prevent any
vibration during the process of working, and if this involves additional excavation or building performed at
the choice of the Contractor and not, in the opinion of the Engineer, required for the permanent work,
measurement for the purpose of payment shall be made only to the thickness shown on the drawings.

No concrete shall be placed under water, except with the written permission of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment over the rates for concrete, by reason of any
limitations in the placing of concrete, required under the provisions of this Clause.

The resultant temperature of the combined materials in any batch of concrete at the point and time of
delivery to the works shall not exceed 6°C above the prevailing shade temperature, when the latter is over
21°C.

Where the temperature of fresh concrete is likely to exceed 32°C, concreting shall not be permitted unless
measures are taken to keep the temperature below that level.

Concreting at ambient temperatures below 2°C may be carried out only if the following conditions are met:

a) the aggregates and water used in the mix shall be free from snow, ice and frost.
b) before placing concrete, the formwork, reinforcement and any surface which the fresh concrete will
be in contact shall be free from snow, ice and frost and shall be at a temperature above 0°C.
c) the initial temperature of the concrete at the time of placing shall be at least 5°C.
d) the temperature of the concrete shall be maintained at not less than 5°C at any point until the
concrete reaches strength of 5 N/mm², as confirmed by tests cubes matured under similar
conditions.
e) the Contractor shall take precautions to prevent the temperature of any concrete falling to 0°C
during the first five days after placing.
[Link] Compacting of Concrete
Each layer of concrete shall be consolidated to the maximum practicable density, so that it is free from
pockets of coarse aggregate and closes snugly against all surfaces of forms and embedded materials. The
use of suitable and approved tamping vibrators in lieu of or supplemental to the immersion type vibrators
may be required on horizontal slabs. Everywhere the vibration shall be supplemented by hand spading.

Only skilled and experienced operators will be permitted to carry out compaction of concrete by vibration.
Vibration shall not be used to cause concrete to flow in a lateral direction, as this will lead to segregation.

Lean concrete for blinding course may be compacted by tamping.

Once compaction of the concrete is completed, the Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to avoid
any disturbance of the concrete from walking upon, wheeling over, or by vibrations of the shuttering in
any way until the concrete is thoroughly set and hardened. No traffic of any kind will be permitted on the

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 82
concrete for a period of at least 7 days. Special care shall be taken to ensure that the reinforcement
projecting from the concrete is not disturbed in any way while the concrete is hardening.

[Link] Curing and Protection

When the shade temperature increases above 35°C, special precautions shall be taken during concreting
and curing to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In this case, and as far as may be necessary, water and the
aggregate should be cooled.

The temperature of fresh concrete must not exceed 30°C.

Concreting shall not be carried out when the shade temperature is above 40°C. It shall then preferably be
carried out at night.

In hot dry weather suitable means shall be provided to avoid premature stiffening of concrete placed in
contact with hot dry surfaces. Where necessary the surfaces, including reinforcement, against which
concrete is to be placed shall be shielded from the direct rays of the sun and shall be sprayed with water
to prevent excessive absorption of water from the fresh concrete by the surfaces against which it is placed.

During placing and the first stages of hardening, concrete shall be protected against the effects of sunshine,
drying winds and rain.

For the purposes of attaining strength to limit shrinkage cracking, concrete surfaces shall be protected and
kept moist. The covering shall be placed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to support the
covering without damage. The type of covering provided shall be that in the judgement of the Engineer is
best suited to the conditions.

If, in the judgement of the Engineer it is necessary to use pump, piping, and hose for proper curing, the
Contractor shall provide adequate water distribution to all parts or the Works so that complete and efficient
curing can be achieved throughout the whole period of construction.

Concrete surfaces shall be protected and cured in the following manner:

• The concrete shall be kept moist for a continuous period of at least 14 days after placing by covering it
with moist sand, wet sacks, canvass, fibre mats or other satisfactory material capable of retaining the
moisture, or by providing a sprinkler system.
• Utilising of an approved non-bituminous pigmented liquid compound of an adequate type. The
compound shall be applied strictly in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This
compound shall not be applied on concrete surfaces of movement or construction joints.
[Link] Embedding Metal Fixtures
The Contractor may be required to embed into the concrete, at the time of pouring, various iron and
steelwork and also smaller fixtures such as bolts, sleeves, anchors, lugs etc.

All tubes, pipes and fixtures shall be set absolutely true in accordance with the drawings by means of
templates fixed accurately in position.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 83
[Link] Cleaning and Oiling of Forms
At the time concrete is placed in the forms, the surfaces of the forms shall be clean. Before concrete is
placed, the surfaces of the form shall be oiled with approved commercial form oil that will effectively
prevent sticking and will not stain the concrete surfaces.

Forms to surfaces to be plastered or rendered shall not be oiled but shall be thoroughly wetted about half
an hour before concreting.

[Link] Removal of Forms

Forms shall not be removed until the strength of the concrete is such that form removal will not result in
perceptible cracking, breaking of surfaces, or other damage to the concrete. Any concrete so damaged
shall be repaired in accordance with this Specification.

No forms shall be removed without the express permission of the Engineer but the Contractor shall,
nevertheless, accept sole responsibility for the removal and consequence thereof.

In no case shall forms to soffits be struck until test cubes from the actual concrete concerned have yielded
the 7-day strength specified. As a guide and subject to the foregoing the following removing times are
recommended for forms (according to DIN).

Table 2-5: Removing times for forms

Cement Type by Formwork for Sides of Formwork for Soffits Props of Beams,
*)
Strength Wall, Beams, Pillars of Slabs and Beams Frames and Slabs
25 4 10 28
35L 3 8 20
35F / 45L 2 5 10
45F / 55 1 3 6
*)
Cement according to DIN 1164.

[Link] Classes of Forms and Finish Concrete

The type of forms for placing of concrete in various structures shall in each case be subject to the approval
of the Engineer.

The formed surfaces, after being finished, will conform to the requirements as to the finish of formed
surfaces.

With regard to required finish of formed concrete surfaces, formwork will be classified as follows:

a) Formwork for concrete surfaces or portions thereof which will be covered up below ground level or
plastered. Use of unwrought timber will be permitted. Forms for concrete surfaces, which are to receive
plaster or cement coat finishes shall be constructed of materials which will leave the concrete surface
sufficiently rough for proper bond.
b) Formwork for exposed un-plastered concrete surfaces. This class shall include the use of forms lined
with steel sheets, form-board, block-board or hard-board of approved manufacture or timber boarding
planed on both sides to equal thickness. A regular and smooth finish is required, free from bulges,
irregularities, or unsightly markings or defects of any kind.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 84
c) Formwork for exposed surfaces in fair face concrete finish. This class shall include use of wrought timber
of equal thickness, in equal widths of 10cm to 15cm, in parallel and vertical or horizontal lines, in a
pattern as instructed.
Timber boarding formwork is not accepted for water retaining structure. Only an approved plywood or
metal sheet system shall be adopted.

[Link] Resumption of Work at Joints

Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to joints, the position and arrangement of which shall be
as indicated on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.

Should concreting be interrupted before completion of the pour, then the surface of the concrete shall be
cut away as instructed by the Engineer and laitance removed.

The bonding of fresh concrete on or against older concrete which has hardened, shall be done in the
following manner:

• When the older concrete is not more than 4 hours old, the fresh concrete shall be placed without further
preparation, but half of the coarse aggregate shall be omitted from the first layer of concrete placed.
• When the older concrete is more than 4 hours old, the surface of the hardened concrete shall be
roughened, wire brushed or, if possible, sand blasted to expose the coarse aggregate without leaving
loose particles at the surface. This surface shall be washed.
• Before placing the new concrete, a thin layer of cement mortar shall be applied to the surface of the
older concrete. The mortar shall consist of cement and sand mixed in the proportion contained in the
concrete mix, i.e. omitting the coarse aggregate. The fresh concrete shall be placed against the layer of
mortar while it is still plastic, but half of the coarse aggregate shall be omitted from the first layer of
concrete.

2.4.7 Testing Concrete

[Link] General
All tests on concrete as prescribed in this Clause and elsewhere in this Specification shall be made at an
authorized laboratory approved by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall arrange for copies of each test
certificate to be handed to the Engineer.

Prior to the commencement of the work, preliminary tests shall be made for workability and compressive
strength as laid down in DIN V ENV206.

The rates are to include the use of moulds and testing equipment, transporting when required and all
labour and materials in preparing the cubes and cores, their curing and testing.

The Contractor shall sample and carry out mechanical analysis of the fine aggregates and each normal size
of coarse aggregate in use, employing the method described in DIN 4226 at least once a week when
concreting is in progress and at such more frequent intervals as the Engineer may require.

The grading of all aggregates shall be within specified limits. Should the fraction of aggregate retained on
any sieve differ from the corresponding fraction of aggregate in the approved mix by more than 5 % of the
total quantity of fine and coarse aggregate, the Engineer may instruct the Contractor to alter the relative
portions of the aggregates in the mix to allow for such differences.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 85
The Contractor shall provide the equipment necessary to determine the compacting factor of freshly mixed
concrete at each place where concrete is being prepared and shall determine the compacting factor of the
freshly mixed concrete by the method described in DIN 1048 on each location where a set of test cubes is
made and not less than once a day or as the Engineer may direct.

Each set of cubes (six cubes per set) shall be made from a single sample of a concrete batch taken by
random. Three cubes shall be tested at 7 days and three at 28 days after manufacture. When requested by
the Engineer, additional set of cubes shall be made for testing 3 days after manufacture. Test reports shall
be submitted to the Engineer in duplicate.

[Link] Compliance with Specified Requirements

The concrete shall be deemed satisfactory provided that:

(a) the average 28 days strength determined from every group of four consecutive test cubes exceeds the
characteristic strength by not less than 5 N/mm2 for grade C 15 concrete and 7,5 N/mm2 for grades
more than C 15;
(b) each individual test result is greater than 85 % of the specified characteristic strength.

If one cube result fails to meet the second requirement, the result may be considered to represent only the
particular batch of concrete from which the cube was taken, provided that the average strength of the
group satisfies the first requirement.

If more than one cube in a group fails to meet the second requirement or if the average strength of any
group of four consecutive test cubes fails to meet the first requirement, then all the concrete in all the
batches represented by such cubes shall be deemed not to comply with strength requirements.

[Link] Non-Compliance with Specified Requirements

When the average strength of four consecutive test cubes fails to meet the first requirement, no further
concrete from that mix shall be placed in the work and the Contractor shall establish the cause of the failure
and apply such remedies as are necessary. The Contractor shall demonstrate by trial mixes and test cube
results that the revised mix is in accordance with the specified requirements.

The Contractor shall, within 24 hours of the date of testing, make proposals for agreement with the
Engineer about actions to be taken in respect of any concrete represented by the test cubes which fail to
meet either of the requirements. These proposals may include, but shall not be limited to, cutting and
testing cores.

Concrete, which ultimately does not comply with any of the requirements of the Specification shall be
broken out and replaced or otherwise dealt with as agreed by the Engineer at the expense of the
Contractor.

Furthermore, the Engineer may instruct additional cement to be added to the mix immediately. The mixes
used may also be changed whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer, such change is necessary or desirable
to secure the required workability, density, surface finish and strength, and the Contractor shall not be
entitled to additional compensation because of such changes.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 86
[Link] Testing of Fresh Concrete
Compacting Factor Test: This test shall be carried out at the preliminary testing stage and whenever a
concrete sample is taken for the making of works test cubes. Values for acceptable factors are indicated in
the table following "Slump Test".

Slump Test: This test shall be carried out regularly as an aid to maintaining uniform consistency of concrete
during the progress of the Works. Acceptable values of the slump are indicated in table 6.1.

[Link] Testing of Hardened Concrete

Concrete test cube results shall be used to determine whether the concrete to be incorporated in the
permanent works has reached the required strength. Hardened concrete shall be deemed to be
unacceptable for the Works should the corresponding test cube results fail to meet the Specification and
in this event the Contractor shall take all necessary remedial measures as instructed by the Engineer.

For the making of test cubes the Contractor shall provide a sufficient number but at least 12 No. 200 mm
standard steel moulds.

For each class a set of 6 cubes shall be made from each of 3 consecutive trial batches. 3 from each set of 6
shall be tested at an age of 7 days and 3 at an age of 28 days.

The cubes shall be made, cured, stored, transported, and tested in accordance with approved standards.

At each age of test, no cube strength shall fall below the appropriate specified minimum for preliminary
strength tests.

Works Test Cubes shall be made from works concrete samples taken from the point of placing as and when
instructed by the Engineer. Normally for each grade of concrete, 6 cubes shall be made from concrete
taken at random, 3 cubes from each set shall be tested at an age of 7 days and 3 at an age of 28 days.

Cubes will generally be required at least as follows:

• For every 25 m3 of concrete placed;

• For each important structural member; and
• As otherwise instructed by the Engineer.

The cubes shall be made, cured, stored, transported, and tested as specified.

A record of such tests identifying the test cubes with the part of the work executed shall be kept on the
Site by the Engineer and made available to the Contractor.

The appropriate strength requirement shall be considered to be satisfied if none of the strengths of the
three cubes tested at each age is below the specified cube strength, or if the average strength of the three
cubes is not less than the specified cube strength and the difference between the greatest and the least
strengths is not more than 20 % of that average.

If the expected 28-day cube strength w 28 is to be estimated from the 7-day cube strength w 7 in
preliminary tests and quality control tests this may, in general be done by applying the factors given in the
table below, to the values of the 7-day cube strength (according to DIN 1045):

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 87
Table 2-6: Conversion Factors for the 7-day cube into the 28-day

Cement Strength Class 28-day Cube Pressure Strength w 28

Z 25 1.4 * w7
Z 35 L 1.3 * w7

The hardening test gives an indication of the strength of the concrete in the structure at a particular time
and thus also gives guidance as to the formwork stripping time as determined in the following table
extracted from DIN 1045 7/88, table 6.3.

The hardening can be determined, in accordance with approved standards, on test specimens or by non-
destructive means.

The specimens for these tests shall be made from the concrete intended for the structural components in
question and be stored directly beside or on these components and be cured in the same manner (influence
of temperature and humidity). At least three specimens shall be made for the hardening test, but it is
advisable to make more so that if the strength determined in the test is found to be inadequate the test
can be repeated.

Components whose dimensions vary significantly from those of the test specimens may attain a different
degree of hardening from that of the specimens, e.g. due to differences in heat evolution in the concrete.
Due account should be taken of such factors when assessing test results.

If, due to lack of compressive strength test results, or in the event that there is reason to doubt the strength
of concrete in any particular section, it may be necessary to determine the compressive strength of the
concrete by taking specimens from the structure or, if authorized by the Engineer, by non-destructive
testing performed on the finished component or by both methods. In connection with such tests the age
and the conditions of hardening (temperature, humidity) of the concrete in the structure shall be taken
into account.

[Link] Cutting and Testing of Core Samples

As and where instructed by the Engineer, cylindrical core samples shall be taken normal to the surface of
the hardened concrete for examination and testing. The procedure for drilling, examination, measurement
and testing shall be in accordance with DIN 1048. Prior to the preparation for testing, the specimen shall
be made available for examination by the Engineer. If the crushing strength of the specimen determined
in accordance to DIN 1048 is less than the characteristic strength at 28 days for the grade requirements in
other aspects, that concrete in that part of the works of which it is a sample shall be considered not to
comply with the specified requirements.

2.4.8 Measurement and Payment for Concrete

Measurement for payment of concrete will be made only to the neat lines of the structures as shown on
the drawings or as established by the Engineer.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 88
2.4.9 Formwork for Concrete
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design the formwork and shall supply and fix all necessary
formwork, together with its attendant scaffolding, timbering, shoring, strutting, etc., required for the
placing of concrete.

Depending on the requirements of the concrete surface for use as formwork the Contractor will be
permitted to use form board, hardboard of approved manufacture, steel plate, or timber boarding.

Where timber boarding is used, the formwork surfaces coming in contact with wet concrete shall be made
of properly seasoned timber, of sufficient thickness to resist the pressure of the wet concrete whilst it is
being placed and vibrated, without any distortion whatsoever.

The forms shall be fixed in perfect alignment and securely braced so as to be able to withstand, without
displacement or deflection, the movement of men, materials, and plant and the pressure of wet concrete
whilst it is being cast and vibrated.

The formwork shall be constructed in such a manner that there shall be no leakage of mortar.

All exposed concrete shall have the external angles chamfered 25mm x 25mm or, where instructed, by
greater amount, by means of arising strips fixed to the formwork.

Ferrules and wire ties shall not be used for the temporary connection of the opposite sides of formwork
for concrete walls and members of water retaining or conveying structures. The use of such methods of
connection in other structures will be subject to the Engineer’s approval.

Wherever ferrule and wire connections are permitted, the ends of the ferrules or ties after removal of the
forms shall be cut back at least 13mm from the face of the concrete and covered with 1:2 cement mortars,
containing an approved shrinkage-reducing additive. This operation shall be carefully carried out. The hole
formed by the cutting process shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted before filing. The mortar shall be of
damp, note, consistency. The patch shall be properly trowelled smooth to match the surrounding concrete
surfaces and shall be thoroughly cured by keeping it moist for at least three days. After the patch is
hardened, the patch and the adjacent concrete shall be ground down smooth. These operations will be
deemed to be included in the rates for concrete.

Where embedded metal rods or sleeves used for holding forms are permitted to remain embedded, they
shall terminate not less than 25mm under the formed faces of the concrete (40 mm on water retaining
surfaces). Embedded fasteners on the ends of such rods or sleeves shall be such that their removal will
leave holes of regular shape. The holes left in the concrete surfaces by the removal of fasteners on holding
rods or sleeves, and the approved shrinkage reducing additive and shall be made completely watertight.
The mortar fill shall be finished flush with the concrete surfaces as specified above.

Where necessary, parallel sides or tapered holes for receiving holding-down bolts as well as core holes,
pockets, etc, for the reception of metal work, pipes, ladder, and other fittings shall be formed in the
concrete with wooden core boxes, fabricated in such a manner that they can be completely withdrawn or
broken up and removed after the concrete has set. The installation and removal of all such core boxes
when the concrete has hardened sufficiently is deemed to be included for in the rates of concrete.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 89
2.4.10 Tolerances of Concrete Construction
The following tolerances of concrete constructions after completion of the work shall be permitted. All
concrete work shall be executed to the required dimensions, shapes, position and level shown on the
drawings. The Engineer may apply other tolerances if required.

Tolerance for dimensions of columns, walls, beams slabs: - 0 mm until + 10 mm

Concrete Cover to Reinforcement

• Concrete cover of 30 mm : - 0 mm until + 5 mm

• Concrete cover of 35 mm : - 0 mm until +10 mm
• Concrete cover of 50 mm : - 0 mm until +10 mm

2.4.11 Repair of Concrete

Repair of concrete shall be performed by skilled workmen and in the presence of the Engineer or his
Representative in accordance with ENV 1504.

The Contractor shall correct all imperfections on the concrete surfaces within 24 hours after the removal of
forms. Concrete that is damaged by any cause and concrete that is honeycombed, fractured, or otherwise
defective, shall be removed and replaced by adequate and approved methods. The removing of the
concrete shall be done in a way that the reinforcement is not damaged e.g., water high pressure cutting of
the concrete.

Cracks shall be refilled with Epoxy Resin, Polyurethane, Cement Lime or Cement Suspension depending on
the purpose of refilling e.g., closing against corroding substances, sealing of cracks, connection which is
capable of stretching, non-positive connection. Furthermore, the kind of application under pressure
(injection) or without pressure (impregnation) shall be determined.

Concrete substitution may be carried out with concrete according to EN 206, Short Crete according to DIN
18551, and Cement Mortar and also by special mixtures as polymer modified concrete or mortar.

No plastering of smooth concrete surfaces shall be permitted.

All materials, procedure and operations applied for the repair of concrete shall be subject to the Engineer’s
approval.

2.4.12 Surface Finish and Treatment

[Link] General
Before any concreting commences the Contractor shall submit details and calculations for all shuttering
necessary for the carrying out of the work. Any damage due to insufficient strength of shuttering is to be
made good by the Contractor.

Shuttering shall be so designed and constructed that the concrete can be properly placed and thoroughly
compacted and that the hardened concrete while still supported by the shuttering shall conform accurately
to the required shape, position, and level, subject to the tolerance and to the standards of finish specified.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 90
The rates for concreting shall include shuttering and for all types of cutting and waste and for forming of
25 mm x 25 mm chamfers at all exposed arises or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

The qualities of finish shall not be inferior to those hereafters described. If minor porosity is evident on
removing shuttering, the Engineer may approve a surface treatment by rubbing down with cement and
fine aggregate mortar of the same richness as in the concrete in that particular portion of the Works. This
treatment shall be carried out immediately after removing the shuttering.

[Link] Shuttered Surfaces

All surfaces of concrete, especially those exposed to view, including all pre-cast structures, shall be cast
against steel or planed timber formwork. All visible edges shall be chamfered as instructed by the Engineer.

Where necessary and instructed by the Engineer, the surface shall be rubbed with a Carborundum stone
or an abrasive of equal quality to remove form marks and projections, thereby leaving a smooth, dense
surface without pits or irregularities.

Any surfaces, irrespective of the shuttering employed, which show honeycombing, voids or air holes, shall
be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Cutting back the concrete behind the reinforcement or
to such depth as is required and/or the Engineer may specify, and any other repair, shall not be started
without the inspection and approval of the Engineer. Resin grouting or other approved suitable materials
may be applied.

All concrete surfaces shall be protected against damage and disfigurement, and the Contractor shall
remove all blemishes and repair all such damages to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

All costs for making good honeycombed and defective concrete and repairing damaged surfaces shall be
deemed to be to be included in the rates for concrete inserted in the Bills of Quantities.

[Link] Surfaces Not Requiring Shuttering

All upper surfaces of concrete shall be thoroughly worked during the placing operation to produce a
smooth finish free from water, coarse aggregate and air pockets or honeycombs.

The Contractor shall be required to prepare tests or samples under the direction of the Engineer, and the
method and manner of finish, the choice and selection of the aggregate and other features affecting the
work shall be approved before any further work is done.

Surfaces shall be formed by placing excess concrete within the forms and removing or striking off such
excess with a wooden template. The surface shall then be tamped to an even finish, aided where indicated
by approved floats to give a dense surface with a minimum of cement and fine materials. The tamping shall
not be done to the extent of bringing an excess of fine materials to the surface. The use of mortar topping
shall only be permitted when indicated on the Drawings.

The final finish of concrete surfaces shall be executed in the following ways, as shown on the Drawings
and/or Bills of Quantities or as instructed by the Engineer.

Rough Finish:

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 91
Rough finish shall consist of levelling and screed concrete to produce a uniform and plain surface for
structural members such as lean concrete, subsequent stages of construction, bonded concrete, surfaces
with mortar topping and paving.

Scratched Finish:

As before, but the surface shall be roughened before the final set to increase the future bond between
structural members.

Floated Finish:

After the concrete has been struck off, the surface shall be floated with a fine or rough wooden plasterer's
float. Cork floats may be used. This finish shall be used on tops of foundations, columns, beams and all
normal structural members.

Trowelled Finish:

In line with the above, the final trowelling shall be carried out after floating using a steel trowel to produce
a finished surface free of trowel marks, uniform, smooth in texture and appearance. This finish shall be used
for surfaces of where specified and/or instructed by the Engineer.

Broom or Belt Finish:

In line with the above, the surface shall be finished to produce a non-skid, coarse transversal score texture.
This finish shall be used for slabs of pedestrian access and in other locations where specified and/or
instructed by the Engineer.

[Link] Treatment with Chemical Hardeners

Where specified in the Bills of Quantities the surface of slabs requiring high wearing resistance shall be
treated with chemical hardeners. Only approved materials from recognized manufacturers withstanding
medium to heavy stress and strain and resistant to chemicals, which have been approved by the Engineer
may be used. The application of chemical hardeners shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.

After the curing of concrete slabs with broom finish or other finish already executed, the surfaces are to be
washed and brushed down with water to clean all dirt, oil, grease and dust, and then allowed to dry before
application of the chemical hardener.

The hardener is to be poured on the totally dry slab and spread evenly with a broom. When the hardener
has been fully absorbed, but before the slab is dried out, all surplus material is to be swilled off. Second
and third coats shall be applied similarly.

2.4.13 Joints in Concrete

[Link] General
The Contractor is referred to the standard joint details, (which form part of this Sub-Section) for the
construction of the types of joints required in the various structures and which are indicated on the
Drawings.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 92
The cost of the joints shall include for all labour and materials in forming the joint as shown on the Drawings
including, inter alia, where required:

• Shuttering, notching for passage of reinforcement if necessary and cutting for passage of water stop.
• Water stops and jointing.
• Expansion joint filler.
• Formation of grooves and sealing with approved sealing compound.
• 20 mm dowel bars, 1 m long, with sleeve and packing, where shown on the Drawings.
• Adequate grout checks.

[Link] Construction (Day) Joints

These joints shall be of the type indicated on the standard joint details.

Concrete bond across the joint shall be affected by removing the surface laitance and exposing the
aggregate on the joint face as soon as the concrete has hardened. The surface shall be thoroughly washed
with clean water prior to the resumption of concreting.

The proposed position of the construction joints shall be submitted to the Engineer and approved by him
before construction of each separate structure is commenced. A joint shall be made wherever concreting
is finished for the day, or whenever concreting is stopped for any reason.

[Link] Movement Joints (Contraction and Expansion)

Movement joints shall be constructed in the positions as shown on the Drawings or as instructed or
approved by the Engineer.

Where indicated on the Drawings, dowel bars shall be positioned across the joint. They shall have sawn
ends and shall be provided with and secured to steel cradles on each side of the joint. They shall be placed
with the midpoint of the longitudinal axes intersecting the plane of the joint at right angles, half the length
of the bars being suitably coated to prevent bonding. Fitted over the coated length shall be a loose
cardboard or plastic sleeve, closed and packed with glass fibre for a depth of 75 mm at the end of the bar
remote from the joint.

Where shown on the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer, joints shall be sealed on one or both faces
as required. On the face or faces requiring sealing, a groove of the shape and dimensions shown on the
standard joint details shall be formed. Not earlier than fourteen days after the placing of the concrete, or
when otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the groove shall be cleaned, dried if necessary, primed and
filled with a suitable approved mastic sealing compound to the underside of the chamfers. The sealer shall
be prepared and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

2.4.14 Joint Sealing

[Link] General
This section covers the work involved in delivery and placing of jointing material and joint sealing in
concrete structures.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 93
[Link] Jointing Materials
Expansion joints shall be filled with an approved jointing material, which shall be compressible and resistant
to weathering and extrusion.

The jointing material shall be kept back from the face as indicated on the joint detail drawings, formed
recesses shall be primed and sealed with an approved sealing compound.

The Contractor shall be held responsible for the quality of all materials, including the adhesion of the joint
sealant. Joint sealant which are too soft, too brittle or which lack the prescribed adhesion and resistance
shall be replaced by the Contractor at no extra cost. The approval of material by the Engineer does not
relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the Contract.

[Link] Synthetic Joint Sealing Material

All joints of concrete members shall be sealed with mastic as specified and/or as instructed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall select permanent elastic, synthetic mastic sealing compound, which has a high degree
of extensibility, optimum elastic force and good adhesion to concrete. Products consisting of one or two
components, on the basis of polysulphide liquid polymer, silicone rubber and polyurethane or others, may
be used; however, only proprietary materials (made by fully recognized manufacturers), which are resistant
to aging, oxygen, ultra-violet radiation, water, oil, grease, chemicals and biodegradation and which have
been approved by the Engineer may be used.

Concrete grey mastic shall be used for joints in exposed concrete areas. Joints in concrete areas not
exposed to the eye may be filled with dark coloured mastic.

The mastic shall be stored in sealed containers in a dry and cool place prior to use, strictly in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.

Mastic sealing compounds used for expansion joints in structure facing water shall be:

• physiologically absolutely safe, i.e., they shall not contain any sub-stances which may be considered a
substrate for water bacteria;
• resistant to any detergents used in water; and
• compliant with the health requirements for potable water.
Mastic sealing compound used for expansion joints of sewage manholes, sewers and any other structural
elements exposed to the effect of chemicals (e.g., varnishing unit, oil traps etc.) shall be resistant to
chemicals such as alkali, acid and solvents etc. and to biodegradation resulting from attack by bacteria
normally present in sewage and sewage sludge.

[Link] Workmanship for Joints

The joints shall be prepared and primed as indicated by the manufacturer of the sealing compound.

The depth of the joint sealant shall be as indicated on the drawings, but at least 25 mm or equal to the
width of the joint. In the case of bevelled joint edges, the sealing shall only be placed between the parallel
joint faces.

In compliance with the instructions of the manufacturer, the mastic sealant shall be applied - within the
time span specified after priming and from bottom to top in vertical joints - with a sealant gun equipped

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 94
with a nozzle fitting the width of the joint. Surplus material must be removed before hardening of the
mastic.

[Link] Water Stops

This Specification covers all work involved in furnishing and placing of pre-formed water stops and joint
sealing strips for sealing of joints in concrete members.

Additional Water Stops shall be considered depending on sequence of placing Concrete and height of the
individual Structure

Construction joints in structures etc., shall be provided with water stops as specified. Joints in base slabs
may have an external flat water stop as indicated on the Drawings.

Prior to commencement of the relevant work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, samples, test
certificates and placement instructions issued by the manufacturer of all proposed water bars and joint
sealing strips.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all materials. The approval of materials by the Engineer
does not relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the Contract.

Pre-formed water stops, and rubber joint sealing strips shall consist of permanent elastic material and
being resistant to aging, oxygen, ultra-violet radiation, water, oil, grease and chemicals.

Water bars used for expansion and contraction joints of sewage manholes, sewers and other structural
elements exposed to the effects of chemicals shall be resistant to attack from alkalis acids and solvents.

Only materials agreeing with the requirements of the specification shall be delivered for use in the Works,
these may be of Elastomeric water stops made of artificial rubber (chloroprene-neoprene)

Vulcanizing of water bars may be done at the site. Vulcanizing of elastomeric water bars necessitates great
care and should where practical be done at the factory. A waterproof gluing shall not be permitted. All
necessary equipment for vulcanizing shall be provided by the Contractor.

All required fittings for intersections, crosses, tees and junction pieces shall be supplied by the
manufacturer. Site fabrication of such pieces shall not be allowed, unless suitable vulcanizing equipment is
provided, and the methods and equipment are approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall make a visual inspection of all water stops prior to placing operations to ensure that
they have no defects or damages (air bubbles, deformations, cuts, holes, brittle parts, etc.). All water stops
shall be stored in a cool place and shall not be exposed to the sun.

For joint sealing, strip types of elastomeric rubber only shall be used.

[Link] Workmanship for Water Stops

The water stops shall be placed in such manner as to ensure that their two flaps are securely embedded in
either side of the adjacent concrete members. They shall be properly fastened to avoid movement during
placement and compaction of the concrete. The use of nails shall not be permitted; only special stirrups or
other constructions approved by the Engineer shall be used; and all cost for additional Stirrups shall not

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 95
be paid separately. Great care shall be exercised during placement and compaction of concrete around the
water bars to ensure that the concrete completely encloses the water bars.

The compressible jointing material for expansion joints shall be glued to the face of the completed member
to avoid slipping during concrete work of the second member. Consideration shall be given to adequate
thickness of the concrete cover enclosing the reinforcement of the concrete members, especially those
adjoining the jointing material. For the perfect functioning of expansion joints perforation of the jointing
material by internal vibrators must be avoided.

Vulcanizing work on water bars shall be kept to an absolute minimum. All vulcanization shall resist a
bending test without formation of cracks along the seams. Diameter of the bending roller in the bend test
is 50 mm.

2.4.15 Cement Mortar and Grout

[Link] General
Cement mortar and grout under bearing plates and to fill in pockets shall be composed of cement, fine
aggregate (natural sand) and water. If required, admixtures and/or additives shall be used. All components
shall comply with the requirements of the Specification for concrete and subject for approval of the
Engineer.

[Link] Strength
The compressive strength of mortar and grout, which must in all cases be determined on three specimens,
shall in preliminary tests and in quality control tests conform to the following requirements:

• Lowest compressive strength for each specimen: 25 N/mm

• Lowest limit for the average compressive strength for each series of specimens: 30 N/mm

The compressive strength of mortars and grouts shall be determined by testing specimens (diameter 100
Mm, height 120 Mm) at an age of 28 days.

[Link] Mixing
Mixing of mortar and grout shall be done in an approved mechanical mixer, the amount of water added
being just sufficient to give the consistency and workability desired for the use to which they are to be put.
Mixing shall be carried out as specified for concrete.

Hand mixing will only be permitted when very small quantities are required, and the approval of the
Engineer has been obtained.

All mortar and grout must be in their final position in the structures within 30 minutes. Grout and mortar
shall be composed of one part cement and two parts well graded sand or as approved by the Engineer.

Shrink-resistant grout shall be used under heavy machinery equipment, subject to vibrating, reciprocating
and pulsating movement and to set structural steel and pre-cast concrete members and in all members
where shrinkage inherent in normal cement grout cannot be tolerated. Non shrink grout shall be obtained
as a pre-mix ready requiring only the addition of water to produce a free-flowing grout which, when cured,
will completely fill the pockets in which it has been placed. The grout shall be so formulated to provide

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 96
high resistance to the long-term effects of machinery operating stresses. The grout shall be obtained from
a manufacturer approved by the Engineer.

Shrink resistant grout shall be free from iron compounds, which can result in rust staining and subsequent
corrosion and expansion.

[Link] Workmanship for Grouting

Grouting shall not be carried out until the steelwork or equipment has been finally levelled and plumbed,
the bases being supported meanwhile by steel wedges.

Immediately before the operation of grouting, the entire area covered by the bearings, including pockets
for holding down bolts and a sufficient extra area around to prevent contamination, shall be thoroughly
cleaned by washing with water from hose pipes, compressed air, etc., and all dust, loose and deleterious
matter shall be removed. Surplus water shall then be removed by mopping, the use of compressed air so
that the surfaces remain damp.

Freshly mixed mortar as instructed, of suitable consistency, shall then be introduced to fill the pockets for
the holding down bolts and the space beneath the bearing plates. The mortar shall be well punned into
the space, working from one side with suitable pinners until the mortar appears on the opposite side and
every care shall be taken to ensure that the entire void is filled, giving complete support to the bearings
over the entire area, without air holes, etc. To ensure this, wooden screeds shall be introduced around the
edges of the grouting space to contain the mortar during the punning operations, any mortar which may
foul the treads of bolts, nuts, or affect their bearing on washers and plates shall be carefully removed
without disturbing the mortar already placed and, on completion of the operation, the edges of the mortar
shall be trimmed.

The whole shall then be covered with wet sacks or hessian, which shall be kept continuously damp for a
period of not less than 7 days, after which they shall be removed and all loose, adherent or projecting
mortar liable to reduce the efficiency of the bearings carefully removed. After 28 days all holding down
and other bolts shall be tightened as instructed.

2.4.16 Falsework and Forms

[Link] General
If the Contractor intends to use a wooden falsework construction, all timber shall be of sound wood and
well-seasoned. Other types of falsework construction, e.g., steel, or tubular steel scaffolding may be used.

Reinforced concrete shall not be poured directly against an excavated face, but only against suitable
formwork.

All concrete, especially that exposed to view; including all pre-cast concrete members shall be fair faced.
Steel shuttering or plywood panels approved for concrete works may be used if they are free from defects
likely to detract from the general appearance of the finished surface. Joints between boards and panels
shall be horizontal and vertical or as instructed by the Engineer.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 97
[Link] Design of Falsework and Forms
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, details of the falsework and forms intended to
be used before commencement of the works.

The submission of such details shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the sufficiency of
falsework and forms.

It is the Contractor's responsibility to dimension the footings in a way that settlement of the subsoil under
concreting loads will be kept small and symmetrical.

Settlement of falsework and footings is to be measured and recorded while concreting. Provisions shall be
made to permit the compensation of unexpected settlements and the uniform release of the falsework by
means of hydraulic jacks or at least wedges.

[Link] Construction Requirement of Forms

Forms shall be of such quality and strength that they maintain rigidity throughout placing and vibration of
concrete. Within the allowable tolerance the finished concrete shall coincide in the required shape, position
and level with the drawing.

In order to prevent adhesion of concrete, forms shall be oiled with form oil approved by the Engineer. The
oil shall be applied according to the recommendations of the manufacturer. Form oil shall be of such quality
that it will not discolour the surface of exposed concrete. Care shall be taken to prevent the reinforcement
from being contaminated.

Forms shall be thoroughly wetted on both sides in advance of placing the concrete. Standing water in the
forms will not be permitted. Joints shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of grout.

All dirt, chips, sawdust and other foreign matter shall be thoroughly removed from between the forms
before any concrete is placed. Where the inside of the bottom of the forms is inaccessible, the lower form
boards shall be left loose so that they may be removed for cleaning out extraneous material immediately
before placing concrete.

Where it is required to use internal ties or anchorage within the forms, they shall be of such design that
after their removal, the cavities that are left will be of the smallest possible sizes. Internal metal ties shall
be so placed as to permit their removal to a depth of at least 50 mm from the face without injury to the
concrete.

Any type of internal ties, their position and the filling of cavities shall be approved by the Engineer,
especially in case of exposed concrete. Ordinary wire ties shall not be permitted.

The Specification for forms shall apply with equal force to metal forms. The metal used for forms shall be
of such thickness that the forms remain true to shape. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface
or line up properly, shall not be used. Special care shall be exercised to keep metal forms free from rust
and grease.

[Link] Removal of Falsework and Forms

The removal of falsework and forms shall be executed in accordance with the DIN 1045. The specified
number of days between placing of concrete and removal of falsework and forms shall closely be adhered

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 98
to. Depending on curing and weather conditions longer times may be necessary if the strength of the
concrete is still low. In no case shall the removal of falsework and forms be done without the approval and
direction of the Engineer.

The removal of formwork shall be carried out in such a manner that the concrete is not disturbed or in any
way damaged. Repairs to concrete shall only be carried out after inspection by the Engineer.

2.4.17 Reinforcement

[Link] Certificates for Reinforcement

All deliveries of steel reinforcement shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's certificate giving the
results of tests carried out in accordance with the requirements of the relevant standard. The Engineer may
require the Contractor to submit samples of steel from each delivery to an approved Authority for testing.

[Link] Material
Mild Steel: Main round steel bars - yield stress minimum 220 N/mm², according to DIN 488 Parts 1 and 2.

Ribbed Tor Steel: Deformed steel bars - yield stress minimum 420 N/mm², according to DIN 488 Parts 1
and 2.

Wire Mesh: Hard drawn welded wire fabric - yield stress minimum 500 N/mm², according to DIN 488 Part
4.

[Link] Construction Requirements

Reinforcing drawings and bar bending schedules shall, unless otherwise indicated, be prepared by the
Contractor and checked and approved by the Engineer.

Special attention should be paid to hooks splices bending radios, anchorage lengths and concrete cover.

[Link] Storage and Protection

All reinforcing steel shall be stored on elevated platforms or other supports and must not be laid on the
ground. It shall be stored in an orderly manner to facilitate inspections; each diameter and quality being
kept separate.

Reinforcing steel shall be protected at all times from damage and, when placed in the structure, shall be
free from dirt, loose mill and rust scale, paint, oil and other foreign substances.

[Link] Bending
Steel reinforcing bars shall be cut and bent by competent workmen in accordance with the provisions of
DIN 1045. They shall be bent cold to templates, which shall not vary appreciably from the shape and
dimensions shown on the Drawings. All sharp bends shall be avoided and in no case shall the bending
radius be less than 80 mm for reinforcing bar diameters less than 20 mm and 200 mm for reinforcing bar
diameters equal to or larger than 20 mm and less than 28 mm according to DIN 1045.

All reinforcing steel shall be accurately placed and, during the placing and vibration of concrete, firmly held
in the position shown on the Drawings.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 99
Distance from the forms shall be maintained by means of stays, blocks, ties, hangers, or other approved
supports. Blocks for holding reinforcement from contact with the forms shall be of suitable material of
approved shape and dimensions. The holders shall be short enough to permit their ends to be covered
with concrete. Reinforcing bars shall be securely wired together in such a manner that they will maintain
their exact designated position during placing of concrete. The ends of all wires shall be turned into the
concrete away from the face.

[Link] Splicing
All steel bars for concrete reinforcement with a total length of less than 12 m shall be furnished in the full
length indicated on the Drawings. Steel bars with splices shown on the Drawings shall be spliced and steel
bars with a total length exceeding 12 m may be spliced as shown on the Drawings and as instructed by the
Engineer.

Welding of steel bars shall only be carried out if authorized by the Engineer.

[Link] Approval of Reinforcement

No concrete shall be placed until the reinforcement has been examined and approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall give a minimum period of notice of at least 24 hours before the scheduled
commencement of concreting to allow the Engineer time to carry out a full and detailed inspection of the
reinforcement.

If in the Engineer's opinion additional reinforcement is required, this shall be placed as instructed by the
Engineer.

[Link] Concrete Cover

The concrete cover to the main reinforcement shall be as indicated on drawings. In case there is not
specified the concrete cover shall not be less than the following:

• Parts of structures exposed to water and/or soil: 50 mm

• Parts of structure not exposed to water and/or soil: 25 mm or unless stated otherwise.

2.5 Walls

2.5.1 Dry walls

Gypsum boards shall be according to standard DIN 18180 and EN 520, moisture proof according to DIN
18534-1 (Class W0-l).

Mineral Wool shall be according to standard ASTM C612.

Installation shall be according to the manufacturer’s requirements and according to other relevant
standards and state-of-the-art methods and shall be approved by the Engineer prior execution.

Metal rack shall be according to relevant norms such as DIN 4103-1.

Furthermore, the installation and connection to the existing walls, floor and suspended ceiling with an
acoustic sealant shall follow the instructions as shown on respective design drawings.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 100

Joints shall be closed by self-adhesive joint tape according to the manufacturer’s requirements and in line
with relevant standards. Specifically manufactured drywall screws shall be used.

2.5.2 Masonry/Brick wall reparation and support

All damaged bricks should be replaced according to the information and specification given in the design
drawings. Technical specifications of bricks shall be according to the stipulations made in the following
chapters.

[Link] Manufacturing of bricks/ masonry

Appearance:

Do not change source or supply of materials after brick manufacturing work has started. (Bricks shall be
manufactured at one time and from the same batch). Blend all brick to produce a uniform appearance
when installed. An observable "banding" or "layering" of colors or textures caused by improperly mixed
brick is unacceptable.

Bricks shall be manufactured locally, the source to be approved by the Engineer.

All specifications of bricks shall be according to DIN EN 771-1.

Testing:

Masonry strength shall be determined in accordance with the relevant standards and the cost of testing
shall be borne by the Contractor.

[Link] Delivery, storage and handling of bricks

Cements materials shall be delivered to the site in unbroken containers, plainly marked and labeled with
manufacturers' names and brands. Cement materials shall be stored in dry, weather-tight sheds or
enclosures and handle so as to prevent entry of foreign materials and damage by water or dampness.
Masonry units shall be stored off the ground and handled with care to avoid chipping and breakage. All
materials shall be protected from damage and, except for sand, kept dry until used. Cover sand to prevent
intrusion of water and foreign materials and to prevent drying. Do not use materials containing frost or ice.

[Link] Bracing
Provide bracing and scaffolding necessary for masonry work. Design bracing to resist wind pressure as
required by local code.

Masonry connectors must be made of stainless steel. These are used when parts of the masonry are
replaced when an addition to the masonry bond is disrupted or can only be restored to a limited extent
and when new masonry parts are connected to an existing wall. All other walls and masonry additions are
to be bricked up in accordance with the rules of technology.

[Link] Masonry Units

1. Solid and perforated Brick: Average dimensions of brick shall be 55 mm thick, 120 mm high, and 250
mm long (standard), subject to the tolerances. The solid and perforated Bricks shall be in accordance to
DIN 105.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 101

2. Facing Brick: Average dimensions of brick shall be 55 mm thick, 120 mm high, and 250 mm long
(standard), subject to the tolerances. Color, texture, and range of facing brick shall match the brick indicated
in the drawings. Brick shall be of uniform light buff color with a wire cut texture. The facing Brick shall be
in accordance with UNI 89422

[Link] Installation
Construction of masonry brickwork shall not commence until the Engineer has accepted the footings on
which it is to be placed.

Brickwork shall be built plumb, curved or battered as shown on the Drawings or as may be required, by
skilled masons and properly supervised workmen. Bricks shall be clean and if necessary, they shall be
scrubbed. Bricks shall be soaked in water for at least one hour before use.

Brick should be laid as indicated in drawings or schedules, or as specified by Engineer. All horizontal joints
shall be parallel and level. Vertical joints in alternate courses shall come directly over one another. Joint
thickness shall be 8mm and shall in no case exceed 12mm. The height of four courses including 4 bed joints
shall rise 300 mm. Set out brickwork with joints of uniform width and minimise cutting of masonry units.

Walls shall always be carried up regularly along their entire length unless otherwise instructed by the
Engineer. Bricks should be laid so that only full courses are used to avoid splitting bricks at beams, ledges,
lintels.

Mortar Mix

Mortar mixing shall be done in a mechanical mixer unless the Engineer specifically permits hand mixing. If
hand-mixing is done, the operation shall be carried out on a clean watertight platform and cement & sand
shall be first mixed dry in the required proportion to obtain a uniform colour and then the mortar shall be
mixed for at least two minutes after addition of water.

Cement Mortar shall be mixed in such quantities as can be used in the work within 30 minutes. Mortar,
which has taken initial set, shall not be used, nor shall it be re-mixed with fresh mortar.

Preparing lime putty:

 Using hydrated lime: Add lime to water in a clean container and stir to a thick creamy consistency.
Leave undisturbed for at least 16 hours. Remove excess water and protect from drying out.
 Using quicklime: Run to putty as soon as possible after receipt of quicklime. Partly fill clean
container with water, add lime to half the height of the water, then stir and hoe ensuring that no
lime remains exposed above the water. Continue stirring and hoeing for at least 5 minutes after all
reaction has ceased, then sieve into a maturing bin. Leave undisturbed for at least 14 days. Protect
from drying out.

2.5.3 Lintels
Lintels shall be installed for the width of the wall allowing for a seating of 25 cm on both sides. Concrete
installation shall follow the stipulations made in Chapter 2.4.

The thickness, steel reinforcement and other requirements shall be according to the design drawings.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 102

Sequence of installation shall be as follows:

- Installation of the vertical support elements which will bear temporary additional load
- Construction of first reinforced concrete lintel (12,5cm x 20cm, length according to drawings) - First
the reinforcement shall be installed, then the concrete shall be placed (C25/30)
- After curing of concrete, the second and third reinforced concrete lintel shall be installed consecutively
- After sufficient time for curing of concrete, the wall underneath the surface shall be cut open and
removed (only for the size as required)
- Repair of bricks, plastering and painting shall be done according to the requirements

2.6 Insulation and surfaces of walls, ceilings, floors, roof, and other parts

2.6.1 General
This section covers the requirements on interior and exterior preparation of new insulation, water proofing
and final surfaces, including walls, ceilings, floors, roof and other areas of the works.

The surface preparation and all works shall be carried out to the requirements of these Specifications, the
relevant standards and the material manufacturer's recommendation, all subject to the Engineer’s approval.

The different layers of the insulation and surface preparation are shown in the design drawings. Installation
of the different materials and layers shall follow the manufacturers recommendations and relevant DIN
norms.

2.6.2 Submittals
The manufacturer shall submit for each component of the system/ layer/ material for the Engineer’s
approval at least but not limited to the following:

• Identification of material system along with trade names.

• Intended place of installation together with method statement
• Surface preparation requirements.
• Acceptance of suitability for the environmental exposure condition.
• Certificates of Standards (DIN, EN, ISO etc.)
• Mixing and application instructions
• Health and safety data sheet
• Application data including equipment and nozzles and pressures to be used (if applicable)
• Surface preparations
• Limiting conditions of use
• Storage, handling, protection instructions
• The application method statement along with appropriate site QC-Forms.
• Qualifications of the Supplier / Applicators
• Relevant certified values according to specifications (e.g. U-value for Insulation
• Any

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 103

[Link] Qualifications of Suppliers and Applicators
Coating manufacturers supplying to the work directly or through agents or representatives shall have the
following:

a. Research and development facilities (local or overseas) or else a technological co-operation with a
company or body with such facilities
b. Quality control facilities, equipment suitable for quality production and assurance
c. Test lab equipped to conduct all the tests required in the specification or the use of external
laboratories suitably equipped
d. Technical service staff suitably qualified and knowledgeable of applications and expected
performances required by the specification.

The Contractor shall submit all aforesaid information for the Engineer’s approval.

Coating applicators shall have the following:

a. Purpose built facilities for the proper application of coatings

b. Equipment and facilities: Compressors with air tanks, pressure gauges and regulators, air filters,
pressure hoses, spray guns, tips and nozzles, component airless spray equipment and spares, dust
free and well-lit spray booths or areas, high pressure water washers, soap detergent, hand washing
and shower facilities, mechanical abraders, wire brushes, grinders, instrumentation for measuring
temperature, humidity, paint properties gauges for measuring thickness of coating, holiday tester
etc.
c. Properly trained, experienced and skilled staff and inspectors shall be available.
d. The ability to provide and erect dust-free and sheltered booths at the place of application
e. The ability to set-up proper equipment and facilities at the place of application as specified

The Contractor shall ensure that the coating applicator shall provide before the works begin to the
Engineer, instruments for measuring substrate and coating properties listed below:

a. Surface moisture determining instruments.

b. Thermometer and Humidity Meter
c. Surface temperature determining instrument
d. Wet and dry film thickness instruments
e. Holiday tester
f. Adhesion testers

Coating shall be carried out only by the applicators specialized in this field.

The exact type and models of instrument for each measurement shall be agreed with the Engineer before
the works begin.

The applicators shall be approved by the Engineer and the Employer prior to proceed with the works after
site demonstrations have been carried out and the standard of workmanship is established.

The applicator shall be a company specializing in performing the work of this section acceptable to the
manufacturer with documented experience for at least 3 years.

The performance of these applicators shall be appraised on regular basis.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 104

[Link] Delivery, Storage and Handling
The Contractor shall transport, handle, store and protect products in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions and recommendations.

Products shall be delivered to place of application in sealed and labelled containers.

Container label shall include manufacturer’s name, type of paint/ material, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage applications surface preparation drying time, clean-up requirements, colour designation,
and instructions for mixing and reducing as well as any other useful information.

Paint and coating materials shall be stored at minimum ambient temperature of 150C and maximum of
250C in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer’s instructions and Health and Safety requirements.

[Link] Environmental Requirements

The Contractor shall provide lighting level of candles 860 lux measured mid-height at substrate surface.

Exterior coatings and painting shall not be applied during rain, sandstorms, or when relative humidity is
outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

All preparation and coatings at works shall be carried out under the following conditions:

a. Coated in a protective enclosure

b. Ambient temperatures are not greater than 35o C
c. Relative humidity is below 85 %
d. Required DEW point as per manufacturer recommendation

[Link] Health and Safety

The Contractor and Sub-Contractors should provide health and safety training to their staff.

Protective clothing shall be provided to all staff employed on coating activities and shall include, but not
be limited to overalls, masks, air respirators, goggles, gloves, head covers, blasting protective gear,
protective boots, etc.

2.6.3 Materials

[Link] Polystyrene
All polystyrene application and materials shall be according to relevant Standards, such as DIN EN 13163.

The polystyrene shall have a thermal conductivity of 0.040 W/mK or better.

Expanded Polystyrene shall be used for insulation of external walls and roof, whereas Extruded Polystyrene
shall be used for bottom part of the building. Thickness of all layers shall be according to the drawings (10
cm for walls and bottom, 12cm for roof).

Additional Insulation of adequate size and form shall be provided for edges and to avoid any other possible
heat bridges.

All insulation layers shall be consisting of boards in applicable sizes.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 105

Installation shall be according to the manufacturers requirements and required materials for fixing made
available.

[Link] Adhesive Mortar

All mortar application and materials shall be according to relevant Standards such as DIN EN 1308, EN 459-
2.

Materials

Cement: Cement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM specification C-150 Type 1 or similar approved
standard for normal Portland cement.

White cement: Iron salts content <= 1%.

Off-white cement: Iron salts content <=2.5%.

Lime: Confirm source of Lime with the Engineer to ensure highest quality Lime is used in the mortar. Protect
from damage on site and store minimum 300mm above ground in waterproof storage facility.

Sand: Fine aggregate with a low clay content selected for grading, sharp and free from efflorescing salts.

Measurement of volume: Measure binders and sand by volume using buckets or boxes. Do not allow sand
to bulk by absorption of water.

Bedding mortar

Proportioning: Select proportions from the range 1:3 – 1:4 cements and to obtain satisfactory adhesion –
to be agreed upon and approved by the Engineer on-site.

Provide minimum water.

[Link] Fiberglass Reinforcement Mesh

The fiberglass reinforcement mesh shall be consisting of a Polyester film core with a reinforcing fiberglass
scrim bonded to one side or similar with the same properties.

The membrane shall be impervious to moisture, flexible, and not affected by caustic alkalis.

The following technical data or better shall be used:

 surface mass - 105g/m²

 eye size - 7x7 mm
 width - 1 m
 length - 50 m

The mesh shall be cut to the required size on-site. In the case of fabric inserts, particular attention must be
paid to the respective corner formations. This applies to the connection to windows, soffits, building
corners inside and outside and the finish on the roof and base. Furthermore, according to the
manufacturer's instructions, approved end rails shall be used. Any necessary expansion rails must be
planned for and possibly agreed with the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 106

[Link] Cement Plaster
All cement plaster applications and materials shall be according to relevant Standards such as DIN EN 998.

Materials:

- Accessories Beads: To be metal proprietary sections manufactured to be fixed to backgrounds and/or

embedded in the plaster to form and protect plaster edges and junctions
- Sand: To be fine, sharp, well-graded sand with a low clay content and free from efflorescing salts
- Bonding products: To be proprietary products manufactured for bonding cement-based plaster to
solid backgrounds
- Cement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM specification C-150 Type 1 or similar approved
standard for normal Portland cement.
- Coloring products: to be proprietary products manufactured for coloring cement plaster. Integral
pigment proportion: 5% by mass of cement.
- Curing Products: To be proprietary products manufactured for use with the plaster system.
- Lime: Confirm source of Lime with Engineer to ensure highest quality Lime is used in the mortar. Protect
from damage on site and store minimum 300mm above ground in waterproof storage facility.
Preparing lime putty:
 Using hydrated lime: Add lime to water in a clean container and stir to a thick creamy
consistency. Leave undisturbed for at least 16 hours. Remove excess water and protect from
drying out. Using quicklime: Run to putty as soon as possible after receipt of quicklime.
Partly fill clean container with water, add lime to half the height of the water, then stir and
hoe ensuring that no lime remains exposed above the water. Continue stirring and hoeing
for at least 5 minutes after all reaction has ceased, then sieve into a maturing bin. Leave
undisturbed for at least 14 days. Protect from drying out.

Select a mix ratio to suit the application in conformity to the Mixes table as shown below.

Measurement: Measure binders and sand by volume using buckets or boxes. Do not allow sand to bulk by
absorption of water.

Plaster mixing: Machine mix for greater than 3 minutes and less than 6 minutes.

Strength of successive coats: Ensure successive coats are no richer in binder than the coat to which they
are applied

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 107

CRF: Cement render – finish.
CRM: Cement render – medium.
CRS: Cement render – stronger.
CRW: Cement render – weaker.
LF: Lime felting render- weaker.
GPM: Gypsum render - medium
GPF: Gypsum plaster – finish.

[Link] Painting/ Surface Coating

[Link].1 Emulsion Paints

Plastered surfaces whereas decoration paints (i.e., Emulsion paint system) are specified; it shall be high
quality acrylic copolymer-based emulsion paint with outstanding wash ability, color retention properties
and give smooth silky durable finishing.

Emulsion paint system shall comply with the following:

a. Primer / Sealer: PVA copolymer, one layer

b. Putty: PVA copolymer putty, min. two layers, DFT >=100 microns @ each layer
c. Final Paint: Acrylic copolymer-based emulsion, min. two layers, DFT >= 70 microns @ each layer.

Substrate surface shall be fully cured, clean and dry.

Surface imperfections shall be repaired to achieve level smooth surface, fair faced looking, and all the
stages of the system shall then be applied.

The temperature of substrate should be >10C and minimum 3C above DEW Point of the air at all stages
of application system.

Coating applicators must be duly trained and certified by the reputable paint manufacturer.

Pull-off (adhesion / cohesion) of all stages shall meet the manufacturer’s requirements.

The following tests shall be observed to the Engineer’s satisfaction on mock-up sample:

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 108

a. Visual inspection of prepared substrate
b. Weather observation (Temperature, humidity, substrate temperature, DEW point temperature, etc.)
c. WFT and DFT of each layer
d. Final visual checks on colour matching across manufacturer standard, surface finish, etc.
e. Pull off tests
f. Wash ability

The preparation and coating applications for metal surfaces are given in the following table:

Table 2-7: Preparation and Coating Application for Metal Surfaces

Surface preparation and coating application

Exp. class

total µ DFT
Surfaces
Preparation Primer Intermediate coat Topcoat

Electrical posts, crane, Solvent based, Solvent based amine

Solvent based
frames, gates, DI- Pickle and hot dip two components cured two pack epoxy
polyurethane 1 550
pipes, fittings galvanized to BS 729 etch primer one 2 coats DFT 250 µ
coat DFT: 50 µ
A1

(external surfaces) coat DFT 50 µ each

Solvent free, amine
Solvent based
cured two pack epoxy
n/a polyurethane 550
2 coats DFT: 250 µ
1 coat DFT: 50 µ
each
Solvent free, amine
Steel works, DI-pipes
cured two pack epoxy
A.2 A 3

and fittings (external n/a 500

2 coats DFT: 250 µ
surfaces)
Degrease grit blast each
DI-pipes and fittings to SA 2.5, profile 80 µ Solvent free, amine
(external surfaces), cured two pack epoxy
n/a 500
mh-covers, gratings 2 coats DFT: 250 µ
A.4

and frames each

Two pack vinyl ester
glass filled epoxy
500
2 coats DFT: 250 µ
each
A.5, 6, 7 & 8

DI-Pipes and Fittings Degrease grit blast Solvent free, amine

(External Surfaces), to SA 2.5, profile 80 N/A cured two pack epoxy 500
Valves microns 2 coats DFT: 250 µ
each

DI-Pipes and Fittings Solvent free, amine

Degrease grit blast
(External Surfaces), cured two pack epoxy
A.9 & 10

to SA 2.5, profile 80 N/A 500

Valves, MH-Covers 2 coats DFT: 250 µ
microns
and Frames each

Two pack vinyl ester

glass filled epoxy
500
2 coats DFT: 250 µ
each
Notes:

a. Use this table in conjunction with respective specified requirements.

b. Blasting surface profiles tolerance 10µm.
c. DFT (Dry Film Thickness) is the minimum requirement.
d. A complete system shall be sourced from one manufacturer.
e. Complete method statement shall be submitted from the manufacturer.
f. All coating systems shall be resistant to the exposed conditions in addition to specified requirements.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 109

g. The factory applied coating systems on external surfaces of DI-Pipes and Fittings shall be blasted and re-coated
by reputable coating applicator as specified.
h. For metal parts where high coating thickness will interfere with the fit, backed enamels based on corrosion resistant
coatings such as phenolics, polyamides, PVDF, PTFE and similar shall be used.
i. Small items of steel or metal parts shall be electroplated, electro coated or subject to other proprietary process
suitable for protection in aggressive conditions.

The preparation and coating applications for concrete surfaces are given in the following table:

Table 2-8: Preparation and Coating Application for Concrete Surfaces

Exp. Surfaces Surface Preparation and Coating Application

Class Preparation Primer Intermediate Coat Top Coat Total DFT
A.1 Manhole / Sweep blast, clean to make Surface Solvent free, amine Solvent 550
Chamber / surface fair faced and smooth, Penetrating cured two pack epoxy based microns
PS – Cover free from cracks, blowholes, Sealer / 2 Coats DFT: 250 polyurethane
Slabs, pinholes, bug holes, pits, Primer microns each 1 Coat DFT
Buildings, voids etc. Fill the small holes :50 microns
Effluent with epoxy amine putty filler,
Tanks big holes with epoxy amine
(External) mortar, cracks with resin as
applicable
A.2 Buildings, Surface Acrylic emulsions N/A 300
Rooms Penetrating system 3 Coats DFT: microns
Sealer / Skim 100 microns each
Coating, 2
Component
Epoxy Amine
A.3 Valve / Solvent free, amine 500
Inspection cured two pack epoxy microns
Chambers, 2 Coats DFT: 250
Dry Wells microns each
A.4 Wet Wells, OR Solvent free, amine N/A 500
Lifting / cured two pack epoxy, microns
Pumping 2 Coats
Stations DFT: 250 microns each

Two pack vinyl ester 400

glass filled epoxy, 2 microns
Coats DFT: 200
microns each
A.5, 6, Manholes, Solvent free, amine N/A 500
7&8 Chambers, cured two pack epoxy microns
Effluent 2 Coats DFT: 250
Tanks microns each
A.9 & Settlement Sweep blast, clean and make Surface OR Solvent free, amine N/A 500
10 Tanks, surface fair faced and smooth, Penetrating cured two pack epoxy microns
Base of free from cracks, blowholes, Sealer / Skim 2 Coats
Drying pinholes, bug holes, pits, Coating, 2 DFT: 250 microns each
Beds, Air voids etc. Fill the small holes Component
Blower with epoxy amine putty filler, Epoxy Amine
Tank big holes with epoxy amine
mortar, cracks with resin as
applicable
Two pack vinyl ester 400
glass filled epoxy, 2 microns
Coats
DFT: 200 microns each

Remarks:

a. Use membrane for embedded parts of RC-Structures e.g., Treatment Plant, Lifting / Pumping Stations as specified.
b. Fillers, plasticizers, diluents etc. must be resistant to acid attack.
Notes:

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 110

a. Use this table in conjunction with applicable tables and the specification.
b. Blasting surface profiles tolerances 10µm.
c. DFT (Dry Film Thickness) is the minimum required.
d. A complete system shall be sourced from one manufacturer.
e. Complete method statement shall be submitted from the manufacturer.
f. All coating systems shall be resistant to the exposed conditions.

The colour schedule is given in the following table:

Table 2-9: Colour Schedule

Item Colour
Floor tiles and skirting To be agreed upon by Engineer

Duct covers (hardwood)

Concrete steps, ramps and aprons

Internal surfaces

Tiles

Ceilings

External surfaces

Internal doors surfaces

External doors

Skirting boards and dirt panels

Door frames (wood)

Aluminium surfaces

GRP surfaces

The required surface preparations for different materials and surfaces are in the following table:

Table 2-10: Surface Preparations

Material Surface Preparation

Wood

Cabinet finish Not applicable

Gloss or matt paint finish or Sand wood using 180 grit paper. Fill all holes, treat knots, sand to flat and smooth
varnish finish. Sand inter coating surfaces using 400 grit wet and dry paper.

Concrete Sweep blast, clean and make surface fair faced and smooth, free from cracks,
blowholes, pinholes, bug holes, pits, voids etc. Fill the small holes with epoxy
amine putty filler, big holes with epoxy amine mortar, cracks with resin as
applicable

Cast Iron and steels Degrease cast iron / steels, fettle, grind off fins, sand spots and round out sharp
edges before grit blasting. Grit blast to SA21/2 to 80 microns profile. Fill all
blowholes and minor cavities (if acceptable) with two component amine cured
epoxy filler.

Stainless & Austenitic Steels No treatment unless specified

Anodized Aluminium & all No treatment unless specified

other non-ferrous metals

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 111

 Galvanized Mild Steel If fresh and un-oxidized sweep blast
If oxidized high pressure water wash
(Before application of mist coat primer)

Wire mesh for embedding in Sandblast to SA21/2 and remove all oil, grease and other contamination and
concrete residues.

Metal: All metals surfaces shall be high pressure washed to remove deposits of grease, oil, tar and other
residues and shall meet the requirements of coating manufacturer.

Concrete: All concrete surfaces shall be cleaned of mould oils by washing, sweep blast or needle gun to
roughen surface. Make fair faced by applying an approved epoxy-amine surface, all surface blowholes, pits
and surface defects, irregularities etc. must be filled with solvent free epoxy-amine filler.

The exposure classes for different locations and surface exposure conditions along with the degree of
aggressiveness are given in the following table:

Table 2-11: Exposure of Surfaces (Metal and Concrete)

Class Location Surface Exposure Condition Degree Of

Aggressiveness

A.1 Atmosphere Exposed to Atmosphere of above ground level and Mild

liable to cycles of condensation, Ultraviolet and
drying

A.2 Atmosphere Inside air-conditioned building / fairly dry Very Mild to Mild

A.3 Atmosphere Inside but exposed to heavy condensation e.g., Aggressive

Inspection / valve chambers

A.4 Atmosphere Inside / outside building but one side of surface Very Aggressive
exposed to H2S gases / acid condensation, inside wet
wells etc.

A.5 Soil / Backfilling Dry Very Mild

A.6 Soil / Backfilling Moist, wet, saturated or condensed with capillary rise Aggressive

A.7 Liquid Recycled / effluent / potable water / storm water etc. Aggressive

A.8 Liquid Seawater, splash zone, ground water etc. Very Aggressive

A.9 Liquid Inside sanitary sewage, bacteria, liquids containing Very Aggressive
dissolved organic acids

A.10 Liquid Highly aggressive medium e.g., sulphuric acid, H2 SO4 Extremely Aggressive
formation with condensation of H2 S gases, organic
acids etc.

The preparation and painting schedule for surfaces other than metal are given in the following table:

Table 2-12: Preparation and Painting Schedule for Surfaces Other than Metal

Surface Location Finish Preparation Primer Final Treatment

Soft Wood Interior Gloss Sand down 1 Coat pink primer 3 Coats alkyd

Exterior Gloss Sand down 1 Coat pink primer 3 Coats alkyd

Plaster (including Interior Flat Sand down 1 Coat 2 Coats emulsion

plaster board)

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 112

 Exterior Gloss Sand down 1 Coat alkali 2 Coats alkyd
resistant primer

Interior Multicolour Sand down 1 Coat primer 1 Coat multi-

colour wall finish

Cement Rendering Interior Flat - 1 Coat emulsion 2 Coats emulsion

Concrete (fair faced)

Exterior Gloss - 1 Coat alkali 2 Coats alkyd

resistant primer

Immersed Matte Wire brush 1 Coat special 2 Coats epoxy

(Epoxy) primer

Brickwork Exterior Sandtex Stiff brush 1 Coat stabilizing 2 Coats sandtex

solution

Hardboard Interior Gloss Zinc chromate 1 Coat emulsion 2 Coats emulsion

spot primer to
screw and nail
heads

Interior Gloss Zinc chromate 1 Coat hardboard 2 Coats alkyd

spot primer to primer
screw and nail
heads

[Link].2 Epoxy Coating to Concrete Surfaces

All surfaces to be protected with the epoxy paint system are to be prepared as described below,
maintaining the sequence of operations shown:

a. Areas of concrete contaminated with machine oil or grease shall be cut out as necessary to remove all
traces and made good with an epoxy mortar.
b. Areas contaminated with release agent shall be scrubbed with suitable emulsion cleansers and any
mould growth with water-soluble fungicide.
c. Materials containing Acids and chloride shall not be used for cleaning concrete surfaces.
d. All approved concrete and rendered surfaces to be treated shall be lightly blast-cleaned to remove the
cement-rich surface layer.
e. Grit and detritus shall be removed by vacuum just prior to priming.
f. The moisture content of the concrete surface shall be  5% measured by approved electronic device.

The surface of the concrete shall be smooth and free of surface defects such as blanches, pits and
honeycombs to receive primer. A minimum 24 hours to be elapsed before starting the epoxy coatings.

The first coat shall be applied by a suitable nylon bristle brush or when sprayed shall subsequently be
squeezed or brushed to wet the surface better.

Cleanliness of the surfaces of the epoxy coats between coats shall be maintained.

The surfaces of the coatings between coats shall be free of visible moisture throughout these operations.

Any thick runs or collections of paint shall be removed before they harden. Not less than two coats shall
be applied over the primer.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 113

Application tools and method shall comply with the instructions of the coating/paint manufacturer and as
approved by the Engineer.

Each coat shall completely cover the entire area without” misses” or pinholes or any areas visibly low in
thickness.

A high voltage pinhole detector shall be used to determine the integrity of the coats.

Pinholes, misses and other defects in the coating shall be repaired by abrading the cured coating for about
50 mm greater than the area to be repaired and then re-applying the specified coating.

The coatings shall be suitably protected against physical damages during the backfill operation by new 4
mm thick approved plywood sheets.

The Epoxy manufacturer shall stipulate primer and high build epoxy re-coat intervals for all curing
temperatures likely to be encountered and these shall be adopted with 4-hours maximum tolerance. Where
this is exceeded the surfaces to be re-coated shall first be suitably abraded to remove gloss and give key.

[Link].3 Quality assurance

On completion, all coatings shall be checked with a holiday detector or spare tester like instruments to the
Engineer’s approval to locate pinholes and other discontinuities in the finished work. Such holes shall be
neatly patched in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations and to the Engineer’s
approval.

The Contractor shall demonstrate all his methods, equipment and materials produce the desired quality to
get the Engineer’s approval before any work commences.

The applicator shall show adequate skill and experience in the use of chemically cured compositions for
high performance application.

An electrically operated mixer may be used but only where it can be shown that it does not entrain air in
the paint.

On no account are thinners or dilutants to be mixed with paint or coating materials. Strict control shall be
exercised in the issue of thinners for cleaning brushes and equipment.

Fillers and topcoats shall be applied to done-dry surfaces.

Adhesion tests will be carried out on the cured coating surfaces using approved test equipment’s. The test
results specimens shall not show indication of poor adhesion to the substrate, residual laitance or inter
coat adhesion weakness.

[Link] Water- and damp proofing layer

Related standards such as DIN 18531 and DIN EN 13967 shall be adhered during material selection as well
as installation and testing.

The material of the water- and damp proofing layer shall be as followed or better:

- three-layer composite sheet membrane consisting of min. 0.41 mm of high-density polyethylene film
or other appropriate material, min. 0.64 mm of specially formulated synthetic adhesive and min. 0.03
mm of protective coating
- unaffected flexibility up to minus 23 Degrees Celsius
- Water absorption max. 0,5%

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 114

- Elongation min. 300%
- Tensile Strength min. 27.600 kPa
- Peel Adhesion to Concrete min. 800 N/m
- Lap Adhesion min. 440 N/m

It must be ensured that the following conditions exist prior to application of the membrane materials:

Drains, curbs, cants, and equipment supports are in place.

Surfaces are rigid, dry, smooth, and free from cracks, holes, and sharp changes in elevation.

Substrate is sloped as indicate to provide positive drainage.

Cast-in-place substrates have been allowed to cure and the surface dryness specified requirements have
been met. Substrate curing shall be compatible with the membrane system.

Priming Of Concrete Surfaces:

After surface dryness requirements have been met, coat concrete surfaces which are to receive membrane
sheet uniformly with bitumen primer. The primer shall be applied in the ratio 130g/m2. Allow primer to dry
prior to application of membrane sheet.

Application:

Application shall follow the relevant standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer.

Clean Up:

Remove debris, scraps, containers and other rubbish and trash resulting from installation of the roofing
system from job site each day.

Protection of Applied Membrane Against Moisture: At the end of the day’s work and when precipitation is
imminent protect applied modified bitumen membrane system.

[Link] Ceramic Tiles

The ceramic tiles shall adhere to the relevant standards such as ISO 13006, EN177, EN159, DIN EN 14411,
ISO 10545-2

The color of tiles and adhesive for the different areas of installation needs to be agreed upon and approved
by the Engineer and Employer.

The general specifications shall prevail for ceramic tiles of Group BIa (Eb ≤ 0,5%), dry pressed.

Tile adhesive shall be chosen according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and best suitable to the
underlying material.

An appropriate flexible mortar should be selected. In addition, attention must be paid to the pre-treatment
of the substrates. This applies to the cleaning of old coverings, adhesive and paint residues. The application
of a primer and any necessary application of a tile leveler. Cracks in the substrate must first be resinified
and needled. Movement joints must be formed in the tile and joint pattern.

2.6.4 Execution
All painting processes, methods, materials, systems, surface preparation, equipment used, conditions under
which application proceeds, staff utilized, and safe conditions shall have the prior approval of the Engineer.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 115

The Contractor shall verify existing conditions before starting work.

The Contractor shall verify that surfaces are ready to receive coating treatment in accordance with
instructions issued by the manufacturer and by this specification.

The Contractor shall examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report
immediately on conditions that may potentially affect proper application or spoilt applications.

The Contractor shall examine, and test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover
materials.

Copies of manufacturer data sheets and of the relevant parts of this Specification shall be issued to all the
staff and workmen concerned with the painting and/or coating process.

The Contractor shall measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not
apply finishes until moisture readings are within ranges given by coating manufactures. The following
applies only as a guide:

a. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard:  10%

b. Concrete:  5%
c. Wood:  15%.

All surfaces not subjected to the coating process shall be masked with proper materials.

All products shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by the
Engineer.

Where such instructions conflict with this Specification a ruling shall be sought from the Engineer.

The Contractor shall not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.

Each coat shall be applied to uniform thickness.

2.6.5 Finishing of Edges and Neatness of visible surfaces

The Contractor shall ensure that all surfaces, edges and other visible areas will be finished and completed
in a neat, pleasant and visually appealing way. This shall be done in coordination with and to the satisfaction
of the Engineer and Employer.

If required, the Engineer may require the Contractor to remove the covering layer/ paint if the result does
not look as desired. Furthermore, it might be required to install plates or strips for edges.

2.7 Suspended Ceilings

The installation of suspended ceilings shall follow the standard DIN EN 13964 and according to the design
drawings.

The Contractor shall verify and check that all required installations (electrical, HVAC, water supply etc.) will
have sufficient space within the suspended ceilings and can be properly fixed according to the design and
fit for purpose. Inspection flaps must be installed as specified and in consultation with the Engineer. The
respective load on the ceilings with lamps or attachments must be taken into account. The substructure
shall be designed accordingly.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 116

2.8 Shading Elements
The shading elements shall consist of a rail system (steel galvanized), which shall be attached to the facade
in front of the respective window with an upper and a lower rail.

The system shall be attached using approved dowels in the masonry facade with spacers for the insulation.

The shading elements shall be mounted on roller bearings in the rail system.

The elements shall consist of an aluminum construction with fixed horizontal slats. (Shading is 70%)
Coloring shall be approved by the Engineer and Employer. A RAL color / lacquer shall be used. The shading
elements shall be operated manually with the window open. A holding device for the closed and open
state must be installed.

2.9 Doors and Windows

2.9.1 Doors
All doors shall be equipped with cylinder locks, using the same type of key, with six keys to each lock. Doors
shall comply with DIN regulations as but not restricted to DIN 18 100, DIN 18 251, DIN EN 2027, DIN EN
1191, DIN EN 1192.

For all work, the respective test reports, certificates, and approvals must be submitted upon completion of
the work. A specialist site manager declaration or specialist contractor declaration must be issued for the
respective building. All doors shall be equipped with adjustable hinges to enable later adjustment if
necessary. The handle sets and attachments shall be agreed and approved by the engineer in order to
remain in one design.

Glazed doors shall be equipped with shatterproof glass single glazed for inside doors and double glazed
for outside doors. A privacy foil / frosted glass foil may be required in some areas. The extent will be
determined with the Engineer and the Employer after the doors have been installed.

Steel doors shall be of the hollow metal type constructed in standard profiles and sheet steel.

Aluminium doors shall be of anodized hollow metal sections constructed in Standard Profiles and sheet
aluminium. They shall be thoroughly braced internally, prepared to receive hardware and accurately
finished so that the surfaces are true and smooth. Edges angles and covers shall be square, clean and sharp.
Doors shall be complete with hinges, stoppers, and locks. The doors shall be provided with buffer strips
fixed all around the frame. Aluminium doors shall be fabricated to and shall consist of materials of an
accepted international standard as approved by the Engineer.

Fittings and door handles:

Front door fittings and fittings for access doors are to be delivered as security fittings/protective fittings
for profile cylinders. The handle sets are to be made of stainless steel, with a matt polished finish. Profile
cylinder perforated probably 92mm, shield 68mm x 240mm, handle length 140mm Sleeve assembly from
the inside for increased security

Interior doors:

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 117

Single-leaf interior doors in dimensions 760/885 or 1010. Smooth door leaf, no fillings, no profiles. Surface
lacquer satin matt according to RAL color chart, leaf insert - tubular chipboard 16kg/m2 climate class 1
stress class M. All edges are to be rounded off with at least 2mm. Rebated impact with all-round rabbet
seal, concealed lipping on the long side, can be replanned. Class 2 mortise lock according to DIN 18250
prepared for profile cylinder. Drill-in hinges V0020 Steel enclosing frame surface finish satin matt according
to RAL color chart. Visible pocket of the surrounding frame depending on the wall thickness. Mau widths
differ depending on the masonry. Installation situation in masonry, reinforced concrete or drywall.

Fire Protection Doors:

Door element as a steel door with a steel frame in the design of an approved and tested fire protection
element as a fire/smoke protection door T30RS according to DIN 4102/DIN 18095, tightly closing and self-
closing - built-in situation as corridor doors with glass section in the door leaf laminated safety glass with
clear or matt foil.

2.9.2 Windows
Windows to be with double glazing with insulation glass, insulation according to climatic conditions as
recommended in DIN and relevant EN regulations. Such regulations are for example: DIN 18101, DIN
18055, DIN EN 2027, DIN EN 1191, DIN EN 1192, DN EN 12608.

Windows and frames shall be manufactured of PVC-U profiles of anodized aluminium, to the dimensions
given on the drawings. They should generally be supplied with one horizontally sliding sash complete with
sash-bolt. Windows installed in offices two metres or more above the ground shall be provided with bottom
hinged sashes with an operating lever to be fixed 1.5 metre above floor level including connection to the
window. All windows shall be designed to withstand wind pressures and to be dust proof.

Openings in windows shall be provided with an aluminium fly-screen mesh. In offices the glass shall
normally be 5 mm thick clear sheet glass, and in workshops and similar buildings it shall normally be 7 mm
thick wire reinforced glass.

Aluminium windows shall be fabricated to and shall consist of materials of an accepted international
standard as approved by the Engineer.

Windowsill on the room side:

30mm thick wood composite windowsill. Corners and edges rounded with at least 2mm. Flat attachment
to prevent bulging, sealing of joint areas to prevent water ingress. Even with coupled windows, the
windowsill runs completely across the entire clear width. The inner edge of the windowsill is always to be
installed with a 30mm front edge of the plaster surface

Outside air inflow element in window frame 422x45x24mm:

In the rooms with forced ventilation, the supply air must be ensured via the windows. Installation of the
fresh air opening in a lower frame extension directly above the connection to the outside windowsill. The
outside air inflow element is to be designed with volume flow control and volume flow limitation with
increased sound insulation. The element consists of an interior facade, mounting plate and exterior cover
strip made of plastic - nominal volume specification 45cbm/h, sound insulation D39dB

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 118

2.9.3 Installation of Doors and Windows
Doors and windows shall be installed plumb and true to line and shall operate smoothly.

All doors and windows shall be protected after installation and handed over in a clean and perfect condition
on completion of the Works.

2.10 Metalwork

2.10.1 General
This section shall specify requirements of the installation of the Emergency Steel Staircase, Steel Studs from
Dry walls, ducts and vents, Rain gutters, Railing, metal covers on roofs and any other metal structures part
of the works.

All steelwork (except roof structures) wherever installed shall be galvanized (in hot bath or zinc spraying).
Welding on galvanized steelwork has to be avoided and assembling has to be done by bolts and nuts.

The permissible design stresses for materials, bolts, rivets, etc., are given in DIN 18800, for welds in DIN
4100.

Rolled structural steel sections shall be mild steel, conforming to DIN 17100. The dimensions, tolerances
and properties of the structural sections shall conform to DIN 18201 up to 18203 and to DIN 18800. Where
the use of prefabricated proprietary designs is proposed, the Standards to which they are manufactured
shall be no less rigorous than specified herein.

For structural steel work assemblies, steel bolts, nuts and washers shall be high strength friction grip bolts
conforming to DIN 6914 up to DIN 6916 or black bolts including nuts and washers conforming to DIN 7989
and DIN 7990.

All welding consumables (electrodes, wire, filler rods, flux, shielding gas and the like) shall comply with the
requirements of the appropriate DIN Standard and with the requirements of the appropriate welding
procedure.

(a) All metalworks shall be erected and installed to the exact lines and positions shown on the Drawings or
determined by the Engineer. They shall be well anchored to the concrete foundations or structures.

Unless installation by grouting in anchor bolts or use of expansion anchors in previously prepared recesses
is approved, anchor bolts and metal parts to be embedded in concrete shall be placed in position before
casting of concrete and shall be held firmly and accurately in place while the concrete is being placed.

Only stainless steel (material no 1.457 according to DIN) may be used for any metalwork in contact with
wastewater.

Where cast iron components are to be installed, the surface boxes, or spindle casings and valve chambers,
step irons for manholes, shall be of standard manufacture and shall be supplied with pipes and accessories
in accordance with the relevant clauses of the Specification.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 119

All other metal work made of steel such as pipe supports, holder bats, pipe anchor clamps, etc., shall be
fabricated by the Contractor.

Bolt holes shall be made by drilling only and shall be accurately positioned so that bolts can be easily
inserted.

Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, bolts shall protrude from nuts not less than two threads.

2.10.2 Materials

[Link] Steelwork
Structural steelwork shall comply with recognized standards for general structural purposes.

Bolts, washers etc. for use with structural steel shall be black bolts. Fastenings, including bolts, for use with
materials having a galvanized finish shall be sherardized or have an alternative approved protective metal
coating.

Before ordering or fabricating any item of metalwork, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his
approval shop drawings showing all details and dimensions required for fabrication, assembly, and
erection. Fabrication shall only commence after the approval of the Engineer has been obtained.

[Link] Standard Sections

Angles, channels, flats and all standard steel sections shall be to the sizes given on the Drawings.

Angles or channels used for framing of openings in concrete structures or for guides shall be provided with
steel fixing lugs securely welded to the frame or guide prior to galvanizing.

Corrosion protection shall be as detailed on the Drawings or in the Bills of Quantities to the quality and
standard specified.

2.10.3 Welding
All welding during fabrication in the factory and erection on the Site shall be carried out in accordance with
the requirements as shown on the approved detail drawings. Details of the proposed welding procedures
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at the same time as the detail drawings. All connections
shall be welded in such a manner as to make the finished connections neat and smooth in appearance, and
suitable for painting. All slag shall be removed, and any sharp projections shall be ground smooth. All
welding carried out during fabrication in the factory and erection on the site shall be carried out in
accordance with the requirements of DIN 4100 and as shown on the approved detail drawings. Before
welding is commenced, either in the fabrication shop or on site, weld procedure tests shall be carried out
where instructed by the Engineer.

All welders employed in the fabrication shop or at site shall have passed qualification tests relevant to the
weld procedures in use in accordance with the appropriate DIN Standard. Welders shall have satisfactory
evidence of having been engaged in welding for at least 9 months in the preceding period. If the work of
any welders employed on the Contract is unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall carry out such further welder
qualification tests as are necessary to demonstrate that the welders are proficient.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 120

When not otherwise specified, welds shall be subject to non-destructive testing by processes which may
include but not necessarily be limited to radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic particle, or dye penetration
methods, depending on the type of weld and its position in the structure. About 50 % of all welding shall
be tested. If any work shows defects or fails to comply with the requirements of the approved drawings or
the specification for any reason, it shall be repaired or rejected, even though it may have been carried out
by qualified welders using approved procedures. The welding procedure for nickel linings shall avoid
porosity in the weld and any uncontrolled dilution of the weld by iron picked up from the steel. Special
precautions shall be taken to avoid lamellar tearing when welding thick plates and low hydrogen content
electrodes shall be used. Class 1 welds shall be fully radiographed except where otherwise specified.

In bad weather, appropriate measures are to be taken to keep the quality standard of welds. In case of
rainy weather, provision shall be made to keep the places of welding dry. In weather with temperatures
below 5 C°, a strip of 100 mm should be preheated to 50 C°, on both sides of the welded joint in case of
both seams and tack welds.

Splash, burning-in, uneven areas, oversized root edges at corner joints, unsatisfactory seam or any crack
are impermissible in the course of welding. Surfaces should be free from any marks of impact, indentation,
and deformation.

No welding on galvanized steelwork and over zinc primers or paint will be allowed.

Please also refer to Chapter 4.1.4 for more information on the requirements for welding and welders.

2.10.4 Galvanizing
Where steel or wrought iron is to be galvanized the galvanizing shall be executed after all fabrication has
been completed. The articles shall be cleaned and pickled in dilute sulphuric or hydrochloric acid followed
by rinsing in water and pickling in phosphoric acid. They shall be thoroughly washed, stoved, and dipped
in molten zinc and brushed so that the whole of the metal shall be evenly covered and the additional
weight thereof after dipping shall be not less than 0.6 kg/m² of surface galvanized, except in the case of
tubes when it shall be not less than 0.46 kg/m². Edges shall be clean and surfaces bright.

2.10.5 Nuts and Bolts

External bolts and fixing rag bolts, nuts and washers shall be sherardized steel. Assembly nuts, bolts and
washers on galvanized fittings or equipment shall be either galvanized or sherardized.

Nuts and bolts used in the fabrication of aluminium structures shall be cadmium plated and shall have
galvanized washers. Washers shall be separated from the aluminium structure by fibre washers of equal
diameter.

2.10.6 Iron Castings

Iron castings shall be made from properly prepared patterns and moulds. All castings for dead ends and
manhole frames and covers shall be of tough grey iron, free from warps, cracks, holes, swells and cold shuts
and shall have a workmanlike finish. Before leaving the foundry, all castings shall be thoroughly cleaned
and subjected to a hammer inspection after which they shall be dipped twice in a preparation of hot asphalt
or coal tar in such a manner as to form a firm fully bonded coating.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 121

2.10.7 Fixing and Building-In
Where fixing bolts are positioned by means of a template they shall be supported and braced to remain in
perfect alignment during the setting of the concrete or grout. Where it is necessary to drill for fixing, the
holes shall be the correct size and they shall be grouted solid with cement mortar.

Frames and plates to be fixed against the face of concrete masonry or brickwork shall be supported against
the face and separated from it by packings. Immediately before fixing the frames or plates, the face shall
be carefully cleaned and roughened over the whole area to be covered. The nut securing each point shall
be lightly tightened to hold the frames or flange in its correct position without distortion. The space
between the face and frames or plates shall then be filled with cement mortar or hard setting butyl mastic.
After the filling has hardened, the nuts shall be finally tightened in sequence to prevent distortion and to
ensure equal bearing. The packing shall maintain a minimum gap of 10 mm to be filled with cement mortar.
The material of the packing shall be to the approval of the Engineer; it shall be waterproof, durable and
compatible with the materials with which it comes into contact. It shall be hard, but just sufficiently flexible
so that any shrinkage of the filler during hardening is taken up in the process of final tightening. When
fixing sluices and the like, gates or doors shall be in the closed position.

Care shall be taken to protect faces and other working parts from mortar and other droppings.

Except where otherwise specified, when a metal is fixed permanently to metal or any other surface, the
metal surfaces in contact shall be painted on Site with two coats of bituminous paint immediately prior to
fixing.

Under no circumstances may steel be built into wet concrete or be fixed to green concrete.

Where it is necessary to join aluminium to steel or cast iron, the two surfaces shall be separated by an
approved insulation not less than 1.5mm thick.

Where aluminium or steel structural members are built into brickwork, masonry or concrete, the contact
surfaces shall be first painted with two coats of bituminous paint.

Where aluminium surfaces are in contact, the jointing compound shall be coated with zinc chromate.

Electrical apparatus to be fixed to the walls and soffits in below ground structures, and otherwise when
likely to be subjected to damp conditions, shall be fixed 10mm clear of the surface by means of barrel or
other suitable spacing devices.

2.10.8 Painting
The Painting shall be carried out according to international accepted standards.

All items of structure intended to be painted shall be cleaned down to the bare metal and given a complete
treatment of surface preparation, priming coats and finishing coats to give a durable, protective system
consistent with the conditions under which the Plant will be used on Site. Surface preparation and at least
one priming coat shall be applied at the Contractor's or Sub Contractor's premises.

All parts intended to be left bright shall receive a mixture of while lead and acid free tallow.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 122

All paints and materials shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be used in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall, at the time of bidding, supply full details of the priming
materials as well as of the finishing coatings which he proposes to use.

Undercoats shall be of distinctive tints and finishing colours approved by the Engineer.

In no case shall paint be applied during rainy, misty weather or to surfaces upon which there is any
condensation.

At least 24 hours shall elapse between the applications of successive coats unless otherwise specified by
the manufacturer.

All surfaces of steel or iron work to be painted shall be well rubbed down to ensure that they are free from
rust or scale.

All iron and steelwork above floor level within buildings and which are exposed to view including pumps,
meters, regulators, cranes, valves and pipework shall have the priming coat or coats which were applied at
the Contractor's or his Sub contractor's premises touched up. The remainder of the painting process shall
be applied to give a smooth gloss finish in approved colours. The surfaces shall be well rubbed down and
cleaned between coats.

Ironwork, such as pipes and valves which are concealed from view below floor level, in ducts or which are
buried shall be thoroughly cleaned and touched up as specified for the steelwork, and then given two coats
of heavy bodied bituminous paint with coal tar base.

2.10.9 Ladders, Stairs, and Handrails

[Link] Ladders and stairways

[Link].1 General
Stairs shall have an inclination of approximately 30°. They shall be complete with handrails, minimum 100
cm vertical height.

All ladders are to have a minimum width of 750 mm where practicable. Vertical ladders shall be installed
alternating left hand/right hand side to horizontal platforms placed approximately every 6 m of vertical
height. Vertical ladders of more than 3 m height shall be provided with safety hoops at intervals not
exceeding 900 mm, with the lowest hoop 2.0 m above the ladder foot. Load assumptions for ordinary
platforms shall be for platforms used by personnel and for support of light equipment with single weights
of less than 50 kg 2.5 kN /m2 for all other platforms 7.5 kN /m2 unless otherwise specified or stipulated in
the applicable Standards.

[Link].2 Ladders
With exception of internal access ladders, laddering shall be in steel (fully hot dip galvanized).

The stringers shall be sized to suit the height of the ladder and the interval of the stringer supports. Stringer
shall be radiuses over the top and drilled to receive the rungs which shall be welded to the stringers on
each side of each stringer. The bottom ends of the stringers shall not be designed for floor fixing but shall

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 123

terminate at wall fixing supports at least 150 mm above the floor. All edges of stringers shall be ground
smooth to remove burrs and sharp edges.

Where the installation of hoops is not possible or inappropriate, as agreed with the Engineer, anchorage
points shall be provided for attaching safety harnesses.

Suitable support stays shall be provided for fixing the ladder to the supporting structure so that there is a
minimum of 200 mm clearance behind the rungs. These connections shall be of the type, which bolt to the
supporting structure.

The spacing of support stays shall not exceed 2.4 m. In cases where this is not practicable, the stringers
shall be suitably strengthened.

[Link].3 Steel stairways

Stairways shall be designed for a loading of 7.5 kN /m² of plan area of the stairway. Steel stairways shall be
provided with tubular hand railing, stringers of cross section suitable for the span and loading, and treads
of open mesh flooring or chequer plating. Except where specified otherwise, the rise between treads shall
be uniform and between 150 mm and 175 mm. Stairways in the same area of the works and in similar
locations shall have the same angle and height of rise between treads.

The width of the treads shall be between 250 mm and 300 mm. The width of the stairways shall not be less
than 750 mm. The stringer shall be mounted by means of angle brackets with slotted holes for adjustment
of the level.

[Link] Handrails and Stanchions

Handrails and stanchions shall be safe and stable and properly fixed to the concrete.

All ladders, stairways or other openings shall be guarded on three sides by handrail. Access to ladders or
openings shall be guarded by two Ni-Steel hanging chains, which shall be secured at one end and
detachable at the other.

Handrails shall be double delivered and installed with all necessary dowels, screws M12 and fishplates in
accordance to DIN 31003 (Part [Link]).

Handrails shall be manufactured from 48.3-mm diameter solid Ni-Steel bar (thickness 2.9 mm), with forged
steel ball minimum 50-mm diameter at handrail locating points complying with the relevant requirements
of BS 4, BS 1387, BS 4848: Part 2, BS 6323 and BS 4360. All components shall be hot dipped to BS ISO 1461.

The Contractor shall ensure that unless specified to the contrary all handrails shall be of uniform
appearance and manufacture.

Handrails shall be of aluminium alloy and stands shall consist of tubular polished Aluminium alloy.
Standards shall be fitted with approved bases.

Handrails shall be provided along every edge of all metalwork and concrete walkways, stairs or accessible
open areas where the drop beyond the edge exceeds 700 mm. Handrailing shall consist of stands at regular
intervals not exceeding 1.5 m, and two rails. The upper rail shall be 1.0 m above the adjacent finished floor
level, and 900 mm above the nosing line on stairways. The lowest rail shall be midway between floor and

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 124

upper rail. The handrail fixing and anchorages shall be designed to withstand a continuous horizontal load
at the top rail of 750 N/m.

The deflection of rails shall not exceed 0.8 per cent of their span between stanchions and the deflection of
stanchions shall not exceed 0.8 per cent of their height.

Unless otherwise required in the specification standards for handrails inside buildings, all rails shall be
fabricated from 32 mm bore galvanized medium weight steel tube.

Handrails shall be flush jointed. Handrails terminating against a wall shall either have a suitable wall fixing
flange, or shall terminate at a standard with a gap between the standard and the wall not exceeding 100
mm. Where the shape of the concrete structure does not incorporate an up stand at the edge of walkways,
toe plates (kickers) 5 mm thick and 100 mm high shall be fixed to handrail standards. The bottom edge of
such toe plates shall be 10 mm above the surface of the concrete walkway.

The handrail Standards for stairways and for landings and walkways of width less than 1.2 m shall have
palm fittings for bolting to the side of the structure. Elsewhere the standards shall be designed for fixing
100 mm inside the edge of concrete structures, or at the supporting edge girder of steel flooring, or have
palm fittings. Horizontal mounting palms shall be drilled for not less than three bolts with two bolts on a
line parallel to and on the walkway side of the line of the handrailing. Vertical mounting palms shall be
drilled for not less than two bolts the line through the bolts being vertical. Where required ladders,
stairways or other openings shall be guarded on three sides by handrailing conforming to the requirements
stated above. Access to the ladders or openings shall be guarded by two removable galvanized hanging
chains secured to eyes at top and middle levels. Handrailing shall be of uniform appearance and
manufacture.

Stanchions shall be as the handrails made of 50 mm nominal bore shank and be 1000 mm high. They shall
be set in sockets, either cast in or fixed to the concrete at approximately 1500 centres. Side palm type of
fixing will only be used where shown on the Drawings.

2.10.10 Roofing
Roofs shall be protected with the following specification as applicable:

• with two coats of approved bituminous membrane torch applied and laid in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
• with a 50 to 150 mm thick protection screed sloped to the rainwater outlets.
Proprietary materials for the waterproofing shall comply with the recognized standards and shall be subject
to the prior approval of the Engineer.

Rainwater outlets are to be provided in sufficient numbers round the roof on the lower sides at a distance
not exceeding 6.5 m. Any pipe or conduit which has to pass through the roof shall be properly sealed to
prevent the leakage of rainwater.

2.10.11 Open Mesh Flooring

Open mesh flooring shall generally comply with BS 4592 except where otherwise specified hereinafter.
Such flooring and gratings shall be of rectangular mesh and non-slip and shall be mild steel and hot dip
galvanized at works after manufacture.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 125

Flooring shall be provided to span between the supporting members. Where necessary intermediate
support members shall be provided and fixed.

All flooring shall be designed to carry a loading of 500 kg per square metre and the deflection shall not
exceed 0.2 per cent of the span and shall be provided with curbing at the edge of walkways.

All flooring shall be removable and set flush in frames of similar material. Where frames are to be fixed
over openings the frames shall be provided with lugs for building in.

Flooring shall be provided in sizes suitable for lifting and removal by one man and with the appropriate
cut–outs to permit its removal without disturbing or dismantling spindles, supporting brackets, cables, or
pipework. Intermediate supporting members to give the required rigidity to the spanning edges of
individual flooring sections over the wider openings and trenches shall be provided and bolted to suitable
built-in fixings.

The members shall also be removable to afford clear access to the openings and trenches. The cost of
these supporting members and fixings shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor's rates and prices.

Lifting keys shall be supplied for each site.

2.10.12 Fixing and installation of metalwork to concrete

Where metalwork is to be supported on and fastened to concrete, the Contractor shall use one of the
following methods as subsequently detailed:

Method Description

1. Bolting or screwing the metalwork to plates or angle sections with anchors set into the concrete
structure or set into pockets left in the concrete structure.
2. Setting the metalwork into pockets or recesses formed in the concrete structure.
3. Bolting the metalwork to bolts set into the concrete structure or set in pockets or holes in the
concrete structure.
4. Bolting the metalwork to self-anchoring epoxy resin fixed bolts placed in drilled holes.
5. Bedding the metalwork on cement-mortar placed on the concrete surface.
Cement-mortar of 1 part of cement to 3 parts of sand shall be used for bedding access covers and the like
and for filling around metalwork or bolts set into pockets or holes smaller than 100 mm2. For larger holes,
concrete of the same grade as the structure shall be used instead of mortar. The installation methods
permitted for each type of metalwork are specified in the table below:

Table 2-13: Installation of metalwork to concrete

Metalwork item Permissible methods of installation

Stairs, ladders, flooring 1, 3 and 4

Step irons 2
Handrails 3
Access covers, surface boxes and gully grating 2 and 3

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 126

During installation, each item of metalwork shall be temporarily braced as necessary to resist all forces
which are likely to be applied to it during installation, fixing and building in. Any bolted connections
required as part of the installation shall be fitted and tightened before fixing bolts are tightened or pockets
are grouted. The nuts of grouted or resin fixed bolts shall not be tightened until the grout has fully cured.

Small or lightly loaded items may be fixed using screws and approved plugs set in drilled holes.

2.11 Elevator
All technical components of the elevator and their installation shall be in accordance with relevant
standards, especially standard EN 81-20.

The elevator and all its technical components, machine/ motor and other equipment shall fit to the
dimensions as shown on the design drawings and civil rehabilitation works as finally implemented within
the Works.

The delivered elevator and components shall be fit for purpose and including all best-practice ancillary
equipment.

The elevator shall have the following minimum technical features and specifications:

- Number of floors/ landings 5 pcs

- Min. speed 1 m/s, acceleration min. 0,5 m/s
- Minimum load for transportation 400 kg / 4 persons
- Total travel 12m
- Machine location: inside shaft
- Shaft preliminary specification
o Shaft size/ elevator (w x d): 1,32m x 1,545m
o Min required Headroom Height: 3,7m
o Pit depth: 1,1m
- Elevator landings
o Door type: right opening
o Door width: 0,7m
o Door height: 2,1m
o Entrance type: Frame
o Maintenance Access Panel to be mounted on Door frame
- Car
o Car type single entry
o Car size (w x d): 0,85m x 1,2m
o Car height: 2,2m
o Car maximum weight incl. decoration 400kg
- Car decoration:
o Ceiling and walls - Painted Steel material, color, e.g., cotton grass white (P63) and Misty
gray (P51) to be agreed upon with Engineer and PEA)
o Floor with rubber material, color e.g., beige gray (RC32)
o Car Operating Panel acc. to safety requirements and international practice
o Handrail material: Stainless steel
- Shaft and Car lighting acc. to standards
- Main supply voltage 3x380V, max. motor output at nominal load 2,6 kW

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 127

All static requirements for the shaft and the scaffolding construction must be coordinated with regard to
the structural possibilities on site. If a static test is required, the test shall be conducted, and all additional
requirements taken into consideration. Strengthening of masonry, installation of reinforced concrete bars
and fastening rails depending on the choice of elevator system must be taken into account.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 128

3 Sanitary Installations and Rainwater drainage

3.1 General Information and requirements

3.1.1 Marker Posts

All marker posts shall be prepared and coated as specified and lettered with the appropriate wording in
accordance with the specifications in this section and drawings.

The marker posts, after the completion of lettering shall be protected from damage, scuffing and abrasions
during transportation, storage and during the construction period by wrapping the posts in foam and
polyethylene sheet or other types of cushioning protective materials.

Application of the lettering

Stencil the Albanian and English lettering as shown in the drawings for the appropriate post with approved
coating but with a contrasting colour as specified in the table below. The appropriate lettering as required
by this specification shall be sprayed, squeezed or stippled on using suitable equipment. Wrap around
screen print gauze supported type of stencil or other removable type of masking shall be used. The lettering
shall have 100% opacity to mask the underlying substrate colour.

The style and height of lettering shall be as follows:

Language Style Height Case

1 Albanian Arial 50 mm -

2 English Arial 50 mm Uppercase

The following colours shall be used for each category of marker post:

Category Topcoat Colour Colour of Lettering

1 Water supply Lines Light Blue Black

2 Sewage Lines Black Bright Yellow

3.2 Water supply (cold & hot sanitary) system

3.2.1 Pipes Fittings and other Materials

The Contractor shall supply, deliver and install all pipework materials and fittings for the pipework services
installation.

All pipework shall follow the routes and approximate positions indicated on the drawings. However, it
should be noted that co-ordination with other services, architecture, structure and any furniture or
equipment in the served areas is the Contractors responsibility. Fully coordinated shop drawings shall be
submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for approval.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 129

Pipework, ancillaries, valves, and demountable joints shall be installed for convenient and safe routine
maintenance and renewals.

Where practicable, all pipework shall be installed with adequate gradients to facilitate draining and venting.

Pipework shall be run in a neat manner and installed plumb, straight, symmetrical and at right angles to or
parallel to adjacent walls.

No joints shall be formed inside wall constructions or floor slabs, unless otherwise stated and approved by
the Engineer.

All pipework, fittings and valves shall be free from corrosion, scale and internal obstructions.

Pipework ends shall be cut square, reamed, free from burrs and finished full bore.

Unions shall have two bronze conical seats ground-in. Long screw connections will not be acceptable.

The contractor has to provide his approach for fixing of pipes to walls, floors, ceilings etc. and provide a
method statement for installation, which shall be subject of approval from the Engineer.

Appropriate means must be taken to prevent galvanic action where dissimilar metals are connected.
Eliminate galvanic corrosion by placing di-electric unions between two dissimilar metals.

3.2.2 Pipes
The sanitary water system pipes shall serve to transmit cold water from the main network and warm water
from electrical storage water heater (boiler) to the sanitary equipment.

The distribution pipes inside the individual rooms after the manifold shall be made of pre-insulated cross-
linked polyethylene (PEX). The pipes inside the technical room shall be galvanized ones and the connection
pipe with the distribution network, which will be laid outside and inside the building till to the water meter
box, shall be made of high-density polyethylene PE100.

[Link] HDPE Pipes

Installations shall be carried out using high density polyethylene (HDPE) Series SDR II pipe and fittings
coloured blue (potable water services) or black (non-potable water services). HDPE pipes shall be
manufactured in compliance with EN 12201-2. The HDPE pipes will be used as distribution pipes within the
corridors and floors of the buildings as well as outside of the building up to the water meter box.

[Link] Manifolds
The manifold is used in toilets for cold and hot water distribution in the toilets sanitary appliances. Each
pipe in the under floor plumbing system is connected to the manifold, which makes it possible to control the
flow from the manifold to supply to each device independently. The manifold box shall have a cold and
another hot water manifold. Each manifold should be operated by a proper brass ball valve in the manifold
entrance.

[Link] Valves and pipework accessories

Valves, cocks, air vents and pipework accessories shall be provided where indicated on the drawings and
at all positions necessary for the proper working, regulation, control, and maintenance of the installations.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 130

All valves required to comply with the Pressure Systems Safety Regulations shall carry the CE mark and
have a declaration of conformity. All valves, cocks, vents and accessories must be fitted in such a manner
that they are accessible for operation and maintenance. Valve operating handles must be easily accessible,
and operation must not be impeded by structure or other services.

The pressure rating of valves must equal or exceed system working pressures at the relevant temperature
and the system test pressure. Valves shall be rated at a minimum of 16 Bar maximum working pressure.

3.2.3 Pumping Booster Station

As it is confirmed by the student city Administration the water supply for all buildings is guarantee for the
required pressure and flow from the municipality supply system. However, it is agreed to keep in reserve
as optional item a pressure booster pumping station in case the requirements are not satisfied.

Therefore, the system is equipped with an optional group pressure booster water pump and will be installed
in accordance with requirements of the Contract as an automatic sanitary water pumping station.

The sanitary pump is foreseen to ensure a considerable water quantity approximately for about 48 hours
autonomy, deposited in reservoirs. The station is foreseen for pumping the cold sanitary water to all
sanitary devices installed within the buildings. According to the selected scheme, the booster pump shall
be installed on the ground floor inside the technical room of the building.

The water pump shall be placed in the galvanized sheet iron base complete on the metallic special plates
with rubber anti-vibration feet to eliminate the sound during the works of pumps. The metallic plate shall
not be connecting with foundation or walls of building.

The booster set shall be equipped with water meter, manometer, and the connection pipes with water
supply system, electric panel, the electric protection system, automatic thermal protection system and
automatic control system.

The Speed-controlled Vario pressure booster set unit shall be supplied as a compact unit for pressure
boosting or as water supply for connecting to break tank/mains network. Consists of non-self-priming,
horizontal multistage stainless steel high-pressure centrifugal pump with an electric motor. Shaft sealing
shall be with bidirectional mechanical seal.

The technical specifications of the pump shall be as follows:

- Motor with built-in air-cooled frequency converter for variable speed control between 24 Hz and
max. 60 Hz.
- Set up on galvanized base frame with height-adjustable vibration absorbers with diaphragm
pressure vessel (volume 8 l) including flow fitting in accordance with DIN 4807,
- integrated non- return valve, pressure sensor (4 - 20 mA) and
- pressure gauge for the automatic system control with p= constant function.
- Delivery head set point infinitely variable by means of one-button operation available on the
frequency converter.
- Automatic zero-volume detection and deactivation.
- Built-in motor protection by means of electronic current monitoring.
- With LCD display for status and actual pressure display, as well as

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 131

 - one-button operation for configuring the pressure level and all set point defaults, as well as
- potential-free contacts for the collective fault and collective run signals. Wired so it’s ready for
connection and furnished with gear-operated ball cocks on the pressure side.

Figure 3-1: Example of a Booster Pumping Set

Below are the main data for the selection of the booster sets for each building shown.

Table 3-1: Sanitary water boosting station technical data’s

Pumps Flow H Power Frequency Voltage Current

Building Type
no. m3/h m kW Hz V A
B03 Booster 1+1 15.0 52 5.5 50 3 x 380-415 19.9
B04 Booster 1+1 19.0 47 5.5 50 3 x 380-415 19.9
B14 Booster 1+1 19.0 47 5.5 50 3 x 380-415 19.9
B16 Booster 1+1 21.0 47 5.5 50 3 x 380-415 19.9
B17 Booster 1+1 21.0 47 5.5 50 3 x 380-415 19.9

3.2.4 Cold Sanitary Water System

The cold water is supplied from the main network where the building is connected and all necessary
accessories like, valve, flow meter and filter.

3.2.5 Hot Sanitary Water System

The hot water will be provided by a decentralized system by installing individual Electrical Boilers at each
toilet or kitchen in the buildings. The designed technical data for the electrical boilers are provided on the
below table.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 132

 Horizontal Floor Mounted Vertical Bottom View

L A B C D E Ζ H G

80 280 100 226 336 800 817 495 450

Figure 3-2. Example with dimensioning (mm) of an Electric Boiler cap. 80 lit

It is calculated the use of 80lt Electrical Boilers for the Bathrooms and 20lt for the kitchens.

In the toilets of Building B04 and B14 shall be used 80lt VERTICAL wall mounted Electrical Boilers.

In the toilets of Building B03, B16 and B17 shall be used 80lt HORIZONTAL wall mounted Electrical Boilers.

Main specifications for the boiler are listed below:

- Tank made of thick steel sheet; pressure tested at 16 bar

- Tank internal protection with "TITAN" enamel coating
- Tank protected by double extra-large magnesium anodes
- Low charge 316L resistance
- Resistance power 3,0 kW or 3,7 kW
- Safety thermostat with special built-in thermoelectric fuse
- Safety valve with membrane and drainage
- External temperature control
- External thermometer (for VERTICAL wall mounted & HORIZONTAL wall mounted)
- Heating element indication light
- Large inspection flange for easier cleaning and maintenance of the water heater
- HCFC free, rigid polyurethane insulation

Table 3-2. Technical Specifications of Electric Water Heaters

CAPACITY L 80 15

ELECTRIC POWER W 2400 1500

CURRENT A 13,0 / 16,0 xx
VOLTAGE (50/60 Ηz) V 220-240 220-240
CONNECTING CABLE NOM CROSS SECTION mm² 4 4
CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY NETWORK G ½” G ½”
OPERATING PRESSURE bar Maximum allowable 10

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 133

 THERMOSTAT Control range 30 - 80oC, thermal cut-off
protection
INSULATION HCFC free, rigid polyurethane foam
DEGREE OF PROTECTION AGAINST HUMIDITY IP23
WEIGHT (EMPTY) kg 26 9
HEATING TIME INDICATION at ΔΤ 45oC Hours: Minutes 1:37 / 1:13 0:30

3.3 Sanitary sewerage system

The sewage waters sanitary system inside and outside the building is designed according to and shall be
in conformity to the Albanian Technical Codes, and European similar norms, such as: EN 12056, EN 12050,
EN 752, EN 1610, EN 124, etc.

3.3.1 Pipes, Fittings, and other materials

[Link] Pipes
For wastewater discharges within the premises shall be used polypropylene (PP) with flexible
connectivity and push-fit system that meet all quality requirements according to EN 1451-1
standard (application for testing and quality pipes). They shall also be in accordance with the
standard EN 12056. including noise reduction (DIN EN 14366) and fire resistance (EN 13501-1).

These pipes should ensure good resistance to corrosion, resistance to chemical agents, light
weight, simple opportunities repair, transportation, simple and quick installation, and durability
over 30 years.

Figure 3-3. Wastewater Discharges Pipe Inside the Building with flexible connectivity and push-fit system

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 134

Drainage pipes should be placed in the entire height of the building, in the form of columns, in
those toilets where extinguishers are grouped and possibly closer to those nodes that collect more
polluted waters and greater pollution.

Each vertical column discharge shall be equipped with checkpoints that must be placed in every
two floors starting from the bottom of the column.

The sewerage pipe shall be fixed on the wall every 50 cm or as appropriate to the individual
conditions.

[Link] Fittings
The PP fittings will be used for connection of discharge pipes with sanitation equipment and other
part of sewerage system. It shall be in accordance with international quality standards EN 1451
(Quality and Test Requirements for pipes).

The fittings (connection parts) should be excellent resistant against corrosion and chemical agents,
low weight, ease of maintenance for repair and transport, fast installation, long working life.

The sizes of fittings will be depending on calculation flow of wastewater, kind of sanitation
equipment, flow velocities and diameter of respectively pipes. The flow velocity should be 1, 0-1,2
m/sec and the utilization rate should be 0,5-0, 8.

Diameters and thickness should be in accordance with data of technical drawings. All data on
outside diameters, lengths, pressure, name of manufacture, referred standard, year of production,
etc., should be stamped on every fitting.

The diameter of fittings should be equal with diameter of discharge pipes. The smallest diameter
is not recommended. If the pipes will change their diameter, the fittings should be adapted with
them.

Minimization of noise Reduction in airborne sound

through Pipe bend with mass optimization of fittings
Minimization of structure-borne sound by way of:

1. Structure-borne sound-dampening bracket

2. Guiding clamp
3. Fixing clamp with rubber lining

Figure 3-4. Fitting for water discharge pipes

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 135

[Link] Floor Drain
The floor drainpipe should be used for discharge of water from floors. They shall be in accordance with
international quality standards EN 1451 (Quality and Test Requirements for pipes). The material of the pipes
and fittings/ inlet shall be PP Floor trap horizontal with stainless steel grid.

The floor drain set should provide a fast and sufficient flow of the water. They should be resistant against
mechanic shutting, corrosion and chemical agents. They should provide water insulation, simple possibility
for the repair, transport, and connection.

The floor drain shall be installed in the lowest part of the water collector basin. Usually, they shall be
installed near of centre of the floor. They shall not be installed near of the connection of the walls with
floor.

The floor drain set should be connected by discharge PP pipes (The connection shall be realized with a
siphon type tube). Fittings, single branch with 45 degrees, 60- or 90-degree, bends, single sleep-on will
facilitate the connection, all with seals type Tee, with 45 degree or 60 degrees. The lengths of syphons
should be 20-30 cm.

[Link] Manholes and Inspection Chambers

[Link].1 Manholes
Where the expression Manhole is used, it shall apply equally to the construction of manholes, backdrop
manholes, inspection chambers and the like. Manholes shall be located as indicated on the Drawings,
instructed by the Engineer, or to be placed at all changes in direction, either horizontally or vertically, and
at connections to sewer lines. They shall be installed with incoming and outgoing polyethylene coated iron
stirrups and manhole cover as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.

In-situ concrete manholes and inspection chambers shall comply with the applicable specified
requirements for Earth Works and Concrete Works. Typical manholes and inspection chambers placed in
the sewerage network shall be either made of pre-cast circular manhole rings or in-situ concrete of size
and diameters as shown on drawings. Sulphate resistant cement shall be used. Unless otherwise specified,
typical in-situ manholes and inspection chambers incorporated in the sewerage network shall be
constructed as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the requirements of DIN 4034, BS 5911, EN
752 or EN 1610.

The Contractor is free to offer as alternative rectangular manholes instead of circular manholes as specified.
However, the alternative manholes have to apply to the stated norms and standards and to comply with
the specifications / requirements as per this Technical Specifications.

Manholes and inspection chambers shall be placed at all changes in direction, either horizontally or
vertically, and at connections to sewer lines. They shall be constructed with incoming and outgoing pipes
neatly and truly concreted in, complete with benching, polyethylene coated iron stirrups and manhole
cover as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 136

[Link].2 Manhole Covers
Cast iron covers and frames shall comply with DIN 4271, BS 497 and EN 124 for materials and workmanship
and be subject to the approval of the Engineer. All covers shall not be ventilated unless otherwise specified
and be marked with the word "Sewer" or “Storm” in Albanian language, on their surface.

Unless otherwise specified, all covers shall be provided with approved corrosion resistant locking
mechanism and provisions for lifting. Holes provided in covers for lifting shall be appropriately shaped
pockets and there shall be no projections above cover level.

3.4 Rainwater drainage system

The stormwater system of the high-rise building shall consist of the gullies and gutters to collect rainwater
and to deliver them to the respective vertical pipes or risers.

The calculation of the stormwater system elements, such as gullies, gutters and the downward riser pipes
are performed in compliance to EN 12056, and Rational method formula. The latter has been used to
calculate the runoff quantity according to the return period and travel time of the rainwater (which is less
than 10 min). After that, the elements were dimensioned using EN 12056 -3 tables and guidelines.

3.4.1 Rainwater Pipes

Plastic pipes and fittings shall be PVC-U pipes with socket and spigot connection and with elastomeric ring
inside the gasket to ensure the hermeticity. These pipes and fittings should be manufactured in compliance
to EN 1401 and to apply for buried in ground outside the building structure (application area code "U"),
and - both buried in ground, within the building structure and outside the building (application area code
"UD"). Special care shall be taken to the UV-resistance of the chosen manufactured products.

Where purpose fitting is required, they shall also be in accordance with the relevant standards. All pipework
shall be free from burrs, rust and scale and shall be thoroughly cleaned before erection. Open ends during
the progress of work shall be blanked-off with purpose-made metal or plastic caps and the use of wooden
plugs is forbidden.

3.4.2 Connections to Underground Services

Connections to external drainage systems shall be made using the manufacturer’s standard
couplings/adapters as recommended to suit the pipe sizes. The water from the risers shall be transited to
the underground pipes through precast RC manholes and PP Rain hoppers manufactured in compliance
to standards DIN 12056 and ÖNORM B 2501.

3.4.3 Rainwater outlets and gullies

Rainwater outlets on roofs shall be of cast iron or stainless-steel cover and construction with dome type
cast iron grating & adequate provision for receiving water and catching the leaves or other solid things, to
prevent from entering the pipe as specified by the Consultant. The gullies main body should be of PP or
PVC or ABS, manufactured in compliance to EN 1253. Rainwater outlets shall be set in position at the
required openings in the structural slabs.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 137

The outlet diameters of these water gullies should be the same as of the vertical pipe risers and delivering
the minimum flow 6 l/sec.

3.5 Sanitary Fixtures

Each room in the dormitories contains an individual toilet. These toilets shall be equipped with all the
necessary sanitary fixtures which are shown in the figure below and described in detail in the following
sub-chapters. The installations consist of the following:
 Water Closet including all connections and ancillary equipment
 Suspended Wash basin including all connections and ancillary equipment
 Shower including all connections and ancillary equipment

Figure 3-5. Typical Toilet Room for the dormitories

3.5.1 Water Closet (WC) set and flash box+ plastic coated wooden seat
In the Toilet rooms, Water Closet (WC) sets are foreseen. The WC sets shall be porcelain sanitary toilets
made of Porcelain materials in accordance with international quality standards ISO 9001, as described in
the Technical Drawings. The Type of WC set is chosen Modern (French) type.

French type shall be strongly fixed on the floor or to the wall by brass clamps and screw plugs and screws,
without creating gaps in the wall tiling. WC set shall be connected to wastewater discharge pipes before
the installation on the wall by brass clamps. The outlet of the WC set can be under the body of the set or
on the backside of the WC set. The WC set with side outlet should be 19 cm high from floor level.

In the lowest part of the collector basin shall be a hole with minimal diameter of D=90 mm. The upper part
of WC set can be oval or circular in accordance with the drawings and WC set type. The height of WC set,
modern type, shall be 38-40 cm. Horizontal Distance between WC Sets and other sanitation equipment
(Washbasin, etc.) should be minimum 30 cm.

WC sets should provide a fast and sufficient water flow. They should be resistant against mechanical
shutting, corrosion, and chemical agents. They should provide water insulation, good condition during the
work and easy access for the repair.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 138

The WC set should be connected with sewerage pipes (The connection shall be realized with a siphon type
tube). The connection pipes of WC sets should be PP pipes (of the same technical characteristic than other
sewerage pipes). The diameters should match the outlet of the WC set (Usually their diameter is 110 mm).

The WC set shall be connected to the drinking water system. The connection shall be realized by a flash
box that can be installed directly on the WC set or on the wall (separately from the WC set). This depends
on the finally chosen type of WC set/ manufacturer. The flash box shall be installed in the height of 1,5 m
from floor level. The flash box shall be made of porcelain materials and in accordance with the Contract
and quality standards ISO with requirements.

Sample of the WC set together with quality certificate, certificate of origin, test certificate and warranty
certificate shall be submitted to the Engineer for the initial approval before WC installation at the site.
Below figure shows and example of the technical details of French-type WC and flash box.

Figure 3-6. Technical Detail for Suspended Toilets

3.5.2 Suspended Wash Basin sets, and mono-control mixer tap

In all toilet rooms and washing part rooms, Wash Basin + mono-control mixer tap is foreseen. The Wash
Basin sets are sanitary equipment for washing hands, faces, etc. The wash basin set shall be made of
porcelain materials. Material type for Wash Basin set shall be in accordance with the international quality
standards ISO 9001, as described in the Technical Drawings.

The wash basin sets should provide a fast and sufficient water flow. They should be resistant against
mechanical shutting, corrosion, and chemical agents. They should provide water insulation, sound
insulation, and good condition during the work and easy access for the repair.

The figure below shows technical details of such a wash basin set and monobloc tap.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 139

Figure 3-7. Technical Detail for Suspended Wash Basin

The Wash Basin and their support shall be strongly fixed to the wall by brass clamps and screw plugs and
screws, without any gaps of the wall tiling. Washbasin set shall be connected to the water discharge pipes
before the installation to the wall by brass clamps.

In the lowest part of the collector basin shall be a metallic hole with minimal diameter of D= 40 mm. The
size of collector basin shall be 40/60 cm x 36/ 45 cm (depending on the type and model). The collector
basin shall be oval in accordance with the work and type requirements. The height of the Washbasin set
shall be 75 - 85 cm. Horizontal distance between the Wash Basin Set and other sanitation equipment (Water
Closet, bidet) should be minimum 30 cm.

The Washbasin set should be connected with sewerage pipes (The connection will be realized with a siphon
type tube). The above connection will be made by fittings, type Tee, with 45 degree or 60 degree. The
connection pipes of Washbasin sets should be PP pipes (in same technical characteristic with other
sewerage pipes). Their length should be 20 - 40 cm and their diameters should match the outlet of the
Washbasin set.

The Washbasin set will be connected with drinking water system. The connection will be realized with two
flexible pipes with the length of 30 - 50 cm and diameter 1/2". The pipes will realize connection of valves
with pipes of hot and Coldwater system.

The mono-control mixer tap shall be installed in the place of connection of valves with the washbasin set,
in order to avoid water leakage.

The connection of the Washbasin set with the sewerage pipes should be with special materials for PP pipes
in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.

Sample of the Wash basin set together with the quality certificate, certificate of origin, test certificate and
warranty certificate shall be submitted to the supervisor for the initial approval before the fixing at the site.
The technical data of the Washbasin set (including the Washbasin type, working pressure, name of the
manufacture, standards and year of production) should be given in the catalogue.

The vitreous wash basin should be manufactured and certified by a third party, in compliance to EN 31 and
the wastes and water discharging parts of this device should be manufactured in compliance to EN 274.

3.5.3 Single Lever Plus Wash-Basin Mixer

Figure 3-8. Singer Lever Plus Wash-Basin Mixer

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 140

The single lever wash basin mixer should be manufactured in compliance to EN 200, EN 817 and other EN
codes for the parts of mixer as listed below:

- Body made in brass according to UNE-EN 1982.

- Handle made in Zinc.
- Chrome plated according to EN 248.
- Guided outlet noiseless Ø40 ceramic cartridge.
- Anti-lime M24x1 plastic aerator with chrome plated brass cover.
- Fitted with chain holder, 35 cm long flexible connectors (M10x1; G ⅜”) and stainless-steel
horseshoe fixation set.
- Minimum flow rate: 12 l/min (3 bar).
- Maximum use temperature: 85 °C.
- Max. recommended temp.: 65 °C.
- Maximum use pressure: 10 bar.
- Minimum use pressure: 0,5 bar.
- Recommended pressure: 1 - 5 bar.

The figure below shows required water flow according to pressure.

25

20
FLOW Q (L/MIN)

15

10

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
PRESSURE P (BAR)

Figure 3-9. Water flow for Mixer

3.5.4 Wall Mounted Shower Bath Mixer Tap and handles

The shower mixer shall have certifications according to DVGW (DIN EN 817 – DIN EN 1111).

The equipment to be delivered shall include mixer, shower kit and handles and include all fixtures that are
required to complete the installation, ready for usage. All materials used shall be from the same
manufacturer including fixtures etc.

The mixer shall have a control lever with completely smooth operation for regulating the water flow as well
as the temperature.

The specifications of the mixer and other equipment shall be as follows:

- Difference in hot-cold water pressure: shall be 0,1 bar (max 1 bar).

- Shower mixer DN 15

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 141

 - Surface finish – glossy chrome
- Brass material
- Quick and easy installation
- Suitable for all plumbing systems
- Minimum flow rate: 12 l/min (3 bar).
- Maximum use temperature: 85 °C.
- Max. recommended temp.: 65 °C.
- Maximum use pressure: 10 bar.
- Minimum use pressure: 0,5 bar.
- Recommended pressure: 1 - 5 bar.
- Length of shower hose min. 1.6m, material: stainless steel – chrome plated, flexibility required
- Replacement sealing rings

The height of the shower head and mixer to be installed shall be agreed upon with the engineer.

3.5.5 Shower drain channel

The shower drain channel shall be linear one with plastic PP or ABS body and stainless-steel cover and
frame. This shower channel should be manufactured in compliance to EN 1253 and the waste parts in
compliance to EN 274. The shower channel should be installed to the tile level as instructed by the
manufacturer installation guide. The contractor should provide full installation procedure and certification
of conformity of these shower drainage channel by the manufacturer to the Engineer for approval.

Figure 3-10. Shower drain channel

3.5.6 Shower Glass

The glass shall be installed according to the design drawings with the following specifications:

- Type of glass: 8 mm toughened safety glass (ESG)

- Glass fittings: pendulum fittings made of solid stainless steel, pendulum fittings shall allow the doors
to be opened inwards and outwards by 90°. From a 25° position, the glass doors automatically shall
retract to a 0° position.
- wall fitting:
o Angle: optically matching the selected glass fitting and made of solid stainless steel
o U-profile: stainless steel (high-gloss/matt)
o Clamp profile: aluminum
- Stabilizing component: solid stainless steel
- Door handle: both sides
- Including Plastic Gadgets for water proofing

Height shall be minimum 2m. Size of door shall be according to relevant standards.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 142

4 Specification for HVAC

4.1 General Information and requirements

4.1.1 Works Included in the Contract

The scope of services of the HVAC system includes the delivery and installation of all required material and
equipment for the initial set-up and start-up, fit-for-purpose for fully functional Heating, Ventilation and
Air Conditioning Systems, in accordance with the specifications, drawings and the Bill of Quantities.

The HVAC-System shall be of Variable refrigerant flow type with heat recovery (VRF/VRV-HR) capability
than can operate simultaneously in heating and cooling mode. The system shall be composed of Outdoor
Units (placed on the rooftops) as well Indoor Units (placed on the roof or wall of the individual rooms). The
entire piping system for the transmission of liquids and gasses of the system shall also form part of the
works. The vertical piping shall be led through a central supply shaft, while several multi-branch selectors
shall be installed on the individual floors for the distribution of refrigerant to the Indoor Units placed within
the individual rooms/ sections/ environments. A Ventilation system including ancillary equipment (i.e. fans
and transit grilles within the rooms) shall be installed for all toilets and kitchen, while the condensate shall
be disposed of by condensate pipes, which eventually discharge into the rainwater network.

All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be manufactured, supplied, installed, and put into operation
complete in every respect with all necessary accessories for reliable continuous operation.

The scope of delivery and performance shall include all work and the provision of all materials, permanent
and temporary equipment, tools, hoisting equipment, compressed air, power, combustibles, accessories,
transport including loading, unloading, storage, protection from adverse ambient conditions, installation,
scaffolding, protection of personnel and equipment, first lubricant filling, painting, putting into operation,
provision of testing instruments, and testing of all the parts of the plant and accessories contained in the
Specifications and needed for fully functional systems, as well as cleaning the site of installation. It is also
understood that the Contractor has to further develop the Employer’s design/Drawings when issuing the
shop drawings according to the Contract and as further specified within Chapter 1.3. and 1.11.6

The Contractor shall make competent and experienced staff available for the training and assistance of the
operating staff during commissioning and test service and, if required by the Employer, for a period after
completion of the trial operation.

4.1.2 Standards
The table below shows Certifications and Directives that need to be complied to and form the basis for the
design and technical specifications of HVAC Design.

Outdoor and Indoor equipment of the VRF/VRV Heat recovery system shall be
Eurovent Certification
certified by the Eurovent Certita Certification.

Outdoor and Indoor equipment of the VRF/VRV Heat recovery system shall be
Ecodesign Directive (2009/125/EC)
certified by Ecodesign Directive (2009/125/EC) energy efficient products.

Certified Reclaimed The VRF/VRV system products shall be according to “Certified Reclaimed

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 143

Refrigerant Refrigerant Allocation” (EPA Certified or similar).
Table 4-1. Certification References

The conditions specified in these general specifications are minimum requirements for all deliveries and
performances. If special requirements are given for items, they apply only to these particular items.

The work shall be executed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All work was designed and shall be carried
out in accordance with the requirements of the general and specific standards.
General standards applicable do include:
 Albanian Standard (SSH);
 Technical Design Condition of Albania (KTP);
 European Norms (EN);
 International Electro Technical Commission (IEC);
 International Organization for Standardization (ISO);
 VDE, DIN, CEI, CE.

The specific standards applicable to the HVAC system include the following:

Document Number Document Title

DCM No. 537, dated 8.7.2020 ON THE APPROVAL OF MINIMUM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
OF ENERGY OF BUILDINGS AND BUILDING ELEMENTS
LAW NO. 124/2015 ON ENERGY EFFICIENCY
LAW 116/2016 FOR ENERGY PERFORMANCE OF BUILDINGS
UNI 10339:1995 Air-conditioning systems for thermal comfort in buildings.
General, classification and requirements. Offer, order and
supply specifications.
DCM No.38, date 16.01.2003 For the approval of norms, rules and conditions of design and
construction, production, and storage of heat in buildings
Regulation from the relevant authority Regulation for the construction of the server room
AKSHI, date 02/12/2008 (version 1.0)
SSH EN 1057:2006+A1:2010 Copper and copper alloys - Seamless, round copper tubes for
water and gas in sanitary and heating applications
SSH EN 12735-1:2020 Copper and copper alloys - Seamless, round tubes for air
conditioning and refrigeration - Part 1: Tubes for piping
systems
SSH EN 12102-1:2017 Air conditioners, liquid chilling packages, heat pumps, process
chillers and dehumidifiers with electrically driven compressors
- Determination of the sound power level - Part 1: Air
conditioners, liquid chilling packages, heat pumps for space
heating and cooling, dehumidifiers and process chillers
SSH EN 12263:2004 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety switching
devices for limiting the pressure - Requirements and tests
SSH EN 15218:2013 Air conditioners and liquid chilling packages with evaporatively
cooled condenser and with electrically driven compressors for
space cooling - Terms, definitions, test conditions, test
methods and requirements
SSH EN 14825:2018 Air conditioners, liquid chilling packages and heat pumps, with
electrically driven compressors, for space heating and cooling
- Testing and rating at part load conditions and calculation of
seasonal performance

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 144

 Document Number Document Title

SSH ISO 4427 Plastics piping systems for water supply and for drainage and
sewerage under pressure — Polyethylene (PE)
EN 15240 Ventilation for buildings - Guidelines for inspection of air
conditioning systems
EN 15243 Ventilation for buildings - Calculation of room temperatures
and of load and energy for buildings with room conditioning
systems
BS EN 1507:2006 Ventilation for buildings. Sheet metal air ducts with rectangular
section. Requirements for strength and leakage
EN 378 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and
environmental requirements - Basic requirements, definitions,
classification and selection criteria
EN 14511 Air conditioners, liquid chilling packages and heat pumps with
electrically driven compressors for space heating and cooling
EN 14276 Pressure equipment for refrigerating systems and heat pumps
EN 14693 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and
environmental requirements - Positive displacement
refrigerant compressors
EN 13136 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Pressure relief devices
and their associated piping - Methods for calculation
EN 779 Particulate air filters for general ventilation. Determination of
the filtration performance
EN 12236 Ventilation for buildings. Ductwork hangers and supports.
Requirements for strength
EN 12237 Ventilation for buildings. Ductwork. Strength and leakage of
circular sheet metal ducts
EN 15650 Ventilation for buildings. Fire dampers
EN 1751 Ventilation for buildings. Air terminal devices. Aerodynamic
testing of damper and valves
Law No. 107/2014 For planning and development of Territory.
DCM No. 408, 13.05.2015 For approval of rules of the territorial development.
Table 4-2. Albanian and European Standards

Where reference is made to a particular manufacturer's product, such reference shall be taken only as an
indication of design and quality. In case of contradictions between the International and National
standards, or between the different standards, the more stringent standard will prevail.

At the request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish a copy of the standards he intends to apply, or
at least the relevant information and tables.

Special prove about the noise emittance of the Selector Units and other Indoor Units, that are close to the
dormitories and other frequently used spaces and rooms shall be provided. The Engineer might request
additional measures that limit the emittance of noise if the required noise emittance limits and standards
are not met.

4.1.3 Submittals
Design Documentation

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 145

The following specific design Documentation (including drawings and specifications) for the HVAC System
shall be provided:

a. VRF/VRV Heat Recovery outdoor Units

b. VRF/VRV Heat Recovery indoor Units
c. VRF/VRV REFNET branch
d. VRF/VRV selector unit Piping Kit
e. Toilet Wall Fans
f. Supply and Return Air Grille

Shop Drawings

The following shop-drawings shall be specifically provided for the HVAC system:

a. VRF/VRV selection scheme from the software

b. Dimension of copper pipes according to VRF/VRV brand selected
c. Ventilation system according to the selected fans

Test Reports

The following tests shall be conducted and reported with regards to the HVAC system:

a. Test of piping systems according to relevant norms

b. Test of condensate systems
c. Test of bathroom ventilation systems
d. Running test of HVAC Systems

4.1.4 Welding, Soldering, Brazing

This section shall be read in conjunction with the stipulations made in the electrical and civil specifications,
especially the general part as well as stipulations made in Chapter 2.10.3.

All welders shall be qualified and have a valid certificate according to ISO 9606-1 from a recognized testing
institute. The certificate shall prove that the welder has passed the tests satisfactorily.

All welds in pipe joints shall be carried out in accordance with Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS)
issued for each particular type of weld and material according to ISO 15614-1. The Welding Procedure
Specifications shall be filled in or approved by an independent body, approved by the Engineer, before
welding.

All welding works shall be performed under the most convenient working conditions; hence all welding
work shall be carried out at the manufacturer's workshop. Field welding will be allowed only after prior
approval by the Engineer. Modern, effective equipment and techniques and latest welding technologies
are to be utilised. All welding shall be performed by welders qualified and experienced in the particular
type of welding required. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all welding operators
are properly qualified and competent to carry out all required field welding.

Records of welding procedures and welder performance qualification tests for work done shall be
maintained by the Contractor for review by the Engineer.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 146

The method and procedure adopted for welding in workshops and at site shall be approved by the Engineer
before production starts.

4.1.5 Execution
Straightness, dischargeability

All lines and pipes must be laid so as to be straight within themselves. There shall be an inclination to the
discharge points. Vertical lines shall be laid vertically. If, for some reason there is a deviation from this
principle, the changes shall be agreed upon with the site supervision manager.

Accessibility

Shut-off devices, discharge and any other components that need to be accessible (operated, checked or
read) must be arranged in such a way that they are always accessible without any obstruction.

4.1.6 Processing
The processing and installation instructions from the manufacturers shall be followed. In particular, all
fittings shall be ensured to be even, without ridges and clean for the connection of the connecting
elements/fasteners.

Preparation

All materials on the Site shall be stored at a designated storage space. All parts stored on the site shall
always be accessible for inspection by the Engineer. All material and equipment on the site shall be
protected from weather and any other adverse influences.

Installation

Piping fabrication, assembly, welding, soldering, and brazing shall be in accordance with relevant norms
and the recommendations of the manufacturer. Piping shall follow the general arrangement as shown in
the Design drawings. Piping and other equipment within buildings shall be routed out of the way of lighting
fixtures and doors, windows, and other structural elements. Piping installed overhead shall be installed
inconspicuous positions wherever possible. Welding of joints and application of insulation shall only be
permitted if adequate distance from walls, ceilings, and floors is ensured. Changes in size of water pipes
shall be done by reducer fittings. No piping shall be buried, concealed, or insulated until it has been
inspected, tested, and approved by the Engineer.

4.1.7 Standard Commercial Product

All Outdoor and indoor units provided shall be in accordance with the features and specifications set forth
in the technical specifications report. Additional or better features/specifications, which are in excess of the
specifications or scope, but which are a part of the Commercial Specifications and/ or Manufacturing
Standards shall be included in the provided equipment.

All Products used are to be stamped with “CE” – Symbol or there must be a declaration that confirms the
conformity with the requirements of European Norms.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 147

4.2 Heating-Cooling System (VRF/VRV)

4.2.1 Copper pipe for refrigeration gas and Branch for the VRF/VRV system

[Link] Preliminary Considerations

Usually in refrigeration and air conditioning driving networks of refrigerant gas are constituted by piping
performed with copper pipe and tubes. Copper is one of the most resistant metals and appropriate for the
transport of fluids. Copper has the great advantage of having inside and outside surfaces which keep
usually smooth dry and clean.

However, the installation of copper material should follow strictly the corresponding technical standards.
Furthermore, specific care in the handling and storage is required.

For use of copper pipes in refrigeration and air conditioning, the manufacturer of these pipes shall comply
to the requirements of the standard EN 12735-1.

All pipes shall be composed of copper which is phosphorus deoxidised (Cu-DHP) and with a minimum
copper content of 99,90% and Ρ=0,015% - 0,040%.

[Link] Application Fields

One of the main areas of application of copper pipes and accessories, are and refrigeration piping networks
in the VRF/VRV systems. In these systems, malleable pipes in rolls as well as rigid copper pipes are used.
The type of pipe is usually depending on the diameter.

Figure 4-1 – The type of pipes

Malleable piping in rolls of 30.50 meters shall be according to the specification given in the table below:

Overall external diameter

Copper tube external Copper tube external Copper tube wall
with 9mm thick insulation
diameter (inch) diameter (mm) thickness (mm)
(mm)
1/4 6,35 0,80 24,35
3/8 9,52 0,80 25,72
1/2 12,70 0,80 30,70
5/8 15,87 1,00 33,87
3/4 19,05 1,00 37,05
7/8 22,23 1,00 40,23
Table 4-3. Table of Standard Dimensions according to EN 12735-1

Rigid pipe at lengths of 5m shall be according to the specification given in the table below:

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 148

 Copper tube external Copper tube external Copper tube wall
diameter (inch) diameter (mm) thickness (mm)
1/2” 12.70 0.90
3/4” 19.05 0.91
7/8” 22.23 0.10
1 1/8'' 28,58 1,42
1 3/8'' 34,93 1,73
1 5/8'' 41,28 2,05
Table 4-4. Table of Standard Dimensions according to EN 12735-1

The pipe ends must always be kept closed with coloured caps to ensure identification as well as to maintain
the interior clean during handling and storage. The pipes shall be pre-insulated by the producer. The
technical properties of the insulation shall adhere to the following specifications:

Material PE-X or PE foam

Density according to DIN 53420 / ASTM D 1667 30 to 33 kg/m3
0.0357 W/mK (0oC)
Thermal conductivity coefficient (λ) according to EN ISO 8497 o
0,0389 W/mK (40 C)
Vapour-water diffusion resistance coefficient (μ) according to
12.500
EN 13469
Working temperature -80oC to +110oC (+90oC for PE foam)
EN 13501–1, Class B or Class E, DIN 4102,
Fire resistance
B2, BS 476, NF P 92 501-M1
Table 4-5. The specifications of pipes

4.2.2 Insulation of rubber pipes

The most important functions of the thermal insulation in Air Conditioning installations are controlling
external condensation and conservation of energy. A closed-cell foam insulation shall be used. The
insulation shall be of a flexible elastomeric rubber foam with a closed structure. Its technical features shall
ensure an efficient thermal insulation and a good control of condensation. The main technical
characteristics of rubber foam insulation pipe are as follows:

- Temperature Range -40 ºC a + 105 ºC

- Thermal Conductivity 0.038 W/mºK a 0 ºC
- Water Vapor Diffuser Resistance Factor 3000
- Fire Reaction Self extinguishable
- Odour Neutral
- Colour Black
- Standard Dimensions Shells 2 meters length
The dimensions in terms of diameter and thickness of the walls of the insulating rubber piping for the most
diameters of copper pipes used in refrigeration of VRF/VRV system, are given in the table below.

External Pipe Diameter Insulating Pipe - Available Dimensions

["] [mm] 6 mm 9 mm 13 mm 19 mm
1 25,0 - 9x25 13x25 19x25
1 1/8 28,0 - - 13x28 19x28
1 3/8 35,0 - - 13x35 19x35
1 5/8 42,0 - - - 19x42
Table 4-6. External and Insulating Pipe Dimensions

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 149

4.2.3 REFNET branch and selector unit Piping Kit
Improper installation or attachment of equipment or accessories could result in electric shock, short-circuit,
leaks, fire, or other damage to the equipment. It must be ensured to only use accessories approved by the
manufacturer/brand that is used for the individual purposes. Those shall be specifically designed for the
use with the equipment. Installation shall always be done by a professional.

The Installation of the branch selector shall be made considering the following recommendation:
- Installation of the Branch selector unit at a location where the refrigerant noise will not disturb the
building occupants
- to avoid that refrigerant noise disturbs the room occupants, at least 5m of piping length shall be
kept between the occupied room and the Branch selector unit (See figure below)
- If there is no false ceiling in the occupied room, it is advisable to install sound insulation around the
piping between the Branch selector unit and indoor unit, or to lengthen the distance between the
Branch selector unit and the occupied room (See also figure)

Figure 4-2 – Branch Selector Unit

The table and figures below show technical specifications of the branch selector units.

Technical Specifications Branch selector unit

Maximum number of connectable indoor units 30
Maximum number of connectable indoor units per branch 5
Number of branches 6
Maximum capacity index of connectable indoor units 600
Maximum capacity index of connectable indoor units per branch 140
Dimensions Unit Height/Width/ Depth mm 298/580/430
Weight Unit kg 24.0
Casing Material Galvanised steel plate
Liquid OD mm 12.7
Outdoor unit Gas OD mm 28.6 / 22.2 (1)
Piping connections Discharge gas OD mm 19.1 / 22.2 (1)
Liquid OD mm 6.4 (2) / 9.5 (3)
Indoor unit
Gas OD mm 12.7 (2) / 15.9 (3)

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 150

 Urethane foam, polyethylene
Sound absorbing thermal insulation
foam
PED art. 4.3
MCA (Minimum Circuit Amps) A -
Phase 1~
Power supply Frequency Hz 50
Voltage V 220-440
MCA (Minimum Circuit Amps) A -

Standard Accessories: Accessory pipe; Quantity: 1

Standard Accessories: Clamps; Quantity:1
Standard Accessories: Insulation tube; Quantity: 1
Standard Accessories: Metal clamp for drain hose; Quantity: 1
Standard Accessories: Sealing material; Quantity: 1
Standard Accessories: Stopper pipes; Quantity: 1

Standard Accessories: Insulation tube for stopper pipes; Quantity: 1

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 151

Table 4-7. The technical specifications of the branch selector units.

The kits shall contain insulation material that complies to EN13501-1, and BS476-7 (class 1)

Piping limitation

All lengths of pipes of the VRF/VRV system for each branch or section shall comply to the limitations
specified in the table below or better.

Description Value
Maximum total length 1,000.0m
Maximum longest actual length 165.0m
Maximum longest equivalent length 190.0m
Maximum main pipe length (size up of main pipe required if longer) -
Maximum length first branch to indoor unit (size up of intermediate pipes
40.0m
required if longer)

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 152

Maximum length first branch to indoor unit 90.0m
Maximum length of indoor units to nearest branch 40.0m
Maximum length difference between longest and shortest distance to
40.0m
indoor units
Maximum height difference, outdoor unit below indoor units 90.0m
Minimum connection ratio, outdoor unit below indoor units -
Maximum height difference, outdoor unit above indoor units 90.0m
Minimum connection ratio, outdoor unit above indoor units -
Maximum height difference in technical cooling, outdoor unit below
90.0m
indoor units
Maximum height difference in technical cooling, outdoor unit above
90.0m
indoor units
Maximum height difference between indoor units 30.0m
Connection ratio range 50.0% - 130.0%
22.2mm (liquid) x 34.9mm (gas)
Maximum Refrigerant pipe diameters
x 28.6mm (discharge)
Maximum equivalent length from BP unit or VRF/VRV indoor to VRF/VRV
-
REFNET (size up of intermediate pipes required if longer)
Maximum equivalent length from BP unit or VRF/VRV indoor to VRF/VRV
90.0m
REFNET
Maximum actual length between CM and HM -
Maximum height difference between CM and HM -
Table 4-8. Design Limitations for lengths of pipes of the VRF/VRV system for each branch

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 153

4.2.4 Heat Recovery Outdoor Units
The external heat recovery units shall comply to the following requirements and principles or better:

- Fully integrated solution with heat recovery for maximum efficiency with COPs of up to 8
- Units shall cover all thermal needs of a building via a single point of contact which has accurate
temperature control and ventilation.
- Free, available heating shall be provided by transferring heat from areas requiring cooling to areas
requiring heating
- Personal comfort for guests / tenants shall be achieved via simultaneous cooling and heating
- Incorporated VRF/VRV standards & technologies shall include Variable Refrigerant Temperature,
continuous heating, VRF/VRV configurator, 7 segment display and full inverter compressors, 4-side
heat exchanger, refrigerant cooled PCB, new DC fan motor
- Outdoor unit shall display quick on-site settings and errors shall be easily read out together with the
indication of service parameters for checking basic functions
- The combination of outdoor units can be freely chosen to meet installation space or efficiency
requirement
- Piping flexibility: min 30m indoor height difference, maximum piping length: min. 190m, total piping
length: min. 1,000m
- Possibility to extend the operation range for cooling down to -20°C for technical cooling operation
such as server rooms

[Link] Building No. 04/B.14 - Ground floor

Total Cooling/Heating Capacity: 83.5/94 kW = 50.4/56.5 kW + 33.5/37.5 kW (two units)
Outdoor Unit Installation
1. Heat recovery Unit, Cooling/Heating 50/56 kW
(Minimum requirements)
Cooling capacity Prated,c kW 50.4
Prated,h kW 27.9
Heating capacity
Max. 6°CWB kW 56.5
ηs,c % 250.6
Efficiency
ηs,h % 172.5
Seasonal coefficient of SEER kW/kW 6.3
performance SCOP kW/kW 4.4
Maximum number of
- - 64
connectable indoor units
Min. - 225
Indoor index connection Nom. - -
Max. - 585
Dimensions Unit Height x Width x Depth mm 1,685x1240x765
Weight Unit kg 317
Sound power level Cooling Nom. dBA 83.8
Sound pressure level Cooling Nom. dBA 62.0
Cooling Min.~Max. °CDB -5.0~43.0
Operation range
Heating Min.~Max. °CWB -20.0~15.5
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677

Charge kg/TCO2Eq 11.8/24.6

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 154

 Liquid OD mm 15.9
Piping connections Gas OD mm 28.6
HP/LP gas OD mm 22.2

Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 3N~/50/380-415

Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 40

Outdoor Unit Installation

2. Heat recovery Unit, Cooling/Heating 33/37 kW
(Minimum requirements)
Cooling capacity Prated,c kW 33.5
Prated,h kW 18.4
Heating capacity
Max. 6°CWB kW 37.5
ηs,c % 257.0
Efficiency
ηs,h % 183.8
Seasonal coefficient of SEER kW/kW 6.5
performance SCOP kW/kW 4.7
Maximum number of
- 64
connectable indoor units
Min. - 150.0
Indoor index connection Nom. - -
Max. - 390.0
Dimensions Unit Height x Width x Depth mm 1,685x930x765
Weight Unit kg 230
Sound power level Cooling Nom. dBA 83.4
Sound pressure level Cooling Nom. dBA 61.0
Cooling Min.~Max. °CDB -5.0~43.0
Operation range
Heating Min.~Max. °CWB -20.0~15.5
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677

Charge kg/TCO2Eq 9.9/20.7

Liquid OD mm 12.7
Piping connections Gas OD mm 28.6
HP/LP gas OD mm 19.1

Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 3N~/50/380-415

Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 32

Table 4-9. Outdoor Heat recovery Unit for Building No.4 and 14, Ground Floor

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 155

[Link] Building No. 04/B.14 – First/Second Floor
Total Cooling/Heating Capacity: 78.5/87.5 kW = 45/50 kW + 33.5/37.5 kW (two units)
Outdoor Unit Installation
1. Heat recovery Unit, Cooling/Heating 45/50 kW
(Minimum requirements)
Cooling capacity Prated,c kW 45.0
Prated,h kW 23.2
Heating capacity
Max. 6°CWB kW 50.0
ηs,c % 243.1
Efficiency
ηs,h % 167.5
Seasonal coefficient of SEER kW/kW 6.2
performance SCOP kW/kW 4.3
Maximum number of
- - 64
connectable indoor units
Min. - 200
Indoor index connection Nom. - -
Max. - 520
Dimensions Unit Height x Width x Depth mm 1,685x930x765
Weight Unit kg 314
Sound power level Cooling Nom. dBA 85.6
Sound pressure level Cooling Nom. dBA 63.0
Cooling Min.~Max. °CDB -5.0~43.0
Operation range
Heating Min.~Max. °CWB -20.0~15.5
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677

Charge kg/TCO2Eq 11.8/24.6

Liquid OD mm 12.7
Piping connections Gas OD mm 28.6
HP/LP gas OD mm 22.2

Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 3N~/50/380-415

Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 40

Outdoor Unit Installation

2. Heat recovery Unit, Cooling/Heating 33/37 kW
(Minimum requirements)
Cooling capacity Prated,c kW 33.5
Prated,h kW 18.4
Heating capacity
Max. 6°CWB kW 37.5
ηs,c % 257.0
Efficiency
ηs,h % 183.8
Seasonal coefficient of SEER kW/kW 6.5
performance SCOP kW/kW 4.7
Maximum number of
- 64
connectable indoor units
Min. - 150.0
Indoor index connection Nom. - -
Max. - 390.0

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 156

 Dimensions Unit Height x Width x Depth mm 1,685x930x765
Weight Unit kg 230
Sound power level Cooling Nom. dBA 83.4
Sound pressure level Cooling Nom. dBA 61.0
Cooling Min.~Max. °CDB -5.0~43.0
Operation range
Heating Min.~Max. °CWB -20.0~15.5
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677

Charge kg/TCO2Eq 9.9/20.7

Liquid OD mm 12.7
Piping connections Gas OD mm 28.6
HP/LP gas OD mm 19.1

Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 3N~/50/380-415

Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 32

Table 4-10. Outdoor Heat recovery Unit for Building No. 4 and 14, First and Second Floor

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 157

[Link] Building No. 04/B.14 – Third floor
Total Cooling/Heating Capacity: 73.5/82.5 kW = 40/45 kW + 33.5/37.5 kW (two units)
Outdoor Unit Installation
1. Heat recovery Unit, Cooling/Heating 40/45 kW
(Minimum requirements)
Cooling capacity Prated,c kW 40.0
Prated,h kW 20.6
Heating capacity
Max. 6°CWB kW 45.0
ηs,c % 243.1
Efficiency
ηs,h % 167.5
Seasonal coefficient of SEER kW/kW 6.2
performance SCOP kW/kW 4.3
Maximum number of
- - 64
connectable indoor units
Min. - 200
Indoor index connection Nom. - -
Max. - 520
Dimensions Unit Height x Width x Depth mm 1,685x930x765
Weight Unit kg 314
Sound power level Cooling Nom. dBA 85.6
Sound pressure level Cooling Nom. dBA 63.0
Cooling Min.~Max. °CDB -5.0~43.0
Operation range
Heating Min.~Max. °CWB -20.0~15.5
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677

Charge kg/TCO2Eq 11.8/24.6

Liquid OD mm 12.7
Piping connections Gas OD mm 28.6
HP/LP gas OD mm 22.2

Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 3N~/50/380-415

Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 40

Outdoor Unit Installation

Heat recovery Unit, Cooling/Heating 33/37 kW
(Minimum requirements)
Cooling capacity Prated,c kW 33.5
Prated,h kW 18.4
Heating capacity
Max. 6°CWB kW 37.5
ηs,c % 257.0
Efficiency
ηs,h % 183.8
Seasonal coefficient of SEER kW/kW 6.5
performance SCOP kW/kW 4.7
Maximum number of
- 64
connectable indoor units
Min. - 150.0
Indoor index connection Nom. - -
Max. - 390.0

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 158

 Dimensions Unit Height x Width x Depth mm 1,685x930x765
Weight Unit kg 230
Sound power level Cooling Nom. dBA 83.4
Sound pressure level Cooling Nom. dBA 61.0
Cooling Min.~Max. °CDB -5.0~43.0
Operation range
Heating Min.~Max. °CWB -20.0~15.5
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677

Charge kg/TCO2Eq 9.9/20.7

Liquid OD mm 12.7
Piping connections Gas OD mm 28.6
HP/LP gas OD mm 19.1

Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 3N~/50/380-415

Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 32

Table 4-11. Outdoor Heat recovery Unit, Building No. 4 and 14, Third Floor

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 159

[Link] Building No. 16/17 – Ground floor/ first floor/ second floor/ third floor
Total Cooling/Heating Capacity: 95.4/106.5 kW = 50.4/56.5 kW + 45.0/50.0 kW (two units)
Outdoor Unit Installation
1. Heat recovery Unit, Cooling/Heating 50/56 kW
(Minimum requirements)
Cooling capacity Prated,c kW 50.4
Prated,h kW 27.9
Heating capacity
Max. 6°CWB kW 56.5
ηs,c % 250.6
Efficiency
ηs,h % 172.5
Seasonal coefficient of SEER kW/kW 6.3
performance SCOP kW/kW 4.4
Maximum number of
- - 64
connectable indoor units
Min. - 225
Indoor index connection Nom. - -
Max. - 585
Dimensions Unit Height x Width x Depth mm 1,685x1240x765
Weight Unit kg 317
Sound power level Cooling Nom. dBA 83.8
Sound pressure level Cooling Nom. dBA 62.0
Cooling Min.~Max. °CDB -5.0~43.0
Operation range
Heating Min.~Max. °CWB -20.0~15.5
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677

Charge kg/TCO2Eq 11.8/24.6

Liquid OD mm 15.9
Piping connections Gas OD mm 28.6
HP/LP gas OD mm 22.2

Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 3N~/50/380-415

Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 40

Outdoor Unit Installation

2. Heat recovery Unit, Cooling/Heating 45/50 kW
(Minimum requirements)
Cooling capacity Prated,c kW 45.0
Prated,h kW 23.2
Heating capacity
Max. 6°CWB kW 50.0
ηs,c % 243.1
Efficiency
ηs,h % 167.5
Seasonal coefficient of SEER kW/kW 6.2
performance SCOP kW/kW 4.3
Maximum number of
- - 64
connectable indoor units
Min. - 200
Indoor index connection Nom. - -
Max. - 520

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 160

 Dimensions Unit Height x Width x Depth mm 1,685x930x765
Weight Unit kg 314
Sound power level Cooling Nom. dBA 85.6
Sound pressure level Cooling Nom. dBA 63.0
Cooling Min.~Max. °CDB -5.0~43.0
Operation range
Heating Min.~Max. °CWB -20.0~15.5
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677

Charge kg/TCO2Eq 11.8/24.6

Liquid OD mm 12.7
Piping connections Gas OD mm 28.6
HP/LP gas OD mm 22.2

Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 3N~/50/380-415

Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 40

Table 4-12. Outdoor Heat recovery Unit, Building No. 16/17 – Ground Floor/ First Floor/ Second Floor/ Third Floor

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 161

[Link] Building No 03 – Ground, first and second floor/ third, fourth and sixth floor
Total Cooling/Heating Capacity: 83.9/94 kW = 50.4/56.5 kW + 33.5/37.5 kW (two units)
Outdoor Unit Installation
1. Heat recovery Unit, Cooling/Heating 50/56 kW
(Minimum requirements)
Cooling capacity Prated,c kW 50.4
Prated,h kW 27.9
Heating capacity
Max. 6°CWB kW 56.5
ηs,c % 250.6
Efficiency
ηs,h % 172.5
Seasonal coefficient of SEER kW/kW 6.3
performance SCOP kW/kW 4.4
Maximum number of
- - 64
connectable indoor units
Min. - 225
Indoor index connection Nom. - -
Max. - 585
Dimensions Unit Height x Width x Depth mm 1,685x1240x765
Weight Unit kg 317
Sound power level Cooling Nom. dBA 83.8
Sound pressure level Cooling Nom. dBA 62.0
Cooling Min.~Max. °CDB -5.0~43.0
Operation range
Heating Min.~Max. °CWB -20.0~15.5
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677

Charge kg/TCO2Eq 11.8/24.6

Liquid OD mm 15.9
Piping connections Gas OD mm 28.6
HP/LP gas OD mm 22.2

Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 3N~/50/380-415

Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 40

Outdoor Unit Installation

2. Heat recovery Unit, Cooling/Heating 33/37 kW
(Minimum requirements)
Cooling capacity Prated,c kW 33.5
Prated,h kW 18.4
Heating capacity
Max. 6°CWB kW 37.5
Efficiency ηs,c % 257.0

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 162

 ηs,h % 183.8
Seasonal coefficient of SEER kW/kW 6.5
performance SCOP kW/kW 4.7
Maximum number of
- 64
connectable indoor units
Min. - 150.0
Indoor index connection Nom. - -
Max. - 390.0
Dimensions Unit Height x Width x Depth mm 1,685x930x765
Weight Unit kg 230
Sound power level Cooling Nom. dBA 83.4
Sound pressure level Cooling Nom. dBA 61.0
Cooling Min.~Max. °CDB -5.0~43.0
Operation range
Heating Min.~Max. °CWB -20.0~15.5
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677

Charge kg/TCO2Eq 9.9/20.7

Liquid OD mm 12.7
Piping connections Gas OD mm 28.6
HP/LP gas OD mm 19.1

Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 3N~/50/380-415

Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 32

Table 4-13. Outdoor Heat recovery Unit, Building No. 03 – Ground, first and second floor/ third, fourth and fifth floor

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 163

4.2.5 Heat Recovery indoor units

[Link] Student Bedrooms

The air duct indoor units within the student rooms shall comply to the following requirements or better:
- Compact dimensions, can easily be mounted in a ceiling void of limited diameters, e.g., < 240mm
- Medium external static pressure, e.g. up to 44Pa, that facilitates unit use with flexible ducts of
varying lengths
- Discretely concealed in the wall, where only the suction and discharge grilles are visible
- 15 class unit especially developed for small or well-insulated rooms, such as hotel dormitory,
bedrooms, small offices, etc.
- Auto cleaning filter option shall ensure maximum efficiency, comfort and reliability
- Multi zoning kit shall allow several individually controlled climatic zones to be served by one unit
- Flexible installations, so it is possible to alter the air suction direction from rear to bottom suction

Slim concealed ceiling

Air Duct indoor unit Cooling / Heating 2.8 / 3.2 kW
(Minimum requirements)
Installation in Student rooms
Cooling capacity Total capacity at high fan speed kW 2.80
Heating capacity Total capacity at high fan speed kW 3.20
Cooling At high fan speed kW 0.071
Power input - 50Hz
Heating at high fan speed kW 0.068
Required ceiling void mm 240
Casing Material Type Galvanized steel
Air flow rate Cooling at 50Hz:
medium fan speed m³/min
8.0 / 7.20 / 6.4
low fan speed m³/min
Fan
high fan speed m³/min
External static Factory set / High
Pa 10 / 30.0
Pressure - 50Hz
Air filter Type Removable / washable
Sound power level Cooling At high fan speed dBA 51
Sound pressure Cooling At:
dBA 33.0 / 31.0 / 27.0
high fan speed / medium fan speed/ low fan speed
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677
Liquid OD mm 6.35
Piping connections Gas OD mm 12.7
Drain mm I.D. 20/O.D. 26
Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 1~/50/60/220-240/220
Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 16

Table 4-14. Air Duct indoor unit Cooling / Heating 2.8 / 3.2 kW

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 164

[Link] Entrance Hall
The round flow cassette indoor units installed within the entrance hall shall comply to the following
requirements or better:
- 360° air discharge for optimum efficiency and comfort
- Integrated automatic filter cleaning to acquire higher efficiency & comfort and lower
maintenance costs
- Two optional intelligent sensors shall improve energy efficiency and comfort
- Designer panels shall be white (RAL9010) and black (RAL9005) and standard panels shall be in
white (RAL9010) with grey louvers or full white
- Bigger flaps and unique swing patterns shall improve equal air distribution
- Individual flap control shall ensure the flexibility to adjust to every room layout without changing
the location of the unit
- Installation height shall be 214 mm for class 20-63 (lowest possible)
- Optional fresh air intake
- Branch duct discharge shall ensure optimization of air distribution in irregular shaped rooms and/
or to supply air to small adjacent rooms

Round flow cassette

Round flow cassette Cooling / Heating 4.5 / 5 kW
(Minimum requirements)

Installation in the entrance Hall

Cooling capacity Total capacity at high fan speed kW 4.50

Heating capacity Total capacity at high fan speed kW 5.00
Power input - 50Hz Cooling at high fan speed kW 0.040
Heating at high fan speed kW 0.040
Casing Material Galvanised steel plate
Standard panels: white with
Model grey louvers Auto cleaning
panels
Standard panels: 50x950x950 /
Dimensions Auto cleaning panels:
Decoration panel
Height x Width x Depth mm 130x950x950 / Designer panels:
50x950x950
Standard panels: 5.4 / Auto
Weight kg cleaning panels: 10.3 / Designer
panels: 5.4
Air flow Cooling At - 50Hz:
high fan speed
m³/min 14.8 / 12.6 / 10.4
medium fan speed
low fan speed
Air flow Heating At - 50Hz:
high fan speed
m³/min 14.8 / 12.6 / 10.4
medium fan speed
low fan speed
Air filter Type Resin net
Sound power level Cooling At high fan speed dBA 51.0

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 165

 Cooling At:
high fan speed
dBA 33.0 / 31.0 / 29.0
medium fan speed
Sound pressure low fan speed
level Heating At:
high fan speed
dBA 33.0 / 31.0 / 29.0
medium fan speed
low fan speed
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677
Liquid OD mm 6.35
Piping connections Gas OD mm 12.7
Drain mm O.D. 32 / I.D. 25
Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 1~/50/60/220-240/220

Table 4-15. Round flow cassette Cooling / Heating 4.5 / 5 kW.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 166

[Link] Kitchen
The wall mounted indoor units installed in the kitchen shall comply to the following requirements or better:
- Flat front panel blends, modern, easily integrated into any interior decor and
- Uncomplicated and easy installation and cleaning/ maintenance
- The air shall be comfortably spread up- and downwards by up to 5 different discharge angles
that can be programmed by the remote control
- It shall be easily possible to perform maintenance operations from the front of the unit

[Link].1 Type 1
Wall mounted unit
In Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 4.5 / 5.0 kW
(Minimum requirements)
Installation in kitchens

Cooling capacity Total At high fan speed capacity kW 4.5

Heating capacity Total At high fan speed capacity kW 5.0

Cooling At high fan speed kW 0.02
Power input - 50Hz
Heating At high fan speed kW 0.02
Air flow rate Cooling At - 50Hz:
Fan high fan speed m³/min 12.2/9.7
low fan speed
Air filter Type Washable resin net
Sound power level Cooling At high fan speed dBA 55
Sound pressure level Cooling At:
high fan speed dBA 37.0/33.5
low fan speed
Heating At:
high fan speed dBA 38.0 / 33.5
low fan speed
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677
Piping connections Liquid OD mm 6.35
Gas OD mm 12.7
mm Drain mm VP13 (I.D. 15/O.D. 18)
Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 1~/50/220-240
Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 16

Table 4-16. Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 4.5 / 5.0 kW

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 167

[Link].2 Type 2
Wall mounted unit
In Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 7.1 / 8.0 kW
(Minimum requirements)

Installation: Kitchen

Cooling capacity Total At high fan speed capacity kW 7.1

Heating capacity Total At high fan speed capacity kW 8.0

Cooling At high fan speed kW 0.05
Power input - 50Hz
Heating At high fan speed kW 0.06
Air flow rate Cooling At - 50Hz:
Fan high fan speed m³/min 13.5/18.3
low fan speed
Air filter Type Washable resin net
Sound power level Cooling At high fan speed dBA 63
Sound pressure level Cooling At:
high fan speed dBA 38.5/46.5
low fan speed
Heating At:
high fan speed dBA 38.5 / 47.0
low fan speed
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677
Piping connections Liquid OD mm 9.52
Gas OD mm 15.9
mm Drain mm VP13 (I.D. 15/O.D. 18)
Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 1~/50/220-240
Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 16

Table 4-17. Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 7.1 / 8.0 kW

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 168

[Link] Common Rooms for Students
The wall mounted indoor units installed in the student rooms shall comply to the following requirements
or better:
- Flat front panel blends, modern, easily integrated into any interior decor and
- Uncomplicated and easy installation and cleaning/ maintenance
- The air shall be comfortably spread up- and downwards by up to 5 different discharge angles
that can be programmed by the remote control
- It shall be easily possible to perform maintenance operations from the front of the unit

Wall mounted unit

Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 2.8 / 3.2 kW
(Minimum requirements)
Installation in the Student rooms

Cooling capacity Total At high fan speed capacity kW 2.8

Heating capacity Total At high fan speed capacity kW 3.2

Cooling At high fan speed kW 0.02
Power input - 50Hz
Heating At high fan speed kW 0.03
Air flow rate Cooling At - 50Hz:
Fan high fan speed m³/min 9.1 / 7.0
low fan speed
Air filter Type Washable resin net
Sound power level Cooling At high fan speed dBA 52.0
Sound pressure level Cooling At:
high fan speed dBA 33.0 / 28.5
low fan speed
Heating At:
high fan speed dBA 34.0 / 28.5
low fan speed
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677
Piping connections Liquid OD mm 6.35
Gas OD mm 12.7
mm Drain mm VP13 (I.D. 15/O.D. 18)
Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 1~/50/220-240
Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 16

Table 4-18. Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 2.8 / 3.2 kW

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 169

[Link] Study rooms
The Ceiling suspended units in the study rooms shall comply to the following requirements or better:

- Specially designed structure to ensure comfortable air flow in wide rooms due to Coanda effect
with up to 100° discharge angle
- Possibility to heat up or cool down rooms with ceilings up to 3.8m without capacity loss
- Uncomplicated and easy installation and cleaning/ maintenance, installation/ mounting in
corners and narrows shall be easily possible (i.e., only 30mm lateral service space needed).

Ceiling suspended unit

Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 7.1 / 8.0 kW
(Minimum requirements)
Installation in the study rooms
Cooling capacity Total capacity at high fan speed kW 7.1
Heating capacity Total capacity at high fan speed kW 8.0
Power input - Cooling at high fan speed kW 0.111
50Hz Heating At high fan speed kW 0.111
Casing Material Resin
Air flow rate - 50Hz Cooling
m³/min 20.0 / 14.0
high fan speed/ low fan speed
Fan
Air flow rate - 50Hz Heating
m³/min 20.0 / 14.0
high fan speed/ low fan speed
Air filter Type Resin net with mould resistance
Sound power level Cooling
high fan speed
dBA 53 / 55
medium fan speed
low fan speed
Cooling At:
high fan speed / medium fan speed / dBA 34 / 35 / 37
Sound low fan speed
pressure level Heating
high fan speed / medium fan speed/ dBA 34 / 35 / 37
low fan speed
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677
Liquid OD mm 9.52
Piping
Gas OD mm 15.9
connections
Drain mm VP20 (I.D. 20/O.D. 26)
1~/50/22
Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V
0-240
Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 16

Table 4-19. Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 7.1 / 8.0 kW.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 170

[Link] Corridors
Ceiling mounted corner cassette units installed in the corridors shall comply to the following requirements
or better:
- Compact dimensions, shall be easily mountable in narrow ceiling void (only 220mm ceiling space
required, 195 with panel spacer, available as accessory)
- Optimum air flow conditions shall be created by either downward air discharge or frontal air
discharge (via optional grille) or a combination of both.

[Link].1 Type 1
Ceiling mounted corner cassette
Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 4.5/5.0 kW
(Minimum requirements)
Installation in the corridors
Cooling capacity Total capacity At high fan speed kW 4.5
Heating capacity Total capacity At high fan speed kW 5.0
Power input - 50Hz Cooling At high fan speed kW 0.076
Heating At high fan speed kW 0.056
Casing Material Galvanized steel plate
Color White
Decoration panel Dimensions Height x Width x Depth mm 70x1,240x800
Weight kg 8.5
Fan Air flow rate- 50Hz Cooling:
13 / 10
high fan speed m³/min
low fan speed
Air filter Type Resin net with mild resistance
Sound power level Cooling:
high fan speed dBA 56 / 50
low fan speed
Sound pressure Cooling:
high fan speed dBA 40.0 / 34.0
low level fan speed
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677
Liquid OD mm 6.35
Piping connections Gas OD mm 12.7
Drain mm VP25 (O.D. 32 / I.D. 25)
Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 1~/50/60/220-240/220
Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 15

Table 4-20. Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 4.5/5.0 kW.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 171

[Link].2 Type 2
Ceiling mounted corner cassette
Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 7.1/8.0 kW
(Minimum requirements)
Installation in the corridors
Cooling capacity Total capacity at high fan speed kW 7.1
Heating capacity Total capacity at high fan speed kW 8.0
Power input - Cooling at high fan speed kW 0.105
50Hz Heating at high fan speed kW 0.085
Casing Material Galvanized steel plate
Colour White
Decoration panel Dimensions Height x Width x Depth mm 70x1,440x800
Weight kg 9.5
Fan Air flow rate- 50Hz Cooling:
15 / 18
high fan speed m³/min
low fan speed
Air filter Type Resin net with mild resistance
Sound power level Cooling:
high fan speed dBA 58
low fan speed
Sound pressure Cooling:
high fan speed dBA 37.0 / 42.0
low level fan speed
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677
Liquid OD mm 9.52
Piping
Gas OD mm 15.9
connections
Drain mm VP25 (O.D. 32 / I.D. 25)
Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 1~/50/60/220-240/220
Current - 50Hz Maximum fuse amps (MFA) A 15

Table 4-21. Indoor unit Cooling / Heating 7.1/8.0 kW.

[Link] Electrical Room

Conditioner split wall mounted unit shall comply to the following requirements:
- Flat front panel blends, modern, easily integrated into any interior decor and
- Uncomplicated and easy installation and cleaning/ maintenance
- The air shall be comfortably spread up- and downwards by up to 5 different discharge angles
that can be programmed by the remote control
- It shall be easily possible to perform maintenance operations from the front of the unit

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 172

 Wall mounted unit
Split wall mounted unit Cooling / Heating 5.0 / 6.0 kW
(Minimum requirements)

Installation: Electrical Room

Cooling capacity Total At high fan speed capacity kW 5.0

Heating capacity Total At high fan speed capacity kW 6.0

Air flow rate Cooling At - 50Hz:
Fan high fan speed m³/min 15.0/18.0
low fan speed
Air filter Type Removable / Washable
Sound power level Cooling At high fan speed dBA 61
Sound pressure level Cooling At:
high fan speed dBA 31/34/43
low fan speed
Heating At:
high fan speed dBA 30/33/42
low fan speed
Refrigerant Type/GWP R-410A/2,087.5 or R32/677
Piping connections Liquid OD mm 6.4
Gas OD mm 12.7
mm Drain mm VP13 (I.D. 15/O.D. 18)
Power supply Phase/Frequency/Voltage Hz/V 1~/50/220-240

Table 4-22. Split wall mounted unit Cooling / Heating 5.0 / 6.0 kW

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 173

4.3 Condensing water discharge system

The discharge of condensate water of the Heat Recovery indoor units will be realized with PP
(Polypropylene) pipes, where these pipes will collect vertically, using all necessary PP fittings, and will
discharge in the external network of collection and discharge of rainwater.

Polypropylene is a thermoplastic belonging to the polyolefin group. It is a semi-crystalline material. Its

density is lower than that of other well-known thermoplastics. Its mechanical characteristics, its chemical
resistance, and especially its relatively high heat deflection temperature have made polypropylene one of
the most important materials used in piping installations today. PP Pipe & Fittings have an excellent
durability against acid, alkali, and some organic solvents. In addition, they exert favorable chemical-
resistance in a high temperature range. In addition to the chemical-resistance shown below, things such as
temperature, concentration, pressure, etc. of solvent need to be considered at the time of selecting.

Figure 4-3 – PP pipes - with flexible connectivity and push-fit system

In general polypropylene can be used at temperatures from 0°C to +80°C, Beta-PP-H in the range from
−10°C up to 95°C. Below −10°C, the outstanding impact strength of the material is reduced. On the other
hand, the stiffness is even higher at low temperatures. For temperatures below 0°C it must be ensured, as
for every other material, that the medium does not freeze, consequently damaging the piping system. As
with all thermoplastics, PP shows a higher thermal expansion (0.16 to 0.18 mm/mK) than metal. As long as
this is taken into account during the planning of the installation, there should be no problems in this regard.
The thermal conductivity is 0.23 W/mK. Because of the resulting insulation properties, a PP piping system
is notably more economical in comparison to a system made of a metal like copper.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 174

Table 4-23. PP Pipe Dimension Table

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 175

4.4 Ventilation system

4.4.1 Wall Bathroom Fans

A centrifugal fan duct is installed to expel air directly through a long duct and is suitable for installation in
bathrooms. The plastic material used for this construction and the precise design of the components shall
give the fans solidity and a pleasing appearance. The maximum operating temperature shall be 40°C.

The following requirements shall be taken into consideration:

- Design shall be purposely created for public sector houses in bathrooms, showers, toilets, utility
rooms and kitchens
- Motor shall be with ball bearings with thermal cut-out.
- Long Life span – min. 30.000 hours of continuous operation acc. specifications
- Two operational modes (speed modes)
- Double motor-fan housing with anti-vibration supports and back draught shutter for silent
operation
- Low power consumption
- Metallic filter shall be removable and washable (dishwasher safe).
- The fans shall fully comply with F1 Building Regulations, plus 1.9D alternative approaches.
- Protection rating: IPX4.
- Protection class: Clio.

Technical And Performance Data

- Absorbed power 1st speed (W) 25
- Frequency (Hz) 50
- Insulation Class II°
- IP X4
- Max ambient temperature for continuous operation (°C) 50
- Max. absorbed Current at max. speed (A) 0,18
- Max. absorbed Current at min. speed (A) 0,14
- Max. absorbed power at max speed (W) 29
- Nominal Diameter (mm) 100
- Ø Discharge Hole (mm) 97
- Voltage (V) 220-240
- Weight (Kg) 2,5
- Delivery 1st speed (l/s) 19
- Delivery 1st speed (m³/h) 70
- Max delivery at max speed (l/s) 33
- Max delivery at max speed (m³/h) 120
- Pressure - 1st speed (Pa) 216
- Pressure max - max speed (Pa) 329
- RPM max 1890

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 176

 - RPM min 1150
- Sound pressure in free air conditions [dB(A)] 3m 36,7
- Sound pressure level Lp [dB (A)] 3m -max speed 43,4
- Sound pressure level Lp [dB (A)] 3m -min speed 36,7

Dimensions#

Figure 4-4 – The Wall Fans

Table 4-24. Dimensions of wall fans

Description

- Material: white ABS plastic

- Capacitor shall start 2-speed induction motor coupled to a forward bladed centrifugal impeller and
equipped with thermal overload cut-off and self-lubricating bushings.
- Nominal diameter 100 mm.
- Equipped with electronic timer designed to shut off the motor automatically after a set interval,
selectable during installation in the range 3’-20’ (default setting 3’).
- IMQ SAFETY and IMQ PERFORMANCE certifications.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 177

4.4.2 Delivery Air Grilles
Delivery grilles from the Fan-Coil, shall be with a double row of individually adjustable blades, suitable for
wall installation. The grilles shall be composed of natural anodized extruded aluminium painted extruded
aluminium (RAL), stainless steel, and copper, as required.

Figure 4-5 – The Delivery Grilles

4.4.3 Return Air Grilles

Return grilles shall be with fixed inclined horizontal fins, 25 mm pitch. The particular shape of the fins shall
ensure that these elements can be used outdoors for the introduction of fresh air, ventilation or the
expulsion of stale air.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 178

 Figure 4-6 – The Return Air Grilles

4.4.4 Transit Air Grilles

The transit grids shall be designed for application on doors or low thickness walls between 40 and 60 mm.
These grids shall also be usable without a counter frame, TA series. It shall be possible that the grids can
be applied to walls >60 mm of thickness by combining it with an AFA grid or another CT. The fins shall be
fixed inverted "V" fins with 25 mm pitch, which allows the passage of air between rooms, limiting the
penetration of light and noise.

All the grilles shall be with dimensions 50x10 cm.

Figure 4-7 – The Transit Air Grilles

4.4.5 Air Duct Ventilation

The ventilation system is provided for the entire buildings, in each toilet, kitchen and student room, which
will be realized with a metal air duct.

All metallic air duct shall be made from galvanized steel with minimum Z275, rectangular cross-section and
according to the indications/ dimensions shown in plans. Construction shall be conventional with seaming
on the four corners. Zinc type shall be ZNA 98. 25 UNI EN 1179/97 shall be used for plating. For Heat joints
the bayonet type might be used for small ducts according to the beforementioned standards, by arranging
seals in between.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 179

 Figure 4-8 – Air Ventilation Duct Detail

The thickness of the sheet metal should be respectively according to the norms given in table below, in
which the thickness is determined for the limit dimensions of the channels.

Height Sheet thickness

Until 30 cm δ=0.6 mm
From 35 ÷ 75 cm δ=0.8 mm
From 80 ÷ 120 cm δ=1.0 mm
From 125 ÷ 200 cm δ=1.2 mm
Up 200 cm δ=1.5 mm
Table 4-25. Air Duct Ventilation thickness

Rectangular ducts
Joints shall be made using flanges and seals for ducts of larger size. Ducts shall be of the type classified
according to the following parameters:

- Sealing class “A”

- Low speed.

Parallel piped section ducts shall be made by folding and longitudinal seaming of the edges by machine
(e.g. PITTSBURGH).

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 180

Ducts with sides larger than 400 mm shall be stiffened by means of transversal ribbings at a pitch from 150
to 250 mm, or by Saint Andrew's crosses. For ducts with sides larger than 800 mm, the stiffening will consist
of crosswise ribbings.

The various duct segments shall be jointed together by means of sliding flanges or made using 30 x 3
galvanized steel angle bars.

The joints will be sealed or provided with appropriate seals to prevent loss of air through the ducts
themselves.

Changes of direction must be performed using wide radius elbows, with ratio no less than 1.25 between
the curving radius and the dimension of the face of the duct parallel to the curving plane.

If for clearance reasons narrow radius curve elbows are required, these must be provided with internal
baffles to convey air threads and prevent turbulent as shown in UNI EN 1505/00.

When a duct changes section, shape or branches off, the segment with different features shall be joined
together by means of suitable fitting parts.

If batteries for locally withholding the air are inserted in the ducts, the duct segment unions shall have a
divergence angle of less than 30 degrees at the inlet and a convergence of less than 45 degrees at the
outlet.

A T-branch is fitted along the duct, a cut-off shutter shall be provided. The necessary joints (which must be
sampled and approved) shall be contemplated for crossing structural joints.

Duct brackets
The brackets shall be made of hot-galvanised F3 37 carbon steel sections and anchoring shelves made so
as to rapidly and easily create support structures, such as crossbars, shelves and self-bearing structures on
site.

Connections and anchoring shall be made using galvanised mechanical members, such as nuts and bolts,
threaded bars, etc.

The number of supports depends on the course and the features of the ducts; generally the pitch of the
step is that of the joints. The maximum distance between supports shall be 2.4 m.

One or more supports shall be installed in the middle of each elbow.

Ducts with side larger than 750 mm may be supported by angular sections fixed to the duct by means of
rivets or bolts and threaded bars.

The angular sections shall be complete with rubber device for soundproofing. The ducts of larger size shall
be supported by means of metallic sections supported by threaded bars. A suitable rubber section for
soundproofing purposes shall be arranged between the duct and the support.

The threaded bars shall be provided with rubber sections for the part related to the height of the duct.

The circular ducts shall be supported by means of galvanized steel collars. The collars shall be provided
with rubber sections for soundproofing purposes.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 181

The ducts running on floor level shall be supported by means of stands made of galvanised steel sections
with supporting plates between plate and resting surface on which a 10 mm thick neoprene plate shall be
arranged with dimensions slightly larger than those of the plate on top.

The vertical duct supports shall also consist of galvanized steel sections and plates fitted onto the wall.

Elastic material shall be arranged for crossing walls and ceilings etc of the type approved by the
Implementation consultant to prevent the transmission of vibrations.

The Contractor shall present samples of all bracketing types to the Implementation Consultant for approval
before construction and shall make the changes that the Implementation Consultant will require, without
requiring extra compensation.

Brackets and supports shall be installed so as to prevent compression or damage to the insulation.

The brackets shall be anchored to the concrete structures or brickwork of the building by the Contractor.

Expansion bolts shall be used for fixing to concrete walls and structures where no metallic structures were
previously fitted in masonry. Embedded braces shall be used for brickwork.

All anchoring systems shall be approved by the Implementation Consultant before starting the works by
submitting samples. Use of nail guns shall not be allowed. Pre-compressed concrete structures may be
used for bracketing only if suitable for this purpose.

4.4.6 Duct insulation

The thickness duct insultations shall be those specified in the Design Drawings. If the conductivity of the
finally chosen insulating material will be different than in the design, the thickness shall be changed
accordingly, but always comply to the Italian Law 10/9 1 and the norm UNI 10376. The external pipes and
ducts shall be protected by waterproof aluminium foil of 0.6 mm thickness. Joints shall be sealed by putty
to properly complete the waterproofing.

Glass fibre insulation

The pipes insulation shall be made by means of cork pipe coverings and curves, whilst the surfaces
shall be covered by a mattress, both in glass fibre and with thermosetting resin.

Plastic insulation
The material shall be expanded polyethylene with closed cells, 1st class of fire reaction. The estimates
shall be carried out per linear meter, and per square meter of surfaces.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 182

5 Specification for Electrical, PV and BMS System
The design of the electrical system for the buildings is based on the Term of References, the architectural
spaces and the applicable Standards.

The power distribution system should be implemented as TN-S system. 3 Ph, N, PE. 400 V, 50 Hz

This section contains the following section specifications:

1. Power network system

2. Normal and emergency lighting system
3. Fire Detection System
4. IT & Telephone, Wi-Fi Network System
5. CCTV and Access Control System
6. EVAC Network System
7. Grounding & Lightning Protection System
8. Electrical Distribution Board`s LV (Single Line and Wiring Diagrams)
9. Photovoltaic System
10. BMS System

The design of the electrical system for the buildings is based on the Term of References, the architectural
spaces, and the applicable Standards.

The power distribution system should be implemented as TN-S system. 3 Ph, N, PE. 400 V, 50 Hz

5.1 General Specifications on Electrical, PV and BMS System

5.1.1 Abbreviations
CCTV : Closed Circuit Television
MEP : Main Electrical Panel
EDB : Electrical Distribution Board
FACP : Fire Alarm Control Panel
Hz : Hertz (frequency)
LED : Light Emitting Diode
LV : Low Voltage
MCCB : Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
MCB : Miniature Circuit Breaker
N : Neutral
PC : Power Cable
PE : Protective Earthing Conductor
Ph : Phase
UPS : Uninterruptible Power Supply
WS : Workstation
GF : Ground Floor
FF : First Floor

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 183

SF : Second Floor
THF : Third Floor
RF : Roof Floor

5.1.2 Works Included in the Contract

The scope of Electrical works to be covered in this Contract includes the complete electrical equipment and
the related services.

Following main items are listed as indication – no limitation - the scope of works:

• Completion of all required approval procedures and coordination with relevant authorities (electricity
Supply Company, Telecom Company, Fire brigade, etc.)
• Detailed design for all cables, apparatuses, low voltage equipment, electrical installations, and rooms
where equipment will be installed.
• Switch – gear, metering system, power supply cables for all installations. Distribution, Control,
Automation, Building Management
• Design, supply, and installation of low voltage systems between the facilities including connection to
the local electricity grid run by local electricity company. The Contractor shall obtain all needed
permissions and shall cooperate with the local electricity company to design, purchase, and install all
needed for the building operation equipment and facilities.
• A complete electrical installation including distribution panels, control panels, cable trays and building
installations (indoor lighting, small power, telephone/internet, fire alarm, data transfer, etc.).
• Energy metering device as requested by the Power Supply Company.
• Lightning protection systems and installation inclusive protective earthing and equipotential bonding.
• Instrumentation for measuring of all needed for Building operation parameters (incl. but not limited to
heat, electricity, water consumption)
• A complete uninterruptible power supply system (UPS) for the control and monitoring system and the
instrumentation.
• An emergency lighting system.
• Exit emergency luminaires
• Fire detection and Alarm System
• Voice Alarm System
• Access Control System
• Supply of spare parts and supply of special tools.

The specifications of the Electrical Works given here are not thought to give a complete information or
descriptions for all items required under the contract. The intention of the specifications for electrical
equipment is to define and to specify the quality, functions and purpose of the main required electrical
systems and components.

The quality and kind of the electrical components and systems shall be as specified in the Bidding
Documents. Additional components must be selected by the Contractor and must be described in detail in
his offer. Any such component must fulfil the uniform high-quality standard that is required for the whole
Electrical Works.

The Contractor must deliver the complete and functioning electrical equipment for the works and fit for
purpose as described in the technical description report, including all Engineering and all accessories that
are necessary for reliable performance which meet state of the art technology.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 184

Together with his offer, the Contractor must submit his preliminary design with all information, diagrams,
lists and drawings necessary to verify all components, quantities, and sizes. It is also understood that the
Contractor has to further develop the Employer’s design/Drawings when issuing the shop drawings.

The Works shall be designed in all respects to conform to the latest current engineering practice.

Purchasing, Manufacturing:

The Contractor shall purchase or manufacture all items described in the specifications and shown in the
drawings.

If specified or on demand the Contractor shall provide factory supervision or factory acceptance tests.

The Contractor shall provide the complete delivery to the sites comprising all duties, taxes, fees, levies and
other charges.

Documentation, Licenses, Contracts

The Contractor shall provide the complete “as built” documentation comprising application software
description.

The Contractor shall submit all software licences, dongles, and interfaces, which are needed for
programming the provided PC`s, PLC`s, RTU´s and the BMS.

The Contractor shall prepare the needed contracts with power supply and telecommunication providers in
liaison with the Employer.

Site tests, Commissioning, Training, Education

The Contractor shall install, test and commission the equipment to complete the requirements of the
Contract, in respect of all building installations, PV system and BMS together with all ancillary items as
particularly described or implicitly necessary for the operation of the entire infrastructure and buildings.

The Contractor shall test the operation of the Electrical, the PV and the BMS system.

The Contractor shall provide the training and education to the Employer’s Personnel in the operation and
maintenance of the a.m. systems as far as practicable.

The major items of equipment to be provided are as shown on the Drawings enclosed with the Bidding
Documents. The Contractor shall include for all minor ancillary items required for the efficient working of
the works as whole, whether they be specified or not.

5.1.3 Contractor's Coordination

The Contractor shall appoint and provide an experienced electrical engineer as coordinating Engineer to
monitor and co-ordinate all aspects of the mechanical and electrical works. The Contractor shall submit the
name and qualifications of the coordinator proposed together with his “curriculum vitae”.

5.1.4 Standards
The conditions specified in these technical specifications are minimum requirements for all deliveries and
performances. If special requirements are given for particular items they apply only to these particular
items.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 185

Each part of the plant and all workmanship executed must meet the latest editions of International or
national Standards (if requirements of local standards are higher) , the applicable legal, administrative, and
technical regulations, standards and conditions, the health-, safety- and accident-prevention-regulations.

Furthermore, the regulations of the local Electricity supply Company and the public guidelines, decrees and
regulations for the protection of the environment must be observed.

Authoritative are all regulations and guidelines, that are valid at the location of the works three months
before submission of tenders.

All units of measurements have to follow the SI metric system. All equipment and tools shall be designed
with metric standard dimensions.

All goods, materials and workmanship shall comply with the requirements of the latest issue (with up-to-
date amendments) of the appropriate standard such like:

International Standards Organization ISO

International Electrotechnical Commission IEC

Especially:

• Albanian Standard (SSH);

• Technical Design Condition of Albania (KTP);
• European Norms (EN);
• International Electro Technical Commission (IEC);
• International Organization for Standardization (ISO).
• VDE, DIN, CEI, CE.

Where reference is made to a particular manufacturer's product, such reference shall be taken only as an
indication of design and quality, unless otherwise stated. All standards written above are accepted. In case
of contradictions between the International and National standards, or between the different standards,
the more stringent standard will prevail.

Main Electricity Supply

The electricity supply will be provided by the Local Electricity Authority (OSHEE). The exact characteristics
of the incoming power feeding shall be obtained, and suitably rated equipment shall be provided.
Generally, the electricity supply shall be
LV 400 volts 3 phase, neutral and PE 50 Hz,
230 volts 1 phase, neutral and PE 50 Hz,

Network Configuration: TN – S

Please refer to Chapter 2.2.1 of the technical description report about more information on the main
external power supply and existing transformer cabins.

5.1.5 Submittals
Design Documentation

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 186

The following specific design Documentation (including drawings and specifications) for the Electrical, PV
and BMS System shall be provided:

a. Single line diagrams of all LV distributions.

b. System overview for the electrical power supply.
c. UPS power supply.
d. Floor plans with the main electrical installations and electrical cabinets and panels.
e. System configuration charts for PLC-systems, central control system, communication-systems,
and computer-systems.
f. Instrumentation lists, list of measuring equipment.
g. Lists of the electrical consumers.
h. P+I diagrams (HVAC)
i. Drawings showing cable for LV power distribution, lighting (including emergency light and exit
luminaires) and small force, fire detection and alarm, Bus and IT infrastructure for the Building
Management system, Access control and Voice alarm System
j. General Earthing Layout
k. Lightning Protection internal and external Calculations of risqué evaluation and LP Levels
(applicable standard is IEC/EN 62305)
l. Design and Installation of the Photovoltaic System. Solar Panel positioning and supports on the
roof, Wiring of the Panels, Inverters, Overvoltage protection, Definition of el. Power (KW),
metering equipment of power production and point of injection to the a) grit, b) building power
distribution system.
m. References of offered products for use
n. Description of required measures

In Addition, the following specifical documentation needs to be provided:

a. documentation of the provided products comprising but not limited to switchgear and control
gear, electrical installation with lighting and air conditioning, the instrumentation, RTUs, data
logger, PLCs, RTU and PLC software, UPS systems.
b. the concept for the Control and Monitoring Philosophy of the BMS in the form of a General Design
Report and Specification

5.1.6 Use of Metals

Iron and steel members shall be corrosion protected by painting or galvanizing. Small iron and steel parts
(other than stainless steel) the cores of electromagnets and the metal parts of relays and mechanisms are
to be treated in an approved manner to prevent rusting. Cores, etc., which are built up of laminations or
cannot for any other reason be treated against rust are to have all exposed parts cleaned and heavily
enamelled or lacquered. The use of iron and steel shall be avoided in instruments and electrical relays
wherever possible.

5.1.7 Use of Wood

The use of wood is to be avoided as far as possible unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. When used
it shall be of approved type and treated to resist termite attack and fungal decay.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 187

5.1.8 Tools and Lubricants
The Contractor shall provide a number of lockable metal boxes to contain two sets of special and general
tools for maintaining the delivered mechanical and electrical equipment.

5.2 Electrical Specification

5.2.1 MAIN POWER SUPPLY

[Link] Corrugated pipes

Description
The manufacturer shall be certified ISO 9001 and ISO 14001.

The pipe shall be supplied in lengths of 6 m or coils of 25 or 50 m, complete with couplings.

Conform to CEI EN 61386-1-2-4 (IEC 23-46/V1), and CE marked Class N with crush resistance higher than
450 N.

General Features
Design: Normal type double-wall black corrugated pipe with co-extruded bands on the outside
and black interior.
Application: Grey band: protection of LV and MV (low and medium voltage) electric cables;
Crush resistance CEI EN 61386-1-2-4 (IEC 23-46; V1) with 5% deformation of internal diameter
(requirement of IMQ mark).
Structure Stabilized against UV rays and guaranteed for one year from the date of manufacture
marked on the pipe
Radius of curvature 15 times the external diameter
Packaging 6 m lengths or 25 or 50 m coils
Accessories Couplings + trefoil in polypropylenes/polyester
Installation Underground
Electric strength Excellent.
Type Testing - Physical Tests
Melt flow rate According to ISO 1133: condition 1T (test parameter: 190°C / 5 Kg/10 mins) on raw
materials of both walls
Density According to ISO 1183: (test temp.: 23°C) on pipe and on raw materials of both walls.
Tests of Conformity
Visual inspection According to UNI ISO 4582 sections 3-4
Marking Clearly visible product code printed longitudinally in ink every 3 meters along the pipe.
Dimensions Mean external diameter (de), minimum internal diameter (dim).
Crush resistance according to CEI EN 61386-1-2-4
Shock resistance test According to CEI EN 61386-1-2-4
Operating limits 50°C / +60°C.
Table 5-1. General Features

[Link] Warning tape for underground cable

Description:
The warning strip must have the logo "ELECTRIC CABLE". The space between the end of the "text" and the
beginning of the "text" shall be 50 cm. Colour and text shall be resistant to atmospheric agents and alkaline
elements and acids or other subterranean elements.

Standards

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 188

EN 50520:2009: Cover plates and cover tapes for the protection and location warning of buried cables or
buried conduits in underground installations.

Technical Data

Material Low density polyethylene (LDPE);

Colour: Red background and black text.
Resistant to alkaline agents: 100%.
Resistant to underground acids: Yes.
Undeletable texts for any reason: Yes.
Tape width (mm): 150.
Text height (mm): 50.
Length (m): 100-200-250-500 (upon request).

Packing

Packaging shall be done in cardboard boxes.

[Link] Electrical Manhole

The manholes shall be of concrete C25 with dimensions 800x800mm (L x W). Deep as requested by the
cable channel. They will be covered with a lockable prefabricated cast iron cover. They must have good
drainage at their lower part to prevent accumulation of water inside.

[Link] Excavation, backfilling works

For excavation and backfilling works please refer to the section of technical specification on Excavation,
Trenching and Backfilling.

5.2.2 POWER NETWORK SOCKETS

[Link] Universal Schuko Socket 2P+PE 16A, 250V

Connection type: Screwed terminal;
With hinged lid: No;
With child-protection: Yes;
Label space/information surface: Yes;
Colour: White RAL-number: white/red;
Mounting method: Flush mounted (plaster);
Material quality: Thermoplastic;
Halogen free: Yes;
Nominal current: 16 A;
Nominal voltage: 250 v Frequency: 50- 60 Hz;
degree of protection (IP): IP20;

For heavy conditions (in accordance with VDE): No.

[Link] Electric Bell

Electric bell shall be installed at the main entrance, outside all budilings.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 189

Technical features

Type: Electric bell;

Voltage: 220-240 V;
Amperage: 0.12 A;
Diameter: 75mm;
Noise (dBA): 75 dB;
Colour: White.

[Link] Plastic box 3 and 4 (gang) modules

Technical features:

Thermo-pressure with ball: 70 °C;

Outer dim. L x H x D (mm): 96x80x50 (3 modules);
Outer dim. L x H x D (mm): 119x80x50 (4 modules);
Fixing supports axles distance: 83.5;
For walls: Masonry;
Operating temperature: -15 ÷ +60°C;
Compartment pre-arrangement: 3;
Description: 3 modules;
Installation: Flush mounting enclosures;
Type of material: Halogen-free in compliance with EN 60754-2;
Glow Wire Test: 650;
Characteristics: Halogen free;
Type: High capacity.

Figure 5-1 – Three/Four modules plastic boxes

[Link] Rectangular boxes

IP55, 4 gang for outdoor application

Figure 5-2 – Four modules cover for sockets with IP55

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 190

[Link] Distribution boxes and fittings
Technical characteristics of distribution boxes:

• in thermoplastic material self-extinguishing and resistant to abnormal heat and fire up to 650
°C (glow wire test) in compliance with IEC 60695-2-11 Standard
• lid in RAL 9016 with self-threaded screws included in the supply FLCO9915
• operating temperature from -5 °C to +60 °C
• wiring accessories and junction boxes made in compliance with CEI EN 60670-1 and CEI EN
60670-22 Standards
• box for 3 modules with new accessories (mortar cover, spacer, separator).

Table 5-2. Flush mounting distribution boxes IP40

[Link] PVC Flexible pipes

Description

The flexible protected conduit system is made of thermoplastic PVC, classification 2311. Applicable
standards are IEC 61386-1, (CEI 23/80) and IEC 61386-23 (CEI 23/83).

Technical features

• Material: PVC;
• Colour: Grey RAL 7035;
• Sheath Ø (mm): 16, 20, 25;
• Electrical characteristics: 2 (With electrical insulating characteristics);

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 191

 • Classification: 2311;
• Protection against ingress of solid objects with revolving & fixed couplings: 5;
• Protection against ingress of water with revolving and fixed couplings: 4;
• Tensile strength: 1 (Very light);
• Standard: EN 61386-1 EN 61386-23;
• Glow Wire Test: 960 °C;
• Resistance to compression: 2 (Light - 320 N);
• Resistance to bending: 4 (Flexible);
• Fire resistance: Not applicable;
• Minimum bend radius: 10 times the diameter;
• Dielectric rigidity: 2000 V a 50 Hz for 15 minutes;
• Protection against ingress of solid objects with conduit-sheath unions: 6;
• Protection against ingress of water with conduit-sheath unions: 5;
• Suspended load capacity: 1 (non-flame propagating).

5.2.3 POWER NETWORK CABLES

a) Cables
Low voltage cables for 400/230 distribution system TN – S. The type of insulation shall be moisture and
heat resistant, suitable for maximum operating temperature of 70 degrees Centigrade. Cables shall be in
one piece without splices between connections except where the distance exceeds the lengths in which
the cable is furnished.

Bends in cables shall be not less than those specified by the manufacturer for the type of cable specified.
All conductors shall be copper, stranded, or solid as required.

Minimum Conductor Sizes:

All sockets: 2,5mm² / indoor light installation 1,5mm², 400V/230V

Colour coding:

- Phase: Black, grey, brown (in cables);

- Phase: black (wires);
- Neutral: light blue;
- Protection Earth: green/yellow
- Insulated potential equalization: green / yellow

Bonding Conductors:

- min. 6mm²
- cable trays 16mm²
- Distribution boards. 70mm²

b) Internal distribution of the low voltage installations

The electrical system distribution in the buildings shall run in cable trays (200x75mm section) fixed on top
of the suspended ceiling.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 192

[Link] Technical features FG16R16 type
This type of cable shall be used for the main power supply line of the Works.

• F - Flexible fine wired conductor class 5.

• G16 - heavy ethylene-propylene rubber type G16 •
• 1. R16 - PVC sheath type R16,

Construction
• Fine wired copper conductor, class 5
• Rigid EPM rubber, G16 quality
• Thermoplastic compound, fire resistant, non-water absorbing
• Anti-abrasive PVC compound R16 quality, fire retardant, with reduced gas emission

Reference standards
• CEI 20-13; IEC 60502-1;
• CEI UNEL 35318-35322-35016;
• EN 50575:2014 + EN 50575/A1:2016.

General:
• Flexible conductor, class 5 copper made.
• Elastomeric mixture insulation (G16 quality).
• Not fibrous and not hygroscopic filler
• Outer Sheath of transparent PVC R16 type.

Technical features
• Nominal voltage U0: 0.6 kV (AC) 1.8 kV (DC);
• Nominal voltage U: 1 kV (AC), 1.8 kV (DC);
• Test voltage: 4 kV;
• Maximum voltage Um: 1.2 kV (AC); 1.8 kV (DC);
• Maximum operating temperature: 90°C;
• Maximum short circuit temperature for sections up to 240mm²: 250;
• maximum short circuit temperature for sections over 240mm²: 240;
• Min. operating temperature (without mechanical shocks): -15°C;
• Minimum installation and use temperature: 0°C.

Employment
Minimum bending radius per D cable diameter (in mm):

• Power flexible cables, class 5= 4 D;

• Control flexible cables, class 5 = 6 D;
• Maximum pulling stress: 50N/mm2.

Core colours
• Single core: black;
• Two cores: blue, brown.
• Three cores: brown-black-grey (or blue-brown-Y/G);
• Four cores: blue-brown-black-grey (or Y/G instead blue);

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 193

 • Five cores: Y/G-blue-brown-black-grey (or black instead Y/G);
• Multicores: black with numbers.

[Link] Technical features FG16OM16 type

Reaction to Fire CPR: CCa-s1b, d1, a1. Multicore flexible power cable for fixed installation, G16 rubber
insulated, LS0H thermoplastic sheathed. Resistant to fire propagation with a low emission of smoke
and toxic and corrosive gases when exposed to fire.

Rated voltage
Uo/U 0.6/1kV

Maximum voltage
1.8 kV d.c also to earth.

Standards
CEI 20-13, CEI Unel 35324, CEI 20-11, EN 60228, CEI EN 50399, EN60754-2, EN61034-2, EN 60332-1-2,
EN 13501-6, CEI EN 50575:2014+A1:2016.

Regulation Construction Products

305/2011 EU.

European directives
2014/35/UE (LVD) – 2011/65/CE e 2015/863/EU (RoHS).

Conductor
Flexible annealed plain copper, class 5(EN IEC 60228).

Insulation
Hard ethylene propylene rubber (HEPR) compound, OF type G16, with reduced emission of halogen
(corrosive gases) under fire conditions. Colour of the core:

Two-core - blue-brown;
Three-core -green/yellow-blue-brown or brown-black-grey;
Four-core - green/yellow-brown-black-grey or blue- black-grey;
Five-core -green/yellow-blue-brown-black-grey or blue –brown-black-grey-black.

Sheath
Thermoplastic compound of type M16, having low emission of smoke and toxic and corrosive gases
when exposed to fire. Colour: green.

Marking
Continuous marking on the sheath: ICEL no Smoke FG16OM16-0,6/1 kV Nominal cross section CEI 20-
13 IEMMEQU thread. Progressive meter marking.

[Link] Technical features of FG18OM16 cable

Power cables, rubber insulated (G18), thermoplastic sheathed, with special requirements of reaction to fire
performance according to the Construction Products Regulation (CPR) Cables with flexible conductors for
fixed installation

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 194

 Standards
• CEI 20-45 – CEI 20-22/3
• EN 50266-2-4 – EN 50200
• EN 50362 – EN 50267 -2-1 – EN 61034-2
• CEI 20-37/4
• 2014/35/UE, Low voltage directive
• RoHS 2011/65/CE directive

Construction products regulation

• CPR (UE) n°305/11
• B2ca - s1a, d1, a1, Class according to standards EN 50575:2014 + A1:2016 and EN 13501-
6:2014

Manufacturing characteristics
Conductor stranded bare copper covered with tape wrapped helically, ethylene-propylene rubber
insulation G18 quality, thermoplastic sheath special quality M16.

Marking
Marking on the external insulation with special ink:

IEMMEQU CEI 20-45 PH90 CEI 20-22 III CAT C FG18(O)M16 0.6/1kV

< nr. conductors x section > <year> <metric marking>

Technical features:
• Nominal voltage: U0 / U = 600/1000V;
• Operating Temperature: 90 ⁰C;
• Short circuit temperature: 250 ⁰C;
• Minimum bending radius: 4 x ext. diameter;
• Traction force during laying: 50 N/mm2 of copper section for fixed laying’s;
• Laying temperature: minimum 0 ⁰C;

Power load calculated for cables above requirement should respect the official campaign:

• For cables 1-6mm2 average power density 4 A / mm2;

• The average density cables electricity 6-16 mm2 / 2-4 A mm2;
• For cables > 16mm2 average power density 1-2 A mm2.

[Link] Technical features of single core, FG17, 450/750, CPR, LS0H conductor
Power cable, PVC insulated S17 quality, with special fire reaction characteristics according to Construction
Products Regulation (CPR).

Reference standards:
• CEI 20-38; CEI UNEL 35310; CEI 20-11; CEI 20-11;
• CEI EN/IEC 60228; CEI EN/IEC 60332-1-2;
• CEI EN/IEC 60754-2; EN 50267-2-1;
• CEI EN/IEC 61034-2; EN 50575:2014+A1:2016.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 195

 Construction products regulation
• 305/2011 EU.

European directives:
• Low voltage directive 2006/95/EC;
• 2014/35/UE - 2011/65/UE;
• 2015/863/UE(RoHS).

General:
• PVC insulation in R2 quality (a double layer up to 6mm);
• Flexible conductor, class 5 copper made.

Insulation
• LS0H elastomeric compound, G17 quality;
• LS0H = Low Smoke Zero Halogen.

Technical features:
• Nominal voltage U0: 0.45 kV;
• Nominal voltage U: 0.75 kV;
• Test voltage: 3 kV;
• Maximum voltage Um: 1 kV for fixed and protected installation;
• Maximum operating temperature: +90°C;
• Maximum short circuit temperature: +250°C;
• Min. operating temperature (without mechanical shocks): -30°C;
• Minimum installation and use temperature: -15°C.

Employment
• Minimum bending radius per D cable diameter (in mm):
• Fixed lay: D<12mm=3D D<20mm=4D;
• Free move: D<12mm=5D D<20mm=6D;
• Maximum pulling stress: 50 N/mm2.

Core colours
• Single core: black;
• Two cores: light blue, brown;
• Three cores: brown-black-grey (or blue-brown-Y/G);
• Four cores: blue-brown-black-grey (or Y/G instead blue);
• Five cores: Y/G-blue-brown-black;
• Multicores: black with numbers.

Ink marking
• Cca-s1b,d1,a1 - IEMMEQU EFP FG17 450/750V - form. x section - inner work order - year -
progressive length.

Note
Current carrying capacities are calculated relatively to piping with 3 loaded conductors.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 196

Wherever metallic tray or Cable Bridge, the cables will lie within them. Where there are no bridges or wall
metallic tray or floor sections, cabling of the distribution network will be made tubular type PVC with RK15
dielectric composition.

Connection cables in the derivation box will be hooded or clips appropriate. Composition of the boxes will
be made of Styrofoam, with screw caps, the classes of protection IP–40.

Cores Cross Approx. Insulation Max Approx. Electric Current

number section conductor medium external cable resistance at carrying
diameter thickness diameter weight 20°C capacities
No. mm² mm mm mm Kg/km Ohm/km A
Single core
1x 1.5 2.0 0.7 3.4 19 13.3 20
1x 2.5 2.2 0.8 4.1 31 7.98 28
1x 4 2.6 0.8 4.6 45 4.95 37
Table 5-3. Connection cables

[Link] Cable terminal for low voltage cable

Cable head for LV cable with 4 cores

The cable must be transformed into almost four single cores cables which allow the intersection of core
cables even in closed connection spaces. Insulation pipes with shrinkage term are inserted in the 4 open
cable cores for protection against surface discharges (one for each core). The pipes must be coated from
the inside with thermosetting adhesive, which during heating melts and sticks to the cable cores ensuring
high airtightness.

For the lugs airtightness with the conductor must have a pipe with short shrinkage term with adhesive
from the inside. The lugs used in these terminals must be with longitudinal airtightness. At the point where
the cores separate is placed the blocking and adhesive material. Eye-shaped terminal lugs with along with
bolts are inside the kit.

All used materials must have:

• High stability in acidic and alkaline environments;

• Hight resistance to ultraviolet radiation.

The set of supplied terminals should include materials for all three phases and for the neutral. Core lengths
must be 450 mm and can be reduced depending on the request of the place where they are installed.

Technical data

• Cable heads will be three types: for cable section:

• 4x25 – 4x95 mm2,
• Dielectric stability 14 kV/mm.

Cable head for LV cable with 1 core

Insulation pipes with shrinkage term is inserted in the 4 open cable cores for protection against surface
discharges. The pipes must be coated from the inside with thermosetting adhesive, which during heating
melts and sticks to the cable cores ensuring high airtightness. For the lugs airtightness with the conductor
must have a pipe with short shrinkage term with adhesive from the inside. The lugs used in these terminals

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 197

must be with longitudinal airtightness. At the point where the cores separate is placed the blocking and
adhesive material.

All used materials must have:

• High stability in acidic and alkaline environments;

• Hight resistance to ultraviolet radiation.

Core lengths must be 450 mm and can be reduced depending on the request of the place where they are
installed.

Technical data

Cable heads will be three types: for cable section:

• 1x25-1x95 mm2;
• 1x50-1x150 mm2;
• Dielectric stability: 14 kV/mm.

5.2.4 ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAYS

Reference: DIN VDE 0639.

Technical features:

The cable tray shall be manufactured from hot dip galvanized mild steel complete with approved type
fixings and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit maximum expansion. Only
manufacturer’s accessories are allowed, no improvisations on site.

Drawings have to be submitted to the Engineer indicating :

• Identification of the cables (= label)

• Diameter of the cables (= width)
• Weight of the cables (= type of tray and fixing points)
• All accessories (= manufacturers ref.)

Metallic earthed separation between power cables and others (if any).

Grounding at least 16mm2.

Trays sections are put together with large galvanic contact.

[Link] Cable trays & accessories

• Cable trays and the associated accessories including tray covers shall be prefabricated type
Galvanized steel sheets.
• The nominal width of cable trays selected is 50, 100, 150, 200, 300, 450, and 600 mm. The cable
trays shall be supplied in standard lengths of 2500 mm.
• Types of trays used are Perforated type, Ladder Type & Solid type.
• The Flange height shall be considered for Ladder Type as 50 mm & for perforated & solid type
trays as 100 mm.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 198

 • The thickness for cable trays shall be considered 2 mm and the thickness for cable tray cover shall
be considered 1.6 mm.
• The maximum spacing between the rungs of the ladder type cable tray shall be considered as 250
mm.
• Cable tray covers shall be provided for Perforated & solid type trays as indicated in the drawings.
• The cable tray accessories are Vertical Elbows, Horizontal Bends, Adjustable Bends, Crosses, Tees
and Reducers, etc.
• The scope covers all these trays and special accessories including covers, coupler plates, bolts,
hinges for all type of trays as listed in items.
• Connecting piece or coupler plate is used to connect two trays & accessories.
• All finished cable trays and accessories shall be free from sharp edges, corners, burrs and
unevenness.
• Galvanizing: All cable trays, tray accessories, tray covers & tray supports including washers, etc.
shall be hot dip galvanized.
• Grounding conductors for Cable Trays 25 x 6 GS flat conductor shall run along the trays &
interconnecting the trays at every 2.5 m intervals. 95 [Link] stranded copper conductor shall be
used to grounding trays at minimum two points and in addition at 25 meters interval for longer
length of trays.

[Link] Cable tray support

The cable tray supporting structures shall be of steel and galvanized. This supporting structure shall
comprise of two parts, which shall be Vertical support channels & Horizontal supporting arms. This
Horizontal supporting arm shall be welded to the Vertical support channels to form the cable supporting
structure as shown in the drawing and this structure shall be welded to the Embedded Plate (EP) on the
wall in case of wall mounted cable trays.

[Link] Flexible firestop foam

Application

• Electrical: cables, cable bundles, cable trays and cable trunking, mixed penetrations
• Repenetrating with single cables
• Combi approvals with firestop blocks especially for large openings or applications in specialist
industry applications (telecom, industrial)

Technical data

• Base materials: Concrete, Masonry, Drywall;

• Approvals: ETA-10/0109;
• Repenetrating: Easy;
• Approx. tack-free time (at 23 °C / 50% rel. humidity): 5 min;
• Approx. curing time: 10 min;
• Application temperature range: 10 - 35 °C;
• Temperature resistance range: -30 - 60 °C;
• Storage and transportation temperature range 5 - 25 °C;
• Required dispenser: HDM 330, HDE 500;
• Content per can / cartridge: 325 ml.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 199

5.2.5 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND PANELS
Standards

References: IEC 61439 (Low-voltage switchgear and control-gear assemblies);

Specification for the Main Low Voltage Panel

Requirements of construction

General information

The main low voltage switchboard for each building shall be manufactured in conformance to standard IEC
61439-1, 2 and 5 and will be tested according to the tests defined by this standard. Such as:

1. Strength of material and parts;

2. Degree of protection of enclosures;
3. Clearance and creepage-creep age distances;
4. Protection against electric shocks and integrity of protective circuits;
5. Incorporation of switching devices and components;
6. Internal electrical circuits and connections;
7. Terminals for external conductors;
8. Dielectric properties;
9. Temperature rises limits;
10. Short circuit withstand strength;
11. Electromagnetic compatibility;
12. Mechanical operation.

Additional 3 routine tests carried out by the panel builder:

1. Wiring, functional operation;

2. Insulation
3. Protection measures.

Type Test Certificates of the switch gear assembly and Certificates of the Routine tests are to submit to the
Engineer prior to the shipment and delivery to side.

To optimise maintenance and spare part management all of the switchboards and panels should be
manufactured by the same company with components of the same brand.

All M.E.P.G.F shall be according to Form 4b as specified in IEC 61439 – 2.

General specification for distribution switchboards

LV switchgear and control gear shall be manufactured by a single approved supplier and the construction
of each individual cabinet shall be such that all components shall be selected for standardization.

For the 0.4 kV-distributions bus bar systems (material copper) with 3 phases + neutral + earth for 400/230 V
operating voltage have to be used. All bus bar systems are to be of the tin-coated type. Type testing reports
about the installed bus bar system must be submitted to the Engineer.

Each switchboard panel or section shall be fitted with a demountable metal cable termination gland plate
positioned at vertical or horizontal level but with adequate space for termination of cables, conduits, etc.
The gland steel plates shall be efficiently earthed to the panel earthing system by a separate earthing

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 200

conductor. The base of the panels shall be provided with removable plates of PVC or steel type to seal the
cable/conduit entry.

According to IEC 61326 all installations have to regard the EMC. All switching cabinets have to be closed
metal casings. All metal parts must be connected to each other with low resistance. Mechanical connections
of varnished casing-parts must also be electrically conductive, e.g. by using contact- or scratching disks.
The cabinet-door has to be connected to the frame by earthing strips as short as possible. In order to
reduce electromagnetic interferences and increase EMC, all components have to be protected against
damaging influences and radiations by adequate means of earthing and shielding, filters and inductors,
regarding possible mains pollution as well as radio interferences.

Signal- and powerlines must be laid spatially separated. To avoid coupling, a safety distance of 20 cm in
switchgear cabinets should be kept. Unscreened wires must be twisted.

Shielding of signal- and power-cables must be connected low-resistive to the casing by a screening clamp.
Screens of analogue-signal lines are connected to casings on one end.

Metal cable trays, pipes, ducts, etc. have to be electrically connected to form an equipotential structure.
Both ends have to be connected to the earthing electrodes.

All external and internal labels shall be engraved multi-layered plastic affixed with chrome plated screws.

Each switchboard, control panel, distribution board, compartment door, etc., shall have a title label and
each door mounted component or control shall have a function label.

Every internal component shall be identified, and each fuse shall be labelled with identification, fuse type,
fuse current.

Compartments with doors not interlocked to an isolator or removable covers having access to live parts
shall have an external label affixed thereto: -"DANGER LIVE TERMINALS" - black letters on a yellow
background.

A list of label inscriptions shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before manufacture.

Notwithstanding that wording of labels and notices and suchlike in this Section is written in English, all
danger and warning labels throughout the Works shall be provided in both Albanian and English.

The degree of protection, as per IEC 61529, shall be at least:

• IP43 dry, clean areas indoor

• IP54 wet areas

For more details reference has to be taken to the relevant Single Line Diagrams as part of the design
drawings.

[Link] Typical Distribution Board – 1 Rooms [D.B.R.x.y] of Building B04+B14+B16+B17+B03

• With 36(2x18) modules plastic door;
• Complete with all accessory’s J/m;
• Installation: flush mounted;
• Operating Voltage: 0.4kV (AC);
• Power frequency: 50Hz;
• Degrees of protection: IP43;
• According to the scheme of single line diagram given the design.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 201

[Link] Typical Distribution Board - 2 Rooms [D.B.R.x.y]
• With 54(3x18) modules;
• Complete with all accessory’s
• Installation: flush mounted;
• Operating Voltage: 0.4kV (AC);
• Power frequency: 50Hz;
• Degrees of protection: IP43;
• According to the scheme of single line diagram given the design.

[Link] Distribution Board Study Rooms

• Type: 12module.
• Installation: flush mounted.
• Rated Voltage: 1kV (AC);
• Operating Voltage: 0.4kV (AC);
• Power frequency: 50Hz.
• Degrees of protection: plastic type, IP43

5.2.6 INDOOR LIGHTING SYSTEM

Applicable Standards: EN 60598; EN 12464-1:2011: ’Lighting for workplaces – indoor’’

• Part 1: General requirements and tests.

• Part 2: Particular requirements – Section 1: Fixed general-purpose luminaries.
• Section 2: Recessed luminaries;
• EN 60 570: Electrical supply tracks for luminaries.
• IES recommendations.
• Local rules and regulations.

Indoor luminaries:

The indoor lighting for each type of area is calculated the lighting flow rate according to the
BS EN 12464-1:2011 standard. The design of lighting installation will be in accordance to EN 12464-1:
‘’Lighting for work places – indoor’’ under the consideration of the general quality criteria for lighting.

Indoor luminaries in offices, reception area, corridors, technical room, server room, toilet, kitchen, corridors,
and staircases are being selected to fulfil the architectural interior satisfaction of the building. For indoor
lighting, the minimum average illumination degree Em has to be designed as follows:

Rooms Intensity

Rooms 200 lux

Corridor, Staircase 200 lux

Administration Room 300 lux

Storage 150 lux

Toilet 200 lux

Laundry 300 lux

Student Area 500 lux

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 202

 Study Room 500 lux

Kitchen 500 lux

Technical Room 200 lux

Table 5-4. The indoor lighting

All the above data were used for the photometric calculations that have been already delivered. Luminaries
in all areas, shall be selected and glare protected. All luminaries in the building must be equipped with
electronic ballasts, with terminals (min. section 2,5mm²) and additional terminals to connect a following
luminary.

According to the design drawing, the following types shall be part of the installations:

[Link] Squared LED panel luminaries 600x600mm, 35W, 3700lm, IP20, 4000K

Figure 5-3 – Squared LED Panel luminaires, 600x600mm, 35W, IP20

Technical features:

• Reference: EN 12464;
• Model: 596x596mm recessed LED Panel;
• Installation: Indoor;
• Light source: LED lighting;
• Optical system: Micro prismatic diffuser;
• Beam angle: 85°, 90°;
• Light Distribution: Direct;
• Wiring: Electronic control gear FIX;
• Mounting: Recessed ceiling mounted;
• Surface finish: white RAL 9016;
• Accessories: Rope suspension; Frame for plasterboard installation, Frame for surfaced
installation;
• Source Voltage 230 [V];
• Frequency [Hz]: 50/60 [Hz];
• Power Factor cos (fi): >0.96;
• Luminous flux tolera: +/- 10 %;
• Luminaire Power: 35 [W];
• Luminaire Flux: 3700 [lm];
• System efficacy: 106 [lm/W];
• Color temp: 4000 K;
• UGR glare index: UGR<19 (in any situation). - EN 12464;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 203

 • Temperature colour: 4000 [K];
• Operating Temp. [°C]: -20°C to +30 [°C];
• EEC: A++ / A+ / A;
• Safety class: Exempt group;
• IP protection degree: IP20 / optical part IP40;
• Dimensions: 600x600x10 mm;
• Weight: 5.7 kg;
• Average Life [h]: 50 000 h / L70 / B50.

[Link] Rectangular LED panel luminaries 1200x300x12mm, 33W, IP20, 4000K

Figure 5-4 – Rectangular LED Panel luminaires, 1200x300x12mm, 33W, IP20

Technical features:

• Reference: EN 12464;
• Model: 1195x295x12mm surface LED Panel;
• Installation: Indoor;
• Light source: LED lighting;
• Optical system: Micro prismatic diffuser;
• Beam angle: 85°, 90°
• Light Distribution: Direct;
• Wiring: Electronic control gear FIX;
• Mounting: Surface ceiling mounted;
• Surface finish: White;
• Accessories: Frame for plasterboard installation, Frame for surfaced installation
• Source Voltage 230 [V];
• Frequency [Hz]: 50/60 [Hz];
• Power Factor cos (fi): >0.95;
• Luminous flux tolera: +/- 10 %;
• Luminaire Power: 33 [W];
• Luminaire Flux: 3318 [lm];
• System efficacy: 100.5 [lm/W];
• Colour temp: 4000 K;
• UGR glare index: UGR<19 (in any situation). - EN 12464;
• Temperature colour: 4000 [K];
• Operating Temp. [°C]: -20°C to +30 [°C];

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 204

 • EEC: A++ / A+ / A;
• Safety class: Exempt group;
• IP protection degree: IP20 / optical part IP43;
• Dimensions: 1200x300x12 mm;
• Weight: 4.10 kg;
• Average Life [h]: 50 000 h / L70 / B50.

[Link] Industrial LED lighting, L1277 x 90 x 93 mm, 33W, IP65, with opal diffusor

Figure 5-5 – Industrial LED lighting 33W, IP 65

Technical features:

• Mounting: Surfaced / Suspended (S/S);

• Light source: LED;
• Optical system: Opal diffuser (OPD);
• Beam angle 145°, 105°;
• Light distribution: Direct;
• Wiring Electronic control gear FIX (ECG);
• On request: through wiring;
• Materials Housing: grey injected polycarbonate;
• Diffuser: polycarbonate;
• Clips: stainless steel (INOX);
• Accessories Rope suspension RS-S 67;
• Voltage 220-240 V, 50-60 Hz;
• Power factor 0,97;
• Net lumen output 4400 lm;
• Luminous flux tolerance+/- 10 %;
• Power consumption 33 W;
• System efficacy 138 lm/W;
• Colour Temperature 3000 K;
• Colour rendering index: >80 Ra;
• Colour tolerance 3 SDCM;
• Service lifetime: 50,000 hours / L90 / B10;
• Ambient temperature: From -25 °C to +35 °C;
• IP protection degree: IP65;
• Mech resistance: IK10;
• Dimensions (LxWxH): 1277 x 90 x 93 mm;
• Weight: 1,7 kg.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 205

[Link] Round LED luminaries, surface wall mounted, 24W, IP65, 4000K

Figure 5-6 – Round LED luminaires, 24W, IP65/IK07

Technical features

• Colour: White;
• Model: High-efficiency LED fixture;
• Mounting: Surface ceiling;
• Material: Aluminium;
• Lamp Type: Luminous flux maintenance 80%;
• Housing: Vandal-resistant, self-extinguishing polycarbonate;
• Reflector: In clear polycarbonate, anti-dazzle, vandal resistant;
• EEC: A++ / A+ / A;
• Power Factor cos (fi): >0.9;
• Luminaire Power: 24 [W];
• Luminaire Flux: 2780 [lm];
• Luminous Efficacy: 115.83 [lm/W];
• Temperature colour: 4000 [K];
• Source Voltage 230 [V];
• Frequency: 50/60 [Hz];
• Insulation class: Class I;
• IP protection degree: IP65/IK07, in accordance with standards EN60529;
• Dimensions: Ø=330x55mm;
• Weight: 1.10 kg;
• Service lifetime: 33,000 h.

[Link] Outdoor Up-Down LED luminaries, wall mounted, 7W, IP65

Figure 5-7 – Outdoor Up-Down LED luminaries

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 206

 Technical features

• Colour: Gray;
• Model: High-efficiency LED fixture;
• Mounting: Wall mounted;
• Material: Aluminium, composite techno polymer methacrylate;
• Lamp Type: Luminous flux maintenance 80%;
• Housing: Vandal-resistant, self-extinguishing polycarbonate;
• EEC: A++ / A+ / A;
• Power Factor cos (fi): >0.9;
• Luminaire Power: 7 [W];
• Luminaire Flux: 109 [lm];
• Luminous Efficacy: 15.57 [lm/W];
• Temperature colour: 3000 [K];
• Source Voltage 230 [V];
• Frequency: 50/60 [Hz];
• Insulation class: Class I;
• IP protection degree: IP65/IK10, in accordance with standards EN60529;
• Dimensions: L140xW140xH140mm;
• Weight: 1 kg;
• Service lifetime: 20,000 h.

[Link] Round LED luminaries, 11W, 1279lm, IP44/IK07, 4000K, Ø=140 mm

Figure 5-8 – Round LED luminaires, 11W, IP44/IK07

Technical features

• Colour: White;
• Model: High-efficiency LED fixture;
• Mounting: Recessed ceiling;
• Material: Aluminium;
• Lamp Type: Luminous flux maintenance 70%;
• Housing: vandal-resistant, self-extinguishing polycarbonate;
• Reflector: In clear polycarbonate, anti-dazzle, vandal resistant;
• EEC: A++ / A+ / A;
• Power Factor cos (fi): >0.95;
• Luminaire Power: 11 [W];

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 207

 • Luminaire Flux: 1279 [lm];
• Luminous Efficacy: 116.3 [lm/W];
• Temperature colour: 3000 [K];
• Source Voltage 230 [V];
• Frequency: 50/60 [Hz];
• Insulation class: Class I;
• IP protection degree: IP44/IK07, in accordance with standards EN60529;
• Dimensions: Ø140mm;
• Weight: 0.27 kg;
• Service lifetime: 55,000 h.

[Link] Round LED luminaires, recessed ceiling mounting, 11W, IP65.

Figure 5-9 – Round LED luminaires, 11W, IP65.

Technical features:

• Reference: EN60598-1; EN60598-2-22; EN 62471;

• Beam angle 60°;
• Model: Ceiling Recessed;
• Mounting: Recessed ceiling;
• Light source: LED lighting;
• Optical system: Opal diffuser;
• Light distribution: Direct;
• Surface finish: White;
• Source Voltage 220-240 [V];
• Frequency: 50 [Hz];
• Power Factor: 0.95;
• Luminaire Power: 25 [W];
• Luminaire Flux: 970 [lm];
• Luminous Efficacy: 88.1 [lm/W]
• Colour rendering index: 80 Ra;
• Temperature colour: 3000 [K];
• UGR: <19;
• IK rating: 02;
• Operating Temp.: (-20°C ÷ 35) [°C];
• Fire Resistance: 650 [°C];
• Ballast: Constant current LED Smart driver (programmable);
• EEC: A++ / A+ / A;
• Insulation class: II;
• IP protection degree: IP65;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 208

 • IK mech resistance: IK02;
• Dimensions: Ø=108mm;
• Weight: 0.37 kg;
• Average Life [h]: 30,000 h / L70 / B50.

[Link] LED Strip, L=1600mm, 18W, 3000K, IP40

Figure 5-10 – LED Strip, L=1600mm, 18W, 3000K, IP40.

Technical features:

• Reference: EN60598-1; EN60529;

• Mounting: Build in furniture’s;
• Light source: LED;
• Optical system: Opal diffuser (OPD);
• Beam angle 90°;
• Light distribution: Direct;
• Wiring Electronic control gear FIX (ECG);
• Housing: Frame in extruded Al with terminal ends in diecast aluminium;
• Clips: Stainless steel;
• Voltage 220-240 V, 50-60 Hz;
• Power factor 0,9;
• Net lumen output 1694 lm;
• Luminous flux 70 %;
• Power consumption 18 W;
• System efficacy 94.11 lm / W;
• Colour Temperature 3000 K;
• Colour rendering index: CRI >80;
• Service lifetime 50,000 hours / L70 / B50;
• Ambient temperature: From -25 °C to +35 °C;
• IP protection degree: IP40;
• Mech resistance: IK07;
• Dimensions (L): 1600mm;
• Weight: 0.55 kg.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 209

[Link] Wall Surface Mounted, LED luminaires, 7W, IP54.

Figure 5-11 – Wall Surface Mounted, 7W, IP54.

Technical features:

• Reference: EN60598-1; EN60598-2-22; EN 62471;

• Mounting: Wall Surfaced;
• Light source: LED;
• Optical system: Opal diffuser (OPD);
• Beam angle 90°;
• Light distribution: Direct;
• Wiring Electronic control gear FIX (ECG);
• Materials Housing: grey injected polycarbonate;
• Clips: stainless steel (INOX);
• Voltage 220-240 V, 50-60 Hz;
• Power factor 0,96;
• Net lumen output 149 lm;
• Luminous flux +/- 10 %;
• Power consumption 7 W;
• System efficacy 21 lm / W;
• Colour Temperature 3000 K;
• Colour rendering index: CRI 80;
• Service lifetime: 50,000 hours / L80 / B20;
• Ambient temperature: From -25 °C to +35 °C;
• IP protection degree: IP54;
• Mech resistance: IK07;
• Dimensions (LxWxH): 469 x 30 x 60mm;
• Weight: 1 kg.

[Link] Motion sensor 180°, wall mounted, IP40

Figure 5-12 – Motion Sensor, wall mounted 180°, IP40.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 210

 Technical features:

• Reference: EN 55014; EN 61000-4-5; EN 61000-4-2;

• Mounting: Wall Surfaced;
• Sensing area: 5000mm;
• Wide angle 180°;
• Clips: stainless steel & PVC;
• Voltage: 220-240 V, 50-60 Hz;
• Number of contacts: 1NO (SPTS-NO);
• Operating range: 96-253V;
• Rated current: 10-20A;
• Light ON time after detection: 12sec - 35min;
• Rated power: 1.5 / 1W;
• Ambient light intervention: 1-500lux;
• Ambient temperature: From -10°C to +50°C;
• IP protection degree: IP40;
• Dimensions (LxWxH): 85.6 x 70.6 x 84.6mm;
• Weight: 0.3 kg.

[Link] Motion sensor 360°, recess ceiling mounted, IP40

Figure 5-13 – Motion Sensor, recess ceiling mounted 360°, IP40.

Technical features:

• Reference: EN 55014; EN 61000-4-5; EN 61000-4-2;

• Mounting: Recess ceiling mounted;
• Sensing area: 8000mm;
• Wide angle 360°;
• Clips: stainless steel & PVC;
• Voltage: 220-240 V, 50-60 Hz;
• Number of contacts: 1NO (SPTS-NO);
• Operating range: 96-253V;
• Rated current: 10-20A;
• Light ON time after detection: 10sec - 12min;
• Rated power: 1.5 / 1W;
• Ambient light intervention: 5-350lux;
• Ambient temperature: From -10°C to +50°C;
• IP protection degree: IP40;
• Dimensions: Ø=80mm;
• Weight: 0.3 kg.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 211

[Link] Switches
Note: Ordinary switches shall be walls recessed, flush mounting type, no exposed boxes shall be admitted.

The number of the lights connected to one switch and in one circuit is to be limited by the appropriate
standards. If there is more than one light in the room, the command may be by two-way or more switches.

• The position and the number of the light connected to one switch and in one circuit must be in
accordance with IEC 60884-1 CEE7 as per DD, Standard EN 60609-1 and degree of protection of
the installed assembly CEI 64-8/7-1998.

• 10 A, 250 V switches shall be normally installed, IP 54 switches shall be installed at toilets, and wet
areas, as per detailed DD, fixing of wires with diameter 1,5 mm². They shall be installed close to the
doors, 15 cm far from to the next-door frame and 105 cm over the FFL.

5.2.7 EVACUATION & SAFETY LIGHTING SYSTEM

Reference:

• EN 1838: Emergency lighting.

• EN 60598.2.22: Luminaries for Emergency Lighting.
• IES recommendation.

General Description

Emergency lighting has to fulfil the requirements of EN 1838. Emergency luminaries shall be installed at
corridors and were indicated at Detailed design.

Administrative building will be equipped with emergency lighting system according to applicable
standards. The central battery system will be supported by the emergency power system. All products must
be equipped with be supplied by companies certified according to ISO 9001.

As per EN 1838 the minimum continuous illumination level of the escape routes will be ensured to be 1
lux, 0.5 lux for open areas and also 0.5 lux for open areas. Following areas and considerations are respected
in designing the emergency lighting system:

• Escape routes (corridors, stairways, etc.) and exit (safety) signs, where illuminance of 1 lux along
the centre line of the escape route should be achieved.
• Open areas greater than 60m2 require anti-panic lighting with a minimum luminance of 0.5lux
• Near stairs should receive direct light from the installed emergency light luminaires, so that the
minimum luminance on each stair tread is 1 lux
• Near changes of level like steps or other changes of level should receive direct light from an
emergency lighting luminaire
• At each change of direction should be installed emergency lighting luminaires as well as each
intersection of corridors on the designated escape route.
• Near firefighting equipment and manual call points should be installed emergency luminaires to
ensure illuminance level of 5 lux. This would apply also to a fire alarm control panel where should
be assured a level of 15 lux on the floor near panel.
• Outside and near to each final exit door with minimum level of 1 lux.
• Near each first aid point to be illuminated with minimum illuminance level of 5 lux and 15 lux for

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 212

 first aid rooms.
• Kitchens with minimum illuminance of 15 lux.
• Plant rooms / Switch rooms should have a minimum illuminance of 15 lux

Every fire section will receive separate emergency lighting circuits which must not be routed to other fire
sections. Emergency lighting installation will be executed with fire resistant cable type FTG17 450/750 E90
S=3x1.5mm2, mounted in ceiling level with metallic cable tidies.

The installation of cables for the supply of the relevant fixtures shall comply with the DIN 4102 part 12
norms with fire resistance of 90minutes in accordance with the regulations in force, including the cable
clamps. The cabling for the emergency supply of lighting fixtures system shall comply with DIN VDE 4102
E30 or E90 norms.

Provide with enclosure outline and clear cover made of plastic. 30% luminous flux with main operation and
100% luminous flux with battery operation. The lighting fixtures showing the escape direction shall be
equipped with pictograph.

[Link] Exit Evacuation luminaires (EXIT), LED 3.1VA IP43, with 3h autonomy
General features

• Integrated self-testing functionality;

• Integrated voltage switching;
• Integrated mains monitoring;
• Quick mounting with wall / flag type bracket;
• Installation method:
- on the wall (wall / flag type bracket included);
- on the ceiling (all included);
- false ceiling (mounting kit not included);
- hanging (mounting kit not included).
• Exit sign screens easy to install in precise position (not included);
• Compliant with EN 60598-2-22 standard;
• Visibility distance of the sign in compliance with the new EN 1838 standard: 28 m;
• Emergency exit sign operating in maintained modes;
• Protection rating: IP43;
• Insulation class: II;
• Operating temperature: 0…40°C;
• Fire behavior (EN 60695-2-10), incandescent wire: 850°C;
• Long-lasting LED light source: (> 10 years expected in typical ambient temperature* condition);
• Power supply: 216 V DC / 230 V AC.

Technical Features

• Power consumption in VA: 3.1 VA;

• Battery capacity: 1.5 Ah at 3.2 V, LiFePO4;
• Device mounting: Surface ceiling;
• Visibility distance: 32 m;
• Autonomy: 3 hours;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 213

 • Bulb type: LED 100000 h;
• Height: 260 mm;
• Width: 220 mm;
• Depth: 45 mm;
• Net weight: 0.7 kg;
• IP degree of protection: IP43;
• Ambient air temperature: 0…40 °C;
• Fire resistance: 850 °C;
• Standards: EN/IEC 60598-1, EN/IEC 62471, EN 62034, EN/IEC 60598-2-22.

Figure 5-14 – Evacuation luminaires (EXIT), LED 3.1VA, IP43, 3 hours autonomy

[Link] Emergency luminaires (EXIT), LED 7.5W IP43, with 3hours autonomy
General features

• Available for maintained and non-maintained operation. The selection is made during first
commissioning
• Integrated self-testing functionality
• Integrated voltage switching
• Integrated mains monitoring
• Installation: quick fixing plate-body
• Compliant with IEC EN 60598-2-22 standard
• ENEC certification
• Protection rating: IP65, IK07
• Insulation class: II
• Installation even on flammable surfaces
• Fire behaviour (IEC 60695-2-10), incandescent wire: 850°C
• Operating temperature: 0…40°C
• Case of self-extinguishing polycarbonate 94V-2 (UL 94)
• Long-lasting LED light source (> 10 years expected in typical environment temperature* condition)
• Power supply: 216 V DC / 230 V AC;
• Products are delivered with an additional removable aesthetic frame.

Technical Features

• Power consumption in VA: 13.8 VA;

• Power consumption in W: 7.5 VA;
• Battery capacity: 1.5 Ah at 3.2 V, LiFePO4;
• Device mounting: Surface ceiling;
• Autonomy: 3 hours;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 214

 • Bulb type: LED 100000 h;
• Height: 260 mm;
• Width: 220 mm;
• Depth: 45 mm;
• Net weight: 0.7 kg;
• IP degree of protection: IP65;
• IK degree of protection: K07;
• Ambient air temperature: 0…40 °C;
• Fire resistance: 850 °C;
• Standards: EN/IEC 60598-1, EN/IEC 62471, EN 62034, EN/IEC 60598-2-22;

Figure 5-15 – Emergency luminaires, LED 8W, IP65

5.2.8 EARTHING SYSTEM

Before beginning the work, the resistance of the ground has to be determined, in order to choose the
required measures of earthing and lightning protection according to EN 62305. The results have to be
certified and submitted to the Engineer.

The complete design of the lightning protection has to comply with EN 62305:

The calculations for the Lighting Protection Class, radius of the rolling sphere, size of mash, number of
down conductors and distance “s” has to be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior of installation.

After Installation a third party has to check and confirm with a measuring protocol the correct execution of
the works according to the applicable standard as mentioned above.

The material for use in potential bonding and earthing has to be selected according to EN 62305.

The total earthing resistance of all earthing electrodes must be less than 2 Ohm or fulfil the requirements
according to IEC 60364-4-41, VDE 0100-410.

The materials used and the connecting methods have to be in a way, that the deterioration of materials
due to electrical potential differences is avoided. Connecting lugs or earth able points must be provided in
all rooms containing important electrical distributions and machinery.

For all lightning protection systems, especially for those to be extended the earth-contact resistance has
to be measured and a report about the installation has to be submitted to the Engineer. All resistances
have to be measured again after 3 months of operation and measuring reports have to be submitted.

The components of the earthing system are to be individually connected to a potential bonding bus, so
that they can be disconnected and tested separately at any time.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 215

 System description / Scope of work

• The works and materials specified in this section are related to the manufacture, delivery and
erection and commissioning of grounding, including all necessary materials, equipment, and
installations.
• The work consists of installation of grounding systems including all necessary associated works
and materials in order to complete all installations to fully operational condition as specified and
shown on related design documents.
• This section specifies grounding of electrical systems and equipment and grounding of conductive
machine frames, enclosures, appliances, structures, and other equipment for protection of life,
equipment, circuits, and systems.
• ΑΙΙ conductive building elements (steel structure, roof panels, facade cladding, concrete
reinforcement steel, etc.) and utilities components (equipment, piping, wire-ways, supports, frames,
cabinets, etc.) will be connected to ground equipotential together with cabling protective
conductors (ΡΕ) and cable shielding where applicable.
• Grounding network around the building should be constructed with stainless steel stripe
30x3.5mm, at the depth -1.00m inside the soil. At the crossing point and connections of earthing
stainless steel strips, connection clamps will be used.
• Grounding network around the building will relate to air terminal network on the roof of the
building through the down conductors. For every down conductor, a grounding disconnector is
installed on electrical control pit with heavy cap 40x40x40cm, for measuring grounding resistance.
• Earthing electrodes will relate to grounding network with proper accessories, galvanized steel
profile, copper-plated L=2.0m.
• Air terminal net on the roof will be constructed with aluminium conductor ∅8mm. Every 1m
extension, the aluminium stripe of air terminal net is fixed in concrete cube coated with PVC
10x10x15cm.
• If the measurement of earthing resistance is greater than requested by the applicable standard it
must be added the number of earthing electrodes, until this condition is fulfilled.
• ΑΙΙ metallic structures located on the roof (Metallic Cable Trays, HVAC Equipment, etc.) will be
connected to the roof-conductors.
• All down conductors will be connected to the foundation grounding system. (to check with the
requirements of the local power distribution company)

Submittals

• Submit system calculations as requested according EN 62305 and shop drawings showing layout
of horizontal conductors, vertical conductors, and down-conductors and bonding connections to
structure and other metal objects. Include terminal, electrode and conductor sizes and
connection/termination details.
• Submit product data showing dimensions and materials of each component.
• Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
• Accurately record actual locations of bonding connections and routing of system conductors.

Products

• All the materials used for an LPS should follow the requirements of series of standards
EN IEC 62305

Earthing electrodes

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 216

Deep driven earth rods shall be made of copper coated steel; they shall be joined together using spigot
and socket. Minimum rod length shall be 1.5 m; minimum diameter shall be 25mm. Impact tips and driving
heads for driving down the rod shall be used.

Roof conductors

• Provide aluminium conductor ∅8mm to construct a Faraday cage. Roof conductors shall be put in
the perimeter of the roof, at the edges and as shown in the drawings making a roof grid so as
every point of the roof shall not exceed 2,5 m from a lightning conductor.
• The conductors shall be fixed with special supports, for such purposes, which shall be,
manufactured items. Aluminium supports and accessories properly for the flat roof shall be used.
• Every 1m extension, the aluminum round conductor ofthe air-termination system shall be fixed in
concrete cubes coated with PVC 100x100x150mm.

Down conductors

• Down conductors shall be made of round aluminium conductor ∅8mm.

• Down conductors shall be connected to the grounding system.
• In each down conductor will be installed Lightning Strike Counter device for atmospheric
discharge’s measurement.

Installation

• The down-conductors will be installed so that, as far as practicable, they form a direct continuation
of the air-termination conductors.
• Down-conductors will be installed straight and vertical such that they provide the shortest and
most direct path to earth.
• Down-conductors shall not be installed in gutters or down-spouts even if they are covered by
insulating material.
• When dealing with the dispersion of the lightning current (high frequency behavior) into the
ground, whilst minimizing any potentially dangerous over voltages, the shape and dimensions of
the earth-termination system are the important criteria.

Field quality control

• Inspect bonding of system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.
• The resistance to earth shall be measured before completion of the work. The resistance to earth
may not exceed the value of 10 Ω (ohms).

5.2.9 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM

References: EN 54 (Fire detection and alarm), ISO 7240 (Fire detection and alarm systems), ISO 8421-3 (Fire
protection) – 11, BS 5839-2, CEI UNI 9795.

During the Works of the system fire detection, we were referred to the standards below:

• Laws and applied standards in Albania

• European Norms

EN 54 Fire alarm and detection system

ISO 7240 Fire alarm and detection system, safety security
ISO 8421-3 Protection against fire

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 217

 BS 5839 Fire alarm and detection for buildings
Table 5-5. Fire Detection System References

General description:

Fire alarm system or fire protection is a personnel system that warns of the presence of fire or smoke in
the building. The system is designed in full compliance with the requirements of UNI 9795 standard. All
equipment fire-signalling system must be produced in accordance with European standard EN 54
standards.

Provide a high-performance fire detection system for an early warning, to be installed into as indicated at
D.D. Addressable fire alarm system for school building consists of:

• Addressable Fire alarm control panel;

• Addressable Smoke detectors.
• Addressable Manual push buttons;
• Addressable Indoor sirens;
• Addressable Outdoor sirens;
• Fire alarm cable.

[Link] Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel

Analogue central unit, with 16-bit microprocessor, to manage fire systems with two detection line, with 2
loops.

Technical features of fire alarm control panel (F.A.C.P):

• It is possible to connect to 128 out of smoke detectors, gas detectors, heat detectors, pushbuttons
actuators and interfaces to control external equipment can be connected.
• Detection line can be programmed in following configurations:
 2 loop line (max 128 devices);
 1 RS232 output towards PC;
 LCD display with 8 lines by 40 characters;
 Event log: 1000 events;
 Signalling outputs:
 Alarm Relay 1 or 3 (1A@30 VDC), NO/NC contact;
 Alarm Relay 2 (5A@30 VDC);
 Failure or exclusion Relay (5A @ 30 VDC) NO/NC contact;
 Network in Relay (1A @ 30 VDC) NO/NC contact;
• Controlled siren output for optical/acoustic indicators;
• Controlled output for self-powered sirens;
• In compliance with EN54/2-4;
• Input voltage: 230 VDC 50 Hz;
• Output voltage: 27 VDC 500 mA;
• Battery management, check and charge: 700 mA;
• Assignable batteries: max 2 x 12V – 15 Ah;
• Operation temperature: -5 to + 50°C;
• Base made in metal sheet and front side made in ABS;
• Dimensions (H x L x D): 450 x 350 x 160 mm.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 218

[Link] Addressable Optical Smoke Detector
Low profile smoke optical addressed analogue detector.

• Visual operation signal is provided by two red led lamps placed on the cap, which flashes at each
call from the central unit;
• The alarm signal from the central unit puts led lamps on steady;
• Operation principle: Tyndall effect;
• Supply voltage: 18 VDC modulated;
• Absorption: 280μA at rest;
• Alarm repetition: O.C. 100 mA max;
• Visual alarm repetition: 2 red led lamps;
• Dimensions : Ø 100 x H 45mm ;
• Magnetic test;
• Operation temperature: –20 to +55 °C;
• Relative humidity: 95% max noncondensing;
• Compliant with Standards: EN 54-11, EN 54-17
• 305/2011/EU (CPR): EN 54-11 / EN 54-17;
• 2014/30/EU (EMC): EN 50130-4 / EN 61000-6-3;
• 2011/65/EU (RoHS): EN 50581;
• included short-circuit isolator for use in fire detection systems installed in buildings.

[Link] Addressable Multi-Sensor Smoke/Heat/CO Detector

Low profile smoke optical addressed analogue detector.

• Visual operation signal is provided by two red led lamps placed on the cap, which flashes at each
call from the central unit;
• Sensor measuring chamber which obstructs disruptive extraneous light
• but provides excellent detection of smoke particles
• The alarm signal from the central unit puts led lamps on steady;
• Operating voltage: 12-33 V DC;
• Absorption: 220μA at rest;
• Alarm repetition: O.C. 100 mA max;
• Visual alarm repetition: 2 red led lamps;
• Dimensions : Ø 105 x H 45 mm;
• Operation temperature: –10 to +55 °C;
• Relative humidity: 95% max noncondensing;
• Compliant with Standards: EN 54-7, EN 54-17
• included short-circuit isolator for use in fire detection systems installed in buildings.
• Weight:0.138kg
• Degree of protection: IP40 (IEC 60529)
• Communication protocol: C-NET
• For detection of smoke-generating flaming fires and smoldering fires

Multi-Sensor Sounder Base

• Sensor measuring chamber which obstructs disruptive extraneous light;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 219

 • but provides excellent detection of smoke particles;
• The alarm signal from the central unit puts led lamps on steady;
• Adjustable sounds and sound levels, sounds synchronized for all alarm devices;
• Operating voltage: 12-33 V DC;
• Absorption: 150μA at rest;
• Sounds: 2 alarm levels / 2 sound levels;
• Sound level:80-88dB(A);
• Visual alarm repetition: 2 red led lamps;
• Dimensions: Ø 175mm x H 29mm (with sound base included);
• Operation temperature: –25 to +70 °C;
• Relative humidity: 95% max noncondensing;
• Compliant with Standards: EN 54-3;
• included short-circuit isolator for use in fire detection systems installed in buildings;
• Weight:0.090kg;
• Degree of protection: IP41 (IEC 60529);
• Communication protocol: Supply and communication via C-NET peripheral device
• For detection of smoke-generating flaming fires and smoldering fires.

[Link] Addressable Optical Heat Detector

Low profile smoke optical addressed analogue detector.

• Visual operation signal is provided by two red led lamps placed on the cap, which flashes at each
call from the central unit;
• The alarm signal from the central unit puts led lamps on steady;
• Operation principle: Tyndall effect heat probe;
• Supply voltage: 18 VDC modulated;
• Absorption: 280 μA at rest;
• Alarm repetition: O.C. 100 mA max;
• Visual alarm repetition: 2 red LED lamps;
• Dimensions : Ø 100 x H 45 mm;
• Magnetic test;
• Operation temperature: –20 to +55 °C;
• Relative humidity: 95% max none condensing;
• Protection degree: IP 43;
• Compliant with Standards: EN 54-11, EN 54-17;
• 305/2011/EU (CPR): EN 54-11 / EN 54-17;
• 2014/30/EU (EMC): EN 50130-4 / EN 61000-6-3;
• 2011/65/EU (RoHS): EN 50581;
• included short-circuit isolator for use in fire detection systems installed in buildings.

[Link] Alarm indicators for optical repeat signals

• Operating voltage: DC 5…8 V;
• Operating current (quiescent): Max. 35 mA;
• Connection terminals: Max. 1.5 mm;
• Operating temperature: -25…+80 °C;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 220

 • Storage temperature: -25…+80 °C;
• Air humidity: ≤95 % relative;
• Colour: RAL 9010, pure white;
• Protection category (EN 60529): IP40;
• Alarm indicator for use in fire detection and fire alarm systems installed in buildings;
• 2014/30/EU (EMC): EN 50130-4 / EN 61000-6-3;
• 2011/65/EU (RoHS): EN50581.

[Link] Red alarm Addressable pushbutton with breaking

Red alarm analogue pushbutton with recommissioning.

• Fire alarm pushbuttons are used for signaling an alarm manually. To use the break glass
pushbutton model just press the glass in the middle to break it and to operate the internal switch.
These pushbuttons are provided with a special tool to be used to perform the TEST, to open the
cover and to replace the glass. The alarm state is shown by the switching on of a red LED;
• Compliant with Standards: EN 54-11, EN 54-17;
• Visual alarm repetition: red led;
• Dimensions (H x L x D): 110 x 110 x 42 mm;
• Weight: 100 g;
• Average absorption: 100 μA @ 18 VDC;
• 305/2011/EU (CPR): EN 54-11 / EN 54-17;
• 2014/30/EU (EMC): EN 50130-4 / EN 61000-6-3;
• 2011/65/EU (RoHS): EN 50581;
• included short-circuit isolator for use in fire detection systems installed in buildings;
• Actuation Type: Recommissioning.

[Link] Addressable Indoor fire alarm sirens

• Electronic bell with sophisticated appearance and innovative technology for fire alarm systems and
other warnings;
• Combining a miniaturized solenoid to a built-in control circuit, excellent acoustic performance,
minimum current consumption, and high reliability are allowed;
• Power supply doubled pins and cap latching make the bell particularly easy to be installed;
• IP 55 protection degree allows bell outdoor use; however, the bell can also be mounted in indoor
environments;
• Power supply: 24 VDC;
• Average absorption: 30 mA;
• Operation temperature: -10°C ÷ +55°C;
• Sound pressure at 1-meter distance: 93-95 dB;
• Protection degree: IP 54;
• Compliant with Standards: EN 54-3, EN 54-17;
• 305/2011/EU (CPR): EN 54-3 / EN 54-17;
• 2014/30/EU (EMC): EN 50130-4 / EN 61000-6-3;
• 2011/65/EU (RoHS): EN 50581;
• included short-circuit isolator for use in fire detection systems installed in buildings.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 221

[Link] Addressable Outdoor fire alarm sirens
Provided with signalling flash with incandescent lamp, Outdoor red self-powered siren made in die-cast
aluminium.

• Operation voltage: 24 VDC;

• Sound pressure: 120 dB (A) at 3 meters distance;
• Operation temperature: -25° C / +55° C;
• Assignable accumulator: 12 V 2, 1 Ah;
• Dimensions (H x L x D): 265x210x65 mm;
• Protection degree: IP 66;
• Compliant with Standards: EN 54-3, EN 54-17;
• 305/2011/EU (CPR): EN 54-3 / EN 54-17;
• 2014/30/EU (EMC): EN 50130-4 / EN 61000-6-3;
• 2011/65/EU (RoHS): EN 50581;
• included short-circuit isolator for use in fire detection systems installed in buildings.

Control Equipment. Contractor should cover, installation, test, and provides a high-quality connection for
the operation of the fire signal device and alarm system including speakers, lights, alarm equipment,
contact breaking glass panels fire alarm, battery charger, and associated relays, will be provided and
connected in accordance with the specifications, according to the positions shown on the drawings.

[Link] Cable J-H (St)H

Installation will be done with JY(St)-Y 2x1mm2 cable for smoke detectors and sirens and 2x1 mm, for fire
alarm sirens. All the signalizations will be equipped with an arrow indicating the place of fire. Leading
signals will also provide links between terminals to help command signal units in the previous drawings.

Application

• In places where human life, valuable materials and equipment’s need to be protected.
• In crowded indoor environments.
• At instrumentation and control engineering.
• At industrial electronics.
• Computer and office devices.
• Indoor communication systems.
• Indoor sound systems.
• Security and fire alarm systems.

Construction

• Conductor: Class 1 electrolytic solid copper (IEC 60228, DIN VDE 0295, EN 60228) HFFR compound
(VDE 0815, EN 50290-2-26) Two pairs are stranded into a star-quad, above two pairs are stranded
together in layers. Polyester tape Tinned copper earthing wire, Al/PET tape UV resistant halogen-
free outer jacket. RAL 3000 (Red);
• Insulation: HFFR compound (VDE 0815, EN 50290-2-26);
• Stranding: Two pairs are stranded into a star-quad, above two pairs are stranded together in layers;
• Wrapping: Polyester tape;
• Screen: Tinned copper earthing wire, Al/PET tape;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 222

 • Outer Jacket: UV resistant halogen-free outer jacket. RAL 3000 (Red).

Technical Characteristics

Conductor Conductor Insulation Resistance Mutual Operating Test Voltage V

Diameter Resistance Mohm/km (500V DC) Capacitance Voltage (DC, 1 minute)
Ohm/km (20ºC) nF/km 800 Hz VDC
1x0.8 mm 73.2 100 100 300 800
1x1.0 mm 44.6 100 100 300 1000
1x1.5 mm 24.6 100 100 300 1000
Table 5-6. Technical Characteristics

Mechanical Characteristics

Bending radius: 10xD mm

Temperature Range: -30 oC - +70 oC.

Pair Conductor Diameter Approx. Cable Diameter Copper Weight Approx. Weight
Count (mm) (mm) (kg/km) (kg/km)
2x 0.8 5.3 20.7 44
2x 1.0 6.3 34.4 65
2x 1.5 7.8 59.6 105
Table 5-7. Mechanical Characteristics

Standards

• Smoke Density Test: IEC 61034-2; VDE 0482-1034-2; EN 61034-2;

• Corrosive Gas Test: IEC 60754-2; VDE 0482-267-2-3; EN 50267-2-3;
• Halogen-Free Test: IEC 60754-1; VDE 0482-267-2-1; EN 50267-2-1;
• Flame Retardancy Test: IEC 60332-3-24; VDE 0482-332-3-24; EN 60332-2-24;
• Flame Propagation Test: IEC 60332-1-2; VDE 0482-332-1-2; EN 60332-1-2.

5.2.10 LAN & TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

General

Any working station is equipped with two RJ45 data and telephone outlet sockets. Each cable (FTP type)
must be measured after installation. Written reports are to hand over to the Engineer afterwards showing
all results.

The contractor shall cover only the layout of the fibre cables for WAN and the FTP cables for the LAN of
each block.

References:

EN 50173 class E

The supply shall be done with Category S/FTP 6A cable. The lines shall be connected on each end ready
for operation. Labelling has to be done on both ends.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 223

[Link] Main RACK 19” 42U
General

Computer RACK 19 "42U, 800x800x2100mm metallic type, with reinforced glass door with a key, steering
cable, ventilation and supply module, with power supply socket outlets 2P+PE, 230V, 16A. It is intended for
devices manufactured in enclosures of the 19’’ standard. Due to the RACK cabinets, the devices are
aesthetically mounted and protected against mechanical damage.

Technical features of 19”, 42U

• Mounting width: 19”;

• Mounting height: 42U;
• Outside width: 800mm;
• Outside height: 2100mm;
• Outside depth: 800mm;
• Net/gross weight: 112, 1 [kg];
• Adjustable distance between front and rear RACK rails;
• Ventilation holes in the front door, top and bottom panel;
• Possible mounting of a 4-fan tray in the top panel - RAWP800;
• Cable ducts in the top and bottom panel;
• 4 casters without locks and 4 levelling feet included;
• Possible assembly of a 100mm high plinth - RAC168;
• Lockable front door (2 keys in set);
• Lockable rear door (2 keys in set);
• Side panels - lock assembly possible - RAZB16;
• Ready-to-assemble;
• Certificates, declaration: RoHS.

Materials

• RACK mounting rails: cold-rolled steel SPCC 2mm RAL 9004 – bolted;
• Horizontal mounting rails: cold-rolled steel 1,5mm RAL 9004 – bolted;
• Frame: cold-rolled steel SPCC 1,2mm RAL 9004 – welded;
• Front door: 5mm toughened glass / SPCC 1,2mm RAL 9004 – hinged;
• Side panels: cold-rolled steel SPCC 1,2mm RAL 9004 – removable;
• Rear door: cold-rolled steel SPCC 1,2mm RAL 9004 – hinged;
• Use indoor: IP20.

[Link] Floor RACK’s 19” 15U

General

Computer RACK 19 "15U, 600x600x769mm metallic type, with reinforced glass door with a key, steering
cable, ventilation and supply module, with power supply socket outlets 2P+PE, 230V, 16A. It is intended for
devices manufactured in enclosures of the 19’’ standard. Due to the RACK cabinets, the devices are
aesthetically mounted and protected against mechanical damage.

Technical features of 19”, 15U

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 224

 • Mounting width: 19”;
• Mounting height: 15U;
• Outside width: 600mm;
• Outside height: 769mm;
• Outside depth: 600mm;
• Net/gross weight: 39.6 [kg];
• Adjustable distance between front and rear RACK rails;
• Ventilation holes in the front door, top and bottom panel;
• Possible mounting of a 4-fan tray in the top panel - RAWP800;
• Cable ducts in the top and bottom panel;
• 4 casters without locks and 4 levelling feet included;
• Possible assembly of a 100mm high plinth - RAC168;
• Lockable front door (2 keys in set);
• Lockable rear door (2 keys in set);
• Side panels - lock assembly possible - RAZB16;
• Ready-to-assemble;
• Certificates, declaration: RoHS.

Materials

• RACK mounting rails: cold-rolled steel SPCC 2mm RAL 9004 – bolted;
• Horizontal mounting rails: cold-rolled steel 1,5mm RAL 9004 – bolted;
• Frame: cold-rolled steel SPCC 1,2mm RAL 9004 – welded;
• Front door: 5mm toughened glass / SPCC 1,2mm RAL 9004 – hinged;
• Side panels: cold-rolled steel SPCC 1,2mm RAL 9004 – removable;
• Rear door: cold-rolled steel SPCC 1,2mm RAL 9004 – hinged;
• Use indoor: IP20.

[Link] System components

24-Port Gigabit Ethernet L2+ Fully Managed Pro PoE

24-Port managed PoE+ switch is equipped with 24 x 10/100/1000BASE-T ports, 2 x 1Gb RJ45/SFP combo
ports and 2 x 1/10Gb SFP+ uplinks. 24 x RJ45 ports support both IEEE 802.3af PoE and IEEE 802.3at PoE+
(up to 30W per port) for powering attached IP phones, wireless access points, or other standards
compliant PoE and PoE+ end network devices. This access switch delivers a compact, cost-effective
solution for campus networks, SMBs and enterprise networks.

Features

• Ports: 24x 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45, 2x 1G/10G SFP+, 2x 1G RJ45/SFP Combo;

• Switching Capacity: 88 Gbps;
• Forwarding Rate: 66 Mpps;
• Power Budget: 740W;
• Flash Memory: 512MB;
• Airflow: Left-to-Right;
• Dimension (HxWxD): 1.73''x17.32''x12.59'' (44x440x320mm);
• Mounting Options Desktop/Rackmount;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 225

 • PoE Standard IEEE 802.3af/at;
• Stacking: Support;
• ARP Table: 1,000;
• Number of VLANs: 4,000;
• Jumbo Frame: 9,216;
• Total Number of IPv4/IPv6 Routes 500;
• Management: WEB, CLI, SNMP V1/V2/V3, RMON, Syslog, SFLOW;
• MTBF: >200,000 Hours;
• Warranty: 5 Years;

24-Port Gigabit Ethernet L2+ Fully Managed Pro PoE

48-Port Managed PoE+ Switch is equipped with 48 10/100/1000BASE-T ports, 4x1Gb SFP/10Gb SFP+
uplinks, 48 RJ45 ports support both IEEE 802.3af PoE and IEEE 802.3at PoE+ (up to 30W per port) for
powering attached IP phones, wireless access points, or other standards-compliant PoE and PoE+ end
network devices.

4 SFP+ uplink ports are provided to support connections to higher layer devices. This access switch
delivers a compact, cost-effective solution for carrier's IP MAN and enterprise networks. Based on the
high-performance hardware and FSOS platform, it supports functions such as ACL, QinQ and QoS. Its
simple management mode and flexible installation can meet the requirement of any complicated
scenarios.

• Ports: 48x 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ45, 4x 10G SFP+;

• MAC Address: 32K;
• DRAM: 256MB;
• Flash Memory: 16MB;
• Max. Power Consumption: 400W;
• Power Budget: 370W;
• PoE Standard: IEEE 802.3af/at;
• Rack Space: 1U;
• Dimensions (HxWxD): 44.4 x 441.2 x 280.4mm;
• Switching Capacity : 176 Gbps;
• Forwarding Rate: 132 Mpps;
• Input Voltage: 100-240VAC, 50-60Hz, 6.5A;
• Max./Min. Latency: 3.84us/37.66us;
• Packet Buffer: 0.5MB;
• Power Supply: Optional AC & DC Power Supplies;
• Fan Number: 2 Built-in Fans;
• Storage Temperature: - 40°F to 158°F (-40ºC to 70ºC);
• Operating Temperature: 14°F to 122°F (-10ºC to 50ºC);
• Warranty: 4 Years.

Patch panels

One distribution panel shall be installed in the server room at Administration building. One outlet on the
patch panel shall be dedicated to every outlet in the field. Additional patch panels for the fibre panel and
active components panel are necessary.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 226

The connection between blocks shall be done with optical fiber8 core single mode. The IT racks and all
necessary active components and devices of them are not part of this contract.

Patch panel, fibre, 24p, 1u, complete

• Material Steel:14 gauge;

• Dimensions: Chassis: 44.5cm (W) x 23cm (D) x 4.3cm 1U (H);
• Front plates: 14.2cm (W) x 2.5cm (D) (unloaded);
• Connector capacity: 12 and 24 (two strips);
• Splice Tray capacity: Two 203 mm (8 in.) trays.

Patch panel 24p, FTP, RJ45 Cat.6A

• Width - 483mm (19’’), depth - 98mm, height - 1u (44.5mm),

• Material - Mild steel, Finish - Matt black polyester paint,
• Socket - High performance side entry RJ45 jacks,
• Socket Labels -Write-on silk screen on panel front,
• IDC Labelling - Colour coded to T568B,
• Conforms to - TIA/EIA-568-C Category 6A Specification

Socket RJ45, cat.6A

Standard production, Material: Flame-retardant PC + Gilded scalp with PCB

Power bar with 8 x 2P+E sockets 10A, 220V

EC Power Strip 8 Ports, 1U Aluminium Material 19'‘, Rack Power Bar,10A,220-250V.

Patch guide, with cover

Allows storage and management of copper and fibre patch cords, High density on 1 HU, 8 cm depth, cover
for tidy cabinet look, White paint finished metal.

Patch cord 0.5m, S/FTP, cat.6a, 500 MHz

LAN / network cable to connect network components with 2 x RJ45 (CAT 6A, 500 MHz) connectors. RJ45
patch cord CAT 6A S/FTP, 500 MHz, with CAT 7 raw cable, with 50μ gold plated PINs, pairs screening: PIMF
(pairs in metal foil) + outer shield: braiding.

[Link] Wi-Fi equipment Specifications

Technical Feature of Wi-Fi access point device

Dimensions Ø220 x 48 mm (Ø8.66 x 1.89")
Weight Without mount: 800 g (1.76 lb)
With Mounting Kits With mount: 930 g (2.05 lb)
Weatherproofing IP54
Networking Interface (1) GbE RJ45 port
Buttons Factory reset
Power Method 802.3at PoE+, passive PoE (48V)

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 227

 Supported Voltage Range 44 to 57VDC
Power Supply PoE switch 48V, 0.5A PoE adapter (not included)
Power Save Supported
Beamforming Supported
Maximum Power Consumption 16.5W
TX Power
2.4 GHz 26 dBm
5 GHz 26 dBm
Mimo
2.4 GHz 4x4
5 GHz 4x4
Antennas
2.4 GHz 600 Mbps
5 GHz 2400 Mbps
Antennas
2.4 GHz 4 dBi
5 GHz 5.5 dBi
Wi-Fi Standards 802.11a/b/g
WiFi 4/WiFi 5/WiFi 6
Wireless Security WPA-PSK, WPA-Enterprise (WPA/WPA2/WPA3)
BSSID Up to 8 per Radio
Mounting -30 to 60° C (-22 to 140° F)
Operating Temperature -13 to 70° C (14 to 158° F)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% Noncondensing
Certifications CE, FCC, IC
Table 5-8. Technical Feature of Wi-Fi access point device

[Link] Technical features of f/FTP, Cat.6A cable, LSZH

LAN cable with 4 pairs, category 6A, with individual Al-foil screen and common braid

Standards

• EN 50173-1; EN 50288-10-1;
• ISO/IEC 11801; IEC 61156-5;
• TIA/EIA-568-B.2;
• IEEE 802.3at.

Application

• Primary (Campus), Secondary (Riser), Tertiary (Horizontal);

• IEEE 802.3: 10Base-T; 100Base-T; 1000Base-T; 10GBase-T;
• IEEE 802.5 16 MB; ISDN; FDDI; ATM;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 228

 • Power over Ethernet (PoE) / PoE+.

Flame resistance

• EN 50399: Class Eca;

• LSHF(LSOH): IEC 60332-1; IEC 60754-2; IEC 61034.

Figure 5-16 – F/FTP AWG23/1 Cat. 6A cable

Construction

Conductor bare copper wire Ø 0.56 mm (AWG23/1)

Insulation Foam skin Polyethylene, Ø 1.35 mm
Stranding 2 cores to the pair
Pair screen High Performance FTP: Al-laminated plastic foil, patented wrapping of two pairs each
Cable lay up 4x2 pairs to the core
Screen Advanced screen: Al-laminated plastic foil, drain wire AWG26 tinned
Sheath LSHF(FRNC), blue RAL 5024
Duplex sheath: two cables parallel, separable
Table 5-9. Construction

Mechanical properties

Bending radius without load 4xD

with load 8xD
Temperature range during operation -20°C to + 60°C
during installation 0°C to + 50°C
Table 5-10. Mechanical Properties

Electrical properties (at 20°C ± 5°C)

Loop resistance ≤ 156 Ω/km

Resistance unbalance ≤ 2%
Insulation resistance (500 V) ≥ 2000 MΩ*km
Mutual capacitance at 800 Hz Nom. 43 nF/km
Capacitance unbalance (pair/ground) ≤ 1500 pF/km
Mean characteristic impedance 100 MHz 100 ± 5Ω
Nominal velocity of propagation ca. 79 %
Propagation delay 427 ns/100m

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 229

 Delay skew 12 ns/100m
Test voltage (DC, 1 min) core / core and 1000 V
core / screen
Transfer impedance at 1 MHz ≤ 20 mΩ /m Grade 2
at 10 MHz ≤ 50 mΩ /m
at 30 MHz ≤ 100 mΩ /m
Coupling attenuation 55 dB Type 2
Segregation classification acc. EN 50174-2 „c“
Table 5-11. Electrical Properties

Electrical properties (nominal) according to Cat. 6A (at 20°C)

Frequency Attenuation NEXT PS- ACR PS-ACR ELFEXT PS- Return

(MHz) (dB/100m) (dB) NEXT (dB/100m) (dB/100m) (dB/100m) ELFEXT loss
(dB) (dB/100m) (dB)
1.0 1.8 100 97 98 95 105 105 -
4.0 3.4 100 97 97 94 105 102 27
10.0 5.4 100 97 95 92 97 94 30
16.0 6.8 100 97 93 90 93 90 30
20.0 7.7 100 97 92 89 91 88 30
31.2 9.6 100 97 90 87 87 84 30

62.5 13.7 100 97 86 83 81 78 30

100.0 17.4 100 97 83 80 77 74 30
125.0 19.5 95 92 75 72 75 72 26
155.5 21.9 94 91 72 69 73 70 26
175.0 23.3 93 90 70 67 72 69 25
200.0 25 92 89 67 64 71 68 25
250.0 28.1 90 87 62 59 69 66 24
300.0 30.9 89 86 58 55 67 64 24
450.0 38.3 87 84 48 45 64 61 23
500.0 44.8 85 82 40 37 61 58 22
Table 5-12. Electrical Properties according to Cat. 6A (at 20°C)

Cable type Brand name Outer Euro Fire load Weight Copper Tensile
Diameter Class content force
Mm MJ/k kWh/m kg/km N
m
J-02YS(St)H AS23 Cat.6A 7.1 Eca 495 0.137 46 24 100
4x2x0.56 F/FTP 4P LSHF
Table 5-13. Cable type

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 230

Cable applied in structures cabling system of class for high-speed data and voice transmission, at primary,
secondary (vertical) and tertiary (horizontal) level. Standardized for application up to 600 MHz (in certain
configurations even up to 900 MHz).

Used in the following types of networks:

• ISDN;
• IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T Ethernet 10Mb/s;
• IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-T Fast Ethernet 100Mb/s;
• IEEE 802.3AB 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet 1000Mb/s;
• IEEE 802.3an 10GBASE-T 10Gigabit Ethernet 10Gb/s;
• IEEE 802.5 Token ring 16MB;
• TP-DDI;
• ATM.

Length of this cable in 10GBASE-T networks can extend 100 m.

23AWG bare copper wire insulated with polyethylene. Two insulated conductors twisted together to form
a pair and four such pairs cabled to form the basic unit jacketed with flame retardant PVC. Plastic cross in
the middle separate’s pairs from each other.

5.2.11 CCTV SYSTEM

General

CCTV system consists of:

• NVR 24 Channels;
• Indoor camera, IP POE Dome type, 5Mpx, IP43;
• Outdoor camera, IP POE Bullet type, 5Mpx, IP66;
• POE Switch with 24PxRJ45;
• Monitor 32’’;
• 1 x HDD 6TB;
• Cable infrastructure with FTP Cat.6A Cable.

In this modern system of control and monitoring, that consists of High-Resolution cameras, Wide Dynamic
Range and Day and Night, we receive clear and stable views for 24/7. Through CCD technology these
cameras reach a photographing speed up to 30 images per second with a resolution up to 5 megapixels.
It’s recommended that for special parts of the building the use of IP cameras, that through LAN or the
Internet can be monitored and controlled online.

The camera control of the object will be done not only inside but outside it too. The indoor cameras are
placed in the entrance.

CCTV monitoring system with IP POE Cameras build up on each floor:

CCTV system with new technology of IP CCTV to view and record from the cameras to all computers in
LAN and through internet (under permission of responsibly person). The system can record 24 hr in day in
24 channel NVR by frame, CIF or Full HD.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 231

[Link] NVR-24 Channel, 4K real-time recording
Introducing Performance Series Focus 4K Embedded NVRs, our newest affordable, fully featured NVRs
offering Ultra HD 4K video resolution. Choose a 24 channel NVR, with multiple hard drive options plus the
ability to expand to up to 16 TB of internal storage, for an ideal and flexible solution to fit your surveillance
situation.

Fully featured NVRs

• High decoding capability for Ultra 4K HD viewing and recording;

• View 24 channels simultaneously with synchronized real-time playback on your monitor
(depending on your model);
• Up to 12 MP (4K) resolution live view, preview, and playback;
• Up to 24 channels at 1080p H.265/H.264 decoding;
• De-warp fisheye camera video in local and web user interface for 360-degree situational awareness.

Dynamic, Accessible Monitoring

• Monitor from anywhere using the mobile apps for both Apple® and Android™ devices
(smartphones, tablet computers, and laptops);
• Protect the NVR's video and network setup with password-protected access;
• Conceal up to 4 areas of a scene from viewing and recording.

Convenient, Flexible Storage Options

• Internal storage supports 2 HDDs expandable up to 16 TB (8 TB each);

• Store video clips and snapshots to external storage, such as the client’s PC, through the Internet
connection Store video clips and snapshots to external network storage servers, such as an FTP
site;
• Store video clips and snapshots to a USB memory device.

Easy to Use

• The Quick wizard and PoE support (for up to 24 channels) make setup fast & easy;
• Quick physical installation with the help of a simple NVR design and easy-to-understand quick
installation guides;
• Simple remote configuration and firmware updating through the Viewer web client and the
Configure tool.

24-Channel 4K NVRs – Technical Specifications

System
Main Processor Quad-core embedded processor
Operating System Embedded LINUX
Video
INPUTS 24 Channel IP
Audio
Audio Input / Output 1 Channel Input/ 1 Channel Output, RCA

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 232

 Display
Interface 2 HDMI (1 HDMI up to 3840 × 2160); 1 VGA
Resolution 3840 × 2160; 1920 × 1080;
1280 × 1024; 1280 × 720;
1024 × 768
Display Split 1/4/8/9/16
OSD Camera tittle; time; Video loss; Camera lock; Motion detection;
Recording
Fisheye Video De-Wrapping Supported in local and web user interface
Recording
Compression H.265/H.264/MJPEG/MPEG4
12 MP (4000 × 3000); 8 MP (3840 × 2160); 6 MP (3072 × 2048); 5 MP
(2560 × 1920); 4 MP (2560 × 1440); 3 MP (2048 × 1520); 1080p (1920
× 1080); 720p (1280 × 720); D1 (704 × 576 / 704 × 480); CIF (352 ×
Resolution
288 / 352 × 240)
Frame Rate 1–15 fps (12 MP and 8 MP); 1–25/30 fps (rest of the resolutions)
Record Bit Rate 320 Mbps
Bit Rate1 16 kbps ~ 20 Mbps, per channel
Recording Mode Schedule (Regular/Continuous, Motion Detection, Alarm); Manual;
Stop
Recording Interval 1 to 120 minutes (default 60 min)
Pre-Event Recording Interval 1 to 30 seconds
Post-Event Recording Interval 10 to 300 seconds
Video Detection and Alarms
Trigger Events Recording; PTZ; Tour; Alarm; Video Push; Email; FTP; Snapshot; Buzzer
Video Detection Motion Detection—MD Zones: 396 (22 × 18); Video Loss; Camera Blank
Alarm Input 16 Channels
Relay Output 6 Channels

Storage
Internal HDD 2 SATA ports, up to 16 TB
Playback and Backup
Sync Playback 1/4/8/16 (maximum 4-ch @ 8 MP, 8-ch @ 4 MP, or 16-ch @ 1080p
simultaneous playback)
Search Mode Time/Date; Alarm; Motion Detection (MD); Exact Search (accurate to a
second); Smart Search
Playback Function Play; Pause; Stop; Rewind; Fast play; Slow play; Next File; Previous File;
Next Camera; Previous Camera; Full Screen; Repeat; Shuffle; Backup
selection; Digital Zoom

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 233

 BACKUP MODE USB Device; Network; Internal SATA burner
COMPATIBILITY
Network
Ethernet 1 RJ-45 port (10/100/1000 Mbps)
Poe 16 ports (IEEE802.3af/at)
Supported Protocols 2 HTTP, TCP/IP, IPv4/IPv6, UPnP, RTSP, UDP, SMTP, NTP, DHCP, DNS, IP
Filter, PPPoE, DDNS, FTP, Alarm Server, IP Search, P2P
Maximum Number of Users 128 users
Network Throughput Input 320 Mbps; Output 320 Mbps
Smart Phone Compatibility iPhone; iPad; Android
Storage
Internal Storage 4 SATA ports, up to 32 TB
External HDD 1 eSATA port
Auxiliary Interface
USB Ports 3 (2 rear USB3.0; 1 front USB2.0)
RS232 1 port (for PC communications and keyboard)
Electrical
Power Supply Single, 100~240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption NVRs: 17.5 W max (without HDD)
PoE: 25.5 W for a single port (150 W total)
Environmental
Operating Temperature 14°F to 131°F (–10°C to 55°C)
Relative Humidity 10% to 90%, non-condensing
Storage Temperature –4°F to 158°F (–20°C to 70°C),0% to 90% relative humidity
Physical
Dimensions 440 mm × 413 mm × 75 mm (17.3" × 16.3" × 3.0")
Weight (Without HDD) 4.65 kg (10.3 lb)
Regulatory
Emissions FCC Part 15B, EN55032: 2012 +AC: 2013, EN61000-3-2: 2014, EN61000-
3-3: 2013
Immunity EN50130-4: 2011+A1: 2014, EN55024: 2010+A1: 2015
Safety EU: EN60950-1North America UL listed to UL/CSA 60950-1
RoHS EN50581: 2012
Table 5-14. Channel 4K NVRs – Technical Specifications

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 234

[Link] Outdoor Cameras bullet 5Mpx, IP66

Operational
Video standing NTSC/PAL
Scanning System Progressive scan
Image Sensor 1/2.7" Progressive CMOS
Number of Pixels (HXV) 2560(H) x 1920(V)
Minimum Illumination 0.035lux color @ F1.4, 0 lux B/W with IR
LEDs on @F1.4
S/N Ratio > 55 dB
Electronic Shutter Speed 1/5 ~ 1/32,000
IR Distance Distance up to 50m (165ft)

IR Distance Smart IR (Auto/Manual)/OFF

IR Light Number 2
Day/Night Auto/Day/Night/Schedule
Backlight Compensation WDR, HLC
White Balance Auto/Fixed Current/Manual

Gain Control 0-100%

Wide Dynamic Range 120dB
Noise Reduction 3D DNR
Privacy Masking Off / On (5 Areas)
Motion Detection Motion detection/Intrusion detection/ People detection
Tampering Detection Tampering Detection/Image too dark detection/Image too bright
detection/ Image too blurry detection
Lens 2.8mm~12mm, MFZ, F1.4~F2.8
Angle of View 5MP: H: 88°-30°, V: 65°-23°
Audio/Two-way Line In/Out
Alarm Input Output 2 In / 1 Out
Analog output support Twin outputs (for adjustment only)
Ethernet RJ-45 (10/100Base-T)
IP SPECIFICATION
Video Compression H.265/H.264/Smart Codec/MJPEG
Resolution 16:9 (5MP) 2560x1920/2048x1536/ 1600x1200/1280x960/800x-600/640x480;
Frame Rate “Mainstream: 5M/4M (1 ~ 25/30fps);
*Up to 30fps @5M under H.265 only
Sub Stream: 800x600 (1 ~ 25/30fps);
Third Stream: VGA (1 ~ 25/30fps)”

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 235

 Bit Rate Control Constrained bit rate/Fixed quality
Bit Rate 20K ~ 40Mbps
NETWORK
Supported protocols* 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet (RJ-45)
Supported Web Browsers Chrome 71+, Internet Explorer 11.0+
Supported OS IPv4, IPv6, TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPS, UPnP, RTSP/RTP/RTCP, IGMP, SMTP,
DHCP, NTP, DNS, DDNS, CoS, QoS, SNMP, 802.1X, UDP, ICMP, ARP, TLS
Interoperability ONVIF Profile G/S
Maximum Users Access 10 Users
Security User account and password protection, HTTPS, IP Filter, Digest
authentication, TLS1.2 only, Stream encryption, AES- 128/256, SSH/ Telnet
closed, PCIDSS compliance
Event Event notification using HTTP, SMTP, NAS server and MicroSD card,
File upload via HTTP, SMTP, NAS server and MicroSD card
Micro SD Micro SD/SDHC/SDXC card slot (256GB)
Electrical
Power Supply DC12V, PoE (IEEE 802.3af) (Class 0)
Long distance poe MAX 12.95W
support
Mechanical
Dimensions 215.6mm x 85mm x 85mm (8.49” x 3.35”x 3.35”)
Product Weight 0.78kg
Package Weight 1.0kg
Construction Die-casting aluminium housing with coating
Construction Colour RAL 120-1 (Lyric White)
Environmental
Operating Temperature Starting: -10°C ~ 60°C (14°F ~ 140°F)
Working: -30°C ~ 60°C (-22°F ~ 140°F)
Relative humidity 0% to 95%, non-condensing
Heater, fan option Heater
Ingress Protection IP66
Impact Resistance IK10
Regulatory
Emissions FCC PART 15B, EN 55032, EN61000-6-3
Immunity EN 50130-4
Safety UL 62368-1, EN 62368-1
ROHS EN 50581
Table 5-15. Outdoor Cameras bullet 5Mpx, IP66

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 236

[Link] Indoor Cameras Day Night 5 MPx
Network WDR 4 IR Rugged Mini Dome Camera

Operational
Video standing NTSC/PAL
Scanning System Progressive scan
Image Sensor 1/2.7” Progressive CMOS
Number of Pixels (HXV) 2560(H) x 1920(V)
Minimum Illumination 0.03 lux color @ F2.0, 0 lux B/W with IR LEDs on @ F2.0
S/N Ratio > 55 dB
Electronic Shutter Speed 1/5 ~ 1/32,000
IR Distance Distance up to 30m (98ft)
IR Light Control Smart IR (Auto/Manual)/OFF
IR Light Number 2
Day/Night Auto (ICR)/Colour/BW
Backlight Compensation BLC/HLC/WDR
White Balance Auto/Fixed Current/Manual
Gain Control 0-100 %
Wide Dynamic Range 120dB
Noise Reduction 3D DNR
Privacy Masking Off / On (5 Areas)
Motion Detection Motion/Intrusion/People detection
Tampering Detection Tampering Detection/Image too dark detection/Image too bright
detection/ Image too blurry detection
Region Of Interest Support
Lens 2.8mm, Fixed, F2.0
Angle of View H:103°, V:76° @5M, H:108°, V:60° @4M
Video
VIDEO COMPRESSION H.265/H.264/Smart Codec/MJPEG
RESOLUTION 2560x1920/2048x1536/ 1600x1200/1280x960/800x600/640x480;
FRAME RATE Mainstream: 5M/4M (1 ~ 25/30fps);
*Up to 30fps @5M under H.265 only
Sub Stream: 800x600 (1 ~ 25/30fps);
Third Stream: VGA (1 ~ 25/30fps)
BIT RATE CONTROL Constrained bit rate/Fixed quality
BIT RATE 20K ~ 40Mbps

Network

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 237

 Ethernet 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet (RJ-45)
Supported Web Browsers Chrome 71+, Internet Explorer 11.0+
Supported OS Microsoft Windows 7/10
Network (Cont. ’D)
Protocols IPv4, IPv6, TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPS, UPnP, RTSP/RTP/RTCP, IGMP, SMTP,
DHCP, NTP, DNS, DDNS, CoS, QoS, SNMP, 802.1X, UDP, ICMP, ARP, TLS
Interoperability ONVIF Profile G/S
Maximum User Access 10 Users
Security User account and password protection, HTTPS, IP Filter, Digest
authentication, TLS1.2 only, Stream encryption, AES- 128/256, SSH/Telnet
closed, PCIDSS compliance
Event Event notification using HTTP, SMTP, NAS server and MicroSD card, File
upload via HTTP, SMTP, NAS server and MicroSD card
Micro SD Micro SD/SDHC/SDXC card slot (256GB)
Electrical
Power Supply DC12V, PoE (IEEE 802.3af) (Class 2)
Power Consumption MAX 6.49W
Mechanical
Dimensions Ø117.11mm x 89.51mm (Ø4.61’’ x3.52’’)
Product Weight 0.54kg
Package Weight 0.88kg
Construction Die-cast aluminium housing with power coat
Construction Colour RAL 120-1 (Lyric White)
Environmental
Operating Temperature Starting: -10°C ~ 60°C (14°F ~ 140°F)
Working: -30°C ~ 60°C (-22°F ~ 140°F)

Relative Humidity Less than 90%, non-condensing

Ingress Protection IP66
Impact Resistance IK10
Regulatory
Emissions FCC PART 15B, EN 55032, EN61000-6-3
Immunity EN 50130-4
Safety UL 62368-1, EN 62368-1
ROHS EN 50581
Table 5-16. Indoor Cameras Day Night 5 MPx

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 238

[Link] LED LCD Monitor 32 Inch
LED Backlit IPS Monitor is a 16:10 LED-based display with a breadth of new features and an LED backlight
in a design

[Link] Hard Disk 6 TB

Hard discs to be used in the recording unit shall be resistant to vibration and propagation vibration. The
hard drives to be used in the recording unit shall have high-speed data writing and random-access time
drives. The properties of 6 TB hard disk shall be following below:

• Guarantee Period: 24 months Size: 3,5”

• Capacity: 6 TB;
• HDD Rate of Turn: 7200 Rpm;
• Cache Memory: 64 M;
• Usage Area: Pc – DVR – NVR;
• Link Properties: SATA 3.0.

5.2.12 EMERGENCY VOICE ALARM AND COMMUNCATION SYSTEM

The sound diffusion system will be used to give information to the personal in case of emergencies and
special occasions.

Emergency voice alarm and public address system will contain:

• RACK 19 "42U, with dim.800x800x2100mm, for the installation of all equipment and components
of the Audio system;
• Central control unit of the Audio system, certified according to the standard EN 54-16 and EN
60849, 4 zones and with the possibility of expansion, 6 audio inputs, 6 audio outputs, with the
possibility of network communication with the fire alarm control panel or expansion (according to
the system of selected);
• Microphone for public announcement, certified according to the standard EN 54-16 and EN 60849,
with the possibility of controlling all areas (6 areas), at the reception (according to the selected
system);
• Recessed metallic loudspeaker, with fire dome case, completed with transformer 100V, 6W,
certified according to standard EN54-16 (acc. to the selected system);
• End of line device for audio zone line control, according to the certification of standard EN 54-16
and EN 54-4;
• Power module for all elements of the public voice and audio notification system, together with the
battery pack, Complete with all accessories according to the certification of standard EN 54-16 and
EN 54-4.

All equipment will be assembled in a RACK Audio, installed in the electrical room on the ground floor, next
to the informatic cabinet. The emergency evacuation and public address system shall be installed inside,
on the corridors, as well as at the outside of the the dormitory building. This system will be used for
emergency notification in the dormitory premises, as well as for various notifications.

The main purpose is for public announcements, scheduled events, background music and most
importantly, for directing people to safety in the event of an emergency. Voice alarm system is expected
to function at all times, throughout entire premises and in conjunction with other control and indicating
equipment. The guarantee of correct operation begins with the inclusion of relevant and required elements
during a product’s development and production processes. During these processes, compliance with the
international standard EN54 has recently become very important for voice alarm equipment.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 239

Description of Voice Alarm System

Voice Alarm is divided into separated areas (6 zones), which means that live messages or pre-recorded
messages can be spoken to (broadcast to) individually, several at once or as an all call. Each zone at End of
Line (optional) is designed to monitor Loudspeaker line, means that in any anomaly case the Controller will
notify Faulty of line and maintains the Voice Alarm System to be fully functional.

Emergency messages can be stored on the system and broadcast by automatic or manual. Voice Alarm
Controller will be integrated with Fire Alarm panel; the Fire Alarm panel activates the voice alarm system
pre-recorded/live messages. A voice alarm system has various inputs, which must be prioritized. This
ensures the most important input (Fireman’s panel) overrides any other.

Figure 5-17 – EVAC system principal diagram

Typical priorities are as follows:

[Link] Main Voice Alarm Controller

The Voice Alarm Controller unit is the heart of the Voice Alarm System. It is the basis of the Voice Alarm
System and has all the essential functionality for compliance with the EN 54-16 and EN 60849 standards,
including full system supervision, loudspeaker line impedance supervision, a supervised emergency
microphone on the front panel and a supervised message manager. Voice controller will be fully configured
via Voice Alarm System Configuration, means every input/output, call station (selectable zone) will be
configured as required.

The controller has two BGM source inputs and a mic/ line input with configurable priority, speech filter,
phantom power, and selectable VOX activation. A total of 16 priority levels can be specified for microphone,
call stations and trigger inputs for optimum system flexibility.

The powerful 240 W output section has six transformer-isolated 100 V constant-voltage outputs for driving
100 V loudspeakers in six separate zones. The 100 V-technique reduces line losses on longer distances and
provides easy parallel connection of multiple loudspeakers. All zones may be individually selected from the
front panel, and the BGM output level in each zone can be individually set in six steps.

The amplifier output is also available as a separate output on 100 V and 70 V. A separate 100 V call-only
output provides addressing for an area where BGM is not required but where priority announcements are.
Six configurable volume-override output contacts are available for overriding local volume controls during
priority calls. Both four-wire and three-wire schemes are supported. An LED meter monitors the output. Up
to 255 messages can be stored in the internal 16 MB flash ROM, without a need for battery backup.

Each message can have any length within the total available capacity. Messages and configurations are
uploaded from a PC via USB 2 into the memory, after which the unit operates without a PC connection. The
standard WAV-format is used for the messages, and sample rates of 8 kHz up to 24 kHz with 16-bit word
length (linear PCM) are supported. This gives up to 17 minutes of recording time with CD‑quality
signal‑to‑noise ratio.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 240

The unit has 12 contact trigger inputs for business and emergency (EMG) calls. Each can be configured for
a message consisting of a sequence of up to eight wave files. In this way some wave files may be used in
various combinations with other messages, optimizing flexibility and the amount of storage space used.
Multiple messages can be merged to form one integrated message. A zone selection, together with this
sequence can be configured for each trigger input.

Certifications and approvals

• Safety: according to t EN 60065;

• Immunity: according to EN 50130‑4;
• Emission: according to EN 55103-1;
• Emergency: according to t EN 54-16.

Controls and indicators

Front

• LED power meter;

• 13 system fault LEDs;
• Two fault state buttons;
• Two emergency state buttons;
• Six EMG zone status LED pairs;
• Six EMG zone select buttons;
• Six BGM zone select LEDs;
• Six BGM zone select buttons;
• Six BGM zone volume control knobs;
• Two BGM source status LEDs;
• Three knobs for BGM volume, treble, and bass levels;
• All-call button;
• Indicator test button;
• EMG state button;
• Alert message button.

Back

• Three service settings DIP switches;

• Calibration switch;
• Four system configuration DIP switches;
• Main’s voltage selector;
• Power switch;
• Power cord socket;
• Mic/line level switch;
• Three DIP switches for VOX, speech, phantom power;
• Microphone volume control knob;
• Digital message volume control screw;
• Monitoring speaker volume control knob.

Interconnections

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 241

Front

• Microphone socket.

Back

• 12 loudspeaker outputs;
• External amplifier input;
• Amplifier output (on 100 V);
• Backup power input;
• Call output;
• Six volume override outputs;
• Three status outputs;
• 12 trigger inputs;
• 24 VDC output;
• Two call station connectors (redundant);
• USB 2 connector;
• Two DE-9 connectors (reserved);
• External amplifier output;
• Line output connectors;
• Two BGM inputs;
• PC call station input (reserved);
• Two RC station connectors (redundant).

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL S/N (flat at min volume/ >75 dB
Mains power supply muted)
Voltage 230/115VAC, +15%, Headroom >25 dB
50/60Hz
Current inrush 8A Trigger Inputs 12 x (6 EMG, 6 business)
Max power consumption 600 VA Connectors MC1,5 / 14-ST-3,5
Battery power supply Activation Programmable
Voltage 230/115VAC, +15%, Supervision On EMG inputs,
50/60Hz programmable
Current inrush 14 A Supervision method Series / parallel resistor
Performance 100 V INPUT
Output power 240 W / 360 W Connector MSTB 2,5 /16-ST
(rms/maximum)
Power reduction on -1 dB Power handling 1000 W
backup power capacity
Frequency response 60 Hz to 18 kHz (+1/- Tape output 1x
3 dB at -10 dB ref.
rated output)

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 242

 Distortion <1% at rated output Connector Cinch, 2 x mono
power, 1 kHz
Bass control -8/+8 dB at 100 Hz Nominal level 350 mV
Treble control -8/+8 dB at 100 Hz Impedance <1 kohm
Treble control -8/+8 dB at 10 kHz LOUDSPEAKER OUTPUTS
Mic/line input 1x Connectors MSTB 2,5 /16-ST,
floating
Connector XLR, 6.3 mm jack MSTB 2,5 /16-ST, 700 W rated per zone
floating
Sensitivity 1 mV (mic), 1 V (line) Volume override types 3-wire, 4-wire (24 V), 4-
wire failsafe
Impedance >1 kohm (mic); >5 BGM zone output 70 / 50 /35 /25 / 18 / 13
kohm (line) Attenuation V for0 / -3 / -6 / -9 / -12
/ -15 dB, 120 / 60 / 30 /
15 / 8 /4 W
S/N (flat at max volume) >63 dB (mic); >70 dB OUTPUT CONTACTS
(line)
S/N (flat at min >75 dB Connector Type MC 1,5/14-ST-3,5
volume/muted)
CMRR >40 dB (50 Hz - 20 Rating 100 V, 2A, voltage free
kHz)
Headroom >25 dB Emergency active relay NO / COM / NC
Speech filter -3 dB at 315 Hz, Call active relay NO / COM / NC
high-pass, 6 dB/oct
Phantom power supply 12 V (mic mode only) Fault relay NO / COM / NC
normally energized
(failsafe)
VOX trigger level -20 dB (100 μV mic / General purpose relays NO / COM
100 mV line) or via
input contact
Limiter Automatic POWER CONSUMPTION
Line input (BGM and PC call Mains operation
station)
Connector Cinch, stereo Max power 550 W
converted to mono,
unbalanced
Sensitivity 200 mV -3dB 440 W
Impedance 22 kohm -6dB 340 W
S/N (flat at max volume) >70 dB Pilot tone* 136 W
Messages Idle 60 W
Data format WAV-file, 16-bit 24 VDC operation
PCM, mono

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 243

 Supported sample rates 24 / 22.05 / 16 / 12 / Max power 14.0 A (336 W)
(fs) 11.025 / 8 kHz
Frequency response -3 dB 12.5 A (300 W)
at fs=24kHz 100Hz to 11 kHz -6 dB 9.5 A (228 W)
(+1/-3 dB)
at fs=22.05kHz 100Hz to 10 kHz Pilot tone* 2.5 A (60 W)
(+1/-3 dB)
at fs=16kHz 100Hz to7.3 kHz Idle 0.9 A (22 W)
(+1/-3 dB)
at fs=12kHz 100Hz to 5.5 kHz MECHANICAL
(+1/-3dB)
at fs=11.025kHz 100 Hz to 5 kHz (+1/- Dimensions (HxWxD) 144 x 430 x 370 mm
3 dB) (19" wide, 3U high)
at fs=8kHz 100Hz to 3.6kHz Weight Approx. 21.17 kg
(+1/-3 dB)
Distortion Mounting 19”rack
S/N (flat at max volume) >80 dB Colour Charcoal
Memory capacity 16 MB Flash ROM ENVIRONMENTAL
Recording / playback time 16 MB Flash ROM Operating temperature -10ºC to +55ºC (14ºF to
+131ºF)

Recording / playback time 1000 seconds at fs = Storage and transport -40ºC to +70ºC (-40ºF
8 kHz temperature to +158ºF)
333 seconds at fs =
24 kHz
Number of messages 255 max Relative humidity <95%
Supervision Flash ROM Continuous Acoustic noise level of <48 dB SPL at 1 m
checksum control fan
Table 5-17. Technical specification of the Voice Alarm Controller

[Link] 6W metallic ceiling loudspeaker, with built-in 100V transformer

The rectangular metal cabinet emergency loudspeaker delivers professional performance from a robust,
yet aesthetically designed metal enclosure.

FUNCTIONS:

Voice alarm

Voice alarm loudspeakers are specifically designed for use in buildings, where the performance of PA
systems is subject to official regulations. This loudspeaker is designed for voice alarm systems and is
compliant with British Standard BS 5839‑8 and EN 60849.

Protection

The loudspeaker has built‑in protection to ensure that in the event of a fire damage does not cause
failure of the connected circuit. In this way, system integrity is maintained; ensuring loudspeakers in other

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 244

areas can still be used to inform people of the situation.

Connections and safety

The loudspeaker has a ceramic terminal block, thermal fuse, and heat-resistant, high temperature wiring.
The cabinet has a provision for internally mounting the optional line/loudspeaker supervision board.

Certifications and approvals

All loudspeakers are designed to withstand operating at their rated power for 100 hours in accordance
with IEC 268‑5 Power Handling Capacity (PHC) standards. Has also developed the Simulated Acoustical
Feedback Exposure (SAFE) test to demonstrate that the speakers can withstand two times their rated power
for short durations. This ensures extra reliability under extreme conditions, leading to greater customer
satisfaction, longer operating life, and much less chance of failure or performance deterioration.

SAFETY According to EN 60065

Emergency According to BS 5839-B
According to EN 60849, EN 54-24
Water and dust protection According to EN60529 IP32
IP21C verified for EN54-24 by CNBOP
Table 5-18- Certifications and approvals

Installation/configuration notes

The cabinet is designed for both surface and recessed mounting on walls. The back box provides a selection
of mounting holes, even for mounting on U40 and MK installation boxes.

The back box has two knockout holes on the topside for two cable glands (not included) for loop-through
connection. For extra installation convenience, a safety cord from the back box lets the installer temporarily
hang the front grille unit during installation.

The cabinet has a three-way terminal block with screw connections suitable for loop-through wiring
(including earth). Four primary taps on the matching transformer allow selection of nominal full-power,
half-power, quarter power or eighth power radiation (in 3 dB steps).

Octave band sensitivity *

Octave SPL Total octave SPL Total octave SPL
1W/m 1W/m Pmax/m
125 Hz 73.3 - -
250 Hz 90.4 - -
500 Hz 89.0 - -
1000 Hz 86.0 - -
2000 Hz 92.4 - -
4000 Hz 96.6 - -
8000 Hz 89.9
A-weighted - 89.9 96.8

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 245

 Lin-weighted - 90.1 96.0
Octave band opening angles Horizontal vertical
125 Hz 180 180
250 Hz 180 180
500 Hz 180 180
1000 Hz 180 180
2000 Hz 80 80
4000 Hz 56 56
8000 Hz 40 40
Parts included
Quantity Component
1 Cabinet loudspeaker, metal, circular
1 Installation instruction

Electrical
Rated Power (PHC) 6W
Power tapping 6 / 3 / 1.5 / 0.75 W
Sound pressure level at 6 W / 1 W (1 kHz, 1 m) 94 / 86 dB (SPL)
Sound pressure level at 6 W / 1 W (4 kHz, 4 m) 82 / 74 dB (SPL)
Effective frequency range (-10 dB) 160 Hz to 20 kHz
Opening angle at 1 kHz / 4 kHz (-6 dB) 180° / 56°
Rated input voltage 100 70 V 100 V
Rated impedance 6 W 835 Ohm 1667 Ohm
3 W 1667 Ohm 3333 Ohm
1.5 W 3333 Ohm 6667 Ohm
0.75 W 6667 Ohm 13333 Ohm
Connector 3‑pole screw terminal block
* Technical performance data acc. to IEC 60268‑5.
Table 5-19. Octave band sensitivity

[Link] Cabinet loudspeaker 6W metal square

Figure 5-18 – Cabinet loudspeaker 6W metal square

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 246

Certifications and approvals

• Safety: according to t EN 62368-1;

• Emergency: according to EN 54‑24 / BS 5839‑8 / EN 60849.
• Water and dust protection according to IEC 60529, IP21C verified for EN54-24 by CNBOP

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL
Mains power supply
Rated power (PHC) 6W
Power tapping 6W, 3.5W, 1.5W
Sound pressure level at 6W/3W/1W (1kHz,1m) 107 / 94 dB (SPL)
Sound pressure level at 6W/3W/1W (1kHz,4 m) 95 / 82 dB (SPL)
Opening angle at 1 kHz / 4 kHz (-6 dB) 224° / 56°
Effective frequency range (-10 dB) 170 Hz to 20 kHz
Rated voltage 70 V 100 V
Rated impedance 20 W 250 Ohm 500 Ohm
10 W 500 Ohm 1000 Ohm
2.5 W 2000 Ohm 4000 Ohm
1.25 W 4000 Ohm N.A.
MECHANICAL
Dimensions (H x W x D) 175mm x 175mm x 70mm (6.98x6.98x2.76 in)
Weight 1.64 kg (5.7 lb)
Colour White (RAL 9010)
Material Aluminium
Connector Screw terminal block
Cable diameter 6‑12 mm (0.24‑0.47 in)
ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating temperature -25 ºC to +55 ºC (-13 ºF to +131 ºF)
Storage and transport temperature -40 ºC to +70 ºC (-40 ºF to +158 ºF)
Relative humidity <95%
Water/dust protected According to EN 60529 IP66
Table 5-20. Technical specification

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 247

[Link] Sound projector 20W metal unidirectional

Figure 5-19 – Sound projector 20W metal unidirectional

Certifications and approvals

• Safety: according to t EN 60065;

• Emergency: according to EN 54‑24 / BS 5839‑8 / EN 60849.
• Water and dust protection according to IEC 60529, IP 66 IP33C verified for EN54-24 by CNBOP

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL
Mains power supply
Rated power (PHC) 20 W
Power tapping 20 / 10 / 5 / 2.5 W (1.25 W, 70 V only)
Sound pressure level at 20W/1W (1kHz,1m) 107 / 94 dB (SPL)
Sound pressure level at 20 W/1W (1kHz,4 m) 95 / 82 dB (SPL)
Opening angle at 1 kHz / 4 kHz (-6 dB) 224° / 56°
Effective frequency range (-10 dB) 170 Hz to 20 kHz
Rated voltage 70 V 100 V
Rated impedance 20 W 250 Ohm 500 Ohm
10 W 500 Ohm 1000 Ohm
5W 1000 Ohm 2000 Ohm
2.5 W 2000 Ohm 4000 Ohm
1.25 W 4000 Ohm N.A.
MECHANICAL
Dimensions (D x L) 146 x 200 mm (5.7 x 7.9 in)
Weight 2.6 kg (5.7 lb)
Colour White (RAL 9010)
Material Aluminium
Connector Screw terminal block
Cable diameter 6‑12 mm (0.24‑0.47 in)

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 248

 ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating temperature -25 ºC to +55 ºC (-13 ºF to +131 ºF)
Storage and transport temperature -40 ºC to +70 ºC (-40 ºF to +158 ºF)
Relative humidity <95%
Water/dust protected According to EN 60529 IP66
Table 5-21. Sound projector specification

[Link] Power Amplifier 1x480W

Multi-channel power amplifiers

Receive the input from the call station (or other source) (via the controller) and amplifies (broadcasts) it to
the relevant zones. Several amplifiers will be built into a voice alarm rack, with each amplifier broadcasting
to specific zones (circuits) within the building.

• 480 W power amplifier in a 2U high housing;

• EN 54‑16 certified;
• 70 V / 100V and 8ohm outputs;
• Dual inputs with priority switching;
• 100 V input for slave operation on 100 V speaker line.

Certifications and approvals

• Safety: according to t EN 60065;

• Immunity: according to EN 50130‑4;
• Emission: according to EN 55103-1;
• Emergency: according to t EN 54-16.

Controls and indicators

Front

• Meter (LED's for: -20, -6, 0 dB and Power ON);

• Battery operation indicator;
• Overheat indicator.

Back

• Level control input 1;

• Level control input 2;
• Power button;
• Main switch.

Interconnections

Back

• Priority line input 1 (XLR/balanced);

• Line loop‑through 1 (XLR/balanced);
• Program line input 2 (XLR/balanced);

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 249

 • Line loop‑through 2 (XLR/balanced);
• Priority controlled loudspeaker output terminals;
• 24 VDC power supply terminal;
• Three loudspeaker direct output terminals;
• Two 100 V slave input terminals;
• Input 2 enable control terminal;
• Input 1 priority control terminal;
• Earth connection screw;
• Main’s socket.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL
Mains power supply
Voltage 230 VAC, ±10%, 50/60 Hz
Inrush current 19 A
Max power consumption 2200 VA
Battery power supply
Voltage 24 VDC +15% / -15%
Current max 30 A
Performance
Output power (rms/maximum) 480 / 720 W
Power reduction on backup power -1 dB
Frequency response 50 Hz to 20 kHz (+1 / ‑3 dB at ‑10 dB
ref. rated output)
Distortion <1% at rated output power, 1 kHz
S/N (flat at max volume) >90 dB
Line inputs 2x
Connector 3‑pin XLR, balanced
Sensitivity 1V
Impedance 20 kohm
CMRR >25 dB (50 Hz to 20 kHz)
Gain 40 dB
100 V input
Connector Screw, unbalanced
Sensitivity 100 V
Impedance 330 kohm
Line loop-through output 2x
Connector 3‑pin XLR

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 250

 Sensitivity 1V
Impedance Direct connection to line input
Loudspeaker outputs 3x
Connector Screw, floating
Direct output 100 V, 70 V, 8 ohm
Priority only (from input 1) 100 V or 70 V internally selectable
Music (non-priority) only 100 V or 70 V internally selectable
POWER CONSUMPTION
Main’s operation
Max power 990 W
-3dB 715 W
-6dB 510 W
Pilot tone 110 W
Idle 25 W
24 V operation
Max power 32 A (770 W)
-3 dB 26 A (625 W)
-6 dB 18 A (430 W)
Pilot tone 3.8 A (91 W)
Idle 0.7 A (17 W)
MECHANICAL
Dimensions (H x W x D) 145 x 430 x 370 mm (19" wide, 3U high)
Weight Approx. 25 kg
Mounting Standalone, 19” rack
Colour Charcoal
ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating temperature -10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to +131 ºF)
Storage and transport temperature -40 ºC to +70 ºC (-40 ºF to +158 ºF)
Relative humidity <95%
Acoustic noise level of fan <48 dB SPL at 1 m (max output)
Table 5-22. Power Amplifier specification

[Link] Six zone Call Station

The call station can make calls to selected zones (one to six and all-call) in a public address system built
with Call station Voice Alarm System. Can also be used as a fire or call paging. During an emergency,
assumes emergency control mode and is given a higher priority.

Controls and indicators

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 251

 • Four status LEDs;
• PTT-key;
• PTT status LED;
• Six zone selection keys
• Six zone selection LEDs;
• All call key;
• Eight DIP switches;
• Rotary volume control.

Interconnections

• Two RJ45 jacks;

• 24 VDC input;
• Keypad connector.

Certifications and approvals

• Safety: according to EN 60065;

• Immunity: according to EN 55103-2;
• Emission: according to EN 55103-1;
• CE Declaration of Conformity.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL
Power supply
Voltage 24 VDC
Current consumption <30 mA (plus <15 mA per keypad)
Performance
Nominal sensitivity 85 dB SPL (gain present 0 dB)
Nominal output level 700 mV
Input sound level (max) 110 dB SPL
Gain present +6 / 0 / -15 dB
Limiter threshold 2V
Compression ratio limiter 1:20
Distortion <0.6% (maximum input)

Input noise level (equiv.) 25 dB SPLA

Frequency response 100 Hz to 16 kHz
Speech filter -3dB at 315 Hz, high-pass, 6 dB/oct
Output impedance 200 ohm
SELECTION
Chimes Any wave file
Priorities 7

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 252

 MECHANICAL
Dimensions 40 x 100 x 235 mm (1.57 x 3.97 x 9.25 in)
Weight 1 kg
Colour Charcoal with silver
Mounting Standalone
Stem length with mic 390 mm
Cable length 5m
ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating temperature -10 ºC to +45 ºC (14 ºF to +113 ºF)
Storage and transport temperature -40 ºC to +70 ºC (-40 ºF to +158 ºF)
Relative humidity <95%
Table 5-23. Call Station

[Link] Power supply unit for EVAC system, EN 54-4 certified

General Features

• 12 A battery charger;
• 6x 40 A, 3x 5 A outputs;
• 150 A back-up current;
• Fully supervised, EN 54-4 certified;
• Under-voltage and over-voltage protection.

Power supply unit with battery chargers are designed for public address and emergency sound systems, to
assure that the system batteries are always charged. They are rack mountable, the unit charges lead-acid
batteries and simultaneously provide 24 V. These chargers must be fully compliant and certified according
to EN 54-4. The battery chargers must be premium quality, intelligent, microprocessor-controlled devices.

The maximum charger current is 12 A for charging the battery. The maximum battery capacity, according
to EN 54-4, is therefore 225 Ah, minimum size is 86Ah. The maximum output of the back-up power system
is 150 A. The charger must have an input voltage range of 195 V to 264 V, and a power factor corrector.
The charger features automatic shutoff when the battery voltage is too low, to prevent battery damage. It
also features over-voltage protection, protection against wrong battery polarity and short-circuit
protection.

The outputs must be protected by fuses. The power supply takes a resistance measurement of the battery
including connections every 4 hours. The charger comes with a temperature sensor that is used to adjust
the charging voltages. The charger must have additional 24 V auxiliary outputs, to supply power to
equipment that needs 24 V as primary power.

The current capacity of these outputs is 5 A per output. The charger has relay outputs to signal a mains
fault, battery fault and charger output voltage fault.

Controls and indicators

• Main’s status LED;

• Battery status LED;
• Output voltage fault LED;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 253

Certifications and approvals

• Safety: according to EN 60950-1;

• Immunity: according to EN 55130-1/2;
• Emission: according to EN 55103-4;
• EMC: EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3, EN 61000-6-4, EN 55022 cl. B;
• Evacuation: according to EN 54-4, EN 12101-10 class A, part 10: power supplies.
• CE Declaration of Conformity.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL
Main Power supply
Voltage 195 to 264 VAC, 50 to 60Hz
Input current 2A
Power consumption 380 W maximum
Performance
Voltage min. 21.6 VDC (auto shutdown)
Voltage max. 28.5 VDC
Max. charge current 12 A
Max. system current (Ib) 150 A
Main outputs (6 x)
Voltage 24 or 48 VDC (battery voltage)
Current 40 A
Auxiliary outputs (3 x)
Voltage 24 or 48 VDC (battery voltage)
Current 5A
Fault outputs (3 x)
Voltage 24 or 48 VDC (battery voltage)
Current 5A
Fault outputs (3 x)
Rating 24 V/1 A, 120VAC/500 mA voltage free
Contacts Normally energized (failsafe)
MECHANICAL
Dimensions (H x W x D) 88 x 430 x 260 mm (19" wide, 2U high)
Weight 6 kg
Colour Charcoal with silver
Material Aluminium
Input connections (connect to battery) Screw terminal block

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 254

 Output connections (connect to system) 10 x pluggable screw connector
ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating temperature -5 ºC to +45 ºC (23 ºF to +113 ºF)
Storage and transport temperature -25 ºC to +85 ºC (-13 ºF to +185 ºF)
Relative humidity <95% (operating and storage)
Table 5-24. EVAC system

[Link] Fireman Panel

Fireman’s panel has top priority – overrides all other call station and inputs to the voice evacuation system.
Used by firemen/building control to override emergency broadcasts – either as a zone select or all call. Any
other messages being transmitted to zones will be interrupted when the Fireman’s panel is activated.

Fireman’s panel is a remote control that has specialized buttons and indicators for firemen. The remote
control has no zone selection, as the standard RC has, but large backlit buttons.

It is possible to enter or acknowledge the emergency state and acknowledge and reset the fault state.

Emergency or alert messages can be started, and live calls can be made. An LED meter shows the presence
and level of the calls that are active in the system. The fault indicators show detailed information of a fault
in the system.

Figure 5-20 – Fireman panel, EN 54-16 certified

Certifications and approvals

• Safety: according to EN 60065;

• Immunity: according to EN 50130-4;
• Emission: according to EN 55103-1;
• Emergency: EN 54-16;
• CE Declaration of Conformity.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL
Power supply
Voltage 24 VDC, +20% / -10%
Current typical 100 mA
Current max (indicator test) 250 mA
Priority relay contacts 30 V, 1 A
Emergency relay contacts 30 V, 1 A

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 255

 Technical performance data According to IEC 60268-3
MECHANICAL
Dimensions 134 x 430 x 90 mm (19" wide, 3U high)
Weight 3 kg
Colour Charcoal
Material Aluminium
Connector Screw terminal block
ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating temperature -10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to +131 ºF)
Storage and transport temperature -40 ºC to +70 ºC (-40 ºF to +158 ºF)
Relative humidity <95%
Table 5-25. Fireman Panel

[Link] Music background device

Music background, a source of music which is installed in the voice alarm rack – such as an SD card or
FM/AM radio, RCA input (via the controller). Used to broadcast background music to zones selected. Will
be overridden in the event of an emergency, lowest priority in voice alarm system.

Certifications and approvals

• Safety: according to according to IEC/EN 60065, CCC, C-Tick;

• Immunity: according to EN 55013+A1+A2, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3+A1, 2006/95/CE LVD
Directive, 2004/108/CE EMC, IEC EN 55020+A2+EC;
• CE Declaration of Conformity.

Configuration

• 19” rack-mount unit;

• IR remote control to control all sources;
• Compatible with High-Capacity Secure Digital (SDHC);
• MMC memory cards;
• Flash USB sticks and bus powered hard disk drives (HDD);
• Completed with all connection cables.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL
Main power supply
Voltage 115 - 230 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz
Power supply fuses 230 VAC 0.63 AT / 250 V
Power consumption (typical) 10 W
Power consumption (Max.) 50 VA
FM tuner

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 256

 Distortion <1%
Total harmonic distortion (1 kHz) < 0.8 %
FM range 87.5 ÷ 108 MHz
Frequency response 50 Hz ÷ 12 kHz
Channel separation (1 kHz) ≥ 40 dB
Intermediate rejection ≥ 70 dB
Signal / noise ratio ≥ 50 dB
Intermediate frequency 10.7 MHz
Input sensitivity 6 μV e.m.f. (2 uV)
Automatic tuning sensitivity ≤ 50 μV
Antenna input 75 ohms (coaxial)
Audio output level - 10 dBV
SD / USB audio player
Maximum storage capacity 32 GB
Maximum number of tracks 2000
Frequency response 50 Hz ÷ 20 kHz
Signal / noise ratio ≥ 70 dB
Total harmonic distortion (1 kHz) < 0.1 %
Stereo separation ≥ 60 dB
Audio output level - 10 dBV
Mechanical
Dimensions (H x W x D) 44 x 444 x 250 mm (1.73 x 17.48 x 9.84 in)
Weight 3.6 kg
Colour Charcoal with silver printing
Mounting Stand-alone, 19" rack (19" wide, 1U high)
Environmental
Operating temperature -10 ºC to +45 ºC (14 ºF to +113 ºF)
Storage and transport temperature -40 ºC to +70 ºC (-40 ºF to +158 ºF)
Relative humidity < 90 % (non-condensing)
Table 5-26. Music background device

Note: Voice Alarm Products are EN 54-4, EN 54-16 and EN 54-24 certified.

All components like loudspeakers, central controlling unit, power amplifier, and connection components
will be delivered, mounted, and connected. The sound diffusion system will allow sending live voice
messages to the frequented zones, and to any system’s service room, other than diffuse music or automatic
alarm messages.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 257

[Link] End of line device
General

This end‑of‑line device is a reliable solution for loudspeaker line integrity supervision, which is a
requirement for emergency sound systems. It is connected at the end of a loudspeaker line, after the last
loudspeaker of a series of looped-through loudspeakers.

Certifications and approvals

The end‑of‑line device shall only require a connection with the end of the loudspeaker line to supervise its
integrity. Supervision reliability shall not depend on the number of connected loudspeakers. Supervision
shall be inaudible and not interrupt audio content. The end‑of‑line device shall be certified for EN 54‑16
and ISO 7240‑16, marked for CE and be compliant with the RoHS directive. Warranty shall be three years
minimum.

• Safety: according to according to IEC/EN 60065;

• Self-extinguishing: according to acc. to UL 94 V0;
• CE Declaration of Conformity and CPR.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL
Control
Pilot tone detection
 Frequency 25.5 kHz
 Level 1.5 - 3 VRMS
Amplifier load < 100 mW
Control
Loudspeaker cable
 Maximum length 1000 m
 Maximum capacitance 80 nF
 Operating temperature -20 to +50 °C (-4 to 122 °F)
Maximum input voltage 100 VRMS
Fault detection Line shorted, line interrupted
Fault reporting By amplifier
Reliability
MTBF 5.000.000 h
ENVIRONMENTAL
Climatic conditions
Temperature
 Operating -5 to +50 °C(23 to 122 °F)
 Storage and transport -30 to +70 °C(-22 to 158 °F)
Humidity (non-condensing) 5 to 95 %
Air pressure (operating) 560 to 1070 hPa

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 258

 Altitude (operating) -500 to +5000 m (-1640 to 16404 ft)
Climatic conditions
Vibration (operating)
Amplitude < 0.7 mm
Acceleration <2G
Bump (transport) < 10 G
MECHANICAL
Enclosure
Dimensions (WxHxD)
 Board shape 78 x 60 x 16 mm
 Box shape 45 x 60 x 18 mm
Ingress protection IP30
Case
 Material Plastic
 Color RAL3000
Weight 25 g
Table 5-27. End of line device

[Link] Cable for EVAC system FTE4OM1, 450/750V, EVC PH120

Technical characteristics

• Core: Stranded flexible bare copper conductor, class 5;

• Insulation: Cross-linked polyethylene compound, E4 type;
• Fire resistant barrier: Mica/glass tape;
• Stranding: Cores twisted/stranded in concentric layers;
• Outer sheath: LSZH thermoplastic compound, M1 type;
• Colours: Red + Black;
• Outer sheath colour: Purple.

Standards

• CEI 20-29 IEC 60228;

• CEI 20-11 EN 50363;
• CEI 20-35 IEC 60332-1-2;
• CEI EN 60332-3-25 Cat. D IEC 60332-3-25 C.A.D;
• CEI 20-37 IEC 60754 IEC 61034 CEI 20-45 P.Q.A;
• CEI 20-105, CEI UNEL 36762;
• CEI 20-36/4-0 EN 50200 (Test 120 min. PH120);
• UNI 9795:2013.

Figure 5-21 – EVAC Cable PH120

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 259

Electrical Characteristics

• Cores operating voltage: 450/750V

• Outer sheath operating voltage: 450/750V
• Testing voltage: 2500 V.

Application

LSZH fire resistant cable (PH120) for voice evacuation systems, according to CEI 20-105 and UNI 9795:2013.

Temperature

• Minimum working temperature: -40°C;

• Maximum working temperature: +90°C;
• Maximum short circuit temperature: +250°C.

Formation Outer Ø Weight Max electrical resistance at 20°C

2
[n x mm ] [mm] [kg/km] [ohm/km]
2 x 1.50 8.4 110 13.30
2 x 2.50 9.6 150 7.98
Table 5-28. Specification of Cable for EVAC system

5.2.13 UPS, UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

References:

• Standard: Safety: IEC 62040-1

• EMC standard: IEC 62040-2
• Manufacturer: ISO 9001

a) General

The UPS will supply fire detection system, telephone switchboard, IT switches, Network Video Recorder,
Sound Diffusion System access control , the entire computer sockets and the emergency lighting system.

The UPS consists of a rectifier with a constant voltage / constant current curve according to IEC 62040, a
Battery-System (NiCd-Type life-span at least 10 years) and an inverter with electronic power switch (EPS)
within the same switchgear cabinet.

The UPS must provide indications and potential free changeover contacts for all important information’s.

The UPS has to be provided to enable the uninterrupted changeover to the mains in case of an inverter
failure and the automatic return when the inverter is operating with its rated voltage again.

UPS is equipped with bypass switch which, in specific cases to exclude manually from the UPS device
network connection.

The UPS shall be a single-UPS unit, operating in double-conversion mode, made up of the following
components, described in detail in this specification: ( applicable Standard IE

• rectifier;
• battery charger;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 260

 • inverter;
• battery;
• static bypass (via a static switch);
• manual maintenance bypass;
• user and communications interface;
• battery management system;
• rack cabinet for battery installation.

The UPS shall ensure continuity of electric power to the load within the specified tolerances, without
interruption upon failure or deterioration of the normal AC source (utility power) for a maximum protection
time determined by the capacity of the backup batteries installed. For the uninterrupted power supply for
the building, a 15kVA UPS, with 30 min autonomy, floor standing is foreseen.

[Link] Technical features of UPS 15kVA

Below are the technical specifications for UPS 15kVA, equipment is completed with batteries and must fulfil
the following features or better (minimum requirements):

ELECTRICAL DATA SHEET OF UPS 15kVA

UPS Rating 15 kVA
Input Specifications
Input Voltage 380V/400V/415V
Nominal Input CURRENT (A) 24/23/22
Maximum Input Current (A) 29/28/26
Input Current Limitation (A) 33/31/30
Input Frequency 45-65 Hz
Input Wiring 3P+N+PE
Input THDI <3%@ 10Kva, <4%@ 15-40 kVa
Bypass Specifications
Bypass Voltage 380V/400V/415V
Minimum Bypass Voltage 304/320/332
Maximum Bypass Voltage 437/460/477
Nominal Bypass Current (A) 23/22/21
Bypass Frequency 50/60Hz
Bypass Wiring 3P+N+PE
Output Specifications
Output Voltage 380V/400V/415V
Nominal Output Current (A) 23/22/21
Output Frequency 50/60Hz
Output Wiring 3P+N+PE
Output THDU <3%@ 100% Linear Load, <5.5%@ 100% Non-
Linear Load

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 261

Battery Specifications
Charging Power Programmable from 1% TO 20% of ups
Capacity. Default IS 10%
Maximum Charging Power (W) 2000 3000
Nominal Battery Voltage (VDC) +/-240
Nominal Float Voltage (VDC) +/-270
End of Discharge Voltage (Full Load) (VDC) +/-198
Battery Current at Full Load and Nominal Battery 33
Voltage (A)
Battery Current at Full load and Minimum Battery 40
Voltage (A)
Ripple Current <5% C10
Maximum Short Circuit Withstand Icc=10kA
Recommended Cable Sizes
Input Cable Size (mm2) 6
Bypass Cable Size (mm2) 6
Output Cable Size (mm2) 6
Battery Input Cable Size (mm2) 8
PE Cable Size (mm2) 6
Table 5-29. UPS specifications – 15kVA

[Link] Technical features of UPS 10kVA

Below are the technical specifications for UPS 15kVA, equipment is completed with batteries and must fulfil
the following features or better (minimum requirements):

ELECTRICAL DATA SHEET OF UPS 10kVA

UPS Rating 10 kVA
Input Specifications
Input Voltage 380V/400V/415V
Nominal Input CURRENT (A) 16/15/15
Maximum Input Current (A) 19/18/18
Input Current Limitation (A) 22/20/22
Input Frequency 45-65 Hz
Input Wiring 3P+N+PE
Input THDI <3%@ 10Kva, <4%@ 15-40 kVA
Bypass Specifications
Bypass Voltage 380V/400V/415V
Minimum Bypass Voltage 304/320/332

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 262

Maximum Bypass Voltage 437/460/477
Nominal Bypass Current (A) 15/14/14
Bypass Frequency 50/60Hz
Bypass Wiring 3P+N+PE
Output Specifications
Output Voltage 380V/400V/415V
Nominal Output Current (A) 15/14/14
Output Frequency 50/60Hz
Output Wiring 3P+N+PE
Output THDU <3%@ 100% Linear Load, <5.5%@ 100% Non-
Linear Load
Battery Specifications
Charging Power Programmable from 1% TO 20% of ups
Capacity. Default IS 10%
Maximum Charging Power (W) 2000 3000
Nominal Battery Voltage (VDC) +/-240
Nominal Float Voltage (VDC) +/-270
End of Discharge Voltage (Full Load) (VDC) +/-198
Battery Current at Full Load and Nominal Battery 22
Voltage (A)
Battery Current at Full load and Minimum Battery 27
Voltage (A)
Ripple Current <5% C10
Maximum Short Circuit Withstand Icc=10kA
Recommended Cable Sizes
Input Cable Size (mm2) 6
Bypass Cable Size (mm2) 6
Output Cable Size (mm2) 6
Battery Input Cable Size (mm2) 8
PE Cable Size (mm2) 6
Table 5-30. UPS specifications – 10kVA

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 263

5.3 Specification for Photovoltaic System

5.3.1 Traditional PV solar modules 450Wp (Minimum Requirements)

Electric Characteristics:

• Nominal Output (Pmax): 450W;

• Sorting Tolerance: 0/+5W;
• Voltage at Pmax (Vmp): 42.17 V;
• Current at Pmax (Imp): 10.67 A;
• Open Circuit Voltage (Voc): 49.93 V;
• Short Circuit Current (Isc): 11.49 V;
• Maximum System Voltage: 1500 V;
• Maximum Series Fuse Rating: 20 A;
• Module Efficiency: 20.70 %;
• Protection class against electric shock: Class II;

Mechanical Characteristics:

• Solar Cells: 144, 2x(6x12) M6 monocrystalline.

• Solar Cells Size: 166x83 mm / 6.54x3.27”;
• Front Cover: 3.2 mm/0.13” thick, low iron temp glass.
• Back Cover: TPT (Tedlar-PET-Tedlar);
• Encapsulant: EVA (Ethylene vinyl acetate);
• Frame: Anodized aluminium alloy, double wall;
• Frame finishing: Silver;
• Back sheet finishing: White;
• Diodes: 3 Bypass diodes serviceable;
• Junction Box: IP67 rated;
• Connector: MC4 or compatible connector;
• Cables Length: 1300 mm / 51.18”;
• Cables Section: 4.0 mm² / 0,006 in²;
• Dimensions: 2094x1038x40 mm / 82.44x40.87x1.57”;
• Weight: 23.6 Kg / 52.03 lbs;
• Max Load (Test Load) – SF: 5400 Pa - 1.5.

Temperature Characteristics:

• NMOT: 45±2 °C;

• Temperature Coefficient of Pmax -0.37 %/°C;
• Temperature Coefficient of Voc: - 0.28 %/°C;
• Temperature Coefficient of Isc: 0.042 %/°C;
• Temperature of operating: -40 °C ~ +85°C.
Certification:

• Fire Resistance Rating: Class of reaction to fire 1 (UNI 9177);

• PID free: IEC TS 62804-1:2015;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 264

 • Salt mist: IEC 61701:2011;
• Ammonia: IEC 62716:2013.

Figure 5-22 – PV module 450Wp

Figure 5-23 – PV module 450Wp dimensions

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 265

 Figure 5-24 – PV module 450Wp voltage characteristics

5.3.2 Solar Inverter DC/AC 20kW

• True three-phase bridge topology for DC/AC output converter;
• The HF isolation allows positive or negative ground configuration;
• The unit is free of electrolytic capacitors, leading to a longer product lifetime;
• Night wakes up button to access energy harvesting data and error log;
• Integrated DC disconnect switch in compliance with international Standards;
• Natural convection cooling for maximum reliability;
• Outdoor enclosure for unrestricted use under any environmental conditions (IP65);
• RS-485 communication interface (for connection to laptop or data logger).

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS FOR 20 kW DC/AC THREE PHASE INVERTER

(Minimum Requirements)
INPUT DC SIDE
Maximum DC Power (Module STC) 36000 Wp STC
DC rated power 20440 W
Transformer-less, Ungrounded Yes
Maximum Input Voltage 1000 V DC
MPP voltage range / rated input voltage 320 V to 800 V / 600 V
Min. input voltage / start input voltage 150 V / 188 VDC

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 266

 Max. input current input A / input B 33 A DC
Max. DC short-circuit current input A/input B 43 A / 43 A
Reverse-Polarity Protection Yes
Number of independent MPPT inputs 2
Number of strings per MPP input 3
OUTPUT AC SIDE
Rated AC Power Output 20 kVA
AC Output Voltage - Line to Line / Line to Neutral (Nominal) 380 / 220; 400 / 230 V AC
AC Output Voltage - Line to Neutral Range 180 V to 280 V
AC Frequency 50 Hz / 44 Hz to 55 Hz
Rated power frequency / rated grid voltage 50 Hz / 230 V
Max. output current / Rated output current 36.2 A / 36.2 A
Maximum Inverter Efficiency 98.4 %
European Weighted Efficiency 98.0 %
THD < 3%
Grids Supported - Three Phase 3-Phase / N / PE
Utility Monitoring, Islanding Protection, Yes
Configurable Power Factor, Country
Configurable Thresholds
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
DC connection / AC connection RS485, Ethernet, Zigbee (optional),
Wi-Fi (optional), Built-in GSM
Smart Energy Management Export Limitation, Home Energy
Management
DC SAFETY UNIT
2-pole Disconnection 1000V / 40A
DC Surge Protection Type II, field replaceable
Compliance UTE-C15-712-1
DC surge arrester (type 2) –Usually ordered separately from the same manufacturer
PROTECTION DEVICES INCORPORATED WITHIN INVERTER
DC-side disconnection device Yes
Ground fault monitoring Yes
Grid monitoring Yes
DC reverse polarity protection Yes
AC short-circuit current capability Yes
All-pole sensitive residual-current monitoring unit Yes
Online monitoring Yes

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 267

 Protection class (according to IEC 62109-1) / overvoltage I / AC: III; DC: II
category
INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION
AC Output Gland Diameter / Wire Cross Section 18-25mm /
Solid wire 2.5-16mm2,
Stranded wire 2.5-10mm2
DC Input 3 MC4 pairs
DC Input with Safety Unit Gland diameter 5-10mm, Wire
cross section 0.5-13.5mm2
ENVIRONMENTAL
Ambient temperature range -25 - +60 oC
Climatic category (according to IEC 60721-3-4) 4K4H
Maximum permissible value for relative humidity (non- 100%
condensing)
Noise emission 51 dB(A)
Maximum operating altitude without derating 2000 m / 6560 ft
MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS:
Environmental protection rating IP 65 - Outdoor and Indoor
Cooling Fan (user replaceable)
Dimension (H x W x D) 661 x 682 x 264 mm
Weight / with Safety Unit 61 kg
Self-consumption (at night) 1W
Mounting system Wall and Bracket Provided
Safety
Isolation level Transformer less
Marking CE (50 Hz only)
Warranty Minimum 5 years
STANDARD COMPLIANCE
Safety IEC-62103 (EN50178), IEC-62109,
AS3100
Grid Connection Standards VDE-AR-N-4105, G59/3, AS-
4777,EN 50438 , CEI-021,VDE
0126-1-1, CEI-016, BDEW
RoHS IEC61000-6-2, IEC61000-6-3,
IEC61000-3-11, IEC61000-3-12
Table 5-31. Technical Characteristics for 20 kW DC/AC Three Phase Inverter

5.3.3 Solar Inverter DC/AC 25kW

• True three-phase bridge topology for DC/AC output converter;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 268

 • The HF isolation allows positive or negative ground configuration;
• The unit is free of electrolytic capacitors, leading to a longer product lifetime;
• Night wakes up button to access energy harvesting data and error log;
• Integrated DC disconnect switch in compliance with international Standards;
• Natural convection cooling for maximum reliability;
• Outdoor enclosure for unrestricted use under any environmental conditions (IP65);
• RS-485 communication interface (for connection to laptop or data logger).

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS FOR 25 KW DC/AC THREE PHASE INVERTER

(Minimum Requirements)
INPUT DC SIDE
Maximum DC Power (Module STC) 45000 Wp STC
DC rated power 25550 W
Transformer-less, Ungrounded Yes
Maximum Input Voltage 1000 V DC
MPP voltage range / rated input voltage 390 V to 800 V / 600 V
Min. input voltage / start input voltage 150 V / 188 VDC
Max. input current input A / input B 33 A DC
Max. DC short-circuit current input A/input B 43 A / 43 A
Reverse-Polarity Protection Yes
Number of independent MPPT inputs 2
Number of strings per MPP input 3
OUTPUT AC SIDE
Rated AC Power Output 25 kVA
AC Output Voltage - Line to Line / Line to Neutral (Nominal) 380 / 220; 400 / 230 V AC
AC Output Voltage - Line to Neutral Range 180 V to 280 V
AC Frequency 50 Hz / 44 Hz to 55 Hz
Rated power frequency / rated grid voltage 50 Hz / 230 V
Max. output current / Rated output current 36.2 A / 36.2 A
Maximum Inverter Efficiency 98.3 %
European Weighted Efficiency 98.1 %
THD < 3%
Grids Supported - Three Phase 3-Phase / N / PE
Utility Monitoring, Islanding Protection, Yes
Configurable Power Factor, Country
Configurable Thresholds
ADDITIONAL FEATURES

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 269

 DC connection / AC connection RS485, Ethernet, Zigbee (optional),
Wi-Fi (optional), Built-in GSM
Smart Energy Management Export Limitation, Home Energy
Management
DC SAFETY UNIT
2-pole Disconnection 1000V / 40A
DC Surge Protection Type II, field replaceable
Compliance UTE-C15-712-1
DC surge arrester (type 2) –Usually ordered separately from the same manufacturer
PROTECTION DEVICES INCORPORATED WITHIN INVERTER
DC-side disconnection device Yes
Ground fault monitoring Yes
Grid monitoring Yes
DC reverse polarity protection Yes
AC short-circuit current capability Yes
All-pole sensitive residual-current monitoring unit Yes
Online monitoring Yes
Protection class (according to IEC 62109-1) / overvoltage I / AC: III; DC: II
category
INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION
AC Output Gland Diameter / Wire Cross Section 18-25mm /
Solid wire 2.5-16mm2,
Stranded wire 2.5-10mm2
DC Input 3 MC4 pairs
DC Input with Safety Unit Gland diameter 5-10mm, Wire
cross section 0.5-13.5mm2
ENVIRONMENTAL
Ambient temperature range -25 - +60 oC
Climatic category (according to IEC 60721-3-4) 4K4H
Maximum permissible value for relative humidity (non- 100%
condensing)
Noise emission 51 dB(A)
Maximum operating altitude without derating 2000 m / 6560 ft
MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS:
Environmental protection rating IP 65 - Outdoor and Indoor
Cooling Fan (user replaceable)
Dimension (H x W x D) 661 x 682 x 264 mm
Weight / with Safety Unit 61 kg

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 270

 Self-consumption (at night) 1W
Mounting system Wall and Bracket Provided
Safety
Isolation level Transformer less
Marking CE (50 Hz only)
Warranty Minimum 5 years
STANDARD COMPLIANCE
Safety IEC-62103 (EN50178), IEC-62109,
AS3100
Grid Connection Standards VDE-AR-N-4105, G59/3, AS-
4777,EN 50438 , CEI-021,VDE
0126-1-1, CEI-016, BDEW
RoHS IEC61000-6-2, IEC61000-6-3,
IEC61000-3-11, IEC61000-3-12
Table 5-32. Technical Characteristics for 25 kW DC/AC Three Phase Inverter

5.3.4 Solar Inverter DC/AC 50kW

• True three-phase bridge topology for DC/AC output converter;
• The HF isolation allows positive or negative ground configuration;
• The unit is free of electrolytic capacitors, leading to a longer product lifetime;
• Night wakes up button to access energy harvesting data and error log;
• Integrated DC disconnect switch in compliance with international Standards;
• Natural convection cooling for maximum reliability;
• Outdoor enclosure for unrestricted use under any environmental conditions (IP65);
• RS-485 communication interface (for connection to laptop or data logger).

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS FOR 50 KW DC/AC THREE PHASE INVERTER

(Minimum Requirements)
INPUT SIDE
Maximum DC Power (Module STC) 75000 Wp STC
DC rated power 50000 W
Transformer-less, Ungrounded Yes
Maximum Input Voltage 1000 V DC
MPP voltage range / rated input voltage 500 V to 800 V / 670 V
Min. input voltage / start input voltage 150 V / 188 VDC
Max. input current input A / input B 120 A DC
Max. DC short-circuit current input A/input B 30 A / 30 A
Reverse-Polarity Protection Yes
Number of independent MPPT inputs 6
Number of strings per MPP input 2

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 271

 Ground-Fault Isolation Detection 350kΩ Sensitivity
OUTPUT SIDE
Rated AC Power Output 50 kVA
AC Output Voltage - Line to Line / Line to Neutral (Nominal) 380 / 220; 400 / 230
AC Output Voltage - Line to Neutral Range 202 V to 305 V
AC Frequency 50 Hz / 44 Hz to 55 Hz
Rated power frequency / rated grid voltage 50 Hz / 230 V
Max. output current / Rated output current 72.5 A / 72.5 A
Maximum Inverter Efficiency 98.1 %
European Weighted Efficiency 97.8 %
THD < 3%
Grids Supported - Three Phase 3-Phase / N / PE (WYE with Neutral)
Utility Monitoring, Islanding Protection, Yes
Configurable Power Factor, Country
Configurable Thresholds
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Supported Communication Interfaces RS485, Ethernet, Zigbee (optional),
Wi-Fi (optional), Built-in GSM
Smart Energy Management Export Limitation, Home Energy
Management

DC SAFETY UNIT
2-pole Disconnection 1000V / 40A
DC Surge Protection Type II, field replaceable
Compliance UTE-C15-712-1
DC surge arrester (type 2) –Usually ordered separately from the same manufacturer
PROTECTION DEVICES INCORPORATED WITHIN INVERTER
DC-side disconnection device Yes
Ground fault monitoring Yes
Grid monitoring Yes
DC reverse polarity protection Yes
AC short-circuit current capability Yes
All-pole sensitive residual-current monitoring unit Yes
Arc-fault circuit interrupter AFCI Yes
I-V Generator Diagnosis
Online monitoring Yes
INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 272

 AC Output Gland Diameter / Wire Cross Section Cable gland – diameter 22-32mm;
PE gland daimeter 10-16mm
DC Input 6 strings, 4-10mm2 DC wire, gland
outer diameter 5-10mm/ 3 MC4
pairs per unit
AC output wire Copper Cable; L, N: Up to 70mm2 ;
PE: Up to 35mm2
ENVIRONMENTAL
Ambient temperature range -25 - +60 oC
Climatic category (according to IEC 60721-3-4) 4K4H
Maximum permissible value for relative humidity (non- 100%
condensing)
Noise emission <65 dB(A)
Maximum operating altitude without derating 2000 m / 6560 ft
MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS:
Environmental protection rating IP 65 - Outdoor and Indoor
Cooling Fan (user replaceable)
Dimension (H x W x D) 569 x 733 x 621 mm
Weight / with Safety Unit 84 kg
Self-consumption (at night) 4.8 W
Mounting system Floorstanding
Safety
Isolation level Transformer less
Marking CE (50 Hz only)
Warranty Minimum 5 years
STANDARD COMPLIANCE
Safety IEC-62103 (EN50178), IEC-62109,
AS3100
Grid Connection Standards VDE-AR-N-4105, G59/3, AS-
4777,EN 50438 , CEI-021,VDE 0126-
1-1, CEI-016, BDEW
RoHS IEC61000-6-2, IEC61000-6-3,
IEC61000-3-11, IEC61000-3-12
Table 5-33. Technical Characteristics for 50 kW DC/AC Three Phase Inverter

5.3.5 DC Surge Arrestor (Minimum Requirements)

• Max. continuous operating voltage UCPV: 1170 V DC;
• Open circuit voltage under STC: ≤ 970 VDC;
• Short-circuit current rating ISCPV: 1000 A;
• Continuous operating current: ≤ 20 µA;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 273

 • Rated load current IL: 80 A;
• Residual current IPE: ≤ 20 µA DC;
• Nominal discharge current (8/20) µs: 15 kA;
• Response time: ≤ 25 ns;
• Degree of protection: IP20;
• Ambient temperature (operation): -40 °C ... 85 °C;
• Installation location: Interior;
• Mounting type: DIN rail 35 mm.

5.3.6 Types of solar cables

The conductors on the DC side of the plant shall have double or reinforced isolation (class II) so as to
minimize the risk of earth faults and short-circuits (IEC 60364-712).

The cables on the DC side are divided into:

• solar cables (or string cables), which connect the modules to the string of the first PV string
combiner box or directly to the inverter;
• non-solar cables, which are used on the load side of the first switchboard.

The cables connecting the modules are fastened in the rear part of the modules themselves, where the
temperature may reach 70° to 80°C. Therefore, these cables shall be able to stand high temperatures and
withstand ultraviolet rays, when installed at sight. Therefore, particular cables are used, generally single-
core cables with rubber sheath and isolation, rated voltage 0.6/1kV, with maximum operating temperature
not lower than 90°C and with high resistance to UV rays.

Non-solar cables positioned on the load side of the first switchboard are at an environmental temperature
not higher than 30° to 40°C since they are far away from the modules. These cables cannot withstand UV
rays and therefore, if laid out outside, they must be protected against solar radiation in conduit or however
sheathed for outdoor use.

On the contrary if they are laid out inside the buildings, the rules usually applied to electrical plants are
valid. For cables erected on the AC side downstream the inverter what said for non-solar cables on the DC
side is valid.

Technical features (Minimum Requirements)

• Type: H1Z2Z2-K;
• Conductor: E-Cu tinned;
• Min. Rated System Voltage: 1000 VDC;
• Insulation: Cross-linked special polyolefin;
• Properties: Termite-resistant, anti-rodent.

5.3.7 MC4 Connectors

Check connector type of the PV Module. Connectors used to terminate strings must be compatible with
PV Module connector.

• MC4 connector (male) and receptacle (female) for low-voltage DC applications up to 65A, 1000
VDC, and 6mm² solar cable.
• Rated voltage: 1000 VDC;
• Rated Current (6.0mm²): 65A;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 274

 • Rated surge voltage: 12 kV;
• Ambient temperature range: - 40°C to +85°C;
• Degree of Protection: IP65;
• Contact resistance of plug connectors: ≤ 0.35 mΩ;
• Locking system: snap-in/locking type;
• Contact material: Tin-plated copper;
• Insulation material: PC/PA;
• Flame class: UL94-V0.

5.3.8 Cable Ties with Clip

An assembly of cable tie with a clip for edged 3-6 mm, pre-assembled, similar to the drawing below:

• Width: 4.6 mm;

• Length: 200 mm;
• Max Bundle diameter: 45 mm;
• Properties: Polyamide 6.6 High impact modified and heat stabilised for temperature conditions of
from -40 °C up to +105 °C.

Figure 5-25 – Cable Ties with Clip

5.3.9 Stainless steel two-wire cable clip

Cable Clip for PV Panels for Holding 2 Cables, similar to the one in Figure 5-25.

• Material: Stainless Steel SUS 301.

5.3.10 Installation materials

All needed materials for a correct installation for mounting and installation of photovoltaic system.

5.3.11 Racking System

Tripod rack for on-roof installation for double rows of modules in portrait. Tripod material of aluminium
alloy 6005-T5 with anodized avg. 12μm finish. All screws and bolts of SUS304 stainless steel. Configuration,
parts and mounting as per the site-specific design.

5.3.12 Generation Energy Meter

• A 63 A digital energy meter with Class 1 accuracy for the measurement of the generation from
each inverter to meet DSO requirements,
• Rated Current: 63A;
• Accuracy Class: 1;
• Technology: Electronic, with LCD display;
• Sampling Rate: 32 samples/cycle;

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 275

 • Mounting: DIN Rain;
• Degree of Protection: IP40 (front), IP20 (body).

5.3.13 DSO Three phase Approved Bidirectional Smart Energy Meter

Important note: *This meter must be DSO-Approved (OSHEE). It is to be purchased by the PV System owner.
It is connected to the connection point by DSO as part of the connection point procedure. It must be stamped
by DSO to be valid. It replaces existing meter as per the contract 220606. *

Standard and Compliance

• Class 0.5S and Class 1;

• IEC 62052-11, IEC 62053-21, IEC 62053-22, IEC 62053-23;
• EN 50470-1, EN 50470-3;
• CLC/TR 50579;
• WELMEC 7.2;
• STS Compliance, DLMS.

Measurement

• 3 phase 3 wire;
• 3 phase 4 wire;
• Neutral current measurement.

Voltage

• Nominal voltage: 220V - 240V;

• Operating range: 0.5Un - 1.2Un;
• Withstand range: 1.9Un;
• Impulse voltage: 8kV IEC, 12kV (SP1618 Method).
Current

• CT range:
• - 1/6A, 1/10A, 1/20A, 5/20A;
• WC range:
• - With disconnect relay: 5/100A, 10/100A;
• - Without disconnect relay: 5/120A, 10/120A, 20/160A;
• Phase current measurement sensor: Internal CT;
• Neutral current measurement sensor: Shunt.

Power Consumption

• Voltage circuit: <10VA/phase, 2W@ Vn;

• Current circuit: <4VA/phase @ In.

Frequency

• 45Hz - 65Hz.

Inputs/Outputs Configuration

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 276

 • 4 x LED indicators;
• 2 control inputs, 2 control outputs, up to 3 pulse input/output.

Relay

• 100A, UC3 compliant.

Battery

• Internal lithium battery;

• Option for external for backup;
• Option for additional Super cap (72 hours);
• Backup time: 5 years without power (23°C);
• Battery shelf life of 15 years at 23°C.

Real-time Clock

• Precision clock accuracy: within 15 seconds per month at 23°C (IEC 61038);
• Conform to IEC 62054-21.

Data Memory

• 8MB of non-volatile memory.

Display

• 8 Characters of seven-segment display (11mm x 6.6mm);

• 4 Characters of starburst display for screen ID (5mm x 3.5mm);;
• Display available without main power
• Option for backlight.

Keypad

• Option of silicone keypad.

Measured Values

• 3 elements 4 quadrants
• Import/Export/Absolute: Wh, varh and Vah;
• Per quadrant Wh, varh and Vah;
• Power: W, var, VA, Vrms, Irms;
• Power factor, frequency, phase angle.

Power Quality Indication

• Total Harmonic Distortion (THD);

• Instantaneous RMS voltages, currents, frequency;
• Per phase instantaneous powers A+ A- R+ R-;
• Per phase average powers A+ A- R+ R- (T=10mn);
• Aggregate instantaneous powers A+ A- R+ R- S+ S-;
• Per phase voltage quality:

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 277

 - Sag/Swell and missing voltage detection;
- Programmable thresholds and filtering time;
• The meter recorded voltage quality profile up to 50 set sag/swell event;
• The meter recorded THD Current & Voltage and calculated TDD Current per phase and Total.

LCD Configuration

• Up to 100 user-defined screens of any meter parameter;

• Up to 3 display sets;
• Definable enunciators.

Load Survey/Profile

• Up to 90 channels and 10 independent surveys;

• Intervals programmable from 1 to 1440 minutes;
• Energy instantaneous readings;
• Ability to store average/minimum/maximum values for interval duration.

Time of Use

• 8 rates plus unified rate;

• Daily, weekly, monthly, yearly, and special days;
• Maximum of 50 special days and 6 seasons;
• Block or rolling maximum demand (kW);
• Time of maximum demand.

Calendar

• Supports Daylight Saving time;

• Supports Gregorian or Persian calendars;
• RTC and frequency synchronization.

Tamper Detection and Alarms

• Provision for sealing with conventional wire or plastic seals;

• Reverse current detection;
• Option for magnetic tamper detection;
• Option for lid/terminal cover detection;
• Line and neutral current unbalance detection;
• Advanced tamper detection and logging;
• Pre-programmed alarms for meter self-check;
• Alarms trigger LEDs, enunciators, communications event;
• Alarms are stored in event logs.

Security

• AES-GCM-128.

Operation Mode

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 278

 • Post-paid/Prepaid.

Communications

• Optical port: FLAG (IEC 62056-21);

• Option for built-in communication module:
- RF: 300 MHz to 950 MHz (configurable);
• Option for Modular Communications module:
- GSM/GPRS/EDGE supported 850/900/1800/1900 MHz.

Protocol

• DLMS/COSEM.

Environmental

• Specified operating range: -25˚C to +70˚C;

• Operating range limit: -40˚C to +70˚C;
• Storage range limit: -40˚C to +85˚C;
• Relative humidity: Up to 85% mean, 95% noncondensing for 30 days;
• Ingress protection: IP54.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 279

5.4 Specification for Building Management System

5.4.1 BMS Server Station

The server and server application should allow a minimum of 100 contemporary connections from client
applications like: facility manager, administrator maintenance, management, security, engineering,
administration, HR, accounting. The BMS operating software should run on the following system
configuration:

Technical Specifications

• Enterprise server typical hardware configuration (single or multiple Quad core CPU), 8GB RAM,
RAID10 hard drive configuration with battery backup RAID controller and redundant power
supplies.
• Windows Server 2021 (or higher) as server operating system.
• Windows 11 (or higher) as client operating system.
• Microsoft SQL 2019 (or higher) as database engine
• Workstation typical hardware configuration (single Dual or Quad core CPU), 4GB RAM, 160GB RAM.
• Windows 11 or higher

5.4.2 BMS Server Software

The system software shall be based on the WINDOWS standards for user interface design. Help texts guide
the user through the program. The GUI must be accessible exclusively through standard web-browser from
the remote client workstations. The access to the BMS operating software should be protected by the
integrated Windows security inbuilt in the Microsoft Active Directory.

An option for SSO (single sign-on should be available). The authorization level of each user defines the
features of the BMS operation software that will be accessible. A record of major system entries, indicating
the respective user's identification, as well as all activities of each user should be logged in the main BMS
database and accessible anytime for verifications.

Building management software with management and operating features as engineering and user
interface. The building management software provides a consistent user interface during all Works phases
from installation to operation.

5.4.3 BMS Management Server

This unit which is equipped with redundant hardware will serve the following features.

Communication engine for all the building hardware. Through this communication real-time monitoring
and control of all room features will be done.

Central logging database for long-term storage of records. All events occurring in the field are recorded as
they come in chronological order. For ideal scalability and stability, the BMS server system should be based
on a SQL database.

Analysis engine for table-based and graphical evaluation of building behaviour. Reporting tool with
predefined reports to analyze staff efficiency and workflows of building.

The system shall provide a seamlessly integrated solution for:

• advanced energy saving in the guestrooms

• online and offline access control of student rooms

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 280

 • the control of the HVAC according to room status
• automation of room lighting
• bathroom lighting control
• centralized room status monitoring and override control
• report generation on various room status
• all components of the system shall be online/offline, with central online ability to be logged and
controlled by a central server and monitored by multiple workstation clients.
• system must support expandability for not less than 3000 cards
• system must have easy add on modules for energy monitoring, service management, card
management
• the system should log, monitor and log all doorbell knocks, door access, light switching, service
requests and system usage habits
• System must report any moonlighting unauthorized usage of student room which is not officially
registered as occupied.
• System must have logical energy saving ability based on door open/close within elapsed present
period;
• regardless of legitimate card is already inserted and left into the key card holder slot.

5.4.4 BMS Room Controller

To provide an efficient room management an electronic room control unit should be installed in each room.
This unit has the task of supervising all room operations. It should remain constantly in contact with the
central server from which it receives all its operational data. It is crucial that it be endowed with a backup
battery pack to ensure all critical systems (access control, HVAC, and lighting systems) function normally,
without affecting the student experience, even in the case of a power outage.

The room control unit should be expandable to fit the requirement of different typical rooms in case the
required features differ from one room to the other. Room to Server connectivity must be IP based) for fast
communication with monitoring server. Each Room Controller shall communicate to Floor Controller
through various communication protocols such as bus, ethernet, etc.

Features to be supported by the room control unit or its extension modules are:

• Outputs for lighting control of switching circuits

• Outputs for dimming control (optional)
• Output for boiler water system
• Output for power sockets group (min. 3 groups)
• Inputs for low voltage light switches
• Inputs for monitoring of several room statuses (window contact, door contact, bathroom alarm)
• Outputs for FCU fan control (ON/OFF)
• Outputs for FCU ventilation system

The data must be stored in a non-volatile memory in the microprocessor so that it is not necessary to
reprogram the peripheral units if power is cut off. The room controller should also be equipped with serial
ports that use the RS485 standard. Each unit shall have its dedicated power supply & independent of the
other.

The room control modules should be powered from 12-24 VDC/VAC, to ensure compatibility with a central
power supply, an eventual backup battery system, as well as a decentralized power supply. All the
connections between room control modules and the room unit board are to be made using plug-in
connectors to simplify servicing operations.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 281

Once all the cables have been connected, the external cover should make all the connectors inaccessible.
The connectors should be numbered and printed on the metal housing to simplify cabling operations. The
room unit should give a potential free contact to open any kind of electric lock or door strike that will be
installed on the doors, depending on security requirement of the Contract.

Specifications (Minimum Requirements)

Supply

80-230VAC, 50/60Hz 3-Lines power consumption: 20-30mA

Inputs

Number of Input channels: Min. 10

Outputs

Number of Output channels: Min. 16

Maximum Total Load

Min. Amperage: 10 Amp/channel

Upgrade I/O

1 x Mini USB port (to connect to special programming board)

User Controls

• LED status indicator/channel

• Diagnostic LED+ BROADCAST

Programming

• Manual Ch. Pairing Prog.

• Advanced Software Configuration & Programming

Compliance

• CE Mark Low Voltage

• CE Mark EMC ROHs,

Internal Protection

Overload Protection

Polarity Protection

Short Circuit Protection

Pre-set and Scenes

Built in Scenes

Installation

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 282

DIN-Rail Mount Ready

DC Supply

24VDC with flexible tolerance between 12-36VDC. Flexible ability to add power supply as to be needed any
where

Supply Terminals

3 each is good for 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Output Terminals

16 each is good for 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size

Operating Environment

0º to 45ºC ambient temperature, 10% to 93% RH

Enclosure & Size

DIN-rail

5.4.5 BMS Key Card Holder

The card holder shall be tampered Glass with capacitive touch buttons. The Key Card Holder should be
located near the entrance door and will be able to detect different users of the room to provide different
programmed features based on the type of cards (student card, staff card, management card). The card
holder should not be of infrared or micro switch type, to prevent the use of the room with credit or business
cards, or any item other than the original guest card. This will prevent loss of energy saving capabilities.

The card holder should have an integrated Mifare RFID reader and accept only the original student cards,
as well as distinguish between all user groups and their levels of cards. The key card holder should have
inbuilt powerful LEDs to show the student where the card has to be inserted. It is also endowed with the
bell chime.

The volume and sound of the chime should be configurable from the facility manager to suit the
requirements of the individual student. The key card holder should at the same time be endowed with the
room service buttons. Room service buttons shall be also used to communicate the automated process of
facility manager workflow. A separate room service panel at the door entrance is to be avoided.

After opening the door and once the card is placed in the card holder, the student shall be able to operate
all the equipment in the room that is controlled by the system:

• Power supply to all the equipment will be turned on (power supply to some of the equipment,
which is normally off as part of the energy management shall also be turned on)
• The system shall cool the room to a temperature that was set by the guest before he/she left the
room, within a few minutes.

While leaving the room, once the student card is extracted, the following shall occur automatically:

• Power supply to all the power outlets expect to those of Fridge, Computer/Fax, FCU shall be turned
off.
• All lights shall be turned off except the entrance light, which will remain on for a 30 second timeout
(length of timeout to be programmable)

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 283

System will automatically regulate the room temperature to the building pre- set temperature. The grace
period during which these functions are performed should be customizable by the facility operator.

If the student card is detected in the pocket, the access of the facility service management cards should
automatically be deactivated to preserve maximum privacy of the guest. The access rights of each of the
card levels to the student rooms, whether the guests are inside the rooms or not, should be programmable
centrally.

Specifications (Minimum Requirements)

Features

Card in & out auto sensing

Service status indicator can be extended to the outside

Control I/O

• 1 x Advanced RS485 serial port links

• 2 x Dry Connector for general purpose
• 3 x Button for service requires input
• 1 x cord holder slot
• 3 led out port (service)

Upgrade I/O

1 x mini-USB port (to connect to special programming board)

Programming

Advanced Software Configuration & Programming

Standards

Compliance CE Mark EMC ROHs, UL Listed Relays Inside

Supply

24VDC with flexible tolerance between 8-36VDC. Flexible ability to add power supply as to be needed
anywhere

Power consumption: 20mA

Installation

• Wall Mount metal frame

• Magnetic screw less mounting
• Advanced security locking

Operating Environment

0º to 45ºC ambient temperature

20% to 93% RH.

Enclosure material

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 284

Aluminium, Glass, and Poly

5.4.6 BMS Key Access Card

The panel shall be tampered Glass with capacitive touch buttons. The following minimum shall be provided
in the external indication panel to be mounted outside the room:

• Room status display (student in room, staff in room, room empty)

• Door-bell function
• Room number

The external indication panel should consist of a contactless online proximity RFID card reader that
recognizes the data and is endowed with a buzzer for the acoustic signal of the card acceptance or
rejection, as well as a signal LED. The card readers shall be NFC enabled. Indications must be provided
through a LED indication stripe to show whether or not the door can be opened and whether the student
is in the room.

The facility manager should be able to set the level of privacy he wants in each single room, defining if the
staff can access a room if a student is there or not, etc. A service staff card should not be able to open the
door if the student is in the room. This is to ensure the maximum level of privacy to the student.

The card should be read just by passing it near the reader independently of which side of the card is used.
Systems with cards that must be inserted in a slot will not be accepted. This is to avoid that the student
does not enter the room while leaving the card in the outdoor reader

The RFID access control is an integral part of the BMS and should not be mounted on the door but on the
wall next to the door.

Specifications

• Elegant Push Button

• Built-in Time Clock Sync
• Comparison Logic (Room, End Date and Time)
• Access Memory Log (Card + Time Date Stamp)
• Built-in Tag reader, 1-Z, 1 Lock Relay, 1 Bell Relay
• Built-in Tamper Switch
• USB Upgrade and Download Log
• Backup and restore
• Magnet Mount with Security Lockable Screw
• Online/Offline function
• Easy Connector Enabled

5.4.7 BMS Floor Controller

Floor Controller will communicate with all Rooms controller and provide with all information’s need to the
Management Controller Server. The Floor Building Controller shall be compatible with all LAN data switch
types, all Wi-Fi routers.

Protocols

• BUS

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 285

 • FTP/IP
• RS-232
• RS-485
• RS baud rates work in all baud rate: 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
ASCII and HEXADECIMAL
• String Commands
• 50 Characters ASCII Length
• Can Send 1980 Commands
• Can receive 99 commands
• Each Rcvd. command can execute 20 functions with delay

Upgrade IO

1 x USB port (to connect to special programming board)

User Controls

LED status indicator/channel

Diagnostic LED+ BROADCAST

Programming

Advanced Software Configuration & Programming

Compliance

CE Mark EMC

Operation Protection

Polarity Protection
Short Circuit Protection

Added IP functions

• Soft reset function that reset

• IP to default
• Remote management
• Intelligent data interchange to minimize the data flux

Supply

24VDC with flexible tolerance between 8-32VDC. Flexible ability to add power supply as to be needed
anywhere

• Power consumption: 15mA

Installation

DIN-Rail Mount Ready

Operating Environment

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 286

 • 0º to 45ºC ambient temperature
• 20% to 93% RH

Enclosure

Polycarbonate, DIN-rail.

5.4.8 BMS Cabling

• Wire type Wire;
• Number of wires 8;
• Cable type Single cable;
• Cable design normal;
• Category Cat. 6;
• Jacket material LSZH;
• Cable jacket characteristics: zero-halogen;
• Stranding 4 pairs;
• Wire diameter AWG 23;
• Shielding F/UTP;
• Cable overall diameter Ø 7.2 mm;
• Max. test frequency 450;;
• PoE Yes;
• PoE Level 4;
• Standard EN 50173-1; ISO/IEC 11801; EN 50288-5-1; TIA/EIA 568.2-D;
• Fire classification: IEC 60332-1, IEC 60754-2, IEC 61034.

5.4.9 BMS Magnetic Contacts

Magnetic Contacts shall be installed in Main entrance doors and windows.

Specifications

• Max. reed switched voltage: 20 V;

• Max. switched current: 20 mA;
• Transient resistance: 150 Ω;
• Life expectancy (20 V, 20 mA): 360 000;
• Contact material: Ru (Ruten);
• Make distance: 18 mm;
• Break distance: 28 mm.

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 287

6 Specification for Fire protection

6.1 General Specification on Fire protection system

The fire protection system shall consist of the following equipment:

 Hydrants inside the building (fixed type)

 Extinguisher with foam/ powder cylinder (portable)

The firefighting system shall comply with all mandatory requirements that have to do with the norms /
standards that are currently in force in Albania.

6.2 Fixed type system

All parts of the fixed system shall comply to DIN EN 378 and other EN/ DIN Norms.

6.2.1 Water tank

Water tanks shall ne vertical circular tanks, which shall be installed in the technical area and these should
be in accordance with the dimensions and definitions of the drawings, including all fittings, connecting
pipelines, emergency overflow, mechanical switch float valve as well as all requirements to ensure a regular
operation.

It´s volume and other technical specifications are presented in the respective drawings.

The material of the water tanks shall be hot dipped zinc coated carbon steel, or stainless steel.

Thickness of material shall be 1mm or bigger.

The water tank installations shall comprise the following:

- Inlet Pipe 1 1/2” - in this pipe a swimming non-return valve shall be installed
- Outlet pipe 1 1/2” - In this pipe a non-return valve shall be installed
- Overflow pipe shall be installed not less than 150 mm from the cover of reservoir.
- Discharge pipe 1 1/2” shall be installed in the lowest part of reservoir and it shall have a control
valve.
- Signal pipe shall be installed 20 – 30 mm under the overflow pipe.
- Floating Valve 1½ “.

The volume of water to be stored on water tanks, the number and size of the water tanks are shown on the
below table.

Tanks Volume Total Tank Volume Shape Diameter Height Material

Building
no. m3 lt m m
B03 3 15 5000 Circular 1.6 2.02
B04 3 15 5000 Circular 1.6 2.02
zinc
B14 3 15 5000 Circular 1.6 2.02 coated
steel
B16 3 15 5000 Circular 1.6 2.02
B17 3 15 5000 Circular 1.6 2.02
Table 6-1. Sanitary water Storage tanks technical data’s

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 288

6.2.2 Pumping Station
The internal pipe distribution network shall be as shown in the drawings. All pipes shall be galvanized steel.

Fire pumps should be united in a Diesel engine fuel pump, one Electrical pump and one Jockey Pump. The
Pumps shall be composed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract and in accordance with EN
12845: 2005. The unit shall consist of electrical part consisting of three fire pumps engines with electric
service panel command and their accessories. The arrangement of the pumps shall be horizontal and type
of pump centrifugal.

The pumping station shall be equipped with a control panel for each pump.

Before leaving the factory, every pump should be hydraulically tested by the manufacturer according to EN
and DIN standards.

Each pump shall be equipped with a safety valve and a closing valve. Minimum discharge valve
dimensioning shall be 3/4 ".

Fire pumps and control panel shall be protected against interruption in service when there are explosions,
fires, earthquakes, storms, freezing, vandalism, and other similar cases.

The pumps shall have supports. These metal supports should not be on walls or building foundations.
Required measures shall be done in order to avoid loud noise while pumps are working (rubber washer
pumps and sand cushion or wood or wood binary).

Firefighting pump

This unit shall consist of three pumps connected to the distribution pipe and suction centrifugal type,
horizontal with flange connection and anti-vibrating joint.

Body pump and motor shall be painted with epoxide resin.

a) Materials
 Base frame Steel galvanized
 Joint tubing’s Painted steel
 Wear rings Bronze (CuSn5Pb20)

b) Electric pump c) Diesel pump d) Jockey pump

Fluid: Water pure Fluid: Water pure Nominal power 0.75 kW

Flow: 7.5 m³/h Flow: 7.5 m³/h Rated current 1.83 A
Power: 7.5 kW Power 10.2 kW Gross volume 20 lit
Rated current 14.8 A Cooling method: Air Fitting dimensions
Winding: 3~400V/50Hz Air volume flow cooling 711 m3/h Flange connection: DN 65/ PN10
Speed: 2900 1/min Gross volume 26 lit
Pressure: 50 m or 500 kPa
Fluid Temperature: (-10 to + 120°C)
Head: (max. 10 bar)
Degree of protection IP 54
Insulation class F

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 289

Figure 6-1. Firefighting Pump

Figure 6-2. Technical Data for Firefighting Pump

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 290

6.2.3 Hydrants
Hydrants shall be installed on each floor as per the drawings and shall be placed in enameled steel box
and painted with red paint and glass on the front of the box.

Hydrant units shall compose of a valve, water flexible pipe with a length of 30 m, and fire lances. All these
devices shall be placed in the box of galvanized steel, which is placed inside the wall and shall have the
level of the surface.

Fluid Water
Fluid temperature 0 until + 50 ºC
Hydrant
Dimensions
- Frame 560 x 360 x 160 mm
- Hydrant valve 1 ½” DN 40
- Pipe outlet 1 ½” DN 40
- Outlet nose 12 mm
- Material Cast iron
Polyester red
- Frame Galvanized steel
color RAL 3000
- Frame Aluminum grey Anodized
- In front view Glass Without color
- Outlet pipe and nose brass
Pipe extension
- Hose Red
polyurethane
Figure 6-3. Technical Wall-mounted Firefighting Hydrant DN 45

Fluid Water
Fluid temperature 0 until + 50 ºC
Hydrant
Dimensions
- Frame 600 x 500 x 300 mm
- Hydrant valve 2 ½” DN 65
- Pipe outlet 2 ½” DN 65
- Material Cast iron
Polyester red
- Frame Galvanized steel
color RAL 3000
- Frame Aluminum grey Anodized
- In front view Glass Without color
Figure 6-4. Firefighting brigade connection DN65

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 291

6.2.4 Water drainage system technical room
The water drainage system in the technical room shall be constructed as described in Chapter [Link].

6.3 Portable type system

The number and dimensions of the cylinders for fire extinguishing shall be determined in accordance with
the norms / existing standards. They shall be maintained and controlled at least every two years and be
licensed according to the Government of Albania standards. All extinguishers shall be according to
international standards, e.g. BS EN 3-7 or similar.

Installation shall be with suitable and approved holders as per manufacturer and safety requirements.

Types of cylinders used for extinguishing fires and their use in accordance with the fire source material, are
presented in the table here below:

Fire
Classes

Name of the Cylinder (fire extinguisher)

Powder extinguisher PG ✓ ✓ ✓
Powder extinguisher for fires caused by
PM ✓
metals

Fixed Powder (special powder) P ✓ ✓

Dioxide extinguisher carbon (CO2) K ✓

Foam extinguisher S ✓ ✓
Figure 6-5. Fire extinguishers according to fire protection classes

EERPSCI_Technical Specifications 292